.:■:■■ OBBm WæmmSeSk ■''.'■■.'■••'■'■"■■.■■-•' BOTANY OF THE FÆROES BASED UPON DANISH INVESTIGATIONS PART II ILLUSTRATED WITH 2 PLATES (XI AND XII), AND 100 FIGURES IN THE TEXT (PUBLISHED BY THE AID OF THE CARLSBERG FUND COPENHAGEN DET NORDISKE FORLAG ERNST BOJESEN 1903 »BINTED BY II. II. THIELE COXTENTS OF PART II Page F. Borgesen : Marine Algæ 339 E. Ostiu !•: Diatoms from the Marine Algæ of the Færoes 533 C. H. Ostenfeld : Phy toplan k ton from the sea around the Færoes 558 F. Borgesen and C. H. Ostenfeld: Phytoplankton of the lakes of the Færoes. . 613 H. Dahlstedt: The Hieracia from the Færoes 625 Eug. Warming: The History of the Flora of the Færoes 660 Separate eopies were published of pp. 339 532 November 15, 1902. of pp. 533 557. March. 1903. — of pp. 558—612 Fehr. 25th., 1903. — of pp. 613—624 August 15. 1903. - of pp. 625—659 August 31. 1903. — of pp. 659—681 September 12, 1903. */ 7 f/ Obs. W'hen Part I of the Botany of the Færoes was published. I p resum ed that the rest of the work could be contained in one volume as large as Fart I. But I find I am mistaken, as the remaining part of the Flora now published amounts to as many sheets as the Part already published. I think therefore that it will be hest to publish the papers on the Vegetation of Land and Sea. etc. as a separate Vol. Part III which will most likely be ready for publication in a year or two. Eug. Warming. CORRIGENDA Page 341, line 7 from bottom, for Department. I read Department I — 347, — 14 and 17 from bottom, for ems. read cm. — 349, — 5 from top. p. 10 read p. 29. — 400, — at bottom, for ollowing read following. — 426, — 7 from top, for Monostroma fuscum read Ulva Lactuca. — 462, — 5 from top, for of, Laminaria digitata e. g., have read of, e. g. La- minaria digitata, have. — 466, — 12 from top, for discribed read described. — 506, — 8 — — , — on this species read on this genus. — 523, — 13 — bottom, for di fjerred read differed. — 545, — 19 — — , — men read but. — 568, — 4 — top, for is found read was found. — 607, — 16 — — , — as met with read is met with. In »Index of Species« (Marine Algæ) add : Page 529 : Chætomorpba tortuosa 503 531 : Laminaria hyperborea 462 MARINE ALGÆ F. BØRGESEN. Intro du etion. The earliest contribution to our knowledge ol' the Marine Vegetation of the Færoes was made, so far as I know, by Jørgen Landt, who in his book »Forsøg til en Beskrivelse over Færøerne«, Kjøbenhavn 1800, mentions about 30 species of which some are easily recognizable, though others of the species which he reports from the Færdes, e. g. Fuciis serratus and Conferva coral- liiut, must imdonbtedly be due to some error as they have not been found since; whilst with regard to others again, it is impossible to ascertain with any certainty what is meant. The next and in every way most important contribution which has hitherto been published was that of the Rev. Hans Christian Lyngbye who visited the Færoes in the year 1817 with the sup- port of the Danish Government. The results of this journey are embodied in his famous work »Tentamen Hydrophytologiæ Danicæ«, published in 1819. In this work, in which Lyngbye describes several new genera and species on the strength of the material col- lected in the Færoes, some 100 Færoese species and varieties are enumerated. In the case of several of these species the narae given by Lyngbye has been retained up to the present time, while others have been re-named. And, more particulaiiy with regard to these latter, the faet that Lyngbye's Herbarium is pivserved in the Bo- tanical Museum in Copenhagen, has been of great importance to me, as I have constantly been able to consult the specimens to which he refers in Hydrophytologia and to revise his old determinations. While the determinations of the greater part of the species were, on the whole, easy enough to revise, there were some which caused difficulty owing partly to the material of the species contained in Lyngbye's Herbarium being old and decayed, and partly and more Botany of the Færdes. 22 340 particularly to the material in question being very scanty. In his Hydrophytologia Lyngbye also gives accurate and valuable infor- mation regarding the habitat and distribution along the Færoese coasts of almost all the species found by him. Besides the large number of Færoese algæ which are enume- rated in Hornemann's »Plantelære«1 on the anthority ofLyngbye's work, a few are added to the list, viz. Polyides himbricalis = P. ro- tundiis and Callithamnwn corymbosum of which I shall give a fuller account later on. Trevelyan's2 paper must also be men- tioned, though the Færoese algæ reported in it are likewise only an extract from Lyngbye's Hydrophytologia. The next independant work which has increased our knowledge of the Færoese algæ is »Færøernes Flora« published in 1870 by E. Rostrup3, in which he gives the results of a journey made in 1867 to the Færoes in company with C. A. Feilberg. In this work ten new species of marine algæ are added to the flora, among which, however, as I have explained more fully later on, there is some doubt as to whether the species Chætopteris plumosa which Rostrup received from a Mr. Randropp of Thorshavn is really from the Færoes. The total number of species of marine algæ reported by Rostrup is not far from 100. The determinations of the material in question were revised by Professor .1. G. Agardh of Lund and Professor J. E. A reschoug of Upsala. The latest contribution to the marine algæ of the Færoes we owe to Herman G. S i m mons who visited several parts of the Færoes in the same year as I had begun my investigations, viz. in 1895, but somewhat later than I. In his work »Zur Kenntnis der Meeresalgen Flora der Færoer«4 125 Færoese species are men- tioned, as his list also includes the 16 species (of which 2 are classilied as genera only, and 1, Porphyra miniata, had been already recorded by .1. Agardh as Færoese) which I published in my preli- minary list of 1896 5, together with the Laminaria lingicruris var. 1 Hornemann, I. W. : Forsog til en dansk økonomisk Plantelære. Kjøben- liavn 1821—37. 2 Trevelyan. W. C: On the Vegetation and Temperature of the Farne Islands (Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal for January 1835 t. XVIII. Reprinted with corrections, Florence, 1837). ;; Botanisk Tidsskrift, Vol. 4. København 1870—71. 4 Hedwigia. 1807, p. 247. ' Børgesen, F. and Ostenfeld Hansen, C: Planter samlede paa Færøerne i 1895 (Botanisk Tidsskrift, Vol. 20. Kjøbenhavn 1805 — 00, p. 156). 34] færoensis nov. var.1 which I described in the same year. But various causes such as a differenl definition of species, or the faet of Sim- mons including sonie species on the authority of old and according to my opinion incorrect reports of previous writers, have combined to reduce the number of Simmons's list which I think ought to be brought down to about 115. Tims, as may be seen from the above, the investigation of the alga-flora of the Færoese coasts has been far from neglected during the last hundred years; and my researches, which I began as al- ready mentioned in 1895, form the last link in the series. I had for some time been thinking that a closer examination of the ma- rine flora of the Færoese coasts would be of great interest as no algologist had investigated it since Lyngbye visited the islands. So when Herman G. Simmons in the beginning of the year 1895 came one day from Lund and told me of his intention to visit the Færoes during the summer for the purpose of studying the flora of the islands , I at once made up my mind to go there and carry out the investigations I had been contemplating. Thus this, my first visit to the Færoes, came to form a part of the thorough investigation of the Færoese flora set on foot by Professor Warming in the years 1896 and 97. On the 8th of June I arrived at Thors- havn where I stayed mostly during that year's visit, though I had also an opportunity of carrying on my researches in the greater part of Stromo and the nearest adjacent islands. In 1896 I again visited the Færoes in company with Mr. Jensen and stayed there from the beginning of May to the middle of June. This year I stayed for the most part in Trangisvaag, Klaksvig, Ejde, Midvaag and Kvi vig; and also paid a visit to Store Dimon. For the purpose of investigating the alga -vegetation in spring I again went to the Færoes in 1898 and stayed there from April 21st to June 16th, and Thorshavn was again my head quarters whence I made longer excursions partly in boats and partly in the steamer »Smiril« to Ostero , Bordo and the Nordreoer. Lastly, in 1899 and 1900, by permission of the Marine Department. I spent about a month in each year on board the man-of-war stationed at the Færoes for the protection of the fisheries, and through the kindness of Captain v. Jessen and Captain Schack I had excellent opportunities of visiting the more remote islands, and piaces difticult of access, and 1 Børgesen, F.: En for Færøerne ny Laminaria (Botanisk Tidsskrift. Vol. 20. Kjøbenhavn 1895—90, p. 403). 22* 342 have thereby been able to form a more complete idea of the vege- tation as a whole. This short account of my journeys will show that I visited the Færoes only in the spring and summer months, but as I was anxious to get some collections from the autumn and winter months, Mr. Hel gi Jonsson on his return journey from Iceland in the autumn of 1897 very kindly stayed some time in the Færoes for the purpose of collecting, the Carlsberg Fund generously covering the expenses. Jonsson stayed in the Færoes from Oct. 26th to Dec. 9th; he traversed more particularly Nordreoerne, Ostero, Sydero and the environs of Thorshavn, and brought home a considerable collection. Lastly, Mr. Ostenfeld brought home some smaller collec- tions especially from Trangisvaagfjord. If we add to this the portions of Lyngbye, Rostrup and Si m mons's collections which I have had at my disposal, the material which I have had for examination forms a continuous series from April 21stto Dec. 9th. It has thus been possible with regard to the grealer part of the species to form a fairly definite idea of their development at the different seasons, though it has of course been a great drawback to have no material from the 3 winter months proper, a season of the year which is of great importance in arriving at any final conclusion with regard to the development of the algæ. As Ko Id er up Ro sen vinge has pointed out in his introduc- tion to »Gronlands Havalger« , in order to be able to arrive at a correct conclusion concerning the composition of a flora it is as necessary to exclude those species which have erroneously been referred to it as to include such as really belong to it; consequently, I have omitted those species with regard to which I felt justified in doubting that they really belong to the llora; and in several cases it has been possible for me by the help of the original spe- cimens in the museum in Copenhagen as well as of those kindly lent me from other piaces to prove the error beyond doubl. In preparing the following list I have naturally followed Kjell- mnn's »Norra Ishafvets Algflora«, the latter being the standard work more particularly for the Arctic alga-llora, but I differ in some respects from Kjellman's dilinition of species in which I follow moslly the opinion of other investigators, such as Foslie and more particularly Rosen vinge, as expressed in his well-known work »Gronlands Havalger«. Thus, I have as a rule adopted the view emphasized by Rosenvinge that such forms as are un- 343 doubtedly connected by Lntermediate ones oughl to be united, and aro onlv to be regarded as forms or varieties of one and the same species. This has naturally reduced the number of the species, but on the other hånd so manv species new to the flora have been found thai they have helped almost to donble the number; some I have been obliged to describe as species new to science. In a later work on the alga -vegetation along the coast of the Færoes, besides the description of the ditTerent alga-associations, etc. 1 hope to be able to give some notes on the plant -geographical position of the Færoese alga -flora compared with those of the nearest adjacent counlries. It is here my pleasant duty to express my sincere gralitude to the many who have in various ways helped me in this work. My thanks are more particularlv due to Dr. E. Bornet, who kindly helped me with regard to the determination of some Caltithamnion ; to Mr. M. Foslie, who determined my collection of calcareous algæ; to Dr. Kuckuck, who, duringa short visit I paid to Heligoland, gave me valuable advice especially with regard to my Færoese species of Ectocarpus ; to Professor Sauvageau for his kind assi- stance in connection with my Myrionemaceae and Sphacelariaceae; and to Mr. Joh s. Schmidt for determining the greater part of my blue-green algæ. Above all I would express my warm thanks to Dr. Ro s en vinge for his constant kind assistance which was of great value to me on account of his wide experience and knowledge of the Northern Algæ, especially those of Denmark and Greenland. Lastly, I must mention those who by lending me Exsiccata or ori- ginal specimens of species which are wanting in the Botanical Mu- seum in Copenhagen, rendered me great help, more particularlv Dr. Nordstedt; Major Reinbold; Dr. Rostrup and Professor W i Ile. List of abbreviations1. J. Ag., Spec. Alg. = J. G. Agardh, Species genera et ordines Algarum. Aresch., Phyc. Scand. = J. E. Areschoug, Phyceæ Scandinavicæ marinæ. Upsaliæ, 1850. Farl., New Engl. Alg. — W. G. Farlow, Marine Algæ of New Eng- land and adjacent coast. Washington 1881. 1 Of the title of books and of names most commonly used. 344 Fosl., Contrib. I and II = M. Foslie, Contribution to the know- ledge of the Marine Algæ of Norway. I and II. Tromsø Museums Aarshefter 13. 1891, and 14. 1892. Gobi, Algenll. Weiss. Meer. = C. Gobi, Die Algenflora des Weissen Meeres und der demselben zunåehstliegenden Theile des Nordlichen Eismeeres. St. Petersbourg 1878. Harv., Phycol. Brit. = W. H. Harvey, Phycologia Britannica. Vols. I— III, London 1846—51. Kjellm., N. I. = F. R. Kjellman, Norra ishafvets algflora. Vega- expeditionens vetenskapliga arbeten. Stockholm 1883. In English : The Algæ of the Arctic Sea, in K. Svenska Vetenskaps.-Akad. Hand- lingar. Bd. 20, No. 5. Stockholm 1883. (The numbers in brackets are those given in the English version). Kjellm., Handb.=F. R. Kjellman, Handboki Skandinaviens hafsalg- flora. I. Fucoideæ. Stockholm 1890. Kleen, Nordl. Alg. = E. Kleen, Om Nordlandens hogre hafs- alger. Ofversigt af K. Vetensk.-Akad. Forhandl. 1874. No. 9. Stock- holm. Kuck.,Ectocarp.= P. Kuckuck, Beitriige zur Kenntnis einiger Ecto- carpus-Arten der Kieler Fohrde. Bot. Centralblatt. Vol. 48. 1891. Kiitz., Tab. phyc. = F. T. Kutzing, Tabulae phycologicae oder Ab- bildungen der Tange. Band I — XIX. Nordhausen 1845 — 69. Le Jolis, Alg. mar. de Cherb. = A. Le Jolis, Liste des Algues marines de Cherburg. Paris 1863. Lyngb., Hyprophyt. = H. C. Lyngbye, Tentamen Hydrophytologiæ Danicæ. Hafniæ 1819. Rke., Algenflora = J. Reinke, Algenflora der westlichen Ostsee deutschen Antheils. Kiel 1889. Rke. Atlas = J. Reinke, Atlas deutscher Meeresalgen. Kiel 1889-92. Rostr., Fær. FL = E. Rostrup, Færoernes Flora, Botanisk Tids- skrift, Vol. IV. 1870—71. Rosenv.,Gronl. Havalg. = L. Kolderup Rosenvinge, Grønlands Hav- alger (Meddelelser om Grønland III. Kjøbenhavn 1893). Rosenv., Deux. Mém.=L. Kolderup Rosenvinge, Deuxiéme memoire sur les Algues marines du Groenland. (Meddelelser om Grønland XX. 1898). Simmons, Meeresalg. = H. G. Simmons, Zur Kenntnis der Meercs- algen-Flora der Fåroer. Hedwigia 1897. Stromf. , Algv. Isl. = H. F. G. Strømfelt, Om Algvegetationen vid Islands Kuster. Goteborg 1886. 345 Wittr. et Nordst., Exsicc. = V. B. Wittrock et O. Nordstedt; Algæ aquæ dulcis exsiccatæ præcipue scandinavicæ. Fase. 1 — 29. Lyngb. = H. C. Lyngbye. Rostr. = E. Rostrup. H. S. = Herman G. Simmons. H. .1. = Helgi .Jonsson. ! = F. Børgesen. Vid. = Videro. Ost. = Ostero. Str. = Stromo. Syd. = Sydero. A. Rhodophyceae. I. Bangioideae. Order. BANGIACEAE. BANGIA Lyngb. 1. B. fuscopurpurea (Dillw.) Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p.83; Kjellm., N. I., p. 241 (192). This speeies belongs to the littoral zone and grows on exposed coast at a high level generally considerably above high-water mark, as also mentioned by Lyngbye: — »Habitat ad littora Faeroensia in summo refluxus limite sæpe denudato.« It prefers sharply inclined rock faces where it is liable to be dashed by the spray, and in calm weather it can also survive a longer period of desiccation. I never came aeross it in rock-pools though Kjellman, 1. c. savs it is to be found there. It grows gregariously in large patches often associated with Urospora. Specimens bearing reproductive organs were found from April to August. The specimen of var. atropurpurea Lyngb. (1. c.) in Lyngbye's Herbarium is a fruitbearing plant belonging to this species. This is a coramon species of the Færoese coasts; it was first men- tioned by Lyngbye. PORPHYRA C.Agardh. 2. P. coccinea J. Ag. Til Algernes Systematik, VI, Ulvaceae, p. 56; Kuckuck, Bemerkungen zur marinen Algenvegetation von Helgoland, II p. 390. 346 This species belongs to the sublittoral zone and occurs both along exposed and sheltered coasts. It has been found as an epi- phyte only, and in abnndance especially on Desmarestia aculeata, which it sometimes covers quite closely, but it may also be met with though sparingly on Ptilota phimosa (at a depth of 20 fathoms) and Delesseria alata. It has hitherto been found sterile only. A single specimen from Vestmanhavn was possibly fructifying, but being dried it was not capable of closer examination. As pointed out by Kuckuck, 1. c, its chromatophores are not star-like, radiating from a central pyrenoid, as in the true Porp/iyra-species, but they occur as a more or less deeply indented parietal plate, hence I agree with Kuckuck in thinking that this species ought to be separated from the genus Porphyra. This species was first reported from the Færoes in Rostrup's list (1. c. p. 88) to whom it was sent by Mr. Randropp, who probably gathered it near Thorshavn. My specimens are from: — Ost.: Molen (!), Ore(!); Str. : Vestmanhavn (!), Kvivig (!), Gliversnæs (!); Syd.: Ordevig (J). 3. P. leucosticta Thur. Le Jolis, Alg. mar. de Cherb., p. 100. In comparison with the specimens (especially from France) which I have had the opportunity of seeing in the collections be- longing to the Botanical Museum in Copenhagen, the Færoese spe- cimens are generally larger and especially broader and more irregu- larly shaped ; the antheridia-sori are likewise broader and of a more irregular form, and arranged irregularly in the thailus and not in the often almost parallel lines which are met with in the French specimens. The colour is not so red as that of P. miniata, but is just between that of P. miniata and P. umbilicalis. Along the coasts of the Færoes this species grows both in the littoral zone near low-water mark and in the sublittoral in shallow water. It occurs most commonly in the Corallina-be\t. Fructifying specimens were found from April to August. It appears to be fairly common: —Vid: Viderejde (Ostenfeld); Str.: Vestmanhavn (!, Kalbakfj orden (!), Thorshavn (!), Velbestad (!) ; Sandd: Skopen (!); Syd: Kvalbo (Lyngb.; H. S.), Trangisvaag (Ostenfeld;. Lastly, Simmons mcntions it with donbt from Klaksvig Bordo). First reported from the Færoes by Simmons but as mentioned above, it was already found by Lyngbye, as a specimen in his her- barium determined as Ulva umbilicalis and gathered July 8th near Kvalbo is this species. 347 4. P. miniata (Ag.) Ag. Rosenv., 1. c. p. 826. /'. typica Rosenv., 1. c. p. 827. f. amplissima (Kjellm.) Rosenv., 1. c. /'. abyssicola (Kjellm.) Rosenv., 1. c. Alter having examined niv Færoese materialof this species I cannot do otherwise than follow Rosen vin ge's definition of this species. To begin with /'. amplissima of this species, it occurs most com- monly in detached, floating examples which attain a considerable size, just in the same manner as, e. g. detached Monostroma fuscum does in the inlerior of fjords, in which the former often occurs intermingled with the latter, though it is also met with floating in the open sea. With regard to /". abyssicola I mav remark that in Trangisvaag- fjord opposite Tværaa I gathered some large and small spceimens which grew attached to stems of Laminaria at a depth of about 5 fathoms, and which, except for their size, were exactly alike in colour (pale rose-red) and habit. They diiTered from Kjellman's (N. I., p. 191) description in having a distinct, short stipe, but this was doubtless due to their habitat, as specimens growing, e. g. amongst Corallina almost invariably have several eallus radicalis« and no stipe. A transverse section of the smaller specimens showed that these consisted of one layer of cells, but the larger specimens of which I examined more particularly one measuring 50 ems., consisted both of one and two lavers of cells. By far the greater part, from the base to beyond the middle, appeared to consist of one layer of cells, but some 10 ems. below the apex the thailus consisted distinctly of two lavers of cells — and was liere quite sterile. Taken as a whole the specimens were as yet almost sterile, only a few had begun to develop <3 just at the margin of the thallus. Hence I can form no opinion as to whether these specimens are diæcious or not; Kjell man mentions that this is the case with Porphyra abyssicola, but the latter character can hardly be regarded as important (cfr. Foslie, Contribution I, p. 57 and Rosenvinge, 1. c). And Hus has recently published a paper1 in which he savs: »Porphyra abyssicola is monæcious (rarely diæcious).« Hus, who curiously enough does not appear to know Rosen vin ges definition (I. c), is of opinion that both /'. abyssicola and /'. amplissima ought to be regarded as distinct species, and points out several characters 1 Hus, H. T. A. : Preliminary Notes on West Coast Porphyras J.oe, vol. 4). 348 especially, e. g. Ihe thickness of the thallus, and the number of the antherozoids and the carpospores in the antheridium and in the sporocarp respectively, as specific distinctions. How far this view, which appears to rae to be somewhat artificial, is the correct one, is rather doubtful, and no definite opinion of it can be formed until Hus's completed work is published. I therefore prefer at present, re- lying on my above-nientioned observations, to follow Rosen vinge's definition of species, all the more as I had finished the examination of my Po/yj/jj/ra-material before receiving Hus's paper. This species generally grows in the sublittoral zone and has been found down to a depth of 10 — 15 fathoms; it is also met with near extreme low-water mark especially in rock-pools, and grows both on open sea-shore and in sheltered piaces. Fructifying specimens were found in May, June and July. This species is very commonly distributed along the Færoes; as inentioned by Simmons (1. c. p. 264) it was first reported from the Færoes by J. Agardh, who, however, does not give the narae of the discoverer, but it was probably L}'ngbye or Rostrup. 5. P. umbilicalis (L.) J. Ag. Kjellm., N. I., p. 238 (190); Rosenv., 1. c. p. 830; Ulva umbilicalis Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 28. f. laciniata (Ag.) Le Jolis, Liste, p. 99. f. umbilicalis (L.) Kleen. f. linearis (Grev.) Le Jolis, 1. c. Formå laciniata is most commonly met with in somewhat sheltered localities, occurring there in the littoral zone near high- water mark, e. g. in the narrow part of Sundelaget, where examples, some two feet long, are found spreading over stones and gravel. Formå umbilicalis is extremely common and is met with abun- dantly along all the coasts of the Færoes which are exposed to the open sea, where it covers the rocks in small, low tufts resembling crumbled paper; Wille calls the latter form ^ scopulorum1. It somelimes extends to a considerable height above sea level. This form always grows attached to rocks, but /'. laciniata mav some- times be found epiphytic, e. g. on Fucus-species. Lyngbye found f. linearis near Kvalbo on Sydero and some of the specimens in my collections suggested this form. Fructifying specimens were found in May, June, July, October and November. 1 Wille, N.: Bidrag til Algernes physiologiske Anatomi, \i.'M. 349 This is an extremely common species of the Færoese cnnsts ns w;is inentioned by Lyngbye (1. c), who savs: -- »Habitat ad insulas Færo- enses saxis in summo refluxus liniite ubique et copiosissirae adnascens Il was iirst recorded by Landt, 1. c. p. 232. Lyngbye (Hydrophyt., p. 10 does not record Ulva purpurea from the Færoes, but bis herbarium contains two specimens which bear this nainc (hev are marked: — Ulva purpurea Lgb. Porphyra purpurea Ag. Færoa), I consider these specimens, which are in faet only small frag- ments, to be identical with P. umbilcalis. But Lyngbye Hydrophyt., 1. c-, reports a var. (i elongata of Ulva purpurea as occurring in the Færoes: A'arietas ad saxa maritim;) prope Qualboe, Færoæ, copiose«. None of the specimens in his herbarium are, however, marked with this name, but judging from its habitats, the varietv in question must be identical with the specimens in his herbarium cailed by him *Ulva umbilicalis var. lanceolata* , on the label of which he has further added crispa sinuosa. 8. Juli 1817 ad Qualbo, copiose«. These specimens are like Porphyra umbilicalis f. linearis. ERYTHROTRICHIA Aresch. 0. E. ceramicola (Lyngb.) Aresch. Kjellm., N. I., p. 242 (193); Conferva ceramicola Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 144. Found along sheltered coast in deep water in about 5 — 8 fathoms, epiphytic on Desmarestia aculeata, but Kleen (1. c. 24) mentions having found it epiphytic on littoral algæ at Nordland. It had spores in June. Seems to be rare along the Færoese coasts; I only found it near Ore (Ost.). CONCHOCELIS Batters. 7. C. rosea Batters1. Phycological Memoirs edited by Murray, Part I. London 1892. The chromatophores are differently described. Batters savs they are star-like, while Schmitz and Hauptfleish (Engler und Prantl, Naturlich. Pflanzenfam. I Teil, 2 Abteil. p. 315) say: »an- scheinend mit wandst åndige m, unregelmåszig scheibenformigem Chro- matophor.« In the material I have had for examination, which was, however, dried, the chromatophores in the large cells appeared to be star-like. 1 In a paper: Die perforierenden kalkbohrenden Algen und ihre Bedeutung in der Natur (Scripta bøtanica: Fase. 18. p. 35) published by the Hussian investi- gator Nadson he gives it as his opinion, relying on the investigations made at the biologicai station on Heligoland. that C. rosea is identical with Ostreobium Queketti as the latter species is said to be sometimes green and sometimes red. It must be owned. that these two species resemble each other very closely, so that his ob- servations mav very possibly prove to be true. Here I have. however, preferred to retain Conchocelis rosen. 350 It has been found in the sublittoral zone down to a depth of 25 fathoms along exposed as well as sheltered shores, and grows in the shells of various animals, e. g. Modiola, Solen, Cyprina, Buc- cinum, Serpula, etc. It is fairly common along the coasts of the Færoes and has been found in the following localities: — Bord 6: Kvannesund (H. J.); Ost: Strænder (H. J.); Str.: Thorshavn (!), Vestmanhavn (!), Gliversnæs (!) ; Syd. Trangisvaag (H. J.). II. Florideae. Order HELMINTHOCLADIACEAE. CHANTRANSIA (Dec.) Schmitz. 8. C. secundata (Lyngb.) Thur. Le Jolis, Alg. mar. de Cherb., p. 106. Callithamnion Dawiesii /3 secundatum Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 129; Trentepohlia Daviesii Pringsheim, Beitråge zur Morphologie der Meeres Algen (Aus den Abhandl. d. Konigl. Academie der Wissensch. zu Berlin 1861, p. 351, tab. XXII, figs. 1— 6). Fig. 51. Chantransia secundata (Lyngb.) Thur. a, one larger plant and one quite young on Ceramium acan- thonotuni ; b, young plant; c, portion of plant showing branches mostly opposite. 100: l.1 This small alga, first described and figured by Lyngbyc, I. c, is more particularly characterized by its small basal disc, which often even in young planls consists of several layers of cells, (see Pringsheim's figs. 1 — 6), as well as by its secund branches, which however, especially in older piants become opposite. But as statcd below under Ch. virgatula, Ch. secundata comes very near to the former2. It is an extremely common epiphyte on several algæ between tide-marks, and often forms a close covering on the host plant. It 1 Throughout this paper all the iigures denoting scale are approximatc, '-' Since writing the ahove I found in mj* Cladophora material a few specimens of the present speeies bearing tetraspores, the piants oceurred on a Cladophora rupestris from Huj vig, gathered May 4th 1898. The tetraspores were ahout 21 u long and 1(> u broad. 351 is found both on sheltered and exposed shores, bul more commonly on the lalter. Specimens bearing monosporangia were met with from April to November, and mav doubtless be found all the year round. It was lirst found l)y Lyngbye and is very comraon everywhere. 9. C. virgatula (Harv.) Thur. Le .lolis, Alg. mar. de Cherb., p. 106; Kjellm., N. I., p. 166 (130). Some of the specimens which I have referred to this species and one of which I have shown in lig. 52 approach most closely to Trentepohlia virgatula Faiiow in »Marine Algæ of New Eng- land«, p. 109, tab. X, lig. 3. The short branches bearing mono- spores are very often opposite and tliose in the upper part of the plant especially terminate in long hairs. Chromatophores are star-like, as may distinctly be seen in the young sporangia. The cells in the long branches are about 10 \i thick. Other specimens differed from these in being almost devoid of hairs, and only after close examination were a few branches found term inating in hairs: these specimens which were gathered near Velbestad epiphytic on Gigartina mamil- losa were further especially noteworthy because they bore both monospores and tetra- spores. As is well-known, Har- vey figures in Phycologia Brit., pi. 313 a Callithanmion virga- tulum bearing monospores as well as tetraspores 1, but as is equally well-known this report Fijr. 52. Chantransia virgatula (Harv.) Thur. Portion of filament with monospores (partly emptied). 100 : 1. 1 and in the following plate he shows the same to be the case in Callithamnion Daviesii. 352 has been regarded as due to some confusion (cfr., e. g. Thuret in Le Jolis's Liste p. 104); in Engler und P ran ti., Die naturlichen Iitf. 53. Chantransla vlrgatula (Harv.) Thur. a Part of plantjwith monospores: ft and d portions of fila- ments showing branches mostly opposite; c filaments with tetraspores; e apex of branch with hair: f young sporangium with star-like chr om a tophor es and central pyrenoid. a and /> 80:1; c, il and c 129 : 1 : f 400 : 1. Pflanzenfamilien, Teil I, Abteil 2, p. 331, it is, however, stated that in Ch. secundata both monospores and tetraspores are sometimes, though rarely, to be found on the same plant. 353 On my visit to Heligoland in the summer of 1901 I mentioned my find to Dr. Kuckuck and he told me that he had found tetra- spores both on Ch. virgatula and on Ch. seciiiuluta which is very oymoL Fig. 54. Chantransia virgatula Harv.) Thur. a, b, c. Portions of plant witfa tetraspores; d, transverse section ol' basal disc. and c- 100 : 1 ; d '250 : 1. closely related to the former, and he has sinee sent me his slides for examination and the specimens in them exeept for some minor difierences, seem to correspond exactly with my Færoese material. In fig. 53 I have shown portions of the plant in question. Both kinds of spores often occurred on the same plant, frequently even 354 on the same branch, and that the monospores were really ripe was proved by the faet that branches bearing monospores only also showed nnmerous empty monosporangia. The monospores (about 19 p long and 11 broad) are soinewhat smaller than the tetraspores which are about 23 \i long and abont 16 fi broad. Except for the tetraspores, the plant is exaetly like a Chantransia and has star- like chromatophores sitnated round a large central pyrenoid. Further, a few tetraspores occurred on a small Chantransia which I have also referred to this species; it grew abnndantly on Cysto- cloninm pnrpurascens from Klaksvig. Lastly, I am of opinion that a small, elegant plant which was observed on a conceptacle of Himanthalia Lorea from Frodebo pre- served in spirit ought to be referred to this species (fig. 54); it oc- curred as small, semiglobular, cushion-like growths of the size of a pea, and in the accompanying figure some portions of the plant are shown. As far as I could see, it bore tetraspores only, so I naturally to begin with regarded it as a Rhorfochorton, but on closer examination and after comparison with the above-mentioned spe- cimens it appears to me unquestionably to belong to Ch. virgatnla. The plant has a distinct basal disc whence proceed erect filaments. These are richly branched and the branches are sometimes alter- nate (occasionally more or less secund) and sometimes mostly oppo- site especially in the upper part. The branches generally terminate in short hairs. The branches springing from the lower part of the erect filaments are often prolonged into long branches like the fila- ments whence they proceed, while those occurring higher up gradu- ally become shorter and either bear tetraspores or produce a new series of branches. The oval or obovate tetraspores are sometimes terminal, sometimes lateral, and in the latter case secund or oppo- site, they are about 23 fi long and about 16 /< broad. The fila- ments when thickest attain to a thickness of about 30 n, the thick- ness of the upper part of the filaments and of the branches ave- raging 10 [i. The cells mav be as much as 4 — 5 times as long as they are broad and the thicker cells are usually rather swollen especially towards the top. Judging from the material preserved in spirit, the chromatophores are star-like with a large central pyrenoid. As mentioned above, this species comes very near to Ch.secun- data, and they are often difficult to distinguish from each other, as Kuckuck writes to me is also his experience, the faet that both 355 of lliem have been found bearing tetraspores making the resem- blance still closer. When typically developed, Ch. virgatula is easiry distinguishable trom Ch. secundata, but sometimes small specimens of Ch. virgatula occur intermingled with the large Ch. virgatula and linse small ones so closely resemble Ch. secundata as to suggest the desirability of classing together the two species. On the other haml, as they are easily to be distinguished when typically developed, 1 think Tor the present they ought to be kept distinet, in which opinion I am supported by Dr. Kuckuck. Ch. secundata is espe- cially distinguished by its small size, its short cells and its branches which are for the most part secund, thougta opposite branches also occur, while in Ch. virgatula the branches are almost as often oppo- site as secund. Lastly, the basal disc in Ch. secundata generally eonsists of several lavers of cells while in Ch. virgatula it often if not arways (?) eonsists of one layer. This species was found on exposed coasts as well as in shel- tered localities especially hetween tide-marks, but occurred also in the sublittoral zone, and appears to be a common epiphyte on larger algæ, e. g. Gigartina mamillosa, Rhodgmenia palmata, Himan- thalia Lorea, Cgstoclonium purpurascens, Polysiphonia nigrescens, eta, and on Zostera marina. Monospore-bearing piants were found in April, June and July, tetrasporic in April, May and June. This species appears to be rather common along the coasts of the Færoes. It was already found by Lyngbye, as a speeimen from Kvalbo which he named Callithamnion Dawiesii is this species. It occurred in the fol- lowing piaces: — Bord 6: near Klaksvig tetrasporic specimens on Cyslo- clonium !); Str.: Velbestad on Gigartina mamillosa (!) ; Syd: Frodebo on Himanthalia Lorea ! , Vaags Ejde likewise on Himanthalia (!). 10. C. efflorescens (J. Ag.) Kjellm., N. I., p. 166 (129). I have only seen a few individuals of this species, and they occurred bearing monospores only. Generally they are found only with cystocarps (cfr. Gran, Kristian iafj ordens Algeflora p. 19, and Kjellman, 1. c. tab. 12, figs 1 — 2). Dr. Rosen vinge, however, who has seen my specimens, tells me that along the Danish coasts he has found monospore-bearing specimens, which exactly resemble mine; and he also tells me that with the help of his material he will be able to prove with certainty the relationship hetween the monospore-bearing specimens and those most commonly met with, viz. the cystocarpic. Gobi (Algenfl. Weiss. Meer., p. 50) mentions Botany of the Færdes. 23 356 only having come across piants bearing monospores and refers his piants to Ch. Daviesii, but according to Kjellman (1. c.) they belong to Ch. efflorescens. The thickness of the main branches = 7 — 8 n. This species has been met with in June only, and then bearing monospores; it was found growing in the sublittoral zone epiphytic on several algæ in sheltered piaces. It has hitherto been found in the following localities only: — Ost.: Fuglefjord on Phijllophora Brodiæi (!), and Ore on Desmarestia aculeata (! . 11. C. Daviesii (Dillw.) Thur., Kjellm., N. I., p. 167 (129). The specimens referred to this species agree fairly well with Harvey's figure (Phycol. Brit., tab. 314). This species occurs in the sublittoral zone, epiphytic on several large brown algæ, especially on Desmarestia aculeata and on the stalks of Laminaria hijperborea. Found with monospores in May, June and November. Does not seem to be coraraon along the snores of the Færoes. Spe- cimens have been seen from the following localities: — Ost: Fuglefjord(!); Str.: Tinganæs(l), Kalbakfjord (H. J.); Sando: Skopen (!). In Hydrophyt., p. 129 Lyngbye reports this species from the Færoes, but the specimens in his herbarium in the Botanical Museum, Copen- hagen, which I have examined belong to Ch. uirgatula. 12. C. Alariæ Jonss. 1, The Marine Algæ of Iceland (Botanisk Tidsskrift, 24. Bind, p. 132). Epiphytic on Alaria esculenta covering its lamina with a short, red-matted growth. Observed with monosporangia in July. Found only on Str.: north of the redoubt of Thorshavn (!). Order GELIDIACEAE. HARVEYELLA Schmitz & Reinke. 13. H. mirabilis Schmitz & Reinke. Reinke, Algenilora, p. 28; Sturch, Harveyella mirabilis (Annals of Bot., Vol. 13, 1899, p. 83); Choreocolax albus Kuckuck, Choreocolax albus n. sp. ein echter Schmarotzer unter den Florideen (Sitzungsberichte d. kgl. preuss. Akademie der Wissenschaften zu Berlin. 1894). Cfr. Kuckuck, Bemerk. zur marinen Algenvegetation von Helgoland II, p. 395. Parasitic on Rhodomela, on the thicker branches of which it forms small, almost semiglobular, whitish growths. 1 determ. by Mr. II. Jonsson. 357 Tetraspore-bearing specimens were found in April, cystocarpic in November. Rare along the coast of the Færoes: -- Kuno (H. J.); Syd: Tran- gisvaag (!). Order GIGARTINACEAE. CHONDRUS (Stackh.) J. G. Ag. 14. Ch. crispus (L.) Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 15; Kjellm. , N. I., p. 212 (167). This alga is found both in the littoral zone near low-water mark, where it also occurs in rock pools, and in the sublittoral in shallow water. It is met with on fairly exposed coasts as well as in more sheltered localities, and grows on rocks and stones, often in the Coro///no-belt. Cystocarp-bearing specimens were found in June and September. It does not seem to be particularly common along the coasts of the Færoes, as was pointed out by Lyngby e: — »Ad littora Færoensia haud frequens.« Si mm o ns (1. c, p. 135) and Rostrup (Le., p. 84) raen- tion it as »fairly common«, but they do not give its habitats. In the collections which I have had at my disposal are specimens from: — Str. : Thorshavn (Lyngb., H. J.!), Sandegærde (!); Ost.: Strænder(!); Nolso: Ejde(!); Kuno (H. J.). GIGARTINA Stackh. 15. G. mamillosa (Good. et Woodw.) J. Ag. Kjellm., N. I., p. 211 (167); Sphærococcus mamillosus Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 14. This is a littoral species and grows gregariously near low-water mark; it prefers exposed coasts and grows most luxuriantly at the most exposed stations. Found attached to gently inclined as well as almost vertical rock faces, and prefers to be left dry by the tide for a time. Occurs seldom in rock-pools and then does not seem to thrive. On the exposed coast north of the redoubt of Thorshavn I found it here and Ihere in rock -pools at half-tide level, mostly forming low, round cushions hardly an inch high. At a higher level it hardly ever occurs in rock-pools, but I have come across a few specimens from pools, which were thinner than customary and more irregularly branched. Found with cystocarps in Julv, August, October, November and December; with antheridia in June. This species is common along the exposed coasts of the Færoes. but rarer in sheltered localities. Its common occurrence was already 23* 358 noted by Lyngbye 1. c. p. 14 , who writes: — >Ad insulas Færoenses copiose.« PHYLLOPHORA (Grev.) J. G. Ag. 16. Ph. Brodiæi (Turn.) ,1. Ag. Kjellm., N. I., p. 209 (163); Rosenv., Gronl. Havalg., p. 821. The typical form is most commonly met with along the Færoese coasts; but sometimes the specimens more or less approach to the subspecies interrupta (Grev.) Rosenv., without, however, being quite identical with it. This is a sublittoral species and prefers growing on stony bottoms where it occurs dispersed, but rarely in large quantities. It is met with both in exposed and sheltered iocalities, but most commonly in the latter. The Færoese specimens which I have seen were sterile, but often infested by Actinococcus subrutaneus. Specimens bearing young shoots occurred in November and December. Found in the following Iocalities: — Videro: (H. J.); Bord 6: Klaks- vig !); Ost.: Fugleijord !); Str. : Vestmanhavn (!), Gliversnæs(!), Kvivig (!); Syd.: Tværaa (Ostenfeld), Lobra (!), Vaagfjord (H. J.). Ph. ru ben s (Good. & Wood.) .1. Ag. Simmons (1. c. p. 266) reports having found this species near Klaksvig, but as I had several times had an opportunity of dredging this locality and had only succeeded in tinding Phyllophora Brodiæi I naturally had serious doubts as to the correctness of Simmons find, and his original specimens kindly lent to me from the collections belonging to the University of Lund also proved to be small specimens of Phyllo- phora Brodiæi. Phyllophora rutens must consequently be omitted from the list of the marine algæ of the Færoes, as it has not hi- therto been found there. 17. Ph. membranifolia (G. et W.) .1. Ag. Kjellm., N. I., p. 210 (165); Darbishire, Die Phyllophora Arten d. westl. Ostsee deutsch. Antheils. This species must presumably be very rare in the Færoes as only a single, small specimen occurred in the gatherings. It has narrow leaves and resembles most closely a Baltic-specimen (cfr. Darbishire, 1. c. p. 5). Syd.: Tværaa, gathered by Ostenfeld in a plaiee net. Simmons (1. c. p. 206) mentions having found this species near Klaksvig; but his original specimens which l)r. Nordstedt kindly lent nu- Ironi the collections belonging to the University of Lund proved to be very small specimens of Rhodymenia palmata. 359 On the north side of Kvalbofjord (Syd,. I found some way inside a cave, rather above Low-water mark a small Phgllophora, which occurred on the rock as a dense, low covering of a fine, red colour. The single individuals were small, hardly more than 2—3 cm. high. This habitai answers exactly to whai Batters (Marine Algæ ol' Berwick-onrTweed pp. 3154— .">) savs of Phyllophora Traillii Holmes, but it cannot be de- termined with any certainly as the plant is sterile. Both on this account and also because the Færoese speeimens are somewhal larger and more branching than indicated by Batters. I prefer to regard theni as small individuals of this species. ACTINOCOCCUS Kutz. 18. A. subcutaneus (Lyngb.) Rosenv.. Grønl. Havalg. , p. 822: Chætophora membranifolii Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 11; Ch. subcu- tanea Lyngb., Fl. Dan., tab. 2135, lig. 2. Parasitic on Phyllophora Brodiæi, on the thallns of which it forms the well-known dark-red, fruit-like growths. The speeimens I saw were sterile. Found in the following localities: —Vid. H. J.); Ost: Fuglefjord (!); Syd.: Vaagfjord (H. J.). CALLOPHYLLIS Kutz. 19. C. laciniata (Huds.) Kiitz. Sphærococcus laciniatus Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 12. A sublittoral species, found attached down to a depth of 25 fa- thoms. Occurs both in the open sea and in the fjords, generally epiphytic, especially on the haptera and lower part of the stem of Laminaria hyperborea\ but also grows attached to stones and shells. I have come across speeimens bearing tetraspores in June, October and November, and cystocarps in May, June, July, October, November and December; hence the plant seems to be able to bear reproductive organs nearly all the year round. This is a very common species along the shores of the Færoes, as already noted by Lyngbye, 1. c, who writes: — 'Ad insulas Færoenses copiose.« Callocolax neglectus Schmitz is a rather common parasite on this plant. CALLOCOLAX Schmitz. 20. C. neglectus Schmitz. Batlers, On some new British Ma- rine Algæ. (Annals of Botany, vol. 9, p. 316). This species is rather commonly met with as a parasite on Callophyllis laciniata, and occurs on it in small irregularly shaped 360 bodies, the internal structure of which bears a remarkable resem- blance to Callophijllis. It is found fairly often bearing tetraspores and on measuring these and comparing them with the tetraspores of Callophijllis the former seemed somewhat smaller than the latter, thus: — The tetraspores of the Callocolax were : long. = 32— 35 f< ; lat. = 17— 19 /x » » » Callophijllis » » = 46—49 ^ ; » —22/i Piants bearing tetraspores oecurred in May, June, July. Appears to be rather common. Found in the following localities: -- Str. : Thors- havn (!), Arge (!), Kvivig (!) and Vestmanhavn (!); Syd: Tværaa (!). AHNFELTIA Fries. 21. A. plicata (Huds.) Fr. Kjellm., N. I., p. 210 (166); Gigartina plicata Lyngb., 1. c. p. 42. It has been met with both in the littoral zone in rock pools near low water mark, and in the sublittoral in shallow water. It prefers a somewhat sheltered eoast, and grows attached to stones and rocks, often associated with Corallina and other algæ, but sometimes it occurs over fairly large areas as pure societies. Here as elsewhere only sterile examples have been found. Sterrocolaæ decipiens Schmitz is a common parasite on the present species and forms small cushion-like growths on it; and in Lyngbye's Her- barium there are specimens from Eide densely covered with Sterro- colaæ decipiens. It is a rather common species of the Færoese coasts and was first reported from the Færoes by Lyngbye, who writes in Hydrophyt. : — »Ad insulas Færoenses, rarius.« STERROCOLAX Schmitz. 22. S. decipiens Schmitz, Die Gattung Actinococcus Kiitz., Flora 1893, p. 367. Appears to be a fairly common parasite on Ahnfeltia plicata and consequently occurs in localities similar to those of the latter. The only reproductive organs it has been known to bear are mono- spores. The latter occur also on the Færoese specimens. It is rather common like Ahn/'ellia plicata. Order RHODOPHYLLIDACEAF. CYSTOCLONIUM Kid/.. 23. C. purpurascens (Huds.) Kutz. Kjellm., N. I., p. 202 (159); Gigartina pinastroides Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 45. 361 hi piaces where thc tide is imperceptible , e. g. in Sundene between Stromo and Oslerci and in Skaalefjord, this species occurs in quite shallow water, olien bardly a foot below tbe surface. But where the tide is felt, e. g. at Klaksvig it grows at so great a depth as to be hardly left dry except at very low ebb-tide. I only found it in particularly sheltered piaces, but Rostrup and Lyngbye gathered it near Thorshavn, consequently, from a more exposed locality. Grows most frequently on stones and rocks, but some- times also attached to other algæ. Tetraspore -bearing specimens were found in May, June and July; cystocarpic in August, September and October, which agrees fairly well with Kleen's report (1. c. p. 18) from Nordland. This species, which was first reported from the Færoes by Rostrup, was already found there by Lyngbye as what he calls Gigartina pinastroides, is this species which was proved by examining the spe- cimens preserved in his herbarium. In Hydrophyt. he mentions it as follows: — Habitat ad insulas Færoenses, ut in sinu prope Thorshavn, at raro.« But Lyngbye must have been very doubtful as to the cor- rectness of his determination, for to begin with he labelled the spe- cimens in question Fucus purpurascens , then he put them in a small wrapper on which he wrote »pinastroides«, and this wrapper with con- tents was again placed among his material of Cystoclonium purpurascens, where it was found by Dr. Rosenvinge some years ago when he arranged Lyngbye's Herbarium; so Lyngbye himself must have dis- covered his error. This species does not appear to be widely distributed along the shores of the Færoes: — Bordo: Klaksvig (Rostr., H. S. !); Ost: Glibre X, Strænder H. J. !); Str. : Sundelaget (!), Kvalvig (!), Thorshavn Lyngb., Rostr.). EUTHORA. J. Ag. 24. E. cristata (L.) J. Ag. Kjellm., N. I., p. 186 (145); Spærococcus cristatus Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 13. There occur two forms of this species, a broader and more robust form — f. typica peculiar to exposed localities, and a nar- rower but larger form — f. angustata Lyngb., which I have only met with in sheltered piaces in fjords or narrow sounds. This species generally occurs in the sublittoral zone, and luxuriant specimens were found down to a depth of 25 fathoms. In caves I found it almost at the waters edge, but hardly so far up as to be left uncovered at ebb-tide. Kleen (1. c. p. 17) mentions very much the same occurring in Nordland. It was met with in 362 the open sea as well as in sheltered localities. in the latter often in its narrow form as mentioned above. Occurs most frequently epiphytic, especially on the haptera and lower part of the stem of Laminaria hyperborea, but also found now and then attached to rocks. Found bearing tetraspores in June, July, August; and cysto- carps in May, June, July, August and November. This seems to agree with Kjell mans report (le.) from the Arctic Sea that it appears to be able to form cystocarps all the year round, but tetraspores chiefly during summer. In Lyngbye's Herbarium there are specimens from dilTerent stations along the Færoes; of f. angustata he has only Greenland specimens. This is a very common species of the Færoese coast. Lyng b ve mentions it as follows: — »Ad insulas Færoenses in stipite Laminariæ digitæ haud rarus> RHODOPHYLLIS Kutz. 25. Rh. dichotoma (Lepech.) Gobi. Kjellm., N. I., p. 185 (144); Sphærococcus eiliatus Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 12. The typical form with the broad thailus occurs in the open sea, but in the interior of fjords in quiet water it alters its appear- ance, the branches getting narrow and ribbon -like, often almost filiform. Kjell man (1. c. tab. 12, fig. 3) has figured such a plant; Lyngbye's Herbarium contains similar specimens from Greenland which he has cailed 0 fuscus (Hydrophyt., 1. c). In Epicrisis, p. 362, Agardh deseribes a var. atropurpurea of this species and reports it from the Færoes, and in the considerable Færoese material of this species which I have had at my disposal I found a few specimens which agreed fairly well with his de- scription of this variety, but as they form together with the rest of my material a continuous series, it is impossible to mark the di- viding line for this variety. I am therefore of opinion that var. atropurpurea can hardly claim to be ranked as a variety. This species grows in the sublittoral zone in deep water and has been found down to a depth of 25 fathoms. It inhabits more particularly the open sea, but may also be met with in the interior of fjords. It occurs most frequently epiphytic especially on the haptera and lower part of the stem of Laminaria hyperborea. I found il very rarely at great depths growing on stones and shells. 363 Tetraspore-bearing piants were Found in .lune, and November, cystocarpic in June, Jury und August. Kl een found il bearing cystocarps in July and August in Nordland. This species is quite commoo along the shores of the Færoes and was lirsl mentioned by Lyngbye. Order RHODYMENIACEAE. RHODYMENIA Grev.) J. Ag. 26. Rh. palmata (L.) Grev. Kjellm., N. L, p. 188 (147); Ulva pal- mata Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 24. Formå typica Kjellm., 1. c. subf. caespitosa Simmons, 1. c. p. 266. Formå prolifera Kutz. Flora Danica, tab. 1128, subf. nana, nov. subf. 1—3 cm. higb, very prolific and branched; the base more or less cuneate and sometimes drawn out into a small stalk. The easiest transitional stages are met with between the above- mentioned forms, but as they differ widely in their typical deve- lopment, and there seems to be some dissimilarity in their habitats, f. typica growing most commonly on rocks while f. prolifera usually occurs epiphytically, I have thought it more practical to keep them apart from each other. F. tijpica is very variable, at times having prolifications (f. marginifera Harv.), at others being quite destitute of them (f. nucla); sometimes it is broad, sometimes the segments of the thailus are narrow and numerous, and a few such specimens in my collections resembled fairly closely f. sarniensis. With regard to subforma cæspitosa Simmons — through the kindness of Dr. Nordstedt I have had some specimens for examination from the collection belonging to the University of Lund and have thus been able to ascertain that these belong to f. typica — , it may be re- marked that some specimens occur whieh correspond to Simmons's description, but they are often destitute of stipe, and are charac- terized especially by their small size and tufted or carpet-like growth, often covering large areas. Subforma nana is likewise only a very small form of f. prolifera, at the most a few inches high, and similarly marked by its carpet-like gregarious growth. In a few rare instances some olherwise normal specimens of f. typica and subf. cæspitosa had part of their thailus transformed into small, irregularly shaped growths (tig. 55) by their very copious 364 branching, which was sometimes dichotomous, sometimes quite irregular. Along the coasts of the Færoes this species grows both in the littoral and in the snblittoral zone. In the former it occurs espe- cially along exposed shores near low-water mark, where it forms rather wide-spread almost pure societies more particularly on hori- zontal surfaees. In the sublittoral it occurs most often as an epi- phyte, e. g. on Laminaria species and Fucus: sometimes it may Fig. 55. Rhodymenia palmata (L.) Grev. 1 : 1 (compare pp. 363 — 41. also be said to occur in the littoral zone as an epiphyte, as it grows by p reference on those Laminaria of which the leaf and upper part of the stem are left uncovered at low-tide, and then the red bushes of Rhodymenia may be seen projecting above the sea together with the brown Laminaria. Forms of f. prolifera are most commonly met with in the latter habitat, and they can attain to a very con- siderable size, but f. tgpica also frequently occurs here in large, vigorous examples. On the whole along the Færoese coasts those growing as epiphytes are larger and more vigorous than those occurring on rocks, and they are particularly small on rocks in 365 exposed localities where their close growth protects thera from the violence of the sea. Tetraspore-bearing piants were found in April, May, .hine and November. This is a very common species of the Færoese coasts, as was pointe«! out by Lyngbye (1. c), who writes: -■ »Ad insulas Færoenses co])iosissime, tam lapidibus ad superficiem maris agglutinata, quam stipiti Laminariæ digitatæ aliarumque parasitice insidens.« Formå tgpica is most common on rocks, and subforma cæspitosa in exposed piaces on rocks between tide-marks; Simmons mentions having found it near Ejde (Ost.) and Fanden Syd. . Specimens which correspond fairly closely to f. sarniensis occurred between tide-marks in the neighbourhood of Gliversnæs (Str.); f. prolifera and f.typica margini- fera are common as epiphytes; lastly subforma nana was found in a small, low cave near Hojvig (Str.). LOMENTARIA Lyngbye. 27. L. articulata (Huds.) Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 101, tab. 30 A.; Hauptfleisch, Die Fruchtentwickelung der Gatungen Chylocladia, Champia und Lomentaria (Flora 1892); Chylocladia articulata (Huds.) Grev., Kjellm., N. I., p. 193 (151). A littoral species, generally grows gregariously, and commonly near low-water mark in the Corallina-belt. It prefers exposed coasts, but mav also be met with in sheltered localities, where it does not, however, seem to thrive. It grows attached to rocks and stones and has not been found as an epiphyte. Tetrasporic spe- cimens occurred in May, June, July and November. Lyngbye, who first found this species in the Færoes, writes in Hydrophyt., p. 10, with reference to its habitat: -- »Habitat pulchra hæc species ad rupes insularum Færoensium in summo refluxus limite hic et illic eopiose.« The species is also very common, especially along the more exposed coasts. 28. L. clavellosa (Turn.) Thur. Hauptfleisch, Die Frucht- entvickelung der Gattungen Chylocladia, Champia und Lomentaria (Flora 1892); Chylocladia clavellosa (Turn.) J. Ag., Spec. Alg., Vol. 3, p. 297. Var. sedifolia (Turn.) J. Ag., Spec. Alg., vol. 2, p. 366; Gastri- dium purpurascens Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 69, tab. 17. Almost all the L. clavellosa- specimens from the Færoes belong to the variety1, but they vary considerably. In some specimens 1 I fully agree with Foslie (New or Critical Norwegian Algæ, Kgl. norske Videnskab. Selsk. Skrifter 1894) when he savs that he cannot follow Stromfelt in regarding var. sedifolia as a distinct species. 366 nearly all the branches are opposite (cfr. Lyngbyes's fig. 1. c), in others only a few, and all stages are met with intermediate between these extremes. The main filament mav attain to a breadth of as much as 4 — 5 mm. Small specimens of this variety, consi sting only of stem and opposite branches, are doubtless identieal with var. pyramidalis Thur. (cfr. Le Jolis, Liste, p. 132). A peculiar form with numerous small, irregular branches was found by Ostenfeld in Trangisvaagfjord. A form has sometimes been fonnd at the bottoms of fjords with long, almost linear branches, consequently, resembling the slender forms of, e. g. Euthora cristata and Rhodophyllis dichotoma met with in similar localities. Lyngbye's Herbarium contains only some very imperfect spe- cimens of his /3 cæspitosum (1. c. p. 69), from which no definite con- clusion as to its habit can be formed, and which do not appear to be particularly characteristic according to his description. This species generally grows in the sublittoral zone along the coasts of the Færoes and mav occur at fairly considerable depths. I dredged it from various depths of about 15 fathoms, and Si in mons (1. c. p. 266) mentions having found it in the »elittoral« zone; but it also occurs in the littoral zone near low-water mark , where it is very common in clefts of rock and in caves. It grows attached to rocks and stones, as also epiphytic especially on the stems of Laminaria hgperborea. Though it grows by preference in the open sea along the most exposed coasts, it is not uncommon in the in- terior of fjords where it is also found epiphytic on Lam. færoensis. Tetraspore -bearing specimens were found in May, June, July, August and November, cystocarpic in June, July and August. This is a ver}' common species of the Færoese coasts; it was first found by Lyngbye 1. c.;, who writes with reference to its habitat: — Habitat ad littora Færoensia saxis et stipitibus Laminariæ saccharinæ adnascens.« 21). L. rosea (Harv.). Found growing near low-water mark as well as in the sub- littoral zone in deep water. It prefers exposed coasts. I found tetrasporic specimens only in May and June. Tbis species appears to be rather rare along the Færoese coasts. Ost.: Molen prope Ejde (!) near low-water mark intermingled witb Corallina, Ejde H. S. ; Sir.: Kalbakfjord (!), specimens very small, and determination uncertain; Kolter(!) on Lam. hyperborea al a depth of some 10—15 fathoms; Syd: Kvalbo Ejde dl. S.. 367 When I came across Uiis alga only ;i few specimens of it near Molen where it occurred between tide-marks, il appeared to me to be only a form of Lomentaria clavellosa, which also grew there. My ma- terial is. however, too scanty to allow me to form any definite opinion of it. bul I would caU attention to whatFoslie New and critical Nor- wegian Algae, Trondhjem 1894 writes in his report of Lomentaria sedi- folia Turn. Stromf.: I cannol agree with Stromfelt thai L. sedi- folia is distinkt from /. clavellosa by characters of the same degree and value as /.. roseer. To my opinion the hitter is a more characterized speeics than the former. Among rather numerous specimens thai I have seen I have not mel with any true transition to L cavellosa, though the species is rather varying. This shows thai Foslie admits of the possibility of the existence of intennediate forms The specimens which I found on Heligoland, while visiting the bio- logicai station there, and which grew epiphytically on Laminaria hgper- borea, were quite distinct from /.. cavellosa, which also occurred there; and Dr. Kuckuck told me that he had aever come across intermediate forms. PLOCAMIUM (Lamour. Lyngb. 30. P. coccineum (Huds.) Lyngb., Hydrophyt., j). 39; Kjellm., X. I., p. 188 (147). Var. typica is the most common; var. uncinala (Harvey, Phyc. Brit., tab. 44, fig. 9) occurred in Trangisvaagfjord. Lyngbye (1. c.) mentions a form fJ subtile, but none of the specimens in his her- barium are marked with this name; it is probably identical with var. uncinala. This species is generally found in the sublittoral zone, but I have also come across it in the littoral in caves a little above low- water mark. It grows both in the open sea and in more sheltered piaces and is generally epiphytic espeeially on the stems of Lami- naria hyperborea of which it is a characteristic epiphyte; but it is also found attached to rocky bottoms especially in caves. Tetraspore-bearing piants occurred in April, May, June, October, November and December; cystocarpic in July and August. Kl een found it bearing tetraspores and cystocarps in July and August at Nordland. It is an extremely common species of the Færoese coasts, as was mentioned by Lyngbye (1. c. , who savs: — »Habitat elegantissima luec- Alga ad insulas Færoenses copiose. It oecurs in fine, large specimens. HALOSACCIOX (Kiitz.) Rupr. 31. H. ramentaceum (L.) J. Ag. Kjellm., N. I., p. 196 (153). f. robusta Kjellm., 1. c. 368 f. ramosa Kjellm., 1. c. f. subsimplex Rupr. Kjellm., 1. c. I think the Færoese material may be referred to the three above-mentioned forms; f. subsimplex appears to be the most common, but often occurs as a transition to f. robusta. Formå ramosa is rare; I have only felt justified in re f erring a few of the specimens to it. Along the Færoes this species occurred both in sheltered locali- ties and, at a single place (Svino), on the open sea-shore which was, however, more or less sheltered by some low rocks standing in the sea opposite to it. According to Jonsson's notes, in the latter locality it grew near low-water mark, but in sheltered piaces it must most properly be said to grow in the sublittoral zone, though in very shallow water, and the specimens growing at the highest piaces are doubtless occasionally left dry at very low tide. Here it grows on large or small stones often associated with nume- rous green algæ, as already noted by Rostrup. Tetraspore-bearing piants were found in May, June and No- vember. This species which was first found by Rostrup (1. c. p. 83) ap- pears to be rare along the coasts of the Færoes. Besides the well- known habitat near Klaksvig (Bordo), where it occurs in abundance along the shore, it has been found by Jonsson near the so-called »Havn« (Svino) and by me in Vestmanhavn (Str.) where it grew under similar circumstances to that near Klaksvig, and likewise associated with numerous green algæ. This species has thus been found onry in the northern part of the Færoes and must probably have been carried thither by the polar current from off the east coast of leeland. As already pointed out by Rostrup (1. c. p. 1G) this seems to be its southernmost limit of dis- tribution. Order DELESSERIACEAE. NITOPHYLLUM Grev. 32. N. laceratum (Gm.) Grev. ,1. Agardh, Spec. Alg., Vol. 3, p. 409; Le Jolis, Alg. mar. de Cherb., p. 136. This alga, which is beyond doubt very rare in the Færoes, was found somewhat below low-water mark in a cave near Kvivig, occurring here in small pink patches on Lithothamnion polymorphum and Corallina officinalis and atlaching itself to these algæ by menus of its numerous rhizoids. It is probably this form which Crouan (Florule du Finistére, p. 153) cailed Nitophyllum reptans, as pointed out by Le Jolis (1. c). 369 Some precisely similar specimens in mv herbarium collected by Lange near Malaga were referred to this species by .1. Agardh. who has determined Lange's collections of Algæ from Spain. The Færoese specimens were small, at the most a few cm. in circumference, and sterile. Found only on Str. : Kvivig (!). DELESSERIA Lamour. 33. D. alata (Huds.) Lamour. Kjellm., NM. p. 172 (134); Lyngh., 1. c. p. 8. There occurs along the coasts of the Færoes hoth a rather broad form and a more narrow form like le Jolis's no. 245, but they merge into one another by a series of very closely connected inter- mediate forms. I have not seen specimens referable to D. angn- stissima. This species generally occurs in the sublittoral zone, but is also common near low-water mark, especially in rock clefts and in caves, where it mav often be seen at ebb-tide forming extensive coverings on the rocks. It is also met with here and there in tide-pools at low-levels. Between tide -marks the specimens are small, only a few centimetres high, as Kjell man (1. c.) savs is the case also with those growing in similar localities in the north of Norway; but in the sublittoral zone they are much larger, up to about 20 centimetres long. It grows both in exposed and sheltered localities on rocky and stony bottoms as well as epiphytic especially on Laminaria hyperborea. Tetraspore-bearing specimens occurred in April, May and Oc- tober, and cystocarpic in May, June, July (a specimen in Lyng- bye's Herbarium), October and November. Kjellman has not found fruit-bearing piants in the Arctic regions, but says that in Sweden the piants bear tetraspores during winter (December and January); and Areschoug says that it bears fruit in Bohuslån in March and April. This species is very common along the Færoese coasts as already noted by Lyngbye (l.c. p.8), who writes: — »ad Jittora Færoensia copiose«. It was first recorded by Landt, l.c. p. 231. 34. D. sinuosa (Good. et Woodw.) Lamour. Kjellm., N. I., p. 175 (136); Lyngb., 1. c. p. 7. A variable plant, the leaves being sometimes almost entire, 370 sometimes deeply sinuate. The greater part of the specimens col- lected belongs to f. typica; f. lingulata was met with in several of the fjords, and specimens from quiet waters were on the whole inclined to be prolific. A few of the specimens approached f. quercifolia. It is snhlittoral, and while it occnrs at the water's edge in caves and ravines dnring ebb-tide, it also grows lnxuriantly at a depth of 25 fathoms. It is met with both in exposed and sheltered localities, and is common on rocky and stony bottoms as well as epiphytic on Laminaria-species, especially L. hyperborea. The plant seems to be able to form new shoots all the year ronnd, but most abundantly during spring. Young piants have been gathered in December. Tetrasporic piants were found in May, June, July, August, October, November and December and were common altogether, while those bearing cystocarps were rarer, and were found only in May, July (a specimen in Lyngbye's Herbarium) and November. This corresponds to Kjellman 's (1. c. p. 177 [138]) statement that this species appears to bear reproductive organs all the year round. This species is very common as already mentioned by Lyngbye (1. c. p. 8): - »Ad stipitem Laminariæ digitatæ ad littora Færoensia copiose«. 35. D. sanguinea (L.) Lam. Hydrolapathum sanguineum (L.) Stackh. Kjellm., N. I., p. 184 (143); Delesseria sanguinea Lyngb., 1. c. p. 7. Generally found growing in the sublittoral zone, but is also met with in the littoral in caves and grottoes at extreme low-water mark where it may be Lefl uncovered for a shorter time by the spring tide, and in such a case in exposed piaces the leaves are often considerably torn. It is one of the algæ which occurs at the greatest depths; thus I have gathered specimens from a depth of 25 fathoms -- consequently, from Kjell mans »elittoral« zone. It is a common epiphyte especially on Laminaria hyperborea, but also grows frequenlly on rocky, stony and shelly bottoms. Found on exposed as well as sheltered shores. Judging from the material in band the plant appears to give out new shoots early in spring, vigorous piants being collected late in April while in those gathered late in October the branches were more or less naked. Almost all the specimens I had for examination were sterile. A single specimen collected late in October in Kvanne- 371 sund by Helgi Jonsson had very young cystocarps on the leaf- less stems, another collected V12 97 at Trangisvaag had quantities of small tetrasporic leaves, which clearly iridicates that the piants fructify during the winter months, as is also the case with those growing along the Danish shores. Tliis species is very common, as already mentioned by Lyngbye (1. c. p. 8): — »Ad insulas Færoenses copiose«. It w;is first recorded by Landt, 1. c. p. 231. Order RHODOMELACEAE. LAURENCIA Lamour. 30. L. pinnatifida (Gmel.) Lamour. J. Ag., Spec. Alg., Vol. 3, p. 656. Found in the littoral zone hoth on the dpen sea-shore closely covering the hottom of a rock -pool situated at a high level, and also in a sheltered locality on large stones near low-water mark. I have not seen fructifying specimens, nor have I come across it growing epiphytically as it may often be found doing on the Danish coasts. It seems to be very rare along the coasts of the Færoes. Rostrup, who first found it, writes: — nve found it sparingly on the coast of Stromo«. I found it on the east coast of Stromo, between Thorshavn and Hojvig, in a large rock-pool situated at a high level, and on Sydero at Tværaa near the snore on stones — where it was first found by Ostenfeld — , and at Ordevig. POLYSIPHONIA Grev. 37. P. urceolata (Lightf.) Grev. J. Ag., Spec. Alg., Vol. 2, pars 3, p. 970. Ltgpica, Kjellm., N. I., p. 153 (118). f. roseola, Ag. J. Ag., 1. c. p.971. This is a very common species both of the littoral and sub- littoral zone. In the littoral zone it generally grows on rocks and stones near low-water mark, often forming liere close societies of wide extent, e. g. in the Cora//zna-belt. In the sublittoral zone it also frequently occurs as an epiphyte especially on the stems of Lami- naria hyperborea, where f. roseola is the most common. This species may be met with down to a depth of at least 10 fathoms; it prefers exposed coasts, but is also to be found in bays and fjords. Judging from the material in hånd this species appears to attain to its highest development during summer; in spring it is small. Botany of the Færoes. 24 372 Tetraspore -bearing piants were found in May and June, cysto- carpic in April, June and July. This species is extremely common along the coasts of the Færoes; f. roseola is also fairly common; the latter appears to prefer somewhat sheltered localities in the interior of fjords, where it occurs as a rathcr common epiphyte on different La/m'naWa-species. According to Agardh, 1. c. p. 972, Lyngbye's Hutchinsia stricta Ag. (Hydrophyt., p. 115) which he reports from the Færoes: — »Ad insulas Færoenses haud frecpiens«, is this form; but how far his material - which is Polysiphonia urceolata -- is formå roseola I am not prepared to say, though his figure in tab. 36 appears to belong to this form. P. lepadicola (Lyngb.) J. Ag., Spec. Alg., Vol. 2, p.945; Hutchin- sia lepadicola Lyngb. 1. c. p. 113. On examining the specimens in Lyngbye's Herbarium they proved to be creeping filaments of /}. urceolata; the latter (which commonly occur on Balanus) differing from the erect filaments in appearance induced Lyngbye to regard them as a distinct species. I myself have gathered specimens, e. g. near Kvivig, which are quite like Lyngbye's, but they naturally occurred in all stages of development, ranging from »P. lepadicola« to well-developed P. urceolata. 38. P. violacea (Roth) Grev. Found epiphytic on Lamiuaria in shallow water. Cystocarp- bearing specimens occurred in May. Very rare along the Færoes: —Syd.: Trangisvaag (Ostenfeld, H. S., according to the latter epiphytic on Lamiuaria saccharina). 39. P. elongata (Huds.) Harv. Kjellm., N. I., p. 158 (122). A sublittoral species and found down to a depth of 10 fathoms. It occurs on stones and shells as well as epiphytic on other algæ, e. g. on the stems of Lamiuaria hyperborea. It has been found both in sheltered and exposed localities. Tetrasporic piants occurred in March, May, June and July, those bearing cystocarps in December. It gives out new shoots in spring, thus specimens collected at Trangisvaag in March had new shoots and leaves; autumn and winter specimens are almost destitute of leaves and new shoots. This species, which lins nol previously been reported from the Færoes, was, however, already found there by Mr. Randropp, but the specimens which he sent to Dr. Rostrup were erroneously named Rhodomela subfusca, f. flaccida (Hostrup, l. c. p. 82). This is nol a com- mon species in the Færoes, but al a l'ew piaces, e. g. Vaagfjord, it occurs abundantly. 373 Str.: Gliversnæs !), Kalbakfjord II.J); Ost.: Glibre and Molen (!); Kolter !; Syd.: Kvalbo !), Trangisvaag (Ostenfeld, II. I., Vaagfjord (H. J.). 40. P. Brodiæi (Dillw.) Grev. Kjellm., N. I., p. 156 (120); Hut- chinsia Brodiæi Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 100. The specimens ironi niv collections generally correspond in the main with the Færoese examples which are to be found in Lyng- bye's Herbarium, l)nt they do not agree exactly with his figure (I. c. tab. 33) which Kjell man qnotes under formå Lyngbyei Kjellm. A t'ew examples, e. g. from Kollefjord, agree fairly well with Are- schoug's Exsicc. , No. 64; others again are small and somewhat suggest Kutzing's figure in Tab. Phyc, Vol. 14, tab. 1. This species belongs to the littoral zone and occurs near low- water mark often in rock-pools. It is met with both on much ex- posed coasts and in sheltered localities. It grows on rocks and often gregariously in fairly large quantities. This speeies is rather widely distributed along the eoasts of the Færoes as it has been found in the following loealities: — Ost.: Molen ! , Ejde H. S.;!), Næs Lyngb., H. S.); Str.: Kvivig !, Kollefjord H. S.. !), Thorshavn (H. J.); St. Dimon (!); Syd.: Kvalbo Ejde (H. S.), Trangisvaag (Ostenfeld,!). 41. P. atrorubescens (Dillw.) Grev. J. Ag., Spec. Alg., Vol. 2, pars 3, p. 1035; Greville, Scottish Cryptogamic Flora, Vol. IV, tab. 210; Hutchinsia atrorubescens Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 110. Sublittoral. The specimens few in number and sterile. They occurred amongst some other Polysiphonia-species from Trangisvaag- fjord which were gathered by Ostenfeld from a depth of some 3 — 4 fathoms in a plaice net. Lyngbye (1. c. p. 110) reports this species as oeeurring along the eoasts of the Færoes, but no specimens of it are to be found in his herbarium. Agardh 4. c. p. 1037) also mentions not having seen any specimens gathered by Lyngbye and hence he is of opinion that the species mentioned by the latter can hardly be the one in question. but as this has now been actually found in the Færoes it is xevx possible that it was already discovered by Lyngbye. As Lyngbye's Herbarium contains no specimens of his Hut- chinsia badia, reported in Hydrophyt., p. 114, no opinion can be formed as to what it really is. 42. P. nigrescens (Huds.) Harv. Kjellm., N. I., p. 102 (126); Hut- chinsia nigrescens Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 109. 21* 374 Found in shallow as well as deep water, and both along shel- tered and exposed coasts. At the head of Kalbakfjord it was found attached to stones in quite shallow water which had a strong ad- mixture of fresh water. Fructifying specimens have not been met with. This species seems to be rather rare along the Færoese coasts. Lj^ng- bye (Hydrophy t. , p. 109: »Habitat ad insulas Færoenses«) reports it from the Færoes, but no Færoese specimens of it are to be found in his herbarium. Rostrup writes with reference to it »a few specimens only were found.« I have seen specimens from: — Str.: Head of Kalbakfjord (!) , Gli- versnæs(I); Ost.: Ore(!); Syd.: Trangisvaag (Ostenfeld). 43. P. fastigiata (Roth) Grev. Kjellm., N. I., p. 159 (123); Hut- chinsia fastigiata Lyngb., 1. c. p. 108. Found in the littoral zone, almost exelusively on Ascophyllum nodosum ; but Lyngbye says that in a few rare instances he found it growing also on Fucus vesiculosus and on rocks. Tetraspore- bearing specimens were found in June and July, cystocarpic in July and August. Its dense, bushy growth affords a favourable habitat for numerous small epiphytes, especially Chantransia secun- data and crusts of Dermocarpa. It is perennial and has been found with young shoots in the beginning of March. This species is common everywhere where Ascophyllum is met with, i. e. in somewhat sheltered and perfectly quiet piaces. PTEROSIPHONIA Fkbg. 44. P. parasitica (Huds.) Fkbg. Die Rhodomelaceen des Golfes von Neapel, p. 265; Kjellm., N. I., p. 152 (117); Hutchinsia Mostingii Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 116, tab. 36. Found along exposed coasts in the sublittoral zone and espe- cially abundant in caves in shallow water where at low tide it may easily be gathered in a hand-dredge at a deplh of about one fathom. Grows liere on the vertical faces of rocks and found attached either to the rock itself or to shells and Lithothamnion polymorphum, often associated with Lomentaria clavellosa, Plocamium coccineum, Deles- seria sinaosa and other Florideæ. In Trangisvaagfjord Jonsson found a specimen growing at- tached to a crab which he dredged from a depth of 10 fathoms. This species is hardly rare along the exposed coasts of the Færoes. Found in the following piaces: — Str.: Kvivig (Lyngb., ! in caves); Ost.: Molen Lyngb.,!); Vaago: cave on the north side(!), cave opposite Kvivig ! .; St. Dimon ! ; Syd.: Kvalbo Ejde (H. S.), Trangisvaagfjord II. .1. . 375 RHODOMELA (Ag.) J. G. Ag. 45. Rh. lycopodioides (L.) Ag. Kjellm., N. I., p. 139 (107); Gigar- tina lycopodioides Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 45. f. typica Kjellm., 1. c. Most of the Færoese specimens bear a slight resemblance to subforma compacta Kjellm., a few approach somewhat to subforma laxa Kjellm. This species occurs both in the littoral zone, near low-water mark, and in the sublittoral, in shallow water. It grows on rocks and stones and sometimes in rock -pools. It is found along open sea-shores as well as in sheltered localities in the interior of fjords, and in narrow sounds, and grows in quite shallow water where the tide is not felt. Tetrasporic specimens were found in May and June. This species, which was already found by Landt (1. c. p. 229), is fairly common along the coasts of the Færoes. I think Gigartina subfusca (3 racemosa Lyngb. (Hydrophyt., p. 47), which Lyngbye reports from the Færoes ought to be referred to this species. The specimen in his herbarium, which is from Kvalbo, is only a small fragment, but is noteworthy on account of its copious branching, which, in connection with its numerous tetraspores, gives it a different appearance. 46. Rh. subfusca (Woodw.) Ag., J. Ag., Spec. Alg., Vol. II, p. 883. Though I am of opinion that it is hardly possible to distinguish the present species from the preceding I have followed Kjell mans definition of species (cfr. N. I., pp. 147 — 8 (113)) and referred just a few specimens to this species. The transverse section of some gathered at Tværaa showed that the central large-celled tissue was sharply defined from the peripheral small-celled tissue and thus agreed with Kjellm an 's fig. 4, tab. 8, so that they cannot be Rh. virgata; The small branches on the longer ones were distinctly subulate and not fusiformed as Kjell man says is the case in Rhodomela lycopodioides. While these characters agree fairly well with Rh. subfusca, the specimens (from Tværaa) referred to this species differ from it in being dark-red and not black as Kjell man mentions being the case in Rh. subfusca. In habit the piants resembled fairly closely specimens of Rh. subfusca gathered by Le Jolis near Cher- bourg. Beyond these specimens I have referred only a few to this species laying more particular stress on their outer habit; but as 376 I said before I believe there are hardly any specially marked diffe- rences between this species and the preceding 1. This species occurs in the littoral zone, but most commonly in shallow water and grows usually on stones and shells. I have come across cystocarpic piants in April and November. Harveyella mirabilis occurs on it as a parasite. Found at the following piaces: — Syd.: Tværaa (!), Vaagfjord (H. J.)~; Kun 6 (H. J.). For Rhodomela sabfusca (3 racemosa Lyngb. see above under Rhodom. lycopodioides. Under Rhodomela sabfusca Rostrup (1. c. p. 82; writes »Mr. Ran- dropp sent us specimens of f. flaccida.* But the only specimen of this form whieh is preserved in Dr. Rostrup's private collection does not belong to this species, but is a well-developed specimen of Polysiphonia eloagata. ODONTHALIA Lyngb. 47. O. dentata (L.) Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 9; Kjellm. , N. I., p. 138 (105). This is a sublittoral species and is common both in the open sea and in the interior of fjords. It grows on rocky and stony bottoms as also epiphytic especially on Laminaria hyperborea. Gene- rally it occurs dispersed, but it may also be found growing gre- gariously in small patches. Cystocarp-bearing specimens were found in May and December; tetrasporic in April, May and June. In the Arctic Sea Kjellman found tetraspore-bearing specimens in August, and Ruprecht (Alg. Och., p. 212) mentions having found similar specimens in June. Some specimens collected in August in Altenfjord (Kjellman, 1. c. p. 10(5) showed signs of cystocarps. This species seems thus to grow much in the same way around the Færoes as in the Arctic Sea. Along the English coasts it bears reproductive organs in the winter months. In the Færoes vigorous young shoots occurred in April, May and June. This species is very common along the Fa^roese coasts as already mentioned by Lyngbye (1. c.): — »Ad insulas Færoenses copiose.« It is recorded by Landt, 1. c. p. 231. 1 Since writing the above Falkenberg has published his large Monograph on the Hhodomelaceæ in whieli he (p. 593) reports /». virgata and li. lycopodioides as synonymous with /{/?. subfusca, but piaces a? against this statement. 377 Order CERAMIACEAE. GRIFFITHSIA C. Agardh. 48. G. setacea (Eli.) Ag. In July 1899 I found in Trangisvaagfjord opposite Tværaa (Syd.) in abont 10 fathoras of water a large vigorous, but sterile speeimen, associated with other Florideæ. Landl 1. c. p. 233 reports Conferva (Griffithsid) corallina Lightf.) Ag. Ironi the Færoes, but as this species has not been found since it is possible tliat it was a confusion with the above-mentioned species. CALLITHAMNION Lyngb. 49. C. scopulorum Ag. C. Agardh, Species Algarum, Vol. II, p. 166; J. Ag., Spec. Alg., Vol. 2, pars 1, p. 47; Callithamnion roseum § tenue Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 126, tab. 39. In order to ascertain the relationship between this species and C. roseum with which I at first thought it to be most closely allied, I compared my material of C. scopulorum — which exactly agrees with Lyngbyes material ol' what he calls Callithamnion roseum (3 tenue with the specimens labelled C. roseum in the Herbarium of the Botanical Museum in Copenhagen, especially with No. 162 in Le Jolis's Alg. mar. de Cherbourg and No. 703 in Phykotheka univer- salis, and I came to the conclusion that while my material bore no great resemblance to the former it approached closely to the latter. In faet these two algæ which are here given under one name diller so widely from each other, even on a cursory examination that one is led to suppose that there must have been a confusion of two distinct species ; and as out museum with regard to these species is not rich in specimens for comparison, and more particularly as it does not contain specimens, excepting Le Jolis's, on the determinations of which I could quite rely I wrote to Dr. E. Bornet of Paris for bis opinion and cannot do better than quote what he very kindly writes tome: — »Je n'ai jamais vu d'échantillon authentique de Ceramium roseum Roth, Catalecta botanica, II, p. 183, et je ne saurais, d'aprés la description, reconnaitre l'espéce, dont il s'agit. Mais si vous consultez l'English Botany, tab. 966 et Dillwyn, p. 17, vous verrez que c'est Roth lui-méme qui anommé les exemplaires récoltés par Sowerby et qui sont représentés dans ces deux ouvrages. Or Dillwyn mentionne la particularité suivante: »branches are repeatedly sub- divised, so that as they approach the summits, they have a very 378 clustered appearance.« C'est lå un caractére bien marqué du C. roscum de Harvey, Agardh etc. et qui est du å ce que les pinnules ne sont pas distiques et qu'elles regardent le rachis par leur face plane, au lieu que, dans les C. Hooked, polyspermum et scopulorum, ils le regardent par la tranche. Vous trouverez des échantillons de la plante que je regarde comme le veritable C. ro- seum (Roth.) Harv. dans les exsiccata suivants: Wyatt, Alg. Danmon. no. 44; Cooke, Collect. of Brit. Seaw. no. 261 ; Hohenacker, Alg. mar. sicc. no. 123 et 530; Le Jolis, Alg. mar. de Cherb. no. 162; Crouan, Alg. mar. Finist. no. 135; Lloyd, Alg. mar. de l'ouest de la France, no. 213. L'échantillon no. 703 du Phykotheka universalis n'est pas le Call. roseum compris dans le sens de (Roth) Harvey. C'est le C. polyspermum. La méme erreur a été commise par Juergens, Alg. aquat., Dec. I, no. 9. S'il est aisé de distinguer le Call. polyspermum du C. roseum, il l'est beaucoup moins de le separer du C. scopulorum, et c'est sous ce dernier nom qu'on le désignait en France avant la publi- cation du Phycologia britannica. Témoin: Chauvin, Alg. Norm. no. 84; Hohenacker, Alg. mar. sicc. no. 120; Crouan, Alg. mar. Finist., no. 146; Lloyd, Alg. de l'ouest de la France, no. 52. J'ai un trop petit nombre d'exemplaires du Call. scopulorum pour savoir dans quelles limites il varie et s'il ne passe point par des gradations insensibles au C. polyspermum. Les differences que j'ai cru aperce- voir entre les deux espéces se réduisent a deux. Le C. scopulorum est une plante en gazons denses, peu élevés et ses filaments sont plus fins et moins raides que ceux du C. polyspermum. Ce dernier est un peu cortiqué å la base.« So far Dr. E. Bornet. According to him, C. scopulorum ought perhaps most properly to be regarded as a variety of C. polysper- mum, but I have preferred to keep it up as a species, partly on account of my not having much material of C. polyspermum for comparison, and partly because, as Dr. Bornet also points out, there is at any rate some difference to be traced between them. Thus C. scopulorum (lig. 56) is of a much smaller and more slender habit, the branches at the base, where they are thiekesl, being some 60 to 80^, very rarely 100 /<, while the Færoése speci- mens of C. polyspermum were about 135 ,u, and a French specimen which I measured had a breadth of some 250 (a. Moreover, C. scopu- lorum is quite destitute of cortical cells while these occur even 379 fairly high up on the branches of C. pohjspermam. Lastly, the habit of C. scopu.loru.rn is very constant and easy of recognition - it is ahvays small and never attains to the size of C. polyspermum, and the colour also is different. The accompanying ligures (figs. 56, 57) show different parts of the plant. The erect filaments start in a more or less'lprostrate base (fig. 57) and from this spring numerous vigorous rhizoids by Fig. 56. Callithamnion scopulorum Ag. Portions of branches with tetraspores. Fig. a 50 : 1. Fig. b 75 : 1. means of which the plant attaches itself to the rocks. Such vigo- rous rhizoids also spring from the long branches proceeding from the basal part of the plant attaching these also in turn to the rocks so that wiien they become in some way disengaged from the mother plant they turn into independant piants, and this also accounts for their densely tufted growth. In the lower part of the filaments the cells are short, but those higher up are longer and generally bear only short branches which proceed from the upper part of the cells. These short branches are sometimes naked, but as a rule 380 they bear other branches and then , with a few rare exceptions, always turn their edges towards the mother plant. The top cell is divided by oblique walls as Reinke also points out in his textbook. The tetraspores are elustered and are borne on the lateral branches of the lst and 2nd order, or sometimes first on those of the 3rd order. This is a species of the littoral zone and occurs at half-tide level where it grows preferably in rock-crevices and caves, but also on vertical rock faces exposed to the open sea. It can grow in the Fig. 57. Callitluimnion scoimlorum Ag. Basal portions of long branches showing rhizoids. 60: 1. most exposed piaces, there forming small, low, dense tufts often associated with Isthmoplea sphærophora and Rhodochorton Rothii. Tetraspore-bearing piants were found in April, May, June, .lu ly and August, and cystocarpic in June. This species is common along the exposed coasts of the Færoes, as already mentioned by Lyngbj'e, 1. c.: -- »ad scopulos maritimos præserlini abruptos insularum Færoensium in summo refluxus limite, copiosissime.« It has been gathered ;it the following piaces: — Str. : Kvivig (in caves!), Hojvig (Lyngbye, !), Arge (!), Thorshavn (!) ; Vaago: North side (in caves!), oposite Kvivig (in caves!); Myggenæs: east side (on steep rock faces!); St. Dimon: (on steep rock faces!); San do: Troldhoved (!) Syd.: Trangisvaagfjord (in caves!), Kval bo (Lyngb.), Famien (Lyngb.). Ost.: Næs (Lyngb.). 381 50. C. polyspermum (Bonnem.) Ag. Kjellm., N. I., p. 223 (177. I have only felt justified in referring a few specimens collected from Trangisvaagfjord by Ho s en vinge to this species. These diller Ironi Callith. scopulorum in their darker colour, their some- what larger size, and more particularly in their being fairly rich in cortical cells; for further details I must refer to the above men- tioned species. Kjellman (Le.) points out that the Nordland spe- cimens resemble K i'itzing's figure (Tab. Phyc. 11, tab. 97), but not Harveys ligure in Phycol. Brit. pi. 231 ; and this is also the case with the Færoese specimens. II is presumably a lilloral species, and it had tetraspores in May. Found only near Tværaa in Trangisvaagfjord Syd. by L. K. Rosen- vinge. Callithamnion lanuginosum Lyngh., Hydrophyt., p. 130, which according to Lyngbye has been found: »ad insulas Færoenses in Hutchinsia urceolata aliisque parasitice, raro« seems to be young specimens of Chantransia virgatala. There are, however, only a very few fragmentary pieces of it in Lyngbye' s Herbarium, and on the label Lyngbye accounts for its scarcity as follows: »Abun- dabat, sed exemplaria perierunt«. According to Rostrup (l.c. p.85) it is identical with C. Dawiesii. 51. C. arbuscula (Dillw.) Lyngb. Hydrophyt., p. 123; Kjellm., N. L, p. 224 (178); Phlebothamnion faroense Kiitz., Tab. phycol., Vol. 14, tab. 83. This is decidedly a littoral species and grows at about half- tide level. It prefers much exposed coasts, where it occurs grega- riously more particularly on sharply inclined or vertical faces of rocks which are lefl dry at ebb-tide. I have not come across il in rock-pools, which is doubtless to be explained by the faet that it cannot thrive unless left dry at intervals. Though it is generally met with on open faces of rocks fully exposed to the light it may also be found growing rather far into caves, but in the latter case it is more poorly developed, the branches being more slender and of a paler red, while the branches of those growing in broad daylight are of a deep reddish-brown colour. Found bearing tetraspores in May, June, July, and November, antheridia in June, and cystocarps in June and November. The most robust examples occur during the summer months; the au- tumn and winter specimens which I have had for examination 382 looked rather poor, the main branches being more or less naked and new branches few in number. This partly corresponds to Kleen's report (1. c. p. 21) that it »Begins to appear in the begin- ning of Jnly«; but how far the Færoese algæ are annual, as Kjell- man — according to Kleen — reports being the case with those oc- curring at Nordland, I am not capable of deciding, I am most in- clined to think that the basal part of the plant survives the winter and gives out new shoots. Regarding its habitat Lyngbye writes: — »Habitat ad insulas Færo- enses in inferiore refluxus limite scopulis adnascens, copiose«; this is quite true as it is very common on all the shores of the Færoes which are exposed to the open sea. The following list of localities will show how commonly it occurs: — Str.: Velbestad (!), Kvivig (Lyngb.,!), Hojvig (!); Ost.: Gjov (!), Ejde (!), Eldevig (Lyngb.) ; Bordo: Klaksvig (H.J.) ; Vid.: Vi derej de (!), Vedvig (H.J); S vin 6 (H.J.,!); Vaago: Midvaag (!), north side (!); Myggenæs (!); Sando: Troldhoved f!); St. Dimon (!); Syd.: south-east coast (!), Vaags Ejde (!), Trangisvaagfjord (!), Frodebo (!). 52. C. granulatum (Duel.) Ag. In a collection of Callithamnion arbuscula gathered by H.Jons- son was found a small Callithamnion which differed from the others in habit. By looking through the Ca//z7/iammon -material preserved in Lyngbye's Herbarium I found another example of the same species. Dr. Bornet, to whom I sent a few specimens, kindly tells me that he thinks they are identical with Callithamnion granulatum. To judge from its few habitats along the Færoes the species must occur there between tide-marks, perhaps associated with Calli- thamnium arbuscula and like the latter on exposed coasts. Found bearing tetraspores in August and cystocarps and antheridia in November. This species, which is presumably rare along the Færoes, has hitherto been found only at the following piaces: — Svind: (H.J.); Ost.: Kidevig at the entrance to Fundingfjord (Lyngb.). 53. C. copymbosum (Smith) Lyngb. var. amphicarpa Thur. Le Jolis, Liste, p. 112; Thuret et Bornet, Etudes phycologiques, p. 67, tab. 34. In a collection of algæ from Ore (Ost.) a few specimens of a small gracefu] Callithamnion were found intermixed amongst several other algæ; it is remarkable for the facl that the same plant bears both cystocarps and antheridia as well as tetraspores. On account 383 of this peculiarity the Færoese specimens agreed with C. corgmbosum var. amphicarpa, Thur., to which variety they also in other respects bear a ralher close resemblance. But as I was nol quite sure that the Færoese spe- cimens could he placed under var. amphi- carpa Thur. I sent an example of the Færoese plant to Dr. Bornet who very kindly lells me that he is of opinion that it approaches closely to the variety in ques- tion, the only difference being that the Færoese specimen has short-slalked as well as sessile tetraspores intennixed on the same plant, while the Cherbourg specimens — according to Dr. Bornet — has only sessile sporangia. But Dr. Bornet adds: — »Ce caractere n'a peut-étre pas une grande valeur.« I therefore refer the Færoese spe- cimens to Thuret's variety. Fig. 58 shows a branch of the plant bearing young cysto- carps as well as stalked and sessile tetra- spores. Found in June as an epiphyte in about 8 fathoms of water near Ore on Ost. (!). As pointed out by Rostrup (1. c. p. 85), Hornemann in Dansk oeonomisk Plantelære, second edition, vol. 2, p. 679 reports Callithamnion eorijmbosum from the Færoes, and a specimen labelled in Hornemann's handwriting >e Færoe« also exists in the museum in Copenhagen. Horne- mann, however, does not give his authority for this report, and as Lyngbye does not mention this species in Hydrophyt. the above report is probably due to a confusion. Fig. 58. Callithamnion uranulatum (Duel.) Ag. var. amphicarpa Thur. Portion of branch with tetraspores and young cystocarps. 70 : 1. PLUMARIA (Stackh.) Schmitz. 54. PI. elegans (Bonnem.) Schmitz. Ptilota elegans Bonnem., Kjellm., N. I., p. 217 (172). This is a littoral species and grows on exposed coasts in caves and dark rock-clefts , often associated with Delesseria alata , Calli- thamnion scopulorum and other Florideæ. It grows gregariously and often occurs as fairly large, pure societies somewhat above low-water mark, appearing at ebb-tide as a covering of a dark, brownish-red colour clinging tightly to the rock. The specimens I examined had only borne cystocarps, they occurred in May and 384 June. Kjell man (1. c.) savs that in the Norwegian Polar Sea it bears cystocarps in August. This species does not appear to be very comnion along the eoasts of the Færoes. I found it at the following piaces: — Str. : Kvivig (!); Vaago: opposite Kvivig (!); St. Di mon (!); Syd.: Kvalbo !). PTILOTA C. Agardh. 55. Pt. pectinata (Gunn.) Kjellm., N. I., p. 219 (174); Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 790; Ptilota plumosa, var. asplenioides Lyngb., Hydrophyt. p. 38. I have found some examples of this species, most commonly small ones, which are undoubtedly typical Pt. pectinata; usually this species is easily distinguishable from Pt. plumosa, as Rosen- vinge 1. c. p.790 points out in the case of the Greenland specimens. Rut a single example of the Færoese specimens appeared to he intermediate between this species and Pt. plumosa though most closely related to the latter. Owing to the occurrence of such intermediate forms, Go bi disputes the specific value of Pt. pectinata and Kjell man also mentions having found some intermediate forms, but is of opinion that the species ought to be retained. The material at my disposal was too scanty to allow me to form any defmite opinion on this point. This species belongs to the sublittoral zone, and has been found down to a depth of more than 20 fathoms, but in caves it may be met with in very shallow vater. It is found both epiphytic and growing on rocks, on exposed coast as well as in quiet piaces. Cystocarp-bearing piants were found in June, July and August which agrees with what is the case in Nordland (Kleen, l.c.p.20). This species is presumably rare along the Færoese eoasts. Bord 6: Haraldssund !); Str.: Kalbakfjord (!); Kvivig (! , Thorshavn (Lyngb.), Gli- versnæs (!). As nientioned above, this species was already found by Lyngbye, as the material of Ptilota plumosa var. asplenioides Ag. (Hydrophyt., p. 38) preserved in his herbarium turned out on examination to be small specimens of this species. In Rostrup' S list it is ealled Pt. serrala Kid/.. (1. c. p. 84), this determination being probably due to J. Agardh. Si mm o n s (Le. p. 264) is therefore wrong in saying that it ought to disappear from the list of the Færoese algæ, and also in accusing Lyngbye with some confusion with regard to his var. (3 asplenioides. which Lyngbye very correctly reports both from Greenland and the Færoes. 385 56. Pt. plumosa (L.) Ag. Kjellm., N. I., p. 218 (173); Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 38. This is generally a sublitloral species and has been found down to a depth of some 20 — 25 fathoms, but it is also met with near low-water mark in caves and rock-pools growing attached to rocks and stones. It seems to prefer exposed coasts, but mav also be found in fjords in sheltered localities. Il occurs most frequently as an epiphyte especially on the stems ol Laminaria hyperborea, of Nvhich plant il is a characteristic epiphyte, and on which it grows luxuriantly. Tetraspore-bearing piants were found from May to November, cystocarpic in May, June, August, October and December. This is a very common species of the Færoese coasts, as already aoted by Lyngbye Le), who writes: — »Ad insulas Færoenses in stipite Laminariæ digitatæ copiose . It was lirst reported by Landt, Le. p. 231. ANTITHAMNION Nagl. 57. A. floccosum (Miill.) Kleen, Nordl. Alg., p. 21 ; Kjellm., N. I., p. 225 (179): Conferva floccosa Muller, whose figure in Flora Danica, tab. 828, lig. 1, is, however, not very good; the specimens from the Færoes come near to Harveys ligure in Phycol. Brit., tab. 81 ; Calli- tham'nion Plumula 0 pusilla Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 127, tab. 39. The Færoese form must be referred to var. atlantica J. Ag. (Spec. Alg. vol. III, p. 22) because the lesser branches on the lower part of the main branch are generally shorter than the articulation whence they proceed, and I only exceptionally found them as long or somewhat longer. I mav add that this species appears to rae a decidedly good one, quite distinct from A. Plumula (cfr. Rosen- vinge, Gronl. Havalg., p. 789). Along the coasts of the Færoes it is most commonly mel with in the littoral zone or in the upper part of the sublitloral, and it grows both on exposed and sheltered coasts, but on the latter it appears to be of more luxuriant growth, the specimens I found on sheltered coasts being up to t) cm. long, while those from exposed localities — from between tide-marks where they grew epiphytic on Lithothamnion — were only 1—2 cm. long, aboul the size of Callithamnion scopulorum. Lyngbye found it in the sublitloral zone, the Callithamnion scopulorum (i pusilla recorded by him in Hydrophyt., p. 127, being this species, as has been proved by exa- 386 mining the specimens in his herbarium. With regard to its habitat Lyngbye writes: — »Ad insulas Færoenses in stipite Laminariæ digitatæ inter cæspites Callithamnii Rothii inveni, rarius«. The greater part of the specimens which I examined were sterile, in June only I found specimens bearing ripe tetraspores. Does not appear to be common. Ost.: Fuglefjord (!), Molen (!); Str.: Between Thorshavn and Hojvig (Lyngb.); San do: Skopen (!); Syd.: Tran- gisvaag (Rosenvinge). 58. A. Plumula (Ellis) Thur. Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 786; Callithamnion Plumula Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 127. Main form. var. boreale Gobi, Algenfl. des weiss. Meeres, p. 47; Antitham- nion boreale Kjellm., N. I., p. 226 (180), tab. 16, figs. 2—3. f. corallina Rupr. Kjellm., N. I., tab. 16, figs. 4—5. Fig. 59. Antithamnion Plumula p boreale {.corallina (Rupr.). 60:1. Portion of a filament with tetraspores and glands. Besides the main form I found the above-mentioned variety and form; I follow Rosenvinge in regarding these as forms be- longing to this species. The specimens re ferred to var. boreale agreed fairly well with Kjellman's figures, but sometimes the tetrasporangia had a uni- cellular stalk. The specimens bear quantities of glands (cfr. Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 788). I have figured (fig. 59) a small portion of one of the specimens which are referred to formå corallina, as they differ somewhat from Kjellman's ligures; the branches of the second order were more rigid and graceful in form, like a feather, being set with branches of a third order which gradually shortened towards the apex. On the main branch between the two larger opposite 387 branches there olien occurred two smaller at the same height, but Ihev were always mueh smaller tban these, and also than the one in Kjt'llman's Hg. 4. The specimens bear quantities of glands (see fig. 59). In the Færoes the species occurs in the suhlittoral zone down to a deptb of aboul 2."> fathoms. It is met with along exposed coasts (especially the main form) as well as sheltered (especially var. boreale). Grows sometimes on stones and shells and sometimes epiphytic on differenl algæ. Tetraspores were found in May, June, July and November; antheridia in May and July. The main form occurred in the following localities: - Bordo: Haraldsund (! ; Ost.: Ore(!j; Str.: Gliversnæs !). — Var. boreale: — Ost.: Fuglefjord !), Ore !). F. corallina: — Str.: Thorshavn (!); Vid.: on the haptera of Laminaria hyperborea in 3—4 fathoms of water (H. J.). CERAMIUM Roth) Lyngb. 59. C. acanthonotum Carm. Kjellm., N. I., p. 21(> (171); Kleen, Nordl. Alg., p. 19; C. ciliatum Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 121 ex parte. Specimens bearing several spines on each articulation were frequently met with, which might consequently be referred to f. coronata (Kleen, 1. c. p. 19), but they nierged by such easy transi- lional stages into the main form - - both forms in faet occurring in the same tuft — that there is no reason to separate them as a distinet variety, as also pointed out by Kjellman, 1. c. It is a littoral species and grows at half-tide level, producing there a characteristic formation together with Callithamnion arbuscula. It prefers open shores and occurs in the most exposed localities, where it is left quite dry at ebb-tide, without, however, getting dried up, which would prove fatal to it on account of its somewhat delicate structure. It grows in small, irregularly-shaped clumps, rendered almost spongy in character by its numerous ramifications as well as by its spines, rhizoids and many epiphytes, especially Chantransia secundata, hthmoplea and Diatoms, and this enables it to absorb a quantity of water which it retains during ebb-tide, and which can be squeezed out of it as out of an ordinary sponge. It seldom occurs in rock-pools. Tetraspore-bearing piants were found in May, June, November, and December. Lyngb ve, 1. e., writes with reference to its habitat: »Habitat ad insnlas Færoenses in summo refluxus limite rupibus hic illic dense et copiose adnascens . It is very conimon in exposed localities and rather Botany of the Færoes. 25 3cS8 rare in sheltered. Lyng by e refers this species to C. ciliatum, and in his herbarium there are specimens of it from Thorshavn and Andefjord. Though he did not gather true C. ciliatum in the Færoes, yet his figure tab. 10) is undoubtedly this species, so it must have been drawn from the specimens of C. ciliatum from the Mediterranean which are also to be found in his herbarium. This species, which was first reported from the Færoes by Lyng- bye, is ver)' common there. 60. C. rubrum (Huds.) Ag. J. Ag., Spec. alg. II, p. 127 and III, p. 100; Kjellm., N. I., p. 214 (170); Foslie, The Norwegian forms of Ceramium, p. 14. f. genuina Kjellm. f. deenrrens .1. Ag. f. prolifera J. Ag. subf. secundata (Lyngb.). Ceramium secundatum Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 119. subf. prolifera (Lyngb.). f. corijmbifera (Bonnem.) J. Ag. Foslie, 1. c. p. 15, tab. 3, fig. 6. f. fasciculata (Bonnem.) J Ag. Foslie, 1. c. p. 15, tab. 3, figs. 2 — 3. Besides these, there were a few specimens which may possibly be referred to f. tenuis (Ag.) and f. pedicellata Duby. Ceramium rubrum is an extremely variable species, and of its numerous forms I think I have been able to distinguish the above- mentioned. Of these, formå deenrrens seems to be the most common; formå genuina is more rare. The characteristic subforma secundata (Lyngb.), of which there is an excellent drawing in Lyngby es Hydrophyt., tab. 37, A, is fairly common in the CoraZZma-belt. Along the coasts of the Færoes this species grows both in the littoral zone near low-water mark and in rock-pools, and in the sublittoral, and it occurs on fairly exposed coasts as well as shellered, perhaps more commonly on the latter. Usually it grows on rocky and stony bottoms, but it is also frequently found epiphytic on Fucus, Ascophyllum, Himanthalia, Laminaria and other algæ. Tetraspore-bearing piants were found from April to November and cyslocarpic from May to July, which agrees very well with what Kleen (l. c. p. 20) says is the case in Nordland. Tliis is an extremely common species of the Færoese coasts. Strangely enough, as pointed out by Rostrup, p. 84, Lyngbye does not record the main species from the Færoes; but there are several specimens of it in his herbarium. Thus, Lyngbye's specimens of Ceramium diaphanum Hydrophyt. p. 119), of which there are hvo in his herbarium, one from Thorshavn and one from Eide, are forms of the main species; the 389 Thorshavn specimen is a distinct formå decurrens. And further examination likewise proves his Ceramium diaphanum d vireseens (1. c. p. 120) to be small examples of C. rubrum bearing ripe tetraspores. Kither on account of these, or more probably on account of the plant having heen partly dried and killed by a longer intervening period of Iow-water (it having presumably grown between tide-marks) it has a greenish tinge, which induced Lyngbye to name il vireseens. There is. moreover, a small specimen in his herbarium which he himself determined as C. rubrum. Lyngbye's Herbarium contains several typical examples of subforma secundata, among these the original of his figure; one of the examples, which somewhat resembles rny specimens of f. pedicellata, Lyngbye has labelled: - forsan Cer. rnbri var. . RHODOCHORTON Någeli. 61. Rh. membranaceum Magnus. Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 794; Kuckuck, Beitråge zur Kenntnis der Meersalgen, 2. Uber Rhodo- chorton membranaceum Magnus, eine ehitinbewohnende Alge. This species grows in diflerent Brgozoa and Sertularia in the tubes of which the endozoic filaments spread themselves. The free erect filaments are 6—8 p thick. It has been found in the littoral zone as well as in the sublittoral down to depths of above 20 fathoms, and occurs both in exposed and sheltered localities. Tetrasporic specimens wére found in May, June and November. It is doubtless commonly distributed along the coasts of the Fær- oes: — Bor do: Haraldsund (H.J.); Str.: Kalbakfjord (!), Thorshavn (H.J.), Gliversnæs (!); Syd.: Trangisvaag (H. J.). 62. Rh. penicilliforme (Kjellm.) K. Rosenv., Algues mar. du Groenl., p. 66, (Annales d. sci. nat. VI s., t.19); Rhodochorlon mesocarpum (Carm.) Kjellm. var.(?) penicilliforme Kjellm. Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 792. This alga, which is fully de- scribed by Rosen vinge, 1. c, is especially characterized by its elegant basal disc (fig. 60) which has a marginal growth. The erect filaments were about 12 fi. It grows on Brgozoa and Ser- tularia, most commonly associated with Hh. membranaceum, and like the latter occurring both in the littoral and in the sublittoral zone, down to a depth of 20 fathoms. Fig. GO. Rhodochorton penicilliforme Kjellm. Iiosenv. Portion of basal disc. 350:1. 390 Tetrasporic specimens were found in June; piants from October to December consisted usually of the basal disc only, though sometimes they bad a very few erect branches. It has bcen found in the following localities: — Vid.: Kvannesund (H. J.); Bord 6: Haraldsund (H. J.); Str.: Kalbakfjord (!), Gliversnæs (!); Syd.: Trangisvaag (H. J.). 63. Rh. Rothii (Turt.) Nagl. Kjellm., N. I., p. 232 (185); Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg. p. 791 ; Callitbamnion Rotbii Lyngb., Hydropbyt. p. 129. f. typica. f. globosa Kjellm. Tbis plant, which is very common along the Færoese coasts, varies considerably according to its different habitats. It occurs as a short, perfectly dense, and evenly spreading crimson covering on rocks and stones between tide- marks: most frequently in narrow rock-clefts; on the walls in the interior of caves; and in openings between tumbled down blocks of rock »Ur«; f. typica is most common in such localities. Formå globosa is met with on vertical rock-faces in much exposed localities from bigh-water mark to several feet above it; it is especially common on vertical rock- faces in caves, and on rocks with a northern aspect, where it oc- curs in small, semiglobular, very solid bodies, about the size of a pea, often growing more or less together and forming small irre- gular crusts. Judging from the following description of Lyngbye (1. c.) he has undoubtedly observed tbis form: — »Caespites minu- tissimi, 2 — 3 lineas alti, maxime gregariæ, interdum ad latera rupium glomerulos durissimos formantes«. The lower part of the filaments were 17 \i thick, higher up they become thinner, about 11 \i. The cell-walls were often very thick, some I measured were as much as 3 i« thick. When Kjell man says that the lower articulations of f. globosa are almost as long as broad tbis does not correspond with the Færoese specimens, the articulations of the latter being, also at the base, twice or tbrice as long as broad. Formå typica varies considerably in thickness; generally il is about 10 fi thick, but I have often come across filaments measuring 15 to 20 fi; in a single small example the filaments bad even at- tained to a thickness of 29 p. It also appears to be a rule thai the higher the plant grows above sea-level, or in otber words, the more frequently and especially the longer il is left dry, the thicker the branches grow, as also the cell-walls. Rosen vinge (l.c.) reports 391 thai the filaments of the Greenland specimens also vary rather con- siderably with regard to thickness, never, however, exceeding 16 (*, but as mentioned above, the Færoese specimens are oflen much thicker, and in ih is they come very near to the extremely interesting aérial species of the Florideæ Rhodochorton islandicum Rosenv.1 which Helgi Jonsson gathered on his native island. The Færoese material, which especially resembled Ibis species and which perhaps even makes il doubtful whether Rhodochorton islandicum ought to retain ils valne as a distinct species, was also gathered by Jonsson during his visit to the Færoes in 1897. As the material in question appears to me to be of special interest, I will describe il more fnlly. The material was gathered in Skaalefjord, lale in October. With reference to its habitat J (His son writes in his diary as follows: — »Forms a continuons covering on the rocks, and occnrs most often above the water, but is, however, now and then washed by the waves«. To this I mav remark that there is no doubt whatever thai the alga growing here in the fjord where no tide is felt or where it is almost imperceptible, would not, during summer in calm weather or when a land-breeze was biowing, be wetted by sea-water for a long period, even if it did not grow very far above sea-level, just a few inches higher making a great difference here in Ihe fjord. The Færoese material — a very small quantity — is sterile; it corresponded, as a whole, closely to Rosenvinge's exhaustive description and ligures, but I have not come across such thin de- current threads as, according to Rosenvinge's description, are to be found on Rh. islandicum; it is true that a few thin threads oc- curred intermixed, but from a biologicai point of view they did not seem to be different from the thicker ones. The thickness of the erect branches varied from 16 to 29 //, i. e. between two somewhat greater extremes than tbose mentioned by Rose uvinge. The cells of the lower part are about as long as broad and those of the upper part twice or thrice as long as broad. The cell-walls are often very thick, as much as 5 /*. A few poorly developed filaments of Callithamnion scopulorum occurred intermixed in the material. This Rhodochorton iinpressed me as being a stunted Rhodochorton Rothii which had altered in appearance on account of its habitat, and in the Færoese material I came across the most evenly transitional stages between this peculiar form and typical Rhodochorton Rothii. 1 Rosenvinge. L. Kolderup: Note sur une Floridée aérienne (Rhodochorton islandicum nov. sp. Botanisk Tidsskrift. 23. Hind, p. (il. København. 1900. 392 But, however this may be, it is at any rate very interesting that this intermediate form has now been found between the marine Rhodo- chorton Rothii and the true air-alga, Rhodochorton islandicum. As mentioned above, Rhodochorton Rothii can grow far above sea-level in piaces where it is not liable to be reached by the spray for a long period, and liere in the Færoes it is not only subject to dissiccation, but owing to the rainy climate that prevails it is often soaked through by rain water, which explains its oc- currence in waterfalls near extreme high-water mark, so extreme that it can only be overflowed by the sea during very high water. Thus I found it south of Thorshavn, on the east side of Stromo, near Gliversnæs, where a small stream dashed perpendicularly down over the edge of a rock, and just where the jet of water fell on the subjacent rock, there Rhodochorton Rothii grew luxuriantly in dense, reddish-purple tufts, and Jonsson found it growing in similar localities near Klaksvig. The specimens found in waterfalls seem to correspond exactly to Rhodochorton intermedium Kjellm.1 They had — what Kjell man points out as characteristic of the latter — their main filament irregularly branched along their whole length and further scattered lateral branchlets bearing tetraspores (see fig. 61), while the branches of typical Rho- dochorton Rothii spring from a limited space on the main branch as is figured beautifully by le Jolis (Alg. Mar. Cherb., pi. V). This clustering together of the long branches in typical Rho- dochorton Rothii is often occasioned by the growing out of the tetraspore-bearing branchlets into numerous long branches after the tetrasporangia have fallen off (see fig. 62). I have often found this to be the case wilh the Færdese specimens. The above -mentioned specimens from the water-fall resemble Kjellman 's not only in their different branch-system , bul also in their ereel filaments being of the same 1 Kjellman, F. R.: Om Spetsbergens marina, klorofyllforande Thallophyter. I, p. 28. (Bihang t K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handl 13. 3, Nr. 7, 1875). Fig. 61. Iihodochorlon Rothii (Turt.) Niig. Portion of fila- ment with lateral branchlets bearing tetraspores. 65: 1. 393 thickness as that of Kjellman's, viz. some 14 — 16^; they differ from Kjellman's specimens in one point only: in their tufts being Fig. 62. Rhodochorton Rothii Turt. Nftg. Older tetraspore-bearing branchlets grown out into long branches, a single tetraspore still to be seen. 65 : 1 . somewhat shorter; they have hardly ever been founri higher than 1 cm. while Kjell man reports the Spitzbergen specimens to be 2—3 cm. high. Excepting this the Spitzbergen and Færoese speci- mens seem to correspond exactly. But I think that the differences 394 mentioned here and which are pointed out by Kjellman as the chief marks of distinction between his Rh. intermedium and Rh. Rothii cannot be regarded as denoting a distinct species, for I have found all intermediate stages between the former species and typical Rh. Rothii, which Jonsson1 also claims to have done in the Icelandic material. Perhaps it may be regarded as a special form of Rh. Rothii, but at any rate the name intermedium is hardly correct, it being by no means intermediate between the former species and Rh. ftori- dulum — as Kjellman supposes — the latter being quite distinct from Rh. Rothii, e. g. by its star-like chromatophores. Rh. Rothii occurs not only in the littoral zone but also in the sublittoral on Laminaria hyperborea — as I quite agree with Jons- son (1. c. p. 147) in thinking that the Rhodochorton , which is com- monly met with on the stems of Laminaria hyperborea where it occurs as a short, dense mat, is this species, and I am also of opinion that Rh. parasiticum Batters2 undoubtedly belongs to this species as pointed out by Jonsson. Fig. 63 shows the basal part, the erect filaments spring from prostrate ones creeping on La- minaria hyperborea. How far this alga is really a parasite or only a pseudo-endophyte as mentioned by Jonsson I shall not discuss at any length, merely stating that where it occurs on the Laminaria the tissue of the latter is always more or less destroyed, and there- fore Jonsson is very possibly right when he savs that it can only penetrate into the tissue, after the latter has been destroyed. A single specimen which I found on a Lam inaria-s tipe which Jonsson had gathered from Kalbakfjord differed in some points. Fig. 64 shows some small portions of it. Besides the clustered tetra- sporangia commonly occurring on Rhodochorton Rothii (see fig. 64 b) it had also, as shown in fig. 64 a, solitary, terminal sporangia, which were noteworthy by being much larger than the former, the tetraspores in the clusters being 16/* broad, while the solitary ones attained to a thickness of some 27 /*. The solitary sporangia were borne on short, erect filaments, which were generally branchless; the cells in these filaments were for the most part short, often only just as long as broad, and frequently somewhat swollen in the middle. On the other band, the filaments bearing the clustered 1 Jonsson, H.: The marine Algæ of Iceland (I. Rhodophyceæ), Botanisk Tidsskrift. 24. Bind, p. 14(5. 2 Batters: New or critical British marine Algæ (Journal of Botany, vol. .'54, 189(5, p. 389). 395 tetrasporangia were much longer and richly branched, and the cells, excepting those in the basal part, were 3 — 4 times as long as broad. The breadth of the filaments averages about 13ju. The specimen in question had another peculiarity: a longer or shorter Fig. 63. Rhodochorton Rotliii (Turt.) Nag. Creeping filament with the basal part of the erect filaments, fln Laminaria hyperborea. 130 : 1. Fig. 65. Rhodochorton Rothii (Turt.) Nag. Portion of the filament overgrown with other filaments. 160:1. Fig. 64. Rhodochorton Rothii (Turt. Någ. On Laminaria. a. Erect fila- ments with terminal sporangia itne dots indicate that a longer portion of the filament has been omltted). 110: 1. b. Another filament of the same plant to show clusters of tetrasporangiå. DO : 1 . portion of the filaments was often near the base encireled by other cell-filaments which formed a dense, eortical sheath aronnd the central filament (see fig. 65), out of which numerous free filaments grew up. I have not had an opportun itv of watching the process by which this sheath is formed. As indicated above, on the Færoese coasts this alga is very common in the littoral zohc How far above sea-level it can grow 396 I cannot exactly sav, but it mav doubtless be presumed to grow at a height of several metres, more particularly in tbe interior of the large caves which occur so frequently along the exposed coasts of the Færoes. Thus, I saw in one of the large caves (at least 20 metres high) at Troldhoved, large, reddish-purple patches, far up on the walls and on the roof of the cave, which were undoubtedly this alga; in a small cave near Kvalbo on Sydero it occurred as a dense covering on the roof which was just within reach. In the sublittoral zone I have only found it epiphytic on La- minaria, but Kjell man says that in the Polar Sea he came across it in the latter zone both on stones and algæ. It has been found down to a depth of some 10 fathoms. I found a small number of specimens in June and July which were still bearing a few tetraspores, but the greater part of them had fallen off. The rest of the specimens gathered from April to August were sterile. On the other hånd, specimens rich in tetra- spores were found in November and December. Thus, as along the Danish coasts so also along the Færoes the period of fructifi- cation falls undoubtedly during the winter months, though the alga is sometimes found bearing tetraspores far into the summer. In Iceland Jonsson found a few tetrasporic specimens in the spring and summer; and Kjellman is of opinion that at Spitzbergen the tetraspores are formed in May and June. The frequent occurrence of this species along the Færoese coasts was also noted tw Lyngbye, who writes: — »Habitat ad rupes abruptas insularum Færoensium in summo refluxus limite, copiose; imprimis autem ad stipitem Laminariæ digitatæ. ibidem«. 64. Rh. seiriolanum H. Gibson. On the Development of the Spo- rangia in Rhodochorton Rothii Niig., and Rh. lloridulum Nag., and on a new Species of that Genus (Journ. of the Linnean Society. Bot. vol. 28, 1891, p. 204). Only a small quantity of this species was found epiphytic on Ceramium acanthonotum associated with Chantransia secundata. It occurred on exposed coast near high-water mark. Tetrasporic specimens occurred in April. Found hitherto only on Str. : Velbestad (!). 397 Order DUMONTIACEAE. DUMONTIA (Lamour.) J. G. Ag. 65. D. filiformis (FL Dan.) Grev. Kjellm., N. I., p. 200 (157); Gastridium filiforme Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 68. Found on exposed as well as on sheltered shores, on Ihe former even frequently not far from high-water mark, and most commonly associated with Scytosiphon lomentarius and Phyllitis fascia in hollows containing a little waler. On sheltered shores where the lide is imperceptible it oecnrs in quite shallow water. Generally il grows attached lo rocks and stones, but I have occasionally found it epiphytic on Gigartina. So late as July I found (juantities of it and large vigorous examples, sno-sving thai it oceurs later in the season on the shores of the Færoes than it does on the Danish shores where it is decidedly a spring alga. Jonsson, however, has nol come across it, so it probably disappears later in autiiiiiii. This species, which was first mentioned Ironi the Færoes by Ho- strup (1. c. p. 83) is very conimon therc. Lyngbye, curiously enougb, does not record this species from the Færoes in his »Hydrophytologia but in his herbarium in Copenhagen tliere is a small specimen Ironi Kval bo. Dilsea edulis Slackhouse is recorded from the Færoes by P. A. Holm in his »Skildringer af Naturen paa Færoerne« (Tids- skrift for populære Fremstillinger af Naturvidenskaberne, Vol. II, p. 204) but as it has not been found since, this statement, as alreadv pointed out by Rostrup (1. c. p. 83, see note), is undoubtedly wrong. Order NEMASTOMACEAE. FURCELLARIA Lamour. ()('). F. fastigiata (L.) Lamour. Kjellm., N. I., p. 201 (158); Fur- cellaria lumbricalis Lyngb., Hydrophyt., pp. 48 — 49. Found most frequently in the sublitloral zone, but also oceurs dow and then in pools between tide-marks. It is most commonly nul with in not very deep water, about 2 — 3 fathoms, in open ravines and inlets »Skærgaarde«, in fairly exposed piaces where it oceurs rather extensively in dense growths on stones and rocky bot- loms. The greatest depth at which I gathered it was about 10 fathoms. All the spring and summer specimens which have been exa- mined were sterile. Telrasporic specimens occurred abundantly in 398 November and December, but none bearing cystocarps and anther- idia, so tbe species doubtless bears fruit d uring tbe winter months proper, as is also tbe case witb tbose growing along tbe Danisb coasts. Kleen(l. c. p. 19) mentions, however, having found sporocarps in June in Nordland. Lyngbj^e writes that the species is »Ad insulas Færoenses raro«, and Rostrup says »Here and there«. I found it in several piaces in exposed as well as fairly sheltered localities, so it may be recorded as fairly common. Order RHIZOPHYLLIDACEAE. POLYIDES Ag. 67. P. rotundus (Gmel.) Grev. Kjellm., N. I., p. 164 (127). Along tbe Færoese coasts it grows in the sublittoral zone; at any rate, I have not found it growing in the littoral zone in rock- pools, as Kjell man says it does along the Norwegian coasts of the Polar Sea. It generally grows on stony bottoms in deeper water (some 10 fathoms), and is most commonly met with in sheltered localities, but I have also gathered it from the open sea. It was found bearing tetraspores in April and October, and young cystocarps in November. Kl een met with cystocarpic spe- cimens in July in Nordland, and Kjell man gathered it in the same month in Nova Zembla bearing both cystocarps and tetra- spores. It appears to be fairly common along the Færoese coasts: — Str. : Gliversnæs (!), Kvalvig (H. J.); Ost.: Fuglefjord (!), Skaalefjord (H. J.); Bordo: Klaksvig (!), Aaerne (!); Vid: Kvannesund (H. J.); Syd.: Lobra (!), Vaagfjord (H. J.), Trangisvaagfjord (Ostenfeld, H. J., !). Lyngbye may so far be said to have found this species in the Færoes as there is a packet in his herbarium containing three small pieces of alga, of which the two small ones are undoubtedly Polyides rotundus. The packet is labelled in Lyngbye's handwriting »Furcellaria rotunda?< In Hydrophyt. he does not record this species from the Færoes. Order SQUAMARIACEAF. CRUORIA (Fr.) .1. C. Agardh. 68. Cr. pellita (Lyngb.) Fr. Kjellm., N. I., p. 182 (142); Chæto- phora pellita Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 193. This species occurs along tbe coasts of the Færoes both in the lilloral zone and in the sublittoral. In the lilloral I most frequenlly 399 came across it growing in caves, where il mav be found forming large, wide-spread, shiny crusts of a dark-red colour on the rock faces, from somewhal above high-water mark downwards. In the sublittoral zone it grows on shells and stones as also epiphytic on the stalks of Laminaria (especially /.. hyperborea). It is common both on open sea-sbores, and in sheltered localities in tbe interior of fjords and sounds, e. g. in Sundene between Thorsvig and Kvalvig where it grows luxuriantly on stones under Laminaria færoensis. Owing to want of specimens collected during the winter months proper, tbe greater part of tbe material was sterile1, but some specimens, collected in June, August and November, were found bearing a few tetraspores. It seems to be fairly common along the coasts of the Færoes, nm I \\;is already found by Lyngbye, whose herbarium contains speeimens from Kvivig. and who writes with reference to its habitat: — »Ad insulas Færoenses latera rupium declivium in infimo refluxus limite obvestiens, ut ad Quivig et inter Thorsbavn et Hoyvig«. PEYSSONNELIA Decsne. 69. P. Dubyi Crouan. Kjellm., N. I., p. 180 (140). Found in the sublittoral zone from a deptb of 2 to 10 fathoms. Usuallv it grows attached to stones and shells, but also occurs epiphytic on the stems of Laminaria hyperborea. Mel with both in the open sea and in the interior of fjords in sheltered localities. Specimens gathered during tbe summer months were sterile; in a single collection gathered late in October specimens were found bearing tetraspores. Found at the following piaces: — Bord 6: Haraldsund (H.J.); Ost.: Skaalefjord H. J. ; Str. : Sundene between Thorshavn and Kvalvig (!), Thorshavn (!), Gliversnæs (!). RHODODERMIS Crouan. 70. R. elegans Crouan. Found in the sublittoral zone a few times on stones and shells. Tetraspore-bearing piants collected in May and July. Found hitherto: — Str.: Kalbakfjord (H. J.), Gliversnæs (!); Syd.: Trangisvaagfjord (!). 1 It is very difficult to determine sterile Squamariacé-material, as e. g. Cruoria pellita, and Pctrocelis cruenta and 1'. Hennedyi resemble eaeh other very closelj when sterile. I think therefore that, at any rate, /'. Hennedyi, whicb lias been found along the shores of Iceland, also occurs around the Fa-roes. 400 Order CORALLINACEAE. PHYMATOLITHON 1 Fosl. 71. Ph. polymorphum (L.) Fosl. As in the Arctic Sea, according to Kjell man (N. I., p. 135 [102]) so also in the Færoes this species grows in the littoral zone, where it occurs abundantly; but it is also met with in the sul)littoral zone down to a depth of 10 fathoms. Its proper habitat is near low- water mark or strictly speaking on either side of low-water mark, where it occurs especially on smooth, vertical rock-faces as a thick crust, varying in colour from white to pink and forming a belt often several feet in breadth. It grows most luxuriantly in the interior of caves and occurs liere from a height of several feet above sea-level downwards into the water as far as the eye can see. According to my observations this species extends farthest into the caves, up to the point where they become too dark even for it. According to what Mr. Foslie writes to me it bore sporangia in May, July and December. This species is extremely common along the Færoese coasts. 72. Ph. lævigatum Fosl. Found in the sublittoral zone down to a depth of 10 fathoms on stones and shells. It has been observed both in sheltered loca- lities and in the open sea. According to Mr. Foslie it bore sporangia in July, October and November. Vid.: Kvannesund (H. J.); Bordo: Haraldsund (!); Kuno (H. J.); Ost.: Glibre (H. J.); Str.: Arge (!), Sundene between Thorsvig and Kval- vig (!); Syd.: Vaagfjord (H. J.). CLATHROMORPHUM Fosl. 73. Cl. circumscriptum (Stromf.) Fosl. Bore young sporangia in June. Found once only on Str.: in Sundene between Thorsvig and Kvalvig (!). LITHOTHAMNION Phil. 74. L. glaciale Kjelbn. According to Mr. Foslie all Ibe specimens are young and partly stunted hence the determination is open to doubt. 1 Mr. M. Foslie of Trondhjem has kindly determined tliis genus and the ollowing: — Clathromorphum, Lithothamnion, Lithophyllum and Dermatolithon. 401 Bordo: Haraldsund (!) ; Str.: Sundene between Thorsvig and Kval- vig (!); Syd.: Lobra (!). 75. L. læve (Stromf.) Fosl. Grows in deep water both in sheltered and exposed piaces. According to Mr. Foslie it hore sporangia in June and July. Bordo: Haraldsund !..; Str.: Arge (!); Syd.: Trangisvaagfjord !), Lobra (!). 76. L. Lenormandi (Aresch.) Fosl. Bore sporangia and carpospores in June. Str.: Hojvig ! . f. sub læ nis Fosl. Syd.: Lobra ! . LITHOPHYLLUM Phil. 77. L. incrustans Phil. Found between tide-marks growing on Lithothamnion polymor- phuin which occurred araongst Corallina. According to Mr. Foslie it bore sporangia in July. Vid.: Viderejde (H. J.), specimens sterile, hence thc determination is not quite certain; Syd.: Kvalbo (!). 78. L. Crouani Fosl. Found growing on the haptera and stems of Laminaria hyper- boTea associated with Dermatolithon macrocarpum f. Laminariæ. Bore sporangia in June. Ost.: Gjov ! : Syd.: Lobra (!). DERMATOLITHON Fosl. 79. D. macrocarpum (Ros.) Fosl. f. færoensis Fosl. f. Laminariæ (Crn.) Fosl. Formå færoensis was found both in the littoral and suhlittoral zone epiphytic on several algæ, e. g. Gigartina, Fnrcellaria , Odon- thalia, Fnens; formå Laminaria' occurs in the suhlittoral zone on the stems of Laminaria. Bore tetraspores and cystocarps in May, June, July, November and December. Both forms, bul especially f. færoensis, are very comraon along the Færoese coasts. 402 80. D. hapalidioides (Crn.) Fosl. On a Pafella shell. Sporangia in Mav. Syd.: Kvanhauge Ostenfeld). 81. D. Coralliriæ (Crn.) Fosl. Epiphytic on Corallina officinalis. Sporangia in November. Appears to be rather commonly distrihuted. CORALLINA (Tourn.) Lamour. 82. Corallina officinalis L. Kjellm., N. I., p. 114 (86). I think by far the greater part of the Færoese material may be referred to f. typica ; only some material from Trangisvaag gathered by Ostenfeld seems to correspond fairly closely to f. flexilis Kjellm. (1. c). This species gro\vs on rocks and stones near low-water mark and often extends thence to a depth of 1 — 2 fathoms. It is verv common in rock-pools between tide-marks. On low-lying, gently inclined surfaces of rocks it often forms extensive growths which are characterized by the intermixture of certain algæ, especially Lomentaria articulata and Gigartina. This does not correspond with Kjellman's statement that it mostly grows »dispersed or in small, close groups.« Neither does his statement that »it prefers sheltered localities« apply to the actual conditions on the shores of the Færoes, where the species grows and attains to its highest development in the most exposed localities; as an example I may mention »Muletangen« (tongue of land resembling a muzzle) near Vaags Ejde on Syd., a peculiarly exposed point. Corallina forms here a vast growth which extends some distance out of the sea up on the gently sloping rocks. Of course I do not say that Corallina officinalis grows exclusively in exposed localities, in faet it is also fairly common in sheltered piaces. Luxuriant specimens bearing tetraspores were found in May and June. This is an extremely common species of the Færoese coasts. It was already found by Landt (p. 292). IIILDENBRANDIA Nardo. 83. H. rosea Kiitz. Kjellm., N. I., p. 179 (139). Along the coasts of the Færoes it is extremely common in the littoral zone, where it is found covering rocks and stones. It often 403 extends far above high-water mark on sloping rock faces in much exposed localities, where it occurs as an undergrowth under other algæ, e. g. Porphyra, Fucaceæ, etc. ; at sucb bigb Ievels it is only reached by the spray. Near Bosdalafos on Vaago it has been found growing some 80 feet above sea-level. It is also very often found covering the sides of rock-pools in association with Ralfsia verrucosa and different species of I Achens. It is always of a fine, dark crimson colour, even when growing in broad daylight, and such bleached, yellowish examples as those which occur along the Danish shores I never met with in the Færoes, owing of course to the sky being so often overcast and perhaps more particularly to the period of sunshine being always so short in the latter place. Rosenvinge (Grønl. Havalg., p. 820) has noticed the same to be the case in Greenland. Tetraspore-bearing specimens were found in March, May, June, July, November, December, and it is doubtless able to fructify all the year round. This species is extremely common along the coasts of the Færoes. B. Phaeophyceae. Order ECTOCARPACEAE. ECTOCARPUS Lyngb. Subgen. Euectocarpus Hauck. 84. E. confervoides (Roth) Le Jol. Kuckuck, Beitråge zur Kenntnis einiger Ectocarpus-Arten der Kieler Fohrde; Ectocarpus siliculosus Lyngb., Hydrophyt., pp. 131—2, tab. 43 B. f. typica Kuckuck, 1. c. f. pygmæa (Aresch.) Kjellm., Handb., p. 77. The specimens referred to f. typica usually agree fairly well with Kuckuck's figure 3, 1. c. The thickness of the main filaments varies with an average of 27 p. In fig. 60 is shown one of the specimens — gathered at Thorshavn — which I have referred to i. pygmæa; it occurred as a short, densely matted growth on the stem of Laminaria digitata. The erect filaments, which are about 12 — 13 (i thick, are sometimes found bearing only one terminal Botany of the Færoes. 26 404 sporangium, while others bear botb terminal and lateral. The sporangia are about 18 fi thick and 50 (i long. This species belongs to the sublittoral zone and is a fairly common epiphyte on several larger algæ. It has been found in the open sea as well as in sheltered localities and bears both plurilocular and unilocular sporangia. The plurilocular sporangia occurred in May, June, July, November and December, the unilocular in April, May and November. F. typica has been found in the following piaces: —Vid.: Ostvig ^H.J.); Ost.: Glibre (!); Str.: Thorshavn (H. J., !), Gliversnæs (!); San do: Trold- hoved (!); Syd.: Trangisvaag (Ostenfeld), Frodebo (!), Vaags Ejde (!), Vaagsfjord (H. J.). F. pygmæa: — Kun 6 (H. J.); Syd.: Vaags Ejde (!). 85. E. siliculosus (Dilhv.) Lyngb., Hydro- phyt., p. 131, tab. 43 C; Kuckuck, Beitråge zur Kenntnis einiger Ectocarpus- Arten der Kieler Fohrde, p. 15. f. typica Kuckuck, 1. c. f. arcta (Kutz.) Kuckuck, 1. c. f. varians Kuckuck, Ectocarpus siliculosus Dilhv. sp. forina varians, ein Beispil fur ausser- ordentliche Schwankungen der pluriloculåren Sporangienform (Berichte deutsch. bot. Gesellsch., Band X, 1892, p. 256, taf. XIII). Ectocarpus siliculosus is a very variable species, and its outward appearance dillers considerably, hence it is often difficult to dis- tinguish from the nearest allied Ectocarpus- species. The specimens referred to f. typica usually agree fairly well with Kuckuck's figs. 1 — 2, 1. c, though as a rule it is comparatively rare for their sporangia to terminate simply in a long, colourless hair, they being most commonly only drawn out into a longer point. The main filaments vary from 40 // to 70 // in thickness. The specimens referred to f. arcta are particularly eharacterized by their shorter sporangia, and in this they resemble Ectocarpus confervoides from whicb they differ, however, amongst other things Fig. 66. Ectocarpus confervoi- des (Roth) f. pygmæa Aresch. Part of a plant with terminal sporangium, and portion of a filament with lateral sporan- gia. 80: 1 and 150 : 1. 405 in the greater thickness of their main branches as also in the faet that, on a closer examination of the material, sporangia have oc- casionally been found which were longer in form. In fig. 67 I have Fig. 67. Ectocarpus siliculosus (Dilhv.) Lyngb. f. arcta (Kutz.)- Different parts of the plant; compare text. a, c, d 100 : 1 ; b 60 : 1 ; e, / 160 : 1. shown some portions of a plant belonging to this form which was found in Vaagfjord growing epiphytic on Zostera marina. As mav be seen the sporangia are in the main short, nearly ovate or oval and most commonly sessile, but stalked examples occur intermingled. The stalk is sometimes composed of a single cell, sometimes of several. Sporangia more long in form occur here and there (fig. 67, 12 ( i - 406 c and d). The plant has only a few rhizoids (fig. 67, e). The main branches are about 60 n thick. Formå varians is marked by being subject to considerable variation in the form of its sporangia, and even if the Færoese Fig. 68. Ectocarpus siliculosus (Dillw.) Lyngb. f. varians Kuck. Different parts of the plant. a, b 100 : 1 ; c, d, e, f 150 : 1; g 270 : 1. specimens do not exhibit the extreme variations described by Kuckuck, 1. c., yet I feel quite justitied in referring the specimens found by me to this form, and Dr. Kuckuck to whom I showed my preparations agrees with me in this. Fig. 68 represents some fragments of this plant. As may be seen, the form of the sporangia varies considerably, being sometimes like typical siliculosus, some- 407 times quite short and irregularly formed. The sporangia are some- times sessile, sometimes stalked, and even the larger branches sometimes bear sporangia instead of hairs at their apices. The chromatophores are ribbon-shaped and are often rainified cjuite in conformity with Kuckuck's description. The main branches attain to a thickness of abont 70 fi, and the cells have very thick walls. This plant which grew in quite shallow water was of a dark, yellowish-brown colour. With regard to f. hiemalis (Crouan) which is mentioned doubt- fully by Simmons, 1. c. p. 270, I have not come across any spe- cimens which I considered could be referred to it. Lastly, I may mention that a few specimens, e. g. from an open ravine a mile north of Kvivig, resembled in no slight degree Eet. penicillatus, but I did not feel justified in referring them to the latter species, typical examples of which I have never met with in the Færoes. This species which usually occurs as an epiphyte on larger algæ is common both in the littoral zone and in the sublittoral, on open sea-shores as well as in sheltered situations. It has been found bearing plurilocular sporangia in May, June and July, and unilocular in May and June. It was first found along the Færoese coasts by Lyngbye, and is common both as f. typica and as f.arcta; {.varians I have met with only in Sundene between Thorsvig and Kvalvig (Str.). 86. E. spec. In preparing a Laminaria færoensis from Sundene between Thorsvig and Kvalvig, which had been preserved in salt, an Ecto- carpus-species was found which I assume to be a new species. Unfortunately the material, having been kept so long in salt, was somewhat damaged, more particularly the contents of the cells, but in spite of this I thought that I could pretty clearly distinguish the chromatophores as ribbon-shaped. In fig. 69 I have shown some portions of the plant. It is rather richly branched, the lower part of the main branches being furnished with long branches like themselves, and the upper part being most commonly set with short branches only. The main branches are about 60 fi thick at the base and gradually grow narrower, usually terminating at the apex in longer hair-like cells which have few chromatophores and are about as long as broad, though they vary, being sometimes shorter and sometimes longer. 408 The specimens collected bore almost exelusively unilocular sporangia. These were ovate, roundish-oval, sometimes sessile, sometimes borne on quite short unicellular stalks; they sometimes sprang directly Fig. 69. Ectocarpus spec. a, b, c, d, e and f different parts of the plant with unilocular sporangia ; g and li part of the plant with plurllocular sporangia. a, b, d and g 100 : 1 ; c 60 : 1 ; e, f and h 160 : 1. from the main filament, sometimes from branchlets. Both the branchlets and the sporangia occnr all round the main filaments. The unilocular sporangia are about 38 fi long and 29 fi broad. Here and there a few plurilocular sporangia occur (fig. 69, g, h) with the base almost ovate and tapering upwards, the length about 75 p, and the breadth 27 /*. 409 The main branches are often surrounded at their base by long rhizoids which, however, only produce a very scanty cortical layer. This species appears to come aear to the group of forms belonging to Ectocarpus siliculosus, more parlicuiarly its f. arcta ; but it is as yet so little known that for the present I prefer to call it Ectocarpus spec. Found hitherto only on Str. : Sundene between Thorsvig and Kvalvig (!). 87. E. dasycarpus Kuck. , Beitråge zur Kenntnis einiger Ecto- carpus- Arten der Kieler Fohrde, p. 21. The specimens referred to this species agree altogether well with Kuckuck's description and figure, differing in some minor points only. Thus the cells in the main branches, which are about 40 /x broad, are generally only as long as broad, sometimes even shorter, and the plurilocular sporangia are sometimes a little broader than recorded by Kuckuck, viz. about 21 \i. It has been found in the sublittoral zone, growing epiphytic on Desmarestia aculeata at a depth of some 5—6 fathoms in a sheltered situation. It bore plurilocular sporangia in the middle of May. Found only on Ost.: Ore (!). 88. E. fasciculatus (Grifl) Harv. Kjellm., N. I., p. 344 (279), Handb., p. 76 ; Sauvageau, Sur quelques Algues phéosporées parasites (Journal de Botanique 1892, p. 102). Besides typical specimens, several others were found which I have referred, though doubtfully, to this species, amongst others some which I have referred to var. refracta (Kutz.) Ardissone. In fig. 70 I have shown some fragments of them. The specimens in question were marked by their sharply recurved, almost hook- shaped lateral branches, which occurred scattered upwards along the main filaments, and bore on their upper side short-stalked sporangia which agreed altogether well with Sauvageau's figures, 1. c. ; and, as in Sauvageau's fig. 34, the lateral branches terminated in a sterile part destitute of sporangia-bearing branchlets, and not in a hair-like apex such as frequently occurs in typical Ectocarpus fasciculatus. The cells in the thicker filaments of this variety were about 4 \i thick, and had elegant, spirally twisted chromatophores which were often ramified.1 1 An imperfectly known species. Eet. Constanciæ Hariot, seems to resemble it fairly closely (Forschungsreise S. M. S. »Gazelle«, IV. Theil, Botanik, Algen von E. Askenasy, p. 17). 410 Some specimens from Strænder (Ost.) which I must regard as belonging to the typical form bore quantities of plurilocular as well as unilocular sporangia on the same plant, sometimes even intermixed on the same branch; but either one or the other kind greatly predominated on the same branch, and either exclusively unilocular or plurilocular sporangia were frequently met with. The unilocular sporangia often occurred in great abundance and were Fig. 70. Ectocarpus fasciculatus (Griff. Harv. var. refracta (Kiitz.) Ardissone. a and b 110 : 1; c 270 : 1. placed quite close together so much so that they frequently came in contact with each other, being even closer than is shown in the accompanying figure (fig. 71, a). Such piants bore considerable resemblance to Ectocarpus pycnocarpus Rosenv. (Gronl. Havalg., p. 886). The unilocular sporangia were about 65 {* long and about 40 ,u broad, of about the same size, consequentlv, as reported by Rosen vinge, and two sporangia on the same cell is also liere sometimes met with, and also a vegetative branch proceeding from beside the sporangium. The main filaments could attain to a thickness of up to 70/*. In tig. 71 is shown a portion of the plant bearing unilocular sporangia (a) as well as a branch bearing 411 plurilocular sporangia (b), which latter have not been found on Bet pyenocarpus. I have also come across plurilocular sporangia occurring on rhizoids such as were observed by Sauvageau (1. c). They are found on thc basal rhizoids, especially of the older piants. Fig. 71. Ectocarpus fasciculatus (Griff.) Harv. Formå, a portion of a plant with unilocular sporangia; b branch with plurilocular sporangia; c cell with chromatophores. a and b 160: 1; c 200: 1. This species is most commonly met with on exposed coast especially in the littoral zone near low-water mark and in the sublittoral in shallow water. It is quite a common epiphyte, espe- cially on old Himanthalia lorea, Alaria esculenta, Laminaria digitata and other larger algæ growing behveen tide -marks. Plurilocular sporangia occurred in May, June, July and November and uni- locular sporangia in May and June. 412 Ectocarpus fasciculatus is commonly distributed along the coasts of the Færoes; var. refracta has been found only at the following piaces: — Str.: Kvivig (!); Syd.: Kvalbo (!), Frodebo (!), Vaags Ejde (!). 89. E. granulosus (Engl. Bot.) Ag. J. Ag., Spec. Alg., p. 21. Found only in the sublittoral zone at a depth of 2 — 3 fathoms in sheltered stations in the bays and sounds, where it grew epi- phytic on Laminaria. It has been found bearing plurilocular sporangia in the middle of May and at the end of October. Found hitherto only near Kvannesund (Vid.) amongst some diflerent algæ growing on the lamina of a Laminaria gathered by Jonsson; and in Trangisvaag (Syd.) on the lamina of a Laminaria (!) and in a seine (Ostenfeld). 90. E. Hincksiæ Harv., Manual p. 59, Phycol. Brit., tab. 22; Sauvageau, Observations relatives å la sexualité des Phéosporées (Journal de Botanique 1896, p. 66). var. typica. var. irregularis nov. var. Among specimens belonging to the typical form, I have come across a few examples gathered near Thorshavn in June which had involucres round the plurilocular sporangia (lig. 72, e) precisely similar to those described and figured by Sauvageau, 1. c, as occurring round the unilocular sporangia. The specimens referred to the variety (fig. 72, a, b, c, d) are more particularly marked by the faet that the form of the plurilocular sporangia differs widely from that of the typical plant, besides varying considerably in itself, and also by the plurilocular sporangia being sometimes stalked. Thus, the sporangia are most commonly oblong-ovate and, in contrast to those of the typical species, they are broadest some way above the base and frequently taper down to it. In the majority of cases they are sessile, but verv often they have stalks composed sometimes of one cell only, sometimes of several, in which case the sporangium may most properly be said to occur terminally on a short branch. The sporangia-bearing branches are sometimes erect, forming an acute angle with the main filament, and sometimes recurved. The sporangia occur as in the typical form in rows on the inner (upper) face of the branches. The main filaments attain to a thickness of some 50 /<, and produce numerous rhizoids as in the typical form. The chromatophores 413 are precisely similar to those of the latter. For the rest I must refer to the accompanying ligure. Ectocarpus Hincksiæ occurs both in the littoral zone and in Fig. 72. Ectocarpus Hincksiæ Harv. a, b. c and d var. irrcgularis nov. var. a, b and c different parts of the plant with plurilocular sporangia ; cl cells with chromatophores. e var. tgpica. Plurilocular sporangia with involucre. n, b and c ltiO : 1 ; d and e 200 : 1. the sublittoral down to a depth of about 10 fathoms. It is most commonly found on exposed coasts as an epiphyte on different algæ; between tide-marks especially on, e. g. old Himanthalia lorea, Alaria esculenta and Laminaria digitata. It has hitherto been found with plurilocular sporangia only, these being observed in May, June, July and October. 414 The typical form is undoubtedly quite common along the coasts of the Færoes, and has hitherto been found in the following piaces: — Bordo: Kvannesund H. J.); Str. : Thors- havn (!), Gliversnæs (!); Sando: Troldhoved (!); S t. Di mon (!); Syd.: Frodebo (!), Fa- mien (Ostenfeld, !). Var. irregularis has only been found on Syd.: Frodebo !) where it grew between tide-marks on Himanthalia lorea, associated with the typical form. 91. E. tomentosus (Huds.) Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 132; Kjellm., N. I., p. 344 (279). A specimen which grew epiphytic on Fucus vesicolosns at the exit of a stream into Kalbakfjord was peculiar on account of a large upper portion of the branches having been transformed into plurilocular sporangia which ri- pened and were emptied in basipetal suc- cession (fig. 73). As I am not aware of any previous mention of such a case I have illustrated this in fig. 73. The plant was otherwise quite normal and had the typical, hooked branches. The filaments were 8 — 10 [i thick. Ectocarpns tomentosus belongs to the littoral zone and is quite a common epiphyte, especially on different Fucus- species, Himanthalia lorea, Alaria, Gi- gartina, and in general on larger algæ growing between tide-marks. It occurs both on exposed coasts and in sheltered situations and grows luxuriantly even Pig. 73. Ectocarpns tomentosus (Huds.) in the interioi- of fjords where fresh- Lvni'b. Parts of filaments witli the upper , ■ ,1 t-»i -i i ... water runs into the sea. Plurilocular portion of the branches transformeu into plurilocular sporangia. a 120:1, b 330: 1. Spol'ailgia OCCUlTed ill April, May, Jllly and November. This species, which Lyngbye reports as follows: - »Habitat ad insulas Færoenses, ul in sinu Qualboe Suderoe, imprimis Himanthaliæ loreæ adhærescens«, is common everywhere along the coasts of the Færoes. 415 92. E. tomentosoides Farl., New or imperf. known Algæ of U.S., reprint from Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, Vol. XVI, 1889, p. 11, pi. 87, fig. 4; Rosenw, Grønl. Havalg., p. 890; Gran, En norsk form af Ectocarpus tomentosoides Farlow; Kuckuck, Ueber Polymorphie bei einigen Phaeosporeen (Festschrift fur Schwendener). Besides basal plurilocular sporangia, such as tbose figured by Rosen vinge and Kuckuck, 1. c, I have also come across basal nniloeular sporangia, as I cannot doubt that the few I found must be regarded as such. These dehisced at their apex, and were about 40 [i long and about 12 fi broad. Grows as an endophyte in the stem and lamina of Laminaria hyperborea, digitata and saccharina covering them with a short, fine, matted growth. Specimens bearing plurilocular sporangia were met with from March to June. It undoubtedly attains to its highest development late in winter, i. e. March to April, as in a collection consisting of fragments of Laminaria gathered by Jonsson in March near Thorshavn large quantities of vigorously developed piants were met with which exactly agreed with Kuckuck's lig. 6 (1. c), while later in the year it only occurred in small quantities and in poorly developed specimens; its occurrence as an early spring plant agrees also with Gran and Kuckuck's report. In Greenland, on the other hånd, it has been found as late as August. In a glass vessel containing Rhodymenia palmata, which I had gathered near Thorshavn for the sake of its different epiphytes, I found Eet. tomentosoides also amongst Myrionema globosnm and others, but whether this alga really growrs on Rhodymenia palmata or not I have not been able to ascertain ; at any rate I did not succeed in tinding endophytic filaments, but it is just possible that these typical filaments of Eet. tomentosoides were allied to the plant I have called with a query Myrionema globosum (cfr. 421); and in referring to my description of the latter for further particulars I will here only add that it bore a striking resemblance to Eet. tomentosoides. This species, which doubtless in early spring occurs as a very common endophyte in La/m'narza-species, has hitherto been found in the i'ollowing piaces: — Ost.: Ejde I , Fuglefjord (!); Str.: Thorshavn H.J., !); Syd.: Trangisvaag (Ostenfeld). ').'}. E. lucifugus Kuck., Ueber zwei hohlenbewohnende Phaeo- sporeen (Beitråge zur Kenntnis der Meeresalgen, 4, Kiel und Leipzig 1897). 416 The Færoese specimens agree very well with Kuckuck's description and figures. They have frequently 2 — 3 and sometimes even 4 terminal sporangia on each branch (see fig. 74), but very often the sporangia occur singly at the apices of the branches, as is chiefly the case in the Heligoland specimens. The sporangia attain to a length of about 60 /x and to a breadth of about 18 [i. It was found intermixed with Rhizoclonium both on fairlv ex- Fig. 74. Ectocarpus lucifugus Kuck. 160 : 1. posed coasts and in sheltered localities. It grows near high-water mark in small hollows in the basalt, though it has not been found in caves proper as is the case in Heligoland. In November it was found bearing a quantity of unilocular sporangia and Jonsson observed swarmspores in abundance when he looked through the material immediately after gathering. Found hitherto only at the following piaces: — Vide ro: Vedvig (H. J.); Bor do: Klaksvig (H. J.). 94. E. velutinus (Grev.) Kiitz. Simmons (1. c. p. 269) reports this species and writes with reference to it: »Auf Himanthalia lorea in Qualbofjord (S.)«. But 417 here I may remark that I have searched in vain for this alga on two original specimens gathered by Simmons near Kvalbo on which only Elachista scutulata occurred. 95. E. Stilophoræ Crouan, Florule du Finistére, Paris 1867. var. cæspitosa Rosenv., Gronl. Havalg., p. 892. x The description given by the brothers Crouan, 1. c, is very short, so that it is difficult to base a reliable determination on it, but as the Færoese specimens gathered by me are undoubtedly identical with the plant figured by Rosen vinge (I. c. lig. 26, A), I Fig. 75. Ectocarpus Stilophoræ Crouan. var. cæspitosa Rosenv. a part of a plant with pluri- locular sporangia; b part of a plant with unilocular sporangia ; c the basal threads. 400: 1. report it here under this name. The plant, of which I have shown some fragments in fig. 75, was found growing in the sorus of a Laminaria; the plurilocular sporangia often occur several on each branch and attain to a thickness of about 5 — 6 n, and, as far as I could see, it bore also unilocular sporangia (see fig. 75, b), the latter being cylindrical or somewhat swollen in the middle and attaining to a length of some 20 — 25 n and to a breadth of some 5 \i. The erect filaments occur abundantly in small patches, as pointed out by Rosenvinge. Specimens bearing both unilocular and plurilocular sporangia were met with in July. Found hitherto only on Str. : Thorshavn (!). 1 Cfr. Svedelius, »Studier ofver Ostersjons Hafsalgflora«, Upsala 1901, p. 105. 418 Subgen. Pylaiella (Bory). 96. E. littoralis (L.) Lyngb. emend. Kuckuck, Beitråge zur Kenntnis einiger Ectocarpus-Arten der Kieler Fohrde, p. 7; Lyng])., Hydrophyt., p. 130; Pylaiella littoralis Kjellm., N. I., p. 346 (281), Handb., p. 83. var. opposita Kjellm., Handb., p. 84; Kuck., 1. c. p. 8. var. firma Ag.; Kjellm., Handb., p. 84; Kuck., I. c. p. 8. var. divaricata Kjellm., Handb., p. 85; Kuck., Le. p. 11. var. varia (Kjellm.) Kuck., 1. c. p. 12; Pyl. varia Kjellm., N. I., p. 348 (282), tab. 27, figs. 1— 12; Handb., p. 83. I think I have been able to discern some of the forms referred by Kjell man and Kuckuck to each of the above-mentioned main groups. Thus, of var. opposita I have found, besides the typical form, f. rupincola Aresch. (Kjellm. and Kuck., 1. c.) and a few specimens which agreed fairly well with Kuckuck's descriptions of f. subverti- cillata and f. rectangnlans. Of var. firma, besides f. typica, some specimens were found which seemed to answer to Kuckuck's description of f. subglomerata. Of var. divaricata, I think I have found, besides the typical form, f. ramellosa Kuck., 1. c, and f. prætorta Kjellm., 1. c. Of var. varia, which occurred at a single place only, I have only found the typical form. Lyngbye mentions in Hydrophyt., 1. c. p. 131, tab. 42 C, a 8 protensus of which there are several specimens in his herbarium in Copenhagen, some of which are like var. opposita, while others, judging from the very much decayed material, appear to belong to other Ectocarpus-species. This alga, which is one of the most common along the coasts of the Færoes, occurs both in the littoral zone and in the sublittoral, but usually not at any great depth. On exposed coast in damp clefts and fissures in the rock, especially in piaces where fresh-water oozes out, it can grow at a considerable height above high-water mark (upwards of 10 feet). This plant occurs sometimes as an epiphyte, sometimes as a dense, brown covering on rocks; it is found abundantly at the exit of the streams. Var. varia was found in loose examples amongst other algæ. Plurilocular sporangia occurred in May, June, July and Oc- 419 tober, and unilocular sporangia in March, May, June, .luly, October and November, so it is donbtless able to fructify all tbe year round. This species is extremely common along the coasts of the Færoes and was already reported by Lyngbye, l. c. Var. opposita is the most commonly distributed; var. firma is rarer, and var. varia I found once only near Kvivig. Conferva ferruginea Lyngb., Hydrophyt. , p. 159, tab. 55 C, belongs to this species, as mav be distinctly seen trom Lyngbye's ligure. In Lyngbye's Herbarium in Copenhagen there are no spe- cimens labelled in Lyngbye's handwriting, but one on which is written in Liebmann's handwriting: Conferva ferruginea Lyngb. ad nip. marit. Næss.« It is, however, undoubtedly one of Lyngbye's specimens, as the habitat corresponds to tbat given by Lyngbye in Hydrophyt. On examining this specimen it also proved to be like E.litoralis. In Hydrophyt. Lyngbye says: »Habitat ad insulas Færoenses, rupibus maritimis abruptis in summo refluxus Iimite adliærescens, ut ad Næs Osteroe et ad Hoyvig prope Thorshavn«. ISTHMOPLEA Kjellm. 97. I. sphærophora (Harv.) Kjellm., N. L, p. 341 (276); Reinke, Atlas, pi. 30. Found as an epiphyte on, e. g. Ceramium acanthonotum, Calli- thamnion Arbuscula and C. scopulorum, Gig artina mamillosa, Clado- phora rupestris and other algæ growing in the littoral zone on ex- posed coasts, also — though rarely — in sheltered situations. Near Molen on Ostero it occurred at the mouth of a stream, closely overgrown with Diatoms. Unilocular sporangia were observed in Mav and June. Found in the following plaees: — Ost.: Molen (!); Str. : Kvivig !), Velbestad ! , Arge (!), in Sundene between Kvalvig and Thorsvig (!); St. Di mon: at the landing-place ! ; Syd.: Frodebo (!). Order MYRIONEMACEAE. MYRIONEMA Grev. 98. M. globosum (Reinke) Sauvageau, Sur quelques Myrionémacées, Extrait des Ann. d. se. nat., Bot., 8 sér., t.5, 1897, pp.9 — 14; Ascocyclus globosus Reinke, Atlas deutsch. Meeresalg., p. 20, pi. 17; Phycocelis globosus Rosenv., Deuxiéme Mém. sur les Alg. mar. du Groenl., p. 86. To this species I have re ferred a small alga which occurred as small, semiglobular cushions, or, where the latter merged into Botany of the Færoes. 27 420 each other, as irregularly shaped, short, matted expansions on Himanthalia lorea near Vaags Ejde. Fig. 76 represents some frag- ments of the plant which according to my opinion agrees fairly well with the plant figured by Rosenvinge (1. c. fig. 19). The erect filaments, which spring from a basal disc composed of one layer Fig'. 76. Myrioncma globosum (Reinke) Sauvag. a and b erect filaments with plurilocular sporangia and hairs. c part of the base of the plant in transverse section. a and b 200 : 1 ; c 300 . 1. Fig. 77. 1 Myrionema globosum (Reinke) Sauvag. a and b erect filaments with plurilocular sporangia. 200 : 1. of cells, usually bear long hairs the base of which are enclosed in sheaths such as are common in the genus Myrionema (cfr. Sau- vageau, 1. c. p. 44); it was presumably this sheath which Rosen- vinge saw and which induced him to write with reference to the hairs: »poussant quelquefois å travers les sporanges vides«. While Rosenvinge observed in the Greenland piants both basal hairs such as are figured by Reinke, 1. c, and hairs on the erect filaments, the Færoese specimens have hairs on the erect filaments only. 421 Some other specimens, which I have also referred to this spe- cies and which likewise grew near Vaags Ejde, hul epiphytic on Laminaria, have basal hairs only. Lastly, some examples occurred on Rhodymenia near Thors- havn which are quite destitute of hairs. These examples have a basal disc which is composed of filaments more or less free along the margin, but grown together towards the centre. The erect filaments shown in fig. 77 spring from this basal disc and are more slenderly built than is the case with those of the hair-bearing form. The plurilocular sporangia are cylindrical and about 5 — 6 /* thick. Il is possible that I have here been referring several different species to Myrionema globosum and the last-named examples espe- cially appear to rae to differ rather widely from it; nevertheless I think for the present we are justiiied in keeping them together. This species has been found in the littoral zone as well as in the sublittoral in shallow water in fairly exposed situations. It grows as an epiphyte on different larger algæ. Sporangia -bearing specimens were met with in April, May and June. Found hitherto in the following piaces: — Str. : Thorshavn and Arge on Rhodymenia palmata(f); Sj'd.: Frodebo on Himanthalia lorea(\); Vaags Ejde on Himanthalia and Laminaria (!). 99. M. speciosum nov. spec. This plant (fig. 78) consists of a basal disc (fig. 78, h) composed of one layer of cells whence proceed erect filaments. The basal disc has a distinctly marginal growth (fig. 78, g) and is composed of filaments which are loosely connected along the margin, but towards the centre are grown together to a pseudo-parenchymatous tissue. The cells in the basal disc are about 8 — 10 \i broad and of variable length, i. e. from about as long as they are broad to 2 — 3 — 4 times as long. From some distance within the margin the erect filaments begin to occur and proceed from almost all the cells in the disc. The erect filaments attain to a length of about 6 — 800 [i ; at first they consist of a longer or shorter vegetative part, the cells of which are 10 \i thick, and about twice as long as they are thick, and higher up they bear either plurilocular or unilocular sporangia. The plurilocular sporangia vary in form from oblong-ovate to oblong cylindrical, and are usually somewhat curved ; they occur unilaterally and are generally placed close 422 together, one sporangium springing from every cell, but sometimes vegetative cells intervene. The sporangia are divided not only by transverse walls, but also by more or Jess oblique longitudinal walls. As the sporangia gradually arise along the filament a pe- culiar development takes plaee, viz. the cells whence the sporangia spring divide and turn into sporangia, transforming the whole of the sporangia-bearing portion of the erect filament into what may be termed a single, large pluriloeular sporangium. The latter generally ripens and is emptied successively from the apex downwards to the base, though not always, for, as shown in lig. 78, c specimens occur in which some of the sporangia are emptied here and there along the filaments, and most commonly the cells whence these sporangia spring are emptied simultaneously. The pluriloeular sporangia are about 11 \i broad and 40 \a long. I have only found a small quantity of unilocular sporangia (fig. 78, d); the latter vary somewhat in shape being obovate or nearly so and they sometimes form a sporangium in connection with the cell whence they spring, and sometimes are separated from this cell by a wall. Besides the sporangia, the erect filaments bear now and then true Phæosporé-hairs which grow endogenously and have a distinct sheath as indicated by Sauvageau, 1. c. p. 47. These hairs are usually lateral and I have only rarely come across terminal ones such as are shown in fig. 78, a. The hairs are about 6 — 7 /* thick; as I said before they do not occur on all the erect filaments. Besides long branches, quite short sporangia-bearing branchlets with only one vegetative cell are occasionally met with as, e. g. shown in fig. 78, /'. The chromatophores consist of a parietal, irregularly branched or perforated plate (lig. 78, e). This plant was found on the conceptacles of Himanthalia lorea, where it occurred as a short, dense mat, often associated with Myrionema globosum. A species which appears to me to be most closely allied to M. speciosum is M. globosum though the latter dillers considerably from the former, more particularly, e. g. in the different ramiiication of its erect filaments as also in the form and position of its sporangia. Myrionema sj)eriosum somewhat resembles the Ectocarpus tomen- tosoides var. norvegica Gran1, which is fully described and lignred 1 Gran, H. H.: Ed norsk form at' Ectocarpus tomentosoides Farlow y\ Chri- stiania Vidensk. Sc-lsk. Forhandlinger tor 1893. No. 17). 423 Fig. 78. Myrionema speciosum nov. spec. a, b and c- erect filaments with hairs and plurilocular sporangia ; d erect filament with unilocular sporangia; e young filament showing the chromatopliores ; f part of the base with erect filaments in transverse section; .'/ and h the basal disc. a, (>. c. d, y. h 200:1; e, f 350: 1. by Gran. The cells of the main filament whence the sporangia spring, are also in the latter species frequently transformed into sporangia, thus forming what Gran calls half intercalary sporangia, 424 with reference to which he writes1: — »When several such half intercalary sporangia occur in a row at the apex of an assimilative filament then they apparently form one single ramified sporangium. The separate sporangia of which this system is composed ripen in the meantime in basipetal succession and are emptied separately«. Thus, in this point these two piants exactly resemble one another, but otherwise, when examined more closely they pro ve to differ a good deal. This plant has been found on exposed coasts as an epiphyte on Himanthalia lorea as mentioned above. It bore plurilocular and unilocular sporangia in June. Found only on Syd.: Vaags Ejde (!). 100. M. færoense nov. spec. Another Myrionema, which I assume to be new to science, oc- curred on Rhodymenia palmata from Thorshavn associated with Myrionema globosum. Professor Sauvageau to whom I sent some preparations also said that judging from the latter he did not know the plant. Fig. 79 represents some fragments of the plant. The latter has a basal disc (fig. 79, g) composed of a single layer of cells whence spring erect, branching filaments. The basal disc, which has a marginal growth, has in the centre a compact layer of cells, in which the separate filaments can, however, be clearly traced, while along the margin the filaments are more or less loosely connected. The cells in the basal disc are sometimes longer, as much as twice as long as broad, sometimes almost square. The erect filaments arise from the cells and are either simple or ramified. The branch- less filaments bear a solitary terminal plurilocular sporangium (fig. 79, c); the ramified filaments start at the base with a shorter or longer naked part and then often have a fairly large number of branchlets each terminating in a sporangium. The branchlets shorten towards the apex of the filaments, being composed here of one cell only, and are rarely re-branched, as e. g. is the case with those shown in fig. 78, a. I have only found plurilocular sporangia. Their form is oblong-ovate-elliptic and they are about 40 — 80 fx long and 11 — 15 /< broad. When the sporangium is 1 »Naar flere saadanne lialvt interkalære sporangier forekommer paa rad i spidsen af et assimilationsskud, kan de tilsammen tilsyneladende danne et eneste, forgrenet sporangium (fig. 4 — 5). De enkelte sporangier, hvoraf dette system bestaar, modnes imidlertid i basipetal rækkefølge og udtømmes hver for sig.« 425 cmptied it very often happens that a new one grows out inside the one that is emptied. The eells of the erect filaments are about 9 fi broad. I have not found hairs on this plant. This species bears some resemblance to the Mijrionema glo- Fig. 79. Mijrionema færoense nov. spec. a, b and c erect filaments with plurilocular sporangia; rf, e and f part of the buse with erect filaments in transverse section (), a hair (a), and a small portion of the basal disc (c). The plant bore plurilo- cular sporangia in May which were 5 fi thick. Professor Sauvageau to whom I sent a preparation corroborates my deter- mination. Found only on Sj'd. : Famien (!). 103. M. foecundum (Stromf.) Sauvageau. Phycocelis foecunda Stromfelt, Algæ novæ quas ad litora Scandinaviæ indagavit, tab. 3, fig. 5 (Notarisia No. 9, 1888); Sauvageau, Sur quelques Myrionémacées, p. 10. To this species I have referred a small alga which occurred as a short, dense covering on the lamina of Laminaria hijperborea. It closely resembled Reinke's var. seriata (Atlas, tab. 16, figs. 5 — 12), but the plurilocular sporangia, unlike what is said to be the case in Reinke's variety were occasionally divided by longitudinal walls. Reinke writes with reference to his variety (1. c. p. 19). »In der Mitte der Scheibe entspringen farblose Haare und kurze Assimilationsfaden aus den Basalzellen, die Assimilationsfaden wandeln sich der ganzen Lange nach durch Quertheilung der Kig. 80. Myrionema Corunnæ Sauvag. Compare text. 370:1. 427 Gliederzellen in Sporangien um«. Thus, according lo Reinke this variety has properly speaking no erect filaments, they being all transformed into sporangia, and I have noticed thc same to be the case in the Færoese specimens. On this point Sau- vageau (1. c. p. 10) appears to have mis- understood Reinke 's description, and if we l'ollow the view of Kuckuck, who regards the absence of erect filaments as a characteristic mark of the genus Phy- cocelis, then M. foecundum onght to be re- garded as a typical Plujcocelis, but I think with Sauvageau that these two genera can practically hardly be kept distinct. Fig. 81 represents some fragments of this plant. The plurilocular sporangia are about 8 — 9 n broad. It bore plurilocular sporangia in May. Found hitherto only on Str. : Thors- havn (!). 104. M. æcidioides (Rosenv.) Sauvageau, Myrionémacées, pp. 15 — 17; Ectocarpus (Streblonema) æcidioides Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 894; Phycocelis æcidioides Kuckuck, Bemerkungen z. mar. Algen- veget, von Helgoland, 1894, p. 234. Found in the lamina of Laminaria færoensis, and agrees fairlv well with Rosenvinge's description and tigure (1. c.) as also with Kuckuck's (1. c). The Færoese specimens come near the Greenland and Heligoland specimens in not having the vertical, vegetative, assimilative filaments described by Foslie (New or critical Norw. Alg., p. 24). Plurilocular sporangia were met with in abundance, and in a vigorously developed plant there occurred just a few unilocular sporangia of the same form as those ligured by Rosen vinge. Sporangiferous specimens were observed in October. Found hitherto only in the following piaces: — Ost.: Skaalefjord (H. J.); Str.: Kvalvig (H. J.). If searched for more closely it will doubt- less prove to he commonly distributed. Fig.81 Mgrionema foecundum (StrOmf, Sauvag. a part of the plant with plurilocular sporangia; b part ol" the plant with a hair. a 300: 1 ; b 200: 1. CHILIONEMA Sauvag. 105. Ch. spec. A small plant of the Myrionemaceae occurred on the lamina of a Laminaria gathered by H.Jonsson, with reference to which Prof. 428 Sauvageau, to whom I sent some preparations, writes to me: »C'est un Chilionema nov. spec, mais vos preparations sont insuffisantes«. Later on I have tried to examine the plant more closely, but have only partially succeeded in doing so owing to the material being apparently rather undeveloped. In fig. 82 I have shown some frag- WgD □ Fig. 82. Chilionema spec. Different parts of the plant, compare text. it. b 200:1; c, d, e, f, g 300:1. ments ol* the plant. The basal disc has a distinctly marginal growth (fig. 82, f and g) and consists of closely united, branching filaments. The greater part of the disc is composed of two layers of cells owing lo the cells dividing in a direction parallel to the surface of the disc; only liere and there a few undividcd cells occur. The cells are about 10 ;i broad. As is characteristic of the genus Chilionema (cfr. Sauvageau, Myrionémacées, p. 103), the erect filaments and sporangia occur in scattered groups on the surface of the basal disc, surrounded by t29 a more or less sterile belt. The erect filaments are about 70 — 100 n long and about 9 u broad. The plurilocular sporangia are most commonly sessile, but stalked examples also occur. They are oblong-ovate, olien some- what lapering towards the top, and are aboul 20 ,« thick and about 50 /i long. I have nol observed quite ripe or emptied sporangia, nor did I come across hairs. This plant, which formed small, dark-hrown patches on the lamina of a Laminaria, was found bearing plurilocular sporangia in October. Found hitherto only on Str. : Kvalvig II. J.). MIKROSYPHAR Kuck. 106. M. Polysiphoniæ Kuck., Bedrage zur Kenntnis d. Meeres- algen. 3. Die Gattung Mikrosyphar Kuckuck mit Taf. IX und X (Aus d. Biol. Anstalt auf Helgoland. 1897). Found endophytic in Polysiphonia urceolata and Callithamnion scopulornm which grew between tide-marks as well as in the sub- littoral zone in more shallow water. Sporangia-bearing specimens were observed in June. Ost.: Ore(!); Str.: Hojvig ! , Kvivig (!). It has been met with in a few piaces only, but is doubtless ratber widely distributed. 107. M. Zosteræ Kuck., 1. c. p. 2,"). Grows on Zostera marina ^xaetly in the way as described by Kuckuck amongst Diatoms on the epidermis of Zostera. It often forms fairly large pseudo-parenchymatous patches such as those observed by Svedelius1 near Gotland. Found only on Syd.: Vaagfjord (!). SORAPION Kuckuck. 108. S. Kjellmani (Wille) Rosenv., Deuxiéme Mémoire sur les Algues marines du Groenland, p. 95; Lithoderma Kjellmani Wille, Wille og Kolderup Rosenvinge, Alger fra Novaia-Zemlia og Kara- Havet, p. 11 (89). A small, brown crustaceous alga, which was found on a Cha>- tomorpha Melagonium gathered near Thorshavn, exaclly agreed with Wille's description and ligures (1. c). It had a quite similar basal 1 Svedelius, N.: Studier <">fver Ostersjons Hafsalgflora, p. 105. 430 disc and the erect filaments formed a parenchymatous tissue an- swering to Wille's description. Further, only one chromatophore occurred in the cells. Fully developed sporangia I have not met with, but notwithstanding this drawback, I have no doubt as to the correctness of my determination. Found only on Str. : Thorshavn (!). LITHODERMA Aresch. 109. L. fatiscens Aresch. Found in the sublittoral zone at a depth of 2 — 20 fathoms both in the open sea and in the interior of fjords. It grows some- times on stones and sometimes on shells. It was gathered in June, July, October and November, but the specimeiis I have examined were sterile. Found hitherto in the following piaces: — Vid. (H. J.); Bordo: Haraldsund (!); Kuno (H.J.); Ost: Glibre (H.J.); Str.: Kalbakfjord (H.J.), between Thorsvig and Kvalvig (!), Gliversnæs (!). PETRODERMA Kuck. 110. P. maculiforme Kuck., Bemerkungen, II, p. 382. Some small, brown patches occurred on smooth rock-faces close to high-water mark near Saxen (Str.), which on a closer investigation were seen to be caused by the growth of a small alga seemingly precisely similar to the present species. A chromatophore occurred in the cells, which corresponds to Kuckuck's description, and both the unilocular and plurilocular sporangia exactly resembled Kuckuck's figure, with the exception that the unilocular sporangia were some- what larger than he described them. Found only on Str.: Saxen (!). RALFSIA Berk. 111. R. verrucosa (Aresch.) J. Ag. Reinke, Atlas, pi. 5 and 6, figs. 1 — 13; Kjellm., N. I., p. 309 (249). This species belongs to the littoral zone and grows by prefe- rence on exposed coasts, where it occurs associated with Hilden- brandia especially in rock-pools, covering the bottom of the latter with a rough, yellowish -brown crusl ; such crusls are sometimes of considerable extent, thus, in a large, Hal rock-pool, near Vaags Ejde on the wesl coast of Sydero, which contained only :i few inches of water at ebb-tide, Ralfsia verrucosa occurred over an 431 area of several square nulres. But it mav also be mel with on shellered coasls; having been found, e. g. at the head of Kalbakfjord growing on stones in shallow water; according lo Kjellmans report (1. c), in the Norwegian Polar Sea it grows by preference in sheltered situations. Specimens bearing plurilocular sporangia were met with in Mav and July. This species, which is doubtlcss widely distributed, has been found at the folio wing piaces: —Vid.: rock on the north side of the island ' Str. : Kalbakfjord I. common in rock-pools between Hojvig and Thors- havn (!. Thorshavn Simmons, !), Myggenæs (!); Sandd: Sandsbugt (!); Syd.: Kvalbo (Lyngbye, !', Vangs Ejde (!). The present species was already found by Lyngbye and there is a specimen of it in his herbarium in Copenhagen named Zonaria deusta. It was gathered by Lyngbye »ad s;ixa maritima littns Qualboe« on July 15th 1817. Il has unilocular sporangia. In Hydrophyt. 1. c. p. 19 Lyngbye mentions Zonaria deusta, but does not report it from the Færoes. On a stone near Glibre in Skaalefjord Helgi Jonsson gathered a Ralfsia, which appears to come very near the one mentioned by Kuckuck in »Bemerk ungen«, I, p. 241. The specimens in questions — two in number — had a smooth, shiny, yellowish- brown, marginal area, and a darker, more rough central area, in which dark, radiating stripes could distinctly be traced. Even when micro scopically examined it closely resembled Kuckuck's plant; the margin of the thailus in the Færoese examples being decidedly arched just as described and figured by Kuckuck, though the cuticula was somewhat thinner in the Færoese spe- cimens. With reference to the arched margin Kuckuck (1. c. p. 242) writes: — »Jedoch scheint es gestaltet, die starke Wolbung mit einer Neigung zum bilateral-symmetrischen Bau der Ralfsia deusta in Zusammenhang zu bringen«. It was consequently interesting that the thailus in the Færoese examples now and then showed signs of being bilateral, small portions occurring, here and there, in which downward-turned filaments as well could distinctly be observed, in contradistinction to Ihe majority of the filaments which turn upwards as in Kuckuck's fig. 6, though these down- ward filaments were far from being as distinet as those in the specimen described and figured by Batters in »Marine Algæ of Berwick-on-Tweed«, p. 66 (286), tab. X, lig. 8. I did not come across any hairs. Here and there, where the thailus were not closely pres- sed against the stone there occurred numerous. strongly interlaced 432 rhizoids. Unfortunately, my specimens wcre still sterile. Batters has referred his example which bore plurilocular sporangia to R. verrucosa. And Kuckuck has by the help of Batters's original example proved that his Heligoland plant is identical with the English. Kuckuck ends thus: — »Es wird mir vielleicht gelingen, spåter einmal durch Beobachtungen im Freien und an Kulturen die hier behandelte Frage endgultig zu entscheiden. Vorlåufig kann ich nur meinen Zweifel dariiber aussprechen, ob unsere Ralfsia zu verrucosa gehort, und mochte eher vermuten, dass R. deusta vorliegt. Wenigstens zeigt die Pflanze, nach welcher Batters seine oben zitirte Figur anfertigte, vollkommen entwickelte Bilateralitåt«. But Ralfsia verrucosa also may occasionally show signs of being bilateral and I am therefore of opinion — Dr. Kuckuck, with whom I discussed the point, said very much the same thing — that the specimens in question are nothing more than a form of Ralfsia verrucosa, which possibly, by growing in the sublittoral zone, has acquired a somewhat different appearance; or what is perhaps most probable, as Batters says, — piants bearing plurilocular sporangia differ from those with unilocular fruit. 112. (?)R. clavata (Carm.) Farl., Mar. Alg., p. 88; Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 899. Amongst some different algæ scraped from rocks at a height of some 8 — 9 feet above high-water mark near Famien (.Syd.j there oc- curred an insignificant quantity of a small Ralfsia which probably be- longs to this species, but the sporangia being unripe the determination is open to doubt. it may, however, be presumed that this species, which has been met with in the surrounding countries both to the north and south of the Færoes, also occurs there. Order SPHACELARIACEAE. SPHACELAMA Lyngb.1 113. S. britannica Sauvag., Remarques sur les Sphacélariacées (Journal de Botanique 1901, p. 50). Found near high-water mark or somewhat above it on damp rocks especially in caves and rock-clefts, where it occurs as a short, dark-brown mat often in association with other algæ, e. g. Calli- thamnion, Ectocarpus littoralis, Rhodochbrton Rothii, etc. Grows on fairly exposed coasts. 1 Professor Sauvageau has kindly determined my material of Sphacelaria 433 Specimens bearing unilocular sporangia were observed in July. I'ound hitherto only on Sir.: Kvivig (!), Gliversnæs (!). 114. S. cæspitula Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 105. Found hitherto in the Færoes only by Lyngby e, who writes with reference to it: - - »Habitat ad stipitem Laminariæ digitatæ ad littus Færoense rarius«. The specimens in Lyngbye's Herbarium are from Næs on Ostero. 115. S. cirrhosa (Roth) Ag. Regarding the specimens I have referred to this species, Sau- vageau writes to me: — »c'est en effet ce que l'on apelle le S. cir- rhosa. Mais je n'ai pas encore terminé l'étude de cette espéce pour mon mémoire en cours de publication, et je serai peut-étre obligé de la scinder en plusieurs autres«. Until then I report it under this name. This species has been found epiphytic on Desmarestia aculeatu and Chætomorpha Melagonium in exposed as well as in sheltered localities. Specimens bearing propagula were met with in December. Found hitherto only on Svino (H. J.); Syd.: Vaagfjord (H. J.). 116. S. furcigera Kutz. A Sphacelaria which I had gathered near Thorshavn on a La- minaria Sauvageau has determined as this species. Sauvageau writes to me concerning it: — »Bien que cela puisse vous étonner, je considére cette espéce comme le S. furcigera, qui n'est pas exclusive- ment tropical comme on le dit. C'est cette plante que Pringsheim a représenté comme S. olivacea å propagules, et M. Kuckuck comme S. furcigera var. saxatilis. Récemment M. Kuckuck (in litt.) revenait å l'opinion que ces propagules appartenaient au S. olivacea, mais moi, je tiens pour le furcigera«. This plant has been gathered from 3 — 4 fathoms of water where it grew on the stem of a Laminaria in a fairly exposed lo- cality. It had propagula in May. Found hitherto only on Str. : Thorshavn (!). CHÆTOPTERIS Kutz. 117. Ch. plumosa (Lyngb.) Kutz. In Rostrup's list (l.c. p.86) this species is mentioned as found in the Færoes, Rostrup writes: — »Specimens have been sent to us by Mr. Randropp of Thorshavn«. And in Rostrup's collec- tion of Færoese algæ there are some good examples of this species, 434 I, consequently, mention it as from the Færoes, though I very much doubt its occurring there at all as it has never been found there, either by Lyngbye or by any investigator since his time, e. g. Simmons, Helgi Jonsson or myself. It is just possible that Mr. Randropp has confused the labels or made some other similar mistake. But, on the other hånd, I would emphasize the faet that it would be Strange if Chætopteris plumosa were absent along the Færoese coasts, it having been found along the eoasts of the nearest adjacent countries. CLADOSTEPHUS (Ag.) J. Ag. 118. Cl. spongiosus (Lightf.) Ag. Kjellm., N. I., p. 336 (272). This plant occurred on the open coast in a very exposed locality, where it grew in rock-pools near low-water mark. Being gathered about the middle of May it was sterile. Found only near Gjov (Ost.) on the projecting point between the village and the large ravine. Order ELACHISTACEAE. ELACHISTA Duby. 119. E. fucicola (Vell.) Aresch., Pugill. 1, p. 235, tab. 8, fig. 67, and Phyeeae scandinavicae, p. 155, tab. IX, fig. C; Kjellm., N. I., p. 314 (253). var. typica Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 878. var. lubrica (Rupr.) Rosenv., 1. c. The cells in the erect filaments of var. typica are very variable, being sometimes longer than they are broad, sometimes only half as long as their breadth. The thickness of the filaments also varies considerably, the latter often attaining to a breadth of 50 fi and even more; the thickest filament I measured was about 65 fi. As E. flaccida has been reported from the Færoes (see below), one is led to think that these specimens with thick, assimilative filaments mighl possibly be small examples of the latter species, but in all the specimens which I examined the assimilative filaments tapered gradually to the base, and not suddenly, as is characleristic of Elachista flaccida., the assimilative filaments of the latter are also much thicker. The main form is an extremely common epiphyte on different Fucaceæ in the lilloral zone and occurs both on exposed coasts 435 and in sheltered situations. It bore unilocular sporangia in the spring and summer months and in October and November, and appears to be able to frnctify all Ihr year round. var. lubrica bas been found epiphytic on Halosaccion ramentaceum and bad unilocular sporangia in Mav. While the main form is extremely common everyvvhere along the coasts of the Færoes, var. lubrica has been found only on Bord 6: Klaksvig (!). Elaehista flaccida (Dillw.) Aresch. is reported from the Færoes by Lyngbye under the nanie of Conferva flaccida (Hydro- pli yt., p. 146): — »Habitat ad littora Færoensia, Fuco vesiculoso insi- dens, baud raro«. The specimens in his herbarium are, however, Elaehista fucicola. Simmons also (1. c. p. 270) mentions E. flaccida »auf Himanthalia lorea bei Thorshavn und auf Eucus uesicnlosus im Qualbofjord«. The specimens1 from Kvalbofjord growing on Fucus nesicutosus which I have had for examination proved, however, to be E. fucicola. 120. E. scutulata (Smith) Duby. Thuret, Etudes phycol., p. 19, tab. 8; Thuret, Recherches sur les Zoospores des Algues, p. 27, tab. 25. Grows on the receptacles of Himanthalia lorea. Found with unilocular sporangia in August and November, having, moreover, young plurilocular sporangia in the latter month. Doubtless an autumn and winter alga, as I have searched for it in vain amongst the material gathered in spring and summer. Found hitherto in the following piaces only: — S vin 6 (H.J.); Syd.: Kvalbo (H. S.). LEPTONEMA Reinke. 121. L. fasciculatum Reinke, Atlas, p. 13, tab. 10; Elaehista fasciculata (Reinke) Gran, Algevegetationen i Tonsbergfjorden, p. 29. var. subcy lindrica Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 879. As I quite follow the opinion expressed by Svedelius in »Studier ofver Ostersjons Hafsalgtlora«, p. 94, I do not hesitate in maintaining Leptonema as a genus though it is certainly closely related to Elaehista. The Færoese specimens agreed well with Rosenvinge's de- scription (1. c); the vegetative filaments were about 8 — 9 p broad; the fructifying 13 — 14 /*. 1 One presented by Simmons to the Botanical Museum in Copenhagen, and one kindly lent me by the Botanical Museum in Lund. Botany of the Færoes. 28 436 Specimens bearing unilocular sporangia occurred in May and June. Found hitherto only on Ost.: Glibre (!), Fuglefjord (!). Order PUNCTARIACEAE. PUNCTARIA Grev. 122. P. latifolia Grev.1 Thuret & Bornet, Etudes phycologiques p. 13, pl.V. To begin with I was very doubtful to what species I should refer some small Phyllitis-Uke algæ which I found growing as an epiphyte on H alidrys siliquosa near Glibre in Skaalefjord. I first took them to be broad Desmotrichum undulatum, as they agreed fairly well on the whole with Lyngbye's figure of Ulva plantag inifolia ji temiior (Hydrophyt., p. 31, tab. 6 B), which figure Reinke in »Algenflora d. westl. Ostsee«, p. 55, refers to Desm. un- dulatum. But on closer examination some of the specimens were found bearing a few immersed plurilocular sporangia at the apex of the thailus, which had quite a different form from those described and figured by Reinke under Desmotrichum undulatum, while they agreed well with those figured by Thuret et Bor net in their above-mentioned work under P. latifolia. These sporangia-bearing piants were, moreover, composed of two lavers of cells which according to Thuret et Bornet (Le. p. 15) generally occur in young -- sometimes even in large — examples of Pund. latifolia; there were numerous hairs at the margin of the thailus, as well as on the surface where they occurred in small tufts; and lastly the cells were rather large and fairly regular in form, so that all the characters pertaining to Punctaria latifolia were present. But the specimens being very small I was not quite sure of their really belonging to this species. During my above-mentioned visit to Heligoland I showed my preparations to Dr. Kuckuck, and he afterwards wrote to me that the specimens bearing the plurilocular sporangia should undoubtedly be referred to P. latifolia — the sporangia of which exactly agreed with those of the former — while they could by no means be referred to P. plantaginea, on which Dr. Kuckuck had found the 1 In Analecta algologica, Continuatio III, J. Agardfa refers tins species to ;i new genus Homoeostroma founded by him. 437 plurilocular sporangia, hitherto unknown in this species, which were also immersed, but were quite different in form from those of P. latifolia. ()n tbe other hånd, some quite small specimens, which occurred among tbe sporangia-bearing piants, and which, like tbese grew epipbytic on Halidrys, were pronounced by Kuekuck to be unquestionably Punctaria plantaginea, tbe young piants of tbe latter species having marginal bairs and closely resembling a Des- motrichum undulatum. I have furlber referred to P. latifolia tbe P. plantaginea of my preliminary list, which is by the way wrongly reported from Thors- bavn it having been found in Kalbakfjord. On closer examination of the few dried specimens which were all I collected there, the thailus proved to be composed of two lavers of cells only, and tbey agreed altogether well with Thuret et Bornet's figure, 1. c. Lastly, a specimen of the P. plantaginea mentioned by Si m mon s (1. c. p. 270) of which be kindly sent me an example, on being examined more closely also proved to agree fairly well with P. latifolia, amongst other things in the faet of its thailus containing two lavers of cells, but the specimen in question is unfortunately sterile. I also showed Dr. Kuekuck this specimen which he pronounced to be undoub- tedly P. latifolia. f. angustifolia Kiitz., Tab. phyc, Vol. 6, tab. 45. Some specimens gathered by Ostenfeld from Trangisvaagfjord and by myself epiphytic on Laminaria near Arge, I have referred to what Kiitzing (1. c.) calls Punctaria angustifolia. One of the specimens bore quantities of sporangia, a transverse section of which showed that they had exactly tbe same form as those in Kiitzings fig. (1. c). The form of tbe plant also agreed well with Kiitzing's habit illustration. Judging from its known habitats, P. latifolia occurs along the Fær- oese coasts in sheltered situations epiphytic on larger algæ, e. g. Laminaria and Halidrys, and at no great depth. Fructifying specimens were found in May only. Found hitherto in the following piaces: — Ost.: Glibre {!); Str. : Kalbakfjord (!) ; Syd. : Trangisvaagfjord Si m mons, 1. c. mentions having found it abundantly on Laminaria saccharina and L. hyperborea ; f. . Willi regard to the unilocular sporangia, I am not quite sure that they really are such, the cell-contents having been destroyed. What I have referred to them are some large cells, of which several fre- quently occurred close together on a few branches. I have shown them in lig. 83, h and i, and I think they agree fairly well with Kuckuck's figure, and also correspond well with regard to size, being about 30 — 40 fi broad. The free filaments are about 16 — 18 a broad. As I said before, I can state nothing for certain as to cell- contents, chromatophores, etc. (but I may point out that in some of the cells the chromatophores appeared to be ribbon -shaped or reticular, a character which distinguishes this species from the other hitherto-known Plucostroma-species), nor do I know anything about the development of the plant, nor how it penetrates into the La- minar ia1. This plant has been found on Laminaria færoensis which grew in shallow water. It bore both plurilocular and unilocular sporangia (?) in July. Found hitherto only on Str.: Sundene between Thorsvig and Kvalvig (!). Order DICTYOSIPHONACEAE. IHCTYOSIPHON Grev. 133. D. foeniculaceus (Huds.) Grev. Kjellm., N. I., p. 333 (269); Scytosiphon foeniculaceus Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 63. Grows in shallow water especially in sheltered localities; occurs commonly as an epiphyte on Chordaria flagelliformis. Sporangia-bearing specimens were found in summer. This species for the exanii nation of which I have not had much material is undoubtedly rather conimon along the Færoese coasts as reportcd by Lyngb ve, who writes: — »Ad insulas Færoenses copiose«. 1 Ph. pustiilosum w;is found endophytic by Rosenvinge (Deux. Mém., p. 68) in Dehtmcirea alteniiata. 444 134. D. hippuroides (Lyngb.) Kutz. Kjellm., N. I., p. 332 (268); Scytosiphon hippuroides Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 63. I have had but comparatively little material of this species for examination. One of the collections resembled very much No. 322 in Hauck and Rickter's »Phykotheka universalis«. This species like the preceding was found especially in sheltered situations in shallow water and mostly epiphytic on Chordaria flagelliformis. Sporangia-bearing specimens were met with in May and October. Found in the following localities only: — Ost.: Ejde (H. S.), Glibre (H. S.); Str.: Kollefjord (H. S.), Kalbakfjord (H. S., !), Kvalvig (H. J.). 135. D. Ekmani Aresh., Observationes 3, p. 33; Coilonema Ek- mani Kjellm., N. I., p. 329 (266). The Færoese specimens have now and then one or at most only a few lateral branches. Found in sheltered piaces in shallow water epiphytic on Scy- tosiphon lomentarius. It bore young sporangia in May. Found only: — Bordo: Klaksvig (!). Order DESMARESTIACEAE. DESMARESTIA (Lamour.) Grev. 136. D. aculeata (L.) Lamour. Kjellm., N. I., p. 324 (261); Ro- senv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 857. Desmia aculeata Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 34. This species grows in the sublittoral zone and occurs down to a depth of at least 10 fathoms. It grows by choice in the open sea, but is also met with abundantly in sheltered situations. It generally grows attached to stones and rocks, but also now and then occurs as an epiphyte on the stems of Laminaria; in sheltered localities it is also frequently found in masses lying detached even on sandy and muddy bottoms as Ro s en vinge points out is the case in Greenland. It bore unilocular sporangia at the end of October; while ga- thering it Jonsson saw the spores move. The sporangia, only lately discovered by Kuckuck, and found ahnost simultaneously in some winter-material from Denmark by Rosen vinge, were pre- cisely similar to Kuckuck's ligure (Bemerkungen I, 1894, p. 247). 445 Assimilative hairs occurred on the plant in May and .lime, and are especially common as late as May, while in June hair-bearing specimens bccome rare. This agrees very well with what Rosen- vinge says is the case in South Greenland where the hairs t'all oli' al the latest in June, while in North Greenland hair-bearing specimens have been observed as late as July and August. This species is extremely common along the coasts of the Færoes ;is already reported by Lyngbye: — Ad insulas Færoenses copiose«. var. media (Ag.) J. Ag., Species Alg., I, p. 168; Rosenv. , Grønl. Ha valg., p. 858; Desm. hybrida Kiitz., Phyc. germ., p. 274, Tab. phyc, Vol. IX, tab. 93. I think that Ectocarpus densus Lyngb. (Hydrophyt., p. 133) ought also to be referred to this variety; it is at any rate a richly hair-bearing Desmarestia aculeata.1 The Færoese specimens exactly resemhle the above-mentioned figure and answer in other respects very well both to Rosenvinge's description (1. c.) and to the Greenland specimens in the herbarium of the Botanical Museum in Copenhagen. The specimens referred to this variety are far more densely covered with hairs than is the case with the main form and the hairs are also much longer. Sometimes a few, sometimes several of the bottom branches are opposite. It also retains its hairs much longer than formå typica, specimens gathered in July and August being closely covered with hairs. Spines were wanting, only a single specimen having on one of its branches a few which were not, however, typically developed. Thus we see typical var. media differs rather widely from typical Desm. aculeata and, consequently, it ought perhaps more properly to be regarded as a distinct species. In habit it reminds one much of Chorda tomentosa if one can imagine the latter branched. It has been found in the following piaces: — Vid.: Near Viderejde, great quantities were found lloating in the sen atter a storm !); Bord 6: In Haraldsund near Aaerne !); Str.: Gliversnæs (!), Kvivig (Lyngbye ; Syd.: Trangisvaagfjord (Ostenfeld). 137. D. ligulata (Lightf.) Lamour. Desmia ligulata Lyngb., Hy- drophyt., p. 33. I once fished up some specimens of this species in a plaice net from a depth of some 3 — 4 fathoms in Kvalbofjord (Syd), but 1 The Færoese specimen preserved in Lyngbye's Herbarium is certainly very small and has no opposite branches, but otherwise it agrees well with the spe- cimen of Desm. aculeata which I have referred to tbis variety. 446 as they were gathered from a sandy bottom they were doubtless free-floating examples; otherwise I only found them washed ashore, and it appears as if the specimens found by other collectors were also only such as had been cast ashore; thus, Lyngbye does not enter into any details regarding its habitat. I am therefore not prepared to say anything definite regarding its habitat around the Færoes, but I believe it grows along fairly open sea-shores and probably in the sublittoral zone, as it can only bear a short period of desiccation without injury. I found it bearing assimilative hairs in June and July. It is hardly common along the coasts of the Færoes. Lyngbye (1. c.) writes with reference to it: — »Habitat ad littora Færoensia haud frequens, ut in sinn Qualboe Suderoe, et ad littns Molen prope Eide Osteroe«. Rostrup eollected specimens of it on the east coast of Stromo where it was also found by me, viz. near Thorshavn and Hvide- næs. Again, Si ni mons observed it near Ejde (Ost.) and I near Kvalbo (Syd.), i. e. in the same piaces where Lyngbye found it. 138. D. viridis (Mtill.) Lamour. Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 859; Dichloria viridis (Mull.) Grev., Kjellm., N. I., p. 325 (263); Gigartina viridis Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 44. Found growing in the sublittoral zone down to a depth of some 10 fathoms; it rarely occurs at greater depths and Kjellman's statement (1. c.) that specimens were found near Spitzbergen down to a depth of 150 fathoms must undoubtedly be due to detached floating examples having been carried by the stream to deeper waters. It grows by preference in the open sea but mav also be met with in somewhat sheltered situations. It is generally found growing attached to stones and rocky bottoms, but also occurs, though rarely, as an epiphyte, especially on the stem of Laminaria. This is a very common species of the Færoese coasts, as was pointed out by Lyngbye, who writes: -- »Ad insulas Færoenses copiose«. Order CHORDARIACEAE. CHORDARIA (Ag.). 139. Ch. flagelliformis (Miill.) Ag. Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 51 ; Kjellm., N. I., p. 310 (249). As Foslie (Contrib. I, p. 90) refers all the Norwegian specimens 447 from East-Finmarken to f. typica, so I am of opinion that all the Færoese specimens mav be referred to this form. This species grows holli on l'airly exposed shores and in sheltered localities, but is most eommon in the latter. It generally occurs in the subliltoral zone, but not at any considerable depth; where the tide is not felt it is eommon in 1 to 2 feet of water. Most frequeatly it is found attached to stones, but may also occur epiphytic on larger algæ. Sporangia-bearing plants were found in November and De- cember, but the summer specimens which I have examined were sterile. This species is quite eommon along the Færoese coasts and was already found by I . y n g b y e. CASTAGNEA Deri), el Sol. 140. C. virescens (Carm.) Thur. Le Jolis, Alg. mar. de Cherb., p. 85; Eudesme virescens ,1. G. Ag., Kjellm., N. I., p. 312 (251). Found in a sheltered situation in quite shallow water growing on stones. It had sporangia in July. It appears to be very rare along the coasts of the Færoes as it has been found once only, and in a small quantity, in Sundene on the coast of Stromo between Thorsvig and Kvalvig (!). LEATHESIA (Gray) J. G. Ag. 141. L. difformis (L.) Aresch. Kjellm., N. I., p. 313 (252). It belongs to the littoral zone and has been mostly met with in sheltered localities. It generally occurs as an epiphyte on Co- rallina officinalis, but also grows on rocky bottoms. It was found bearing plurilocular sporangia in July. Found in the following localities: —Ost.: Ejde (H. S.), Selletræ (H.S.); Str.: Kollefjord (H. S.), Kalbakfjord (!), Thorshavn (H. S.); Syd.: Trangis- vaagfjord (,11. S.. Simmons, 1. c. p. 270, mentions it on the whole as eommon: — »als Epiphyt in der Corallinaformation , wo sie selten zu fehlen scheint<. The reason why Simmons found it so frequently is doubtless that it is most luxuriantly developed at the end of summer. Order CHORDACEAE. CHOHDA (Stackh.) Lamour. 142. Ch. filum (L.) Stackh. Lyngh., Hydrophyt., p. 72; Kjellm., N.I., p. 307 (245); Reinke, Atlas, tab. 26— 28. 448 This species grows in shallow water down to a depth of a few fathoms, especially in sheltered situations. It is consequently com- mon in the interior of fjords and mav even be met with right at their head where the water is brackish owing to the fresh-water streams entering the sea. It grows by preference on gravelly bottoms attaching itself to pebbles and shells, and where the water is V2 to 1 fathom deep it often forms a dense growth; the topmost part of the thallus may then be seen floating on the surface of the water. Sporangia-bearing piants were found in May, June, July and October. Specimens from the spring months were young and still small, during the summer they attained to their highest development, while specimens gathered as early as October were more or less decayed. It probably dies away completely during the winter, as is doubtless also the case along the Danish shores. This species is common along the sheltered coasts of the Færoes. Bordo: Klaksvig (H. S.,!); Ost.: Skaalefjord (H.S., H.J.), Kvalvig (H. J., !.), Sundelaget H.S.); Str.: Kalhakfjord (Rostrup, !); Nolso: Ejde(!); Syd.: Trangisvaagfjord (Ostenfeld, !). 143. Ch. tomentosa Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 74; Reinke, Atlas, tab. 20. This beautiful alga was found in the sublittoral zone both in shallow water on rocky coasts, and in deeper water (some 5 to 6 fathoms) in Haraldsund where a strong current was running. Here it grew attached to stones and shells associated with Laminaria, Alaria and other algæ, and occurred abundantly in vigorous ex- amples several feet in length. Fructifying specimens were found in May. Found hitherto only on Bordo: Aaerne near Haraldsund (!); Ost.: Molen (!) and Ejde (!). Order LAMINARIACEAE. ALARIA Grev. 144. A. esculenta (L.) Grev. Kjellm., N. I., p. 265 (212), Handb., p. 19; Laminaria esculenta Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 23. f. tgpica. f. pinnata (Gunn.). Fig. 84 represents the form most commonly met with in the Færoes, and the one which I regard as typical. The lamina is long and very narrow in comparison. One speeimen which was 449 Fig. 84. .Maria esculenla (L.) Grev. f. tgpica. From St. Dimon. (F. B. fot.j. (Scnle: 10 centimetres). 3x/2 metres long, measured at its broadest only 101/* cm., and another 2 metres in length was only 5 cm. broad. In their very narrow, almost linear sporophylls they resemble f. fasciculata Strom- felt (Om Algvegetationen vid Islands Klister, [>. 38). Specimens 450 bearing such narrow sporophylls occur on exposed coasts; in more sheltered localities the sporophylls get broader and the same often applies also to the lamina. These specimens thus constitute a transition to the broader f. pinnata. This species occurs gregariously in enormous masses from about low-water mark to several fathoms below it, but in particu- larly exposed piaces it can grow somewhat above low-water mark, and in narrow rock-clefts washed constantly by the sea it may be found up to 1 — 2 metres above sea-level at low tide. It grows by preference along open sea-shores, but may also occur in the interior of fjords in more sheltered localities, and is most commonly met with on steeply sloping or quite perpendicular rock-faces and in faet on rocks in general. Fructifying specimens were found in May, June, July and November. This alga undoubtedly attains to its highest development in spring and early summer. With regard to its change of leaves Wille writes in »Beitråge zur physiologischen Anatomie der Laminariaceen«, Christiania, 1897, p. 7: — »dieses Endblalt fållt jeden Herbst ab und wåchst von neuen heraus im Laufe des Winters«, but I do not think that this is always so, as at any rate along the Færoes I never came across specimens which showed the slightest indication of a regular change of leaves as is the case, e. g. in most of the Laminaria- species. My own observations lead me to think that the leaf keeps on growing at its base during the greater part of the year, while the apex is continually so to speak worn away by the force of the waves. All the specimens I have seen had leaves which were al- ways fresh at the base, while towards the apex they gradually become older and more and more tattered and the segments were gradually torn away so that the midrib only was left and when examined more closely the latter also proved to be scratched and worn at the apex (cfr. fig. 84). It is true that I have only seen specimens from April to August and October to December and it is very probable that the leaf grows more rapidly at certain seasons, but I feel convinced that a regular change of leaves does not take place. I think Wille's observation (based on the material from Mandal gathered in August) must doubtless be regarded as a result of the warm season which is less favourable to this species at so southerly a habitat. 1 1 In connection with this 1 would call attention to the faet that in the mu- seum in Copenhagen wc have some specimens gathered by Dr. Hosenvinge near 451 This species which is extremely common along the coasts of the Færoes was already reported ironi the latter place by Landt, Le. p. 230. Lyngbye writes with reference to it: — »ad insulas Færoenses copiose, nbi rupibus præruptis in superficie maris adnascens summae lluctnum vehementiæ exponitur«. — f. pinnata has beeo found at a few piaces in the fjords, e. g. in Trangis vaagfjord Hosenvinge). Ho. A. Pylaii (Bory) .1. G. Ag. Kjellm., X. I., p.266 (213), Handb., p. 20; Rosenv., Grønl. Ha valg., p. 838. I have only felt justilied in referring a few specimens to this species, and they were all rather small. The specimens in question had a distinctly two-edged mid-rib; and as soon as the latter showed the slightest indication of being four-sided or even if the two sides only ran parallel along a short distance I re ferred the specimens to Alaria esculenta, as young specimens of the latter species often have a mid-rib which must most properly be cailed two-edged. This species occurs in fairly sheltered localities where it grows in company with the preceding. Fructifying specimens were found in April, May, June and Octoher. It has hitherto been found only in the following piaces: — Ost.: Skaalefjord (!), Saltnæs (H. J.); Str. : Thorshavn (!); Syd.: Trangisvaag (Rosenvinge). This species was already found by Lyngbye as J. Agardh's Her- barium contains a specimen gathered by him which according to Agardh's determination (cfr. J. Ag., Spec. Algarum I, p. 144) belongs to this species. Of the genus Alaria Lyngbye's Herbarium in Copenhagen contains some small fragments only, but they all doubtless belong to Alaria esculenta. LAMINARIA Larax. 146. L. saccharina (L.) Lamx. Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 21. f. linearts J. Ag., Spec. Alg. I, p. 132; De Laminarieis, p. 12. f. bullata C. Ag., Synopsis Alg. Scandinav. . p. 18; Kjellm., Handb., p. 24. f. grandis Kjellm., Handb., p. 24. This plant varies very much and a large number of forms have been described (see, e. g. Kjellm., 1. c, and Foslie, Ueber die Laminarien Norwegens, p. 90). I think the three above-mentioned forms are distinguishable in the Færoese material. The specimens referred to f. linearis (see fig. 85) are marked by their long, narrow lamina, which is highly rugose and slightly or not at all waved, Haugesund in August on the west coast of Norway which do not show the least indication of luning changed leaves. the leaves as in the Færoese specimens being worn at the apex and growing gradually younger towards the base. Botany of the FærOes. 29 452 and has generally no marginal area at all; on the other hånd, it has sometimes a smooth, median stripe. The lamina is thick and of a tough, leathery consistency. The Færoese specimens differ from those mentioned by Kjell man in N. I., p. 287 (230) in ahvays having a short stem whieh passes insensibly into the lamina. With regard to the size of the specimens referred to this form the fol- lowing measurements may serve as an example: — Length of plant Breadth of lamina Length of stem 2 metres 8 cm. 6 cm. 1 metre 13 cm. 2 cm. The specimens referred to f. bullata are often larger and espe- cially broader as they have a fairly distinct, strongly waved marginal area. Two of the specimens which I measured were of the following sizes: — Total length Breadth of lamina Length of stem 2 m. 10 cm. 20 cm. 9 cm. 2 m. 30 cm. 20 cm. 8 cm. Lastly, the specimens referred to f. grandis are marked by their thinner and smoother or at any rate only slightly rugose lamina, which can attain to a fairly great breadth and has generally a rather distinct marginal area. With regard to the size of the spe- cimens referred to this form the following measurements may serve as a guide: — Total length Breadth of lamina Length of stem 2 m. 35 cm. 13 cm. 2 m. 15 cm. 37 cm. 4 cm. I have also referred a few large specimens which were found growing in shallow water at the head of Trangisvaagfjord to this form. The lamina was highly rugose and had a strongly waved margin. The consistency of the lamina was in the middle, thick and leathery; in the margin, thin and membranaceous. One speciinen measured as follows: — Length of lamina 2 metres; breadth 75 cm.; stem 5 cm. Formå linearis is met with in the most exposed situations, e. g. on the south- western side of Sumbo Holm (Syd.); it occurs here near low-water mark and sometimes beyond it. It answers to f. slenophylla ol" Laminaria digitata. Formå bullata is found 153 Fig.85. Lammaria saccharina (L.) Lam*, f. linearts J. Ag. From Sumbo Holm. (F.B.fot.). (Scalo: 10 cm.). in more sheltered localities, e. g. in the small inlets on the east side of S trom 6 between Thorshavn and Hojvig, but it mav also •JO* 454 be met with in the interior of bays and fjords. It belongs to the sublittoral zone but grows in shallow water. Lastly, f. grandis grows in tbe sublittoral zone most commonly in deeper water of some 8 to 10 fathoms and occurs both in the open sea and in the interior of fjords. Small, young examples of Laminaria saccharina , the so-called formå phyllitis (cfr., e. g. Kuckuck, Bemerkungen 1, p. 250) often occur in rock-pools. This species grows both on rocks and stones, and, more rarely, epiphytic on larger algæ, e. g. Laminaria hijperborea. Fructifying specimens were found in June and July. The change of laminæ probably takes place during winter as specimens found in May, June and July still had parts of the old lamina attached. This is a very common species of the Færoese coasts. It was first reported by Landt, 1. c. p. 230. 147. L. færoensis nov. spec. Syn. L. longicruris de la Pyl. var. færoensis Børgs., En for Færoerne ny Laminaria (Botanisk Tids- skrift, Vol. 20, p. 403). I had previously described the present plant as a variety of L. longicruris , but after having examined the rich material of it which I gathered on my last journeys, I have no hesitation what- ever in reporting it as a distinct species, all the more as it fills a gap between the nearest allied La/mnar/a-species hitherto described, which in my opinion also include besides L. longicruris, L. groen- landica Rosenv., L. Agardhii Kjellm. and L. saccharina (L.) Lamx. These species and L. færoensis resemble each other in habit; their stems are usually comparatively long, their laminæ undivided, most commonly elliptic with waved margin and of a thin consistency. The following table illustrates the occurrence in these species of hollow stems and muciparous canals in the stems: — Hollow stem Solid stem With muciparous canals ... L. longicruris L. groenlandica Without — — . . . L. færoensis L. Agardhii — — L. saccharina Thus we see thai L. færoensis resembles L. longicruris in having a hollow stem, but dillers from it in not having muciparous canals; and the absence of the latter character in /.. Agardhii and L. sac- charina distinguisb.es them from L. groenlandica, while all three have solid stems. 455 L. færoensis with its hollow stem being the one which comes most near to L. longicruris, I will now go more i'nlly into the points «& "Sft S/tf Pig. 86. Laminaria færoensis nov. sp. f.typica. From Sundene. With sorus. (C. Thornam del.)- ' n : '• which, in addition to the above-mentioned characters, separate these two species. In his notes on the occurrence of muciparous canals in the Laminariaceæ Guignard1 observes that Laminaria longicruris has muciparous canals both in the lamina and in the 1 Guignard: Observations sur Pappareil mucifére des Laminariacées (Annales. des seiences nat.. VII sér. Hot., t. 15. 1892). 456 stem, but in the latter, however, only in the basal and not in the inflated part. I have now examined the stem and especially the basal part of the stem of numerous specimens of L. færoensis without, however, tinding the least indication of muciparous canals which are doubtless wanting here, though they are distinctly de- veloped in the lamina and exactly resemblc those which Kjell- man found in L. saccharina and figured in N. I., pp. 292— 3 (234—5), tab. 25, fig. 7. The length of the stem varies considerably according to whether the plant grows in shallow or deep water; thus, at the head of Kalbakfjord in quite shallow water — a few feet — I found spe- cimens with lamina measuring 3 — 4 feet and the stem hardly a foot long, while in normally developed specimens the stem and the lamina are of about the same length; in L. longicruris, however, the stem is reported to be generally longer than the lamina. With regard to the hollowness of the stem, it appears as if it often extended for a greater distance. I have closely examined a large example, the stem of which measnred somewhat above 2 metres, and found that it was already hollow at the apex just below the lamina, and this hollow expansion widened rapidly so that a few inches from the apex of the stem it attained to a diameter of about one inch and remained this width for a short distance; this inflated part, being filled with air, serves to buoy up the lamina. When growing in shallow water (1 — 2 metres), which seems to be the favourite habitat of this plant, these inflated apical parts of the stem may be seen in abundance floating about on the surface and bearing the immense lamina which hang thence downwards towards the bottom. The hollow part gradually narrows towards the base, and a foot above it the stem becomes solid. In young specimens the stem is solid. The haptera are long, thin, and very much divided. In typical, well-developed specimens the lamina is broadly el- liptic, has a distinctly cordate base, a strongly waved margin, and sometimes tapers somewhat to the top giving almost an ovate appearance to the lamina. In young specimens the lamina is nar- rower, oblong elliptic, with base less distinctly cordate, and often agrees well with Harvey s figure of L. longicruris in Nereis Boreali- Americ, Part 1, tab. IV and in Phycol. Brit., Vol. III, tab. 339. On the other hånd, the lamina in typical, well-developed L. longicruris, judging both by the specimens from Greenland and other piaces preserved in the museum in Copenhagen and by the tigures and 157 descriptions in botanical literature, has a wedge-shaped hase, which, however, varies (cfr. e. g. De la Pylaie's figures in Annales d. sciences Fig. 87. Laminarla færoensis nov. sp. formå sacehariniformis nov. form. From the mouth of Kalbakfjord. (F. B. fot.). (Scale: 10 cm.). nat., tome 4, 1828, pi. 9, lig. 8): further, the lamina is comparatively narrow. The form of the sori also nsually appears to differ in the two species. In L. færoensis the sporangia-bearing part consisted chiefly 458 of two longitudinal rows on each side of the lamina which merged into each other at the apex of the latter or frequently broke up into several irregularly formed large and small patches; only rarely and especially in the below-mentioned form, did I find a broad sorus along the centre of the thailus as is to be found in typical L. longicruris. I do not think that a regular change of leaves occurs in this species at any fixed season. At any rate I did not observe it from the middle of April to August, nor Jonsson from October to De- cember. Specimens from these seasons did not show the least indication of a regular change of leaves, the lamina being on the contrary very large and well-developed with the apex generally rotting away and falling off; so it is probably continually growing at the base and dying away at the apex. Of course this does not exclude the possibility of its growing more vigorously at some seasons than at others. From the above description it will be seen that the typical form of this species is well characterized, at least so it appears to me. But , on the other hånd , in a habitat not favourable to this species a form occurred which is especially difficult to distinguish from certain forms of L. saccharina. I have named it: — Formå sacchariniformis nov. form. This (fig. 87) is distinguished from the main form by the lamina being narrower and less waved, and by the base of the lamina being frequently not cordate, but rounded or sometimes even wedge- shaped; hence its habit bears much resemblance to that of L. sac- charina and L. longicruris. The lamina varies in its consistency from a sort of thin paper to a fairly thick parchment, and one of the specimens had a distinctly chequered surface such as is fre- quently to be found in L. saccharina. The lamina was usually shorter than the stem. The former was destitute of muciparous canals and its stem was generally distinctly hollow, but specimens also occurred with al most or quite solid slems and these could hardly be distinguished from long-stemmed /,. saccharina. In this connection I would call attention to the specimens which F ar- lo w (Marine Algæ of New England, p. 93) in his description of L. longicruris mentions as follows: — »specimens resembling L. saccharina, bul with hollow stipes have been collected in Long Island Sound. Whether really belonging to /.. longicruris is doubl- ful and the subject requires farther investigations« ; if the stems of 459 Farlow's specimens are also destitnte of muciparous canals then they resemble the present form in no slight degree. Thus Laminaria færoensis, of which the typical form is parti- cularly characteristic and easily recognizable is owing to the occur- rence of this form perhaps not so clearly marked off especially from L. saccharina, just in the same way as Rosen vinge (»Grønl. Havalg.«, p. 846) points out that /,. longicruris on account of the occurrence of not decidedly typical specimens, is less distinct from L. groenlandica and L. cuneifolia. The typical Laminaria færoensis which is undoubtedly the largest alga of the Færoese coast, grows by preference in the most sheitered situations; it attains to its highest development at the head of fjords and in the narrow sound between Ostero and Stromo. As I said before, it develops more vigorously in shallow water — in a few metres — where it can reach the surface by means of its air-vesicles; but well-developed specimens may also occur at greater depths, at about 10 fathoms. Formå sacchariniformis occurs at the boundary of the area of distribution of the typical form, especially in deeper water where the sea begins to be somewhat disturbed. But the species has never been met with in the open sea. It grows especially on stony and gravelly bottoms and even on quite fine-grained gravel, and in such a case it attaches itself by means of its finely divided haptera to numerous small stones. Fructifying specimens were found in May, June and July. With regard to the size of the plant, I may refer to the measurements given in Bot. Tidsskrift (1. c). This is a coramon species and occurs abundantly in all well- shellered localities: -- Syd.: Head of Vaagfjord and Trangisvaagfjord; Str. : Kollefjord, Kalbakfjord and in faet everywhere in the sound be- tween Ost. and Sir. from the narrow tideway to the north to about Kalbakfjord; further, in Skaalefjord on Ost. During a brief stav in the interior of Sorvaagsfjord I searched for it in vain; it is possible that this fjord, being open and rather exposed even in the interior, does not afford a suitable habitat for this species. 148. L. digitata (L.) Lamx. Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 20 partim. f. gennina Le Jol., Examen des espéces confondues sous le nom de Laminaria digitata auct. (N. Aet. Car. Leopold. Vol. 25.) f. stenoplujlla Harv., Phycol. Brit., Plate 338; Laminaria steno- phylla (Harv.) J. Ag., De Laminarieis, p. 18; Kjellm., Handh., p. 24. f. cucullata Le Jol., 1. c. I think the three above-mentioned forms of this plant, which 460 varies considerably according to its habitat, are to be distinguished in the Færoes. The forms referred to f. genuina somewhat resemble the figure in the centre of fig. 88 which is taken from a small example, but they are generally a little broader and have often a cordate base. Some of the specimens had the upper part of the stem compressed and consequently agreed with Kjell man's f. complanata. But in the Færoes I have not come across specimens precisely similar to Foslie's figures of f. typica in »Ueber die Laminarien Nor- wegens« pi. 4 and 5, fig. 1, the stems of the Færoese specimens especially being much shorter. To show the dimensions in f. ge- nuina I give the following ineasurements: — Total length Length of stem Length of lamina Breadth of lamina 157 cm. 52 cm. 105 cm. 50 cm. 200 cm. 25 cm. 175 cm. 55 cm. Some of the specimens referred to f. stenophylla were precisely similar to Harvey' s above-mentioned figure, and had the lamina divided into 2 — 3 segments only; others had the lamina split into many quite narrow segments (see the two outside specimens in fig. 88) thus agreeing most closely with Kjellman's f. cnneata (Handb., p. 23). The Færoese specimens of this form were comparatively small, those figured being, e. g. some 50 cm. long. The specimens referred to f. cucullata are noteworthy by their lamina being more or less cucullate and being either divided into only a few broad segments or being entirely whole; the lamina is frequently very irregularly folded and waved, but in young specimens it is sometimes almost smooth like Le J ol i s's f. ovata. Such a young specimen isdistributed in Areschoug's Alg. scand.No. 167. The length of the stipe also varies considerably, being sometimes short, some- times long even longer than the lamina (f. longipes). In the Færoes I found specimens precisely similar to those figured by Foslie (1. c). Formå stenophylla is generally met with in the littoral zone and occurs on open sea-shores even in the most exposed situations. Formå genuina grows in more sheltered localities in the sublittoral zone or near extreme low-water mark. Formå cucullata occurs in the sublittoral zone in the interior of fjords and is particularly well-developed in piaces where the water is almost stagnant. F. stenophylla and f. genuina generally grow on rocky bottoms; f. cu- cullata especially on stony bottoms. 101 Fructifying specimens were (bund in June, Julv and November. .ludging from the material in hånd the plant doubtless changes ils Fig. 88. Lamlnaria digitata (L.) Lam. From Store Dimon. (F. B. fot.). (Scale: 10 cm.). lamina d uring the winter; and attains to its highest degree of development during the summer. This species is extremely common everywhere along the Færoese coasts. 462 149. L. hyperborea (Gunn.) Foslie, Ueber die Laminarien Nor- wegens, p. 42; L. Cloustoni Le Jolis, Examen des espéces confondues sous le nom de Laminaria digitata auct., p. 56; Kjellm., N. I., p. 298 (239); Laminaria digitata Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 20 partim. While a great many forms of, Laminaria digitata e. g., have been distinguished, this has not been the case with the present species, though it also varies considerably, at any rate in the Færoes, and in a manner quite similar to L. digitata. Thus in exposed situations small specimens are met with liere and there near low-water mark, but rarely in great abundance, which by their narrow lamina and also by the latter being often divided into narrow segments strikingly resemble formå stenophylla of L. digitata ; and in the interior of fjords in stagnant water the lamina becomes less divided or is even entirely whole, also becoming ir- regularly folded and waved just as is characteristic for formå cn- cullata of L. digitata. I have not found Foslie's f. compressa in my material. This species generally grows in the sublittoral zone, but as mentioned above it mav sometimes be found near low-water mark, e. g. in rock-pools. Its proper habitat is from a depth of a few to as much as 10 fathoms, sometimes even to almost twice that depth. It grows by preference in the open sea, but may also be met with in the interior of fjords, it grows most commonly on rocky bottoms which it covers with a dense forest-like growth. Frutifying speci- mens were found in November. It changes its lamina during winter; in the spring months large quantities of the old laminæ are washed ashore but as late as May and June I found specimens which still had the old lamina attached. This species is extremely eommon along the coasts of the Færoes where it forms widely spreading growths; Lyngbye (1. c.) who does not keep it distinct from Laminaria digitata writes with reference to it: — »Habitat in fundo sinuum Færoensium profunditate plurium or- gyiarum superficiem maris, aqua decrescente, sylvæ instar, attingens«. Saccorhiza bulbosa (Huds.) De la Pyl. On the authority of Landt who (1. c. p. 232) mentions Fncus polgscides as found in the Færoes, Lyngbye in Hydrophyt., p. 20, reports Saccorhiza bulbosa from the Færoes under the name of Laminaria bulbosa. But the synonyms alone which Landt mentions in the same place make the correctness of the above statement doubtful, and as the species has, moreover, never since been found in the Fieroes I have thought 463 that it should be omitted from the list of the Færdese algæ. But, of course, there is just a possibility of its haviug been conveyed thither from Norway or the British Isles. Order FUCACEAE. HALIDRYS Lyngb.) Grev. 150. H. siliquosa (L.) Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 37; Kjellm., N. I., p. 243 (194). Found attached only in Skaalefjord near Glibre, where large specimens of a metre or more in length occur in about one fathom of water. Specimens gathered in the middle of May were sterile, but some found late in October had fruit. Besides occurring in the above-mentioned habitat — Glibre (Ost.) - where it was observed by S i mm o ns, Jonsson and myself, it has been found detached floating about or east ashore at the following piaces: — Bor do: Klaksvig (Rostr.); Str. : Hvidenæs (Rostr., H. S.), Thorshavn (!). Lyngb ve does not mention this species as occurring in the Færoes, but Landt (1. c. p. 228) reports it from these islands. ASCOPHYLLUM Stackh. 151. A. nodosum (L.) Le Jol. Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 832; Ozothallia nodosa Kjellm., N. I., p. 243 (194); Halidrys nodosa Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 37. Besides the common form, another occurs along the coasts of the Færoes which is smaller and more delicately built in all its parts. It is much sienderer than the form in Le Joliss Alg. mar. de Cherb., No. 101, though the latter is far from large. The difference between the common large form and the small one is shown in the accompanying illustration (lig. 66) reproduced from a photograph of the two forms. The branches of the small form are narrower; the largest air-bladders are hardly more than one- third the size of those in the large form, and the same applies lo the receptacles, etc. It occurs here and there togelher with the typical form, and grows in large bushes like the latter. This species is very common in sheltered localities, but mav also be met with in more exposed piaces, viz., off the west-coast of Sydero, on rocky islels, where il grows on the sides of the rocks facing the land. During a storm these islets are completely dashed over by the breakers. Where tides prevail it grows somewhat above half-tide level; where their inlluence is not felt, e. g. in 405 Sundene it grows in shallow water, but does not occur so abun- dantlv as in the former place, doubtless because it prefers being lefl dry at ebb-tide. I found it bearing ripe receptacles as eaiiy as the end of April, and it keeps on fructifying throughout the summer, evidently ceasing towards the end, as speeimens gathered late in July had only a few receptacles left on them. Lastly, speeimens from the beginning of Deeemher bore young receptacles, so the latter doubt- less develop during the winter. This agrees well with what Kjell- man (1. c. p. 244 [195]) savs is the case in Arctic Norway. This is an extremely common species of the Færoese eoasts ;is already pointed out by Lyngbye: -- Ad littora Færoæ copiose«. FUCUS L. 152. F. inflatus L., M. Vahl, Flora Danica, tab. 1127; Foslie, Krit. fort., (Tromso Mus. Aarshefter, IX, 1886, p. 109); Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg. , p. 834; Fucus vesiculosus y inflatus Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 3. (Speeimens are lacking in his herbarium in Copenhagen). Fucus furcatus Kleen, Nordl. Alg., p. 29. f. edentata (De la Pyl.) Rosenv.1 1. c. Fucus edentatus de la Pyl., Flore de Terre Neuve, p. 84, Paris 1829; Fucus furcatus and Fucus edentatus J. Ag., Spetsbergens Alger, Tillag p. 402; Fucus edentatus de la Pyl., f. typica Kjellm., N. I., p. 256 (204). f. disticha (L.), Fucus distichus L. partim3; Lyngb., Hydrophyt., 1 C. Agardh's Fucus furcatus (Spec. Alg., p. 97, 1821, Icones alg. ineditæ, tab. XIV) is certainly older than De la Pylaie's Fucus edentatus, and, consequentlv, on the ground of priority the former name ought to be preferred, but as the spe- cimen of this species which C. Agardh described was — judging especially from his figure — a small, poorly developed one (apparently a transitional form to f. disticha) I think it most proper not to use his name. 2 Cfr. Ruprecht, F. J, Tange des ochotskischen Meeres (Middendorff, Reise in Sibir., 1. Band, p. 346). Ruprecht's objection, quite unjustifiable as it appears to me, to J. Agardh's definition of Fucus furcatus in Spec. Alg. was the reason why Agardh in »Spetsbergens Alger« described the two species Fucus edentatus and Fucus furcatus as distinct, which again has created much uncertainty with regard to Fucus inflatus. 3 Linné's short description (Syst. Nat. Edit. 12, Vol. 2, p. 716) of Fucus distichus snits all dwarf forms of Fucus inflatus, consequentlv, both f. linearis and f. disticha. but I apply the latter name to the small, more robust forms which grow on exposed eoasts in contradistinction to the sienderer f. linearis which grows in rock-pools. Judging from Kjellman's description of his f. nana (Spetsbergens mar. klorof. Thallophyter, II. p. 4) the latter appears to be some poorly developed speeimens. belonging to f. disticha (cfr. his note 1. c. p. 7). 466 p. 6 (partim, e specim.); a, robustior J. Ag., Spetsb. Alg., Tillag p. 37; Kjellm., N. I., p. 262 (210). f. linearis (Oed.) Rosenv., 1. c. Fucus distichus Lyngb., Hydro- phyt. p. 6 (partim) Kleen, Nordl. Hafsalg. p. 30. Fucus inflatus is an extremely variable plant and many of its numerous forms have been regarded and deseribed as distinct species, as already pointed out by Rosen vinge in Grønl. Havalg., (1. c). I have long been in doubt how to classify the Færoese speci- mens of which the accompanying figures may serve to give an idea. Kjell man's »Handbok« certainly contains exhaustive descriptions and a large number of forms are mentioned in it, but as Kjell man has not satisfactorily identified theni with those discribed under older names it is often rather difficult to arrive at any definite conelusion about them. As pointed out by Foslie (1. c), Vahl's description in Flora Danica, tab. 1127 ought to be regarded as the type for Fucus inflatus — and e. g. Kjellman in »Handbok« (p. 11) and Rosen vinge (1. c.) have taken it as such. In >: Handbok« Kjellman divides the species into two main groups « finmarkicus and (i nordlandicus. As the type for the main form of finmarkicus he mentions the species gathered and distributed by him in Areschoug's Exsicc. No. 401, and as he also quotes this example as the type for his formå typica of Fucus edentatus de la Pyl. in N. I., p. 256 (204) then finmarkicus must be regarded as synonymous with f. edentata. But in Grønl. Havalg. Rosen vinge mentions fi nordlandicus as synonymous with Fucus inflatus a edentatus (de la Pyl.); and with reference to Vahl's figure, which Kjellman gives as type for nordlandicus, Foslie (l.c.) writes: — »it is identical with the species met with in Nordland and Fin- marken which later authors have referred to Fucus edentatus de la Pyl«. From which again it follows that both a nordlandicus and P finmarkicus ought to be regarded as synonymous with f. edentata and this view is presumably also the most natural one as it appears to me somewhat doubtful how far we are justified in maintaining two such main groups. As marks of distinction between the two groups Kjellm an properly speaking, only mentions that in nord- landicus the branches are given off at narrow angles and the con- ceptacles are small and placed close together, while in finmarkicus the branches are given off at wide angles and the eoneeptacles are scattered and irregularlv arranged, bul in a large collection these characters will hardly be of any use for purposes of elassification. In his work »Om Algvegetationen vid Islands Klister«, pp. 35 467 — 36, S tro in Icl l also includes under the single species Fucus evanescens Ag. everything mentioned by Kjellman in his N. I. under this name, and everything reported from Norway under the names of F. edentatus and F. furaitiis, and lastly de la Pylaie's Fig. 90. Fucus inflatus L. f. edentata de la Pyl. From Thorshavn. 3/3: 1. (H.Westergaard del.) F. edentatus; uniting these species, because J. Agardh told him that some of his forms from Iceland bore a close resemblance to the original specimens of de la Pylaie's F. edentatus, and I think he is quite justified in doing so. But I do not agree with Stromfelt vshen he insists that wh at Kjell man in N. I. calls Fucus edentatus, for which, as mentioned above, the type is No. 401 in Areschoug's Exsicc, is not identical with de la Pylaie's Fucus edentatus; nor Uolany ol the Færoes. ISO 468 do I consider him justified in dividing his Fucus evanescens into the main groups arcticus, norvegicus, edentatus and dendroides. According to my o])inion the alga distributed by Kjell man in Areschoug's Exsicc. No. 401 , corresponds exactly to the plant named by Collins Fucus eden- tatus de la Pyl. and distributed by him in Hauck et Richter, Phykotheka universalis No. 119. It likewise bears a fair resem- blance to specimens of Fucus edentatus from Miquelon preserved in onr museum in Copenhagen. The specimens of my Færoese ma- terial which I have referred to for- må edentata agree well with these specimens in Phykotheka and Areschoug's Exsicc, as also with others referred by Kjell man, Ro se uvinge, Foslie and Col- lins to Fucus inftatus var. eden- tata, so that I do not doubt their identity with this form. Lastly, I may mention that when Professor W. G. Farlow was on a visit to Copenhagen I showed him the specimens which I had referred to this form and he pro- nounced them to be good Fucus edentatus. Fucus inftatus f. disticha has hitherto been regarded as a distinct species.1 This is, however, an error, as from observations which I have several times had an opportunity of making in the Færoes, I have arrived at the con- clusion that it is only a plant whose small size is due to its habitat. As shown in fig. 92, very gradual, almost imperceptibly traftsitional 1 I may mention liere that in »Handbok«, p. 15, Kjellman writes: »This spe- cies is slightly differentiated from the more slender forms ol' Fucus inflatus />' nord- landicus . ( Arien ar svajet begråusad mol Bnare former ol' Fucus inflatus j3 nord Landicus«). Fig. 01. Fucus inflatus L. f. edentata de la Pyl. From Nolso. 8/s: 1. (H.Westergaard del.) 469 stages occur between the large typical f.edentata which often attains to a length of 2 feet, and the tiny formå disticha which usually =3 £ measures only a few inches in length. fullv in what follows. I shall explain this more 30* 470 Faciis in flat us f. edentata can grow in fairly exposed piaces and it can grow rather near high-water mark ; but the higher the habitat and the more exposed the locality, the smaller the specimens. On the east coast of Stromo from Thorshavn southwards I have dis- tinctly observed this transition in process. Large vigorous examples of f. edentata occurred in the two small bays at Thorshavn at about low-water mark (the specimen figured in fig. 90 is from the latter locality). To southward of this the coast gradually grows more ex- posed, there is almost always sorae swell and the waves break almost continuously upon the shores which both enables Fucns inflatns to grow higher up and al so reduces its size. On a gently inclined rock-face south of Arge I observed for the first time inter- mediate forms in different stages which distinctly illustrated the transition from f. edentata to f. disticha. The piants growing near low-water mark were fairly large, about one foot in length, but as they spread higher up the face of the rock they gradually grew smaller in all their parts until at the top at about high-water mark or somewhat above they were only a few inches long, or, in other words, occurred as Fucus distichus; while still further south- wards the coast becomes too exposed for f. edentata, and f. disticha only is met with. The latter form of Fncns inflatns is fonnd in the most exposed localities along the Færoese coasts, often in large quantities and frequently at a considerable height above sea-surface. The more exposed the locality, the more vigorously developed is its attachment-disc, which in specimens measuring 2 — 3 inches in length often attains to a size of 1/2 an inch in transverse section; and the more graceful and elegant are its branches, while its receptacles also grow longer and more pointed, such particularly elegant specimens (fig. 93) were found by me, e. g. on Myggenæs, Muletangen, Vaags Ejde, Sumbo Holm., etc. While f. disticha always occurs on sloping rock-surfaces left dry at ebb-tide, f. linearis occurs between tide- marks in pools at high-Ievels. Situations adapted to the growth of this form seem lo be rare along the Færoese coasts. I have hitherto only found it near Famien on Sydero. The Færoese specimens agree very well with the somewhat broader ones from Greenland which Rosen- vinge has referred to this form; I have not come across any Færoese specimens which were quite thread-shaped. Formå linearis is distinguished from f. disticha by its branches being thinner and more Hat, the colonr nsually somewhat paler and the shoots Irans- 471 parent; prolifications of'lcn occur on il. A few specimens Ironi Thorshavn somewhat resembled cerlain Greenland specimens which Rosen vinge has re ferred to (3 evanescens, l)nl they not being especially characteristic I think we are justified in referring them to f. edentata. When dried the piants become ahnost blaek and nearly opacpie. The midrib is quite indistinct and receptacles are shorter and broader than in f. eden lu lu. A single specimen of typical f. edentata was noteworthy owing Fig. 93. Fucus inflatus f. disticha. From Muletangen at Vaags Ejde (Syd.). 1:1. (H. Westergaard del.) to its bearing conceptacles in the middle of a branch at a consider- able distance from the apex. Fucus inflatus occurs in the littoral zone or (f. edentata) in the uppermost part of the sublittoral; f. disticha belongs exclusively to the littoral zone, and f. tinearis occurs in tide-pools. The large forms of f. edentata require somewhat sheltered coasts, and also grow right in the interior of the fjords even in piaces where the water has a considerable admixture of fresh water; f. disticha can thrive in the most exposed localities. Fructifying specimens of this species were found in April, May, June, July and August, consequently, during the summer. Specimens gathered in October and November were sterile; in December a few specimens were found bearing young receptacles. 472 Formå edentata is very common along the Færoese coasts, and was first reported by Landt, 1. c. p. 227 (Fucus inflatus); f. disticha was also already mentioned by Landt, 1. c; it had formerly been observed on Sydero only, but I found it to be common almost everywhere on ex- posed coasts, viz. : — Vid.: Viderejde (!); Bord 6: »Skaarene« at the en- trance to Arnefjord (!); Vaago: north side (!); Ost.: Mjovenæs (!), Ost- næs (!); Str.: Hojvig Fiesen i!), Gliversnæs (!); Svino (!); Mj'ggenæs (!); St. Dimon (!); Syd.: besides the habitats already known near Norbes Ejde, Kvalbo Ejde and Famien it was found near Huddan at the entrance to Trangisvaagfjord (!), Sumbo Holm (!), Muletangen near Vaags Ejde(!); f. linearis was only found on Syd. near Famien (Lyngbye, Ostenfeld, !). 153. F. spiralis Linné, Flora Lapponica, p. 350, No. 467, Species Plantarum, Tom. II, p. 1159, Holmiæ 1753; Systema Naturæ, Editio Duodecima, Tom. II, p. 715, Holmiæ 1767; Kjellm., N. I., p. 252 (202); Fucus platycarpus Thur., Etudes phycolog., p. 40; Fucus Areschougii Kjellm., Handb., p. 11; Fucus vesiculosus ^ spiralis (L.) Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 3 (according to the specimens in his herbarium in Copenhagen). f. typica. Fucus Areschougii Kjellm., the main form, Handb. 1. c. f. nana Kjellm., Handb., p. 11; Fucus limitaneus Mont., Thuret, 1. c. pp. 41 — 42; Fucus platycarpus var. limitaneus Sauvageau, Sur les Algues du golfe de Gascogne, p. 35 (Journal de Botanique, Vol. 11, p. 268). I am quite convinced that all the species mentioned here and described by different authors (sorae more may be added to the list, cfr. e. g. Thuret and Kjellman, 1. c.) must be regarded as belonging to Linné's old species Fucus spiralis. Linne's description in the works quoted is though short, yet fairly exhaustive, so a sufficiently clear idea may be formed of what he meant. Now the alga named by Thuret Fucus platycarpus and figured by him on tab. 16, 1. c. — original specimens of which were very kindly sent to rae from Thuret's Herbarium by Professor Sauva- geau — differs rather considerably from what, e. g. Kjell man calls Fucus Areschougii and of which a typical example is to be found in Areschoug's Exsicc. No. 54 (compare also my figure 94). But to this I may remark that both in the Firth of Forth near North Berwick and at Heligoland I gathered specimens which are exactly intermediale between these. And even amongst my Færoese material I found a very few specimens or portions of piants which reminded one strongly of Fucus platycarpus Thur., e. g. the portion of the plant given in fig. 95, the other parts of the same plant being like the main species. My opinion is that Thuret's Fucus platycarpus 473 Rg. 94. F, *cus spiralis L. From Thorshavn. iA:lj (H. w estergaard del.) 474 Fig95. Fucus „ptralis L. Part of a plant .pproaching var. platgcarpa Thur. From Thorshavn. »/*:!• (H. Westergaard del.) is a more southerly variety of Fucns spiralis, while the typical form occurs more particularly in the northern regions, but mav also be found growing together with var. platycarpa in the southern. 1 475 would point out as particularly characteristic of var. platycarpa that its main branches are distinctly continued along its whole length and set with short, alternating, lateral branchlets bearing reeeptacles, while Fticus spiralis L. tgpica — as I regard it, and to which as I said before I refer, e. g. Fucus Areschougii as a synonym — has all its branches, even the topmost distinctly dichotomous, and the latter terminating in reeeptacles, which are usually more or less swollen and roundish-oval, and occur terminally either 2 011 each branch, or cordate if the bipartition is not complete. On observing a well-pressed herbarium specimen of a typical Fucus spiralis (e. g. Areschoug's Exsicc. No. 54), all the reeeptacles will be seen to occur along the periphery of the plant, while in var. platycarpa they are situated along the main branches, beginning from somewhere near their base1. It is a pity that Kjell man, who in N. I. refers this species to Fucus spiralis, does not give any reason for having in »Handbok« given it the name F. Areschougii. In his description of p borealis Kjell man just writes in a footnote: — "If the name Fucus spiralis L. agrees with this species, then it must most pro- perly be applied to the northern form2.« With regard to formå nana (fig. 96), the latter is only a small dwarf form of f. hjpica. I have reported Fucus limitaneus Mont. as synonymous with this form on the strength of some specimens gathered in the Canary Islands by the late Mr. O. Gelert, and also because Thuret, 1. c. piaces it as variety of F. plahjcarpus. Further, Professor Sauvageau kindly sent me specimens of this form from Fig. 96. Fucus spiralis I.. f. nana 1:1. H.Westergaard del.) 1 In connection with this I would call attention to the faet that Rosenvinge is quite of the same opinion, as he not only told me himself when speaking to him on the suhjeet, but as he had also previously written to Sauvageau (cfr. Sauvageau, 1. c. pp. 22 — 23. Journal de Bot., tome 11, p. 211) who, however, partly misunderstood Rosenvinge, for he writes with reference to Fucus plati/carpus: »Ce serait Tanden F. spiralis de Linné, que Mr. Rosenvinge appelle F. platycarpus var. spiralis*, but »var.« is a misreading. Rosenvinge having written »ou«. '-' »Om henamningen Fucus spiralis L. afser denna art, så år den nårmast att hånfora till den nordiska formen«. 477 Cap du Figuier in the Bay of Biscay; he calls thera Fucus platy- carpus var. limiUmeus; and with reference to them he w rites 1. c. pp. 171 — 2: — »En 1896, j'en ai récolté sur un bloc situé en avant du Casino, de petils, gréles et bien fructifiés, en touffes éparses, de 2 a 3 eentimétres de longueur, et j'étonnerai probablemenl les algo- logues qui ont exploré seulement les regions plus septentrionales, en disant que j'aie pu faire rentier dans une boite d'allumettes ina réeolte, qui se composait dune dizaine d'exemplaires bien entiers«. The Færoese specimens from exposed localities are often as small. Several Færoese examples are shown in lig. 97, the small ones being formå nana, the large f. typica. This species occurs in the littoral zone along the Færoes and grows in fairly sheltered situations (especially formå typica) as well as on exposed coasts (forina nand). In more particularly exposed piaces the latter may be found growing at a considerable height above high-water mark, e. g. at Vaags Fjde it occurred at a height of some 5 metres. It grows by preference on steeply inclined cl i Ils which are incessantly dashed by the sea in rough weather. On the other band, in calm weather it often sutfers from desiecation and I have frequently gathered it so dried that it could easily be broken. It always grows gregariously and this applies especially to formå nana. It has also sometimes been found in rock-pools at high levels, e. g. in abundance near Velbestad, specimens from such situations being thinner and of sienderer build answering to f. li- nearts of Fucus iuflatus, as f. nana answers lo f. disticha. Fructifying piants were found in April, May, June, July and October. A few specimens gathered in December were sterile. Ils period of fructification corresponds exactly to that of piants in the Norwegian Polar Sea where according to Kjell man, 1. c. they bear receptacles during summer and a part of October. This is a very common species of the Færoese eoasts and was first mentioned by Landt, 1. c. p. 227. 154. F. vesiculosus L. Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 3; Kjellm., X. I., p. 248 (198); Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 833. var. typica Kjellm., 1. c. var. subfusiformis f. lanceolata Kjellm., Handb., p. 9. var. rotundata f. robusta Kjellm., Handb., p. 7. I think by far the greater part of the Færoese material mav be referred to var. typica; taken as a whole it agreed well with Harvey's figure in Phycol. Brit., tab. 204, fig. 1. A single specimen 478 gathered by Mr. C.Jensen near Sumbo (Syd.) was notewortby on account of its very long, lanceolate, swollen receptacles (like Har- vey's fig. 2, 1. c.). It bad quantities of bladders. It is this specimen which I have thougbt proper to refer to var. subfusiformis f. lan- ceolata. Near Thorsbavn I gathered a few specimens, which on account of their large, cordate or broadly oval receptacles appear to correspond to Kjellman's f. robusta. Lastly, the Færoese rnaterial contains a great many specimens, which are quite destitute of bladders. Botb for this reason and on account of the very long, almost lanceolate receptacles these specimens when cursorily exa- mined resemble in no slight degree forms of Fucus inflatns, but it is obvious that they do not belong to it, as the conceptacles are unisexual. It grows attached to rocks and stones, and occurs in the littoral zone at about half-tide level; it grows by choice in well-sheltered localities, but may also flourish luxuriantly in piaces which are not much sheltered, e. g. in the small inlets (»Skærgaarde«) which occur along the east coast of Stromo between Thorshavn and Hojvig — a comparatively exposed stretch of coast. It is, however, entirely absent from absolutely open sea-shores. At piaces where tides are not felt it grows directly below the surface of the sea in quite shallow water. It thrives excellently in brackish water, e. g. at the heads of fjords where it even occurs abundantly in the streams at the point where they flow into the sea. It fructifies d uring summer. Specimens gathered in November were sterile, a few found in December bore quite young receptacles, and those collected in April had conceptacles which had not as yet fully ripened. This species is extremely common along those coasts of the Færoes which are either not very much exposed or entirely sheltered. It was first reported by Landt, 1. c. p. 226. Fucus ceranoides L. In Hydrophyt. p. 5 Lyngbye reports this species from the Færoes: — »etiam ad insulas Færoenses«. But his herbarium contains no specimens of this species, and as it has not been found since, the correctness of his report is open to doubt. Fucus serratus L. is reported by Landt, 1. c. p. 226, who writes: — »Grows every where at the foot of cliffs covered by the sea at high-tide«1. But this report must be due to some confusion as 1 »Voxer overalt paa Klippe-Rødderne, hvor Havet gaar op ved Flod«. 479 il has never since been found along the coast of the Færoes and it is hardly possible that il should liave been overlooked. Lyng- bye writes also in Hydrophyt., p. 5, with reference to this species: — »Ad insulas vero Færoenses non reperitur«. PELVETIA Dtsne. et Thur. 155. P. canaliculata (L.) Dtsne. et Thur. Fucus canaliculatus Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 6. As might be expected piants growing at higher levels are small as they there lack sufficient nourishment, and such small examples are especially met with in the interior of fjords. Si m mons, 1. c. p. 296 calls them f. minima, and as pointed out by him they usnally consist merely of a comparatively large receptacle horne on a short stalk; hul they are only to he regarded as stunted specimens. This species belongs to the littoral zone and grows near high- water mark or even somewhat above it; it is rare in exposed lo- calities; it requires some sort of shelter as it never occurs on eliffs which are exposed to the full force of the incoming waves from the open sea, but grows in localities which are somewhat protected by rocks standing out in the sea. In such it occurs several feet above high-water mark and is able to endure a longer period of desiccation. It always grows gregariously. I never observed it in rock-pools. It was found bearing frnil in May, .lune, July, October and December so it seems to be able to fructify almost all the year round. This species is quite comnion along the Færoes though not every- where, so Ly ngbye's (l.c. p. 6) statement: — »Ad insulas Færoenses hic illie copiose is quite to the point. It was first mcntioned by Landt l.c. p.227. HIMANTHALIA Lyngb. 156. H. lorea (L.) Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 36; Kjellm., N. I., p. 242 (193). This characteristic species grows at about low-waler mark or somewhat above it, but in particularly exposed localities it mav occur at fairly high levels or at any rate up to some 2 metres above low-water mark. It grows by preference on open sea-shores and is in et with at the most exposed piaces, but it mav also grow in more sheltered localities. Where tides are not felt, e. g. in Skaale- fjord it grows at a depth of a few feet, but does not seem to thrive. 480 the receptacles being often more irregularly formed and sometimes swollen, and the colour of the plant being of a paler yellow. It was found bearing young receptacles in April and May, and the receptacles reached their highest degree of development (1— 172 metres long) during summer, and contained ripe oogonia from July to September. Kjellman (l.c. p. 194) says that according toWahlen- berg H. lorea is not to be found during winter in Lapland which does not agree with what happens along the Færoese coasts. Here according to my observations the plant is »hapaxanthic«. I think the oogonia germinate immediately in autumn and develop during winter into the well-known button -shaped piants which are often ovately swollen. In my experience the latter can live several years without fructifying, and this appears to be more particularly the case when growing nearer high-water mark than is natural to the plant. It is undoubtedly necessary for the young plant to attain to a certain size and vigour in order to be able to bear fruit; those growing in favourable habitats probably arrive at perfection during the winter, others which are less fortunate keep on living for several years and such older piants are easily recognizable by their darker colour and their more leathery consistency as also by the numerous epiphytes which gradually occur on them. Some of these older piants are perhaps able to fructify later on, others, growing in the most unfavourable habitats, are never able to do so and eventually die. When the plant has fructified it dies away gradually, but the conical lower part and a portion of the receptacles can keep fresh doubtless for several years and form a favourite habitat especially for species of Ectocarpus, but they can hardly produce new receptacles. This is an extremely common species of the Færoese coasts as was reported by Lyngbye, who writes: — »Ad insulas Færoenses copiose, non solum in fundo, sed etiam in summo refluxus limite«. This species was first mentioned by Landt, l.c. p. 228. C. Chlorophyceae. Order PLEUROCOCCOCEAE. PLEUROCOCCUS Menegh. 157. PI. spec. Palmella adnata Lyngb.,Hydrophyt.,p.205,tab.69A. On examining Lyngbye's specimens of Palmella adnata which are preserved in his herbarium in Copenhagen they proved to be 481 a gathering of a great many different algæ, e. g. Calothrix scopulorumj some very Ihin Oscillariaceæ, fragments of Ulothrix, Porphyra, etc; and further, a small, unicellular, yellowish alga, which occurred abundantly in the gatherings and is presumably tlial which Lyngbye calls Palmella adnata, as I think it must be tliis alga to which he refers when he writes in his diagnosis: »granulis internis globosis, fuscis«, and in Descript. : »granula intra substantiam lutescentem minuta, globosa, fusca«. Judging from the material in hånd, Ihe cell contents are of a yellowish colour, which corresponds to Lyngbye's description. As far as I can see, the chromato- phores consist of one or more Æk ø\ fr\ /y\ f°x parietal piates (lig. 98); some of ('" g) W (JJ O the cells contained one or two , . , . i ,i i Fig. 98. Pleurococcus spec. 300:1. lai riv large pyrenoids, tlie en ro- matophores being generally arranged around the latter somewhal in the form of a star. The cells are almost oval, and are ahout 11 — 12 /< long and 5,5 — 7 /< broad. They are divided sometimes by transverse and sometimes by longitudinal walls (fig. 98). I think tliis alga may qnite naturally be referred to the genus Pleurococcus. I have preferred not to give it a name, as it appcars to me that Hudson's name adnata can hardly he used, for, his original examples not being availahle for reference, and his description being shorl, it is very difficult to decide which plant he w;as describing, and moreover, later authors (Nægeli, Berkeley) have referred his plant to the genus Gloeocystis. Further, I have preferred to call it Pleurococcus sp. as it appears to me highly probable that the Protococcus ovalis described by Hansgirg in Foslie's »Contribution« I, p. 159, is identical with the Pleurococcus in question. Hansgirg gives no reasons for calling his plant Protococcus, and his description and ligures as a whole are not exhaustive enough for comparison. With regard to its occurrence along the coasts of the Færoes Lyngbye Le. writes: — »Habitat ad rupes maritimas declives Færoenses, inter Thorshavn et Hoyvig in superiore refluxus limite, rarior«. Order PROTOCOCCACEAE. C II LOROCH YTR I U M Cohn. 158. Ch. inclusum Kjellm., N. I., p. 392 (320), lab. 31, ligs. 8—17; Rosenv., Grønl., Havalg., p. 963. The Færoese examples appear lo be precisely similar to Kjell- 482 man's description. They occufred as endophytes in different Flo- rideæ, e. g. Polgides rotundiis, Furcellaria fastigiata and Chondrus crispus. Found hitherto in thc following piaces: — Bordo: Klaksvig (H. J.); Str.: Thorshavn (!) ; Nolso (!); Syd: Trangisvaag (H. J.). Order PRASIOLACEAE. PRASIOLA (Ag.) Menegh. 159. P. crispa (Lightf.) Menegh. ■marina nov. subspec. Schizogonium radicans Foslie, Contri bution I, p. 128 (e specim.); Gayella polyrhiza Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 936 (e specim.); Ulothrix discifera Batters, A List of the Marine Algæ of Berwick-on-Tweed, p. 258 (e specim.); Prasiola crispa f. sub- marina Wille, Studien fiber Chlorophyceen, III. Eine submarine Form von Prasiola crispa (Lightf.); (?) Ulothrix discifera Kjellm., Om Spets- bergens mar. klorofyllf. Thallophyter, II, p. 52. On steep rocks facing the open sea I have several times ob- served a small alga which often occurred in great abundance and was very conspicuous on account of its fresh, light yellowish-green colour when dry. Thus, it occurred abundantly on the rocky coast between Skandsetangen near Thorshavn and Hojvig. In order to be able to compare it with the rather widely differing species of different authors which I have grouped above, and all of which according to my opinion ought to be included under this species, I will here shortly describe the Færoese specimens. They consist originally and for the most part of cell-filaments (about 10 — 12 \i thick) formed of disc-shaped cells which are generally only about one-third as long as broad, though they are sometimes met with as long as they are broad. Now and then, and most commonly at fairly regular intervals rhizoids arise, generally two together, but occasionally also singly; the cells whence these arise are mostly longer than the others in thc lilament. These rhizoids are generally connected with the moUier-cell, and the chromatophore contained in the latter is con- tinued into the former. But sometimes I have observed rhizoids divided into several cells (see fig. 99, i, j) as Wille (1. c. p. 15, lig. 53) also menlions having done in a single instance. While, on the one hånd, the single rhizoids, shown in lig. 99, /, perhaps mav be regarded, in conformity with Wille's opinion, as an abnormal formation, on the other band, thc two illustrated in lig. 99, /, appear 48,3 Pig. 99. Prcsiola crispa (Ligbtf.) Menegh. Botany of tlie Færdes. marina nov. subsp. Compare test. 400:1. 31 484 to be quite normal. Intermixed with Ihese cell-filaments consisting of one row of cells, occur some filaments in which the cells are divided into two rows (Schizogonium-stage fig. 99, n), and this division is continued on the same plane so that it forms a complete plate (Prasiola - stage fig. 99, b and f). These piates are sometimes fa hiv broad mnch more so than fig. 99, /", but piates, as large as those oc- curring in the land -form of Prasiola crispa, were not met with. I have only observed these Prasiola-like cell- piates in the material from Hojvig, in which there further occurred some filaments re- sembling the fragment illustrated in fig. 99, a. As may be seen from this figure, the cells have become divided in more than two direc- tions, thereby reminding one of the genus Gayella fonnded by Rosen vinge. Typically developed Gayella -specimens did not occnr in this gathering, consequently, it was very interesting that a gathering from S vin 6 contained some well -developed Gayella- filaments exactly agreeing with Rosenvinge's description. Fig. 99, d, shows a filament which has begnn to develop into Gayella, the cells being divided in more than two directions; and fig. 99, o, p show the transverse seclion of thinner Gayella- filaments. In the latter gathering there also occurred cell -filaments exactly agreeing with, e. g. fig. 99, e; and fig. 99, h represents a fragment of such a fila- ment bearing one rhizoid. Finally in fig. 99, / and m are shown two fragments of filaments whence proceed several rhizoids side by side, corresponding with Rosenvinge's fig. 45, G. It is on account of the interesting way in which the filaments consisting of a single row of cells pass by such very gradual stages, on the one hånd into the form Prasiola, and on the other into the form Gayella, that it appears to me to be impracticable to maintain the genus Gayella; the latter must therefore be regarded only as a phase in the development of Prasiola crispa subspec. marina eo- ordinately with the already accepted Ulothri.v radicans- stage and Schizogonium-P/asiola - stage. With regard to the contents of the cells, the star-like chromato- phores, etc, they exactly agreed with G av s's description in »Algues vertes« (pp. 80— 86) and Wille's (1. c). In »Deuxieme Mémoire sur les Algues marines du Groenland« (p. 116), Rosen vinge points out the following characterislic of Gayella: — »Les couches intérieures des membranes qui entourent les cellules, donnent la reaction de cellulose avec la chlorojodure de zinc, la membrane épaisse extérieure des filaments reste au con- 485 traire incolore,« and the same may be said of the Færoese material and of Prasiola crispa f. terrestris. Tbough Wil le (I. c. p. 1.'}) writes witli reference lo his formå submarina: — ■ »Es kann vielleichl Zweifel daruber herrschen, warum sie nicht als selbståndige Art aufgefuhrt werden soli, da sie keinerlei Obefgang aufweist zu Prasiola crispa (typische Flåchenform), welche aucb keineswegs mil ihr zusammen vorkommt,« il is quite natural, al any rate now thai the typical plate-form has also been found, lo refer it lo Prasiola crispa, with which it is very closely allied. The fresh-water material from damp roofs in Thorshavn bears consider- ahle rcsemhlanee to the marine form; as lo the differences which exist belween them I mav point out the following: — In the Hormi- as;il pari of U. mirabilis corresponds closely with that, which according to Rosenvinge, lakes place in Chætomorpha. Var. elongata Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg. (p. 918, fig. 35). Tliis form which is distinguished by its elongated, not swollen cells, frequently occurred among the main species with which it seemed to be connected by a series of very gradual transitional stages. A fruiting filament was about 30 (i broad. This species occurs on rocks and stones near high-water mark, especially on exposed coasts where it is washed by the waves. It grows gregariously, often asso- ciated with U. Wormskioldii, Ulothrix flacca, Bangia fuscopurpurea , etc. Sometimes though rarely, it occurs as an epiphyte on larger algæ, e. g. on Himanthalia lorea. Specimens with zoospores were ga- thered between April and July and with gametes in April. The latter which are much smaller, are elongated and have two cilia; cells with the latter as well as those with zoospores are often found intermixed in the same filament. Specimens gathered by Helgi Jonsson in November seemed to be sterile. This species, which is undoubtedly eoin- iiion along the coasts of the Færoes, has hitherto been gathered on Str.: Thorshavn, in many piaces abundantly (!) , Kvivig (Lyngb.); Syd.: Frodebo (!), Yaagsejde (!) ; M y g g e n æ s (!) ; Lille Dimon (!). As mentioned above, it had already been gathered by Lyng- bye, since it occurs intermixed in his material of Conferva flacca in his herbarium. Lyngbye's Conferva hormoides is also beyond 1 Kolderup Rosenvinge, L.: »Om nogle Væxtforhold hos Slægterne Clado- phora og Chætomorpha (Botanisk Tidsskrift, 18. Hind. København 1892 . 2 Kjellman, F. R.: Blastophysa polymorpha och Urospora incrassata, två nva Chlorophyceer Iran Sveriges vestra kust (Bihang till K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handlingar. Band 23, Aid. III, No 9. Stockholm 1897, p. 13). 32* Fig. 100. Urospora mirabilis Aresch. Basal portions of 2 young piants; a with extracellular ;md intracellular rhi- zoids; /> with intracellular rhizoids onlv. 200: 1. 502 doubt referable to this species, though no specimens from the Færoes are to be found in his herbarium. He writes with reference to it (Hydrophyt. , p. 145): — »Habitat ad littora Færoensia, saxis maritimis in summo refluxus limite adnata, copiose«. Rostrup (1. c. p. 88) calls it Hormiscia penicilliformis (Roth) Fr. on the faith ofLyngbye's record, and finally Simmons (1. c. p. 274) calls it Ulothrix isogona (Engl. Bot.) Thur. and records it as probably fairly common without, however, naming the habitat. 181. U. Wormskioldii (Mert.) Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg. , p. 920; Chætomorpha Wormskioldii Kjellm., N. I., p. 384 (313). The base of this species — fig. 101 shows the lower part of a young plant — consists of a more or less large disc formed by numerous intertwined rhizoids, which spring from a fairly considerable number of cells situated in the ba- sal portion of the plant, these rhizoids grow downwards along the cell-wall, attaching them- selves to the sides of the filament. The single cells in the portion of the filament thus covered by the rhizoids are on the whole distinctly dis- cernable right down to the base. These rhizoids closely resemble the extracellular rhizoids of U. mirabilis, but the intracellular rhizoids of the latter are wanting in U. Wormskioldii. The chromatophore, as found in a well- developed cell, has the shape of a very richly Fig. 101. Urospora Wormskioldii (Mert.) Rosenv. Base of piant and fiiiely reticulated parietal plate, with nu- merous small pyrenoids, and in a young cell it occurs as an almost unperforated plate or with a very few holes only, and fewer pyrenoids. The chromatophore of U. mirabilis is more dense and of a darker colour and has eoin- paratively few, but larger pyrenoids. Wil le' s figure (77«) in his synopsis of the Chlorophyceæ in Engler und Prantl: »Die natur- lichen Pllanzenfamilien« gives a good representation of a young cell; in older more developed cells of U. mirabilis the chromato- phore is richly perforated and is almost quite reticular. with numerous downward growing rhizoids. 40 : 1. 503 With regard to the opening through which llie zoospores escape, I have in living material Ironi the Færoes most frequently found the opening lo occur laterally in llie middle of the cell, bul il mav also occur al llie cross-wall, and specimens were sometimes met with, which had, as pointed onl by Rosenvinde, hvo openings, one at the upper, and one al the lower end of the cell. This is a litloral species and is mel with on exposed coasls al abonl high-water mark, and somewhat below it in sheltered loca- li ties ; in Skaalefjord (Ost.) where lides are not felt il grew al aboul llie surface of the water. It occurs gregariously often associaled with U. mirabilis. Found April — June, and had zoosporangia in llie same months. This species is probably common along the coasls of the Færdes and has hitlierlo been gathered in the following localities: — Ost.: Ejde(!), GlibreO), Strænder(!); Str.: Kvivig (!), Thorshavn (!). I presume tlial the Urospora collabens figured and described by Harvey in Phycol. Brit. belongs to this species; it is likewise recorded by Holmes and Batters (A revised lisl of the British marine Algae with an Appendix, London 18(.)2, p. 73); an example gathered by Holmes, and determined by him as U. collabens, and presented to our Musen in in Copenhagen looks like this species; the specimen I examined had, however, sterile cells only. CHAETOMORPHA Kutz. 182. Ch. MeJagonium (Web. et Mohr) Kiitz. Kjellm., N. I., p. 382 (311); Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 917; Conferva Melagonium Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 148. It seems to me that all the material I have had for examina- tion may be referred to f. rupincola Aresch., Kjellm. (1. c), Flora Danica, tab. 2397, lig. 1. This species has been found in the littoral zone in pools be- tween tide-niarks and in caves, as well as in the sublittoral. It grows both on exposed coasts and in more sheltered localities, and is commonly attached to rocks and stones, but occurs also epiphylic, e. g., on the stem of Laminaria hijperborea. This species has been observed from April to December. It is very common along the coasts of the Færoes as had already been noted by Lyngbye, who writes (1. c): -- »Ad insulas Færoenses in superiori reiluxus limite, ut ad Bidevig, Quivig, copiose«. 183. Ch. tortuosa (Dillw.) Kleen. Kjellm., N. I., p. 384 (313); Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 917; Conferva tortuosa Lyngb., Hydro- phyt., p. 145. 504 The specimens re ferred to this species had as observed by Rosenvinge (1. c.) numerous cell-nuclei. The filaments were abont 30 — 60 /< thick, consequently, somewhat smaller than those des- cribed by Ro sen vinge, the cells were about 2 — 5 times as long as they were broad. Generally this species is recorded (e. g. by Kjellm. 1. c.) as lying loose at the bottom of shallow lagoons; and Rosen vinge wriles with reference to it (1. c): - »Usnally it is not attached«. In the Færoes I once found some piants of it attached to stones in pools, near high-water mark, in an exposed locality. The base of these attached examples consisted of a rhizoid- like cell which at the bottom widened into a small at- tachment disc (lig. 102). Besides these specimens which occnrred attached I found considerable quantities of it, either lying loose in sheltered localities or entangled in other algæ, e. g. Ahnfeltia plicata and Halosaccion ramen- taceum and it is possible that it also grows partly at- tached to the latter plant. With regard to its habitat Lyngbye writes (1. c): — »Habitat ad littora Færoensia, imprimis supra sa- Fig. io2. ciiæto- bulum, quod in sumrao refluxus limite saxa maritima morpha tortuosa (Diiiw.) Kieen. hic illic obducit, baud frequens; in sinu Qualboensi Baseofthe^Iant. alibique passim«. Lyngbye has several specimens of this species in his herbarium, but some of the piants under this name have, how- ever, proved to be Rhizoclonium. Found in the following localities: — Bord 6: Klaksvig (!); Ost.: Ejde (Lyngb.); Str.: east coast (Rostr.); Syd.: Kvalbo (Lyngb.), Suinbo Holm (!). RHIZOCLONIUM Kutz. 184. Rh. riparium (Rolh) Harv.1. Rosenv., Grønl. Havalg., p. 913, Deuxieme Mémoire; p. 103; Kjellm., N. I., p. 381 (311). var. pohjrhiza Rosenv. 1. c. Conferva obtusangula Lyngb., Hy- drophyt., p. 159. 1 For practical reasons, I have followed Rosenvinge's aomenclature and nol tliat of Stockmayer given in his monograph: reber die Algengattung Rhizo- clonium« (Verhandlungen der k. li. zool. botan. Gesellschaft in Wien, vol. XI, Wien 1890) which \\;is published before that of Rosenvinge, 505 var. valida Fosl. Rosen v. 1. c. var. implexa (I)illw.) Rosenv. 1. c. Conferva iraplexa Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 144 (As proved by the specimens in his herbarium). The specimens referred lo var. polyrhiza agree well with Ro- senvinge's description and lignres (1. c). Now and then, thongh rarely, ramifications such as are seen in Lyngbye's ligure (tab. 55 15) oecur in them. The plant attaches itself lo rocks, etc. by ils nu- inerous multicellular rhizoids. The specimens referred lo var. valida are about 30 — 40 ju thick and Ihe cell wall is about 3 — 5 \i thick. The rhizoids are eilher not at all divided or by a few walls only. The piants which were all (bund at one station only, are galhered in rock-clefts as is also the case with Ro se uvinge 's piants. The specimens referred to var. implexa have eilher a very few rhizoids or none at all, and these rhizoids when they do oecur are not separated from the mother-cell by a wall. The filaments are about 30—40 n thick. This species is found on sheltered coasts as well as in exposed localities; it grows near high-water mark, and in piaces where the breakers rise high it may oecur at about 30 — 40 feet above sea-level, and has even been found at a height of about 80 feet above sea-level near the exit of Bosdalafos on the west side of Vaago associated with Hildenbrandia rosea, Enteromorpha and a few other algæ. It grew liere in damp rock-clefts, and formed large, crisp, pale-green enshions on the rocks. Frequently it grows in piaces where fresh-water drips down from above or oozes out of clefts in the rocks. Var. implexa also grows on the ground associated with Vaucheria coro- nata and Percursaria percursa ; and var. valida was observed in rock-clefts on rather exposed coast and associated with Rhodochor- ton Rothii. Var. polyrhiza is common, and as mentioned above, had been found by Lyngbye, who (1. c. p. 159) writes with reference to it: — »Habitat ad insulas Færoenses. rupibus declivibus maritimis in summo refluxus limite hic illic, ut ad Næs et Quivig Osteroe1, copiose adnata; etiam ad rupes maritimas, quæ aqua dulci irrorantur, ut ad Nosocomium Arge prope Thorshavn«. Var. valida occurred near Glivernæs (Str.) (!), and var. implexa in Sundelaget (!) north of Kvalvig; Syd.: Trangisvaag (!) and had been found by Lyngbye also (1. c), who writes: — »Ad littora Færo- 1 »Osteroe« must be an error, as Quivig is on Stromo. 506 ensia sat frequens«. In his herbarium in Copenhagen there is a Færoese specimen of this variety from Thorshavn. Rostrup records it from Klaksvig. ACROSIPHONIA (J. Ag.) Kjellm. Before I try to describe those of Kjell man' s species which I think I have been able to distinguish in my Færoese material I must make a few short preliminary remarks. Kjell man records a great many species in his standard work1 on this species. They are described and figured very accurately and divided into two subgenera, and then again subdivided into sections; he further gives a key to the determination of the species, and by tbe help of this key and more particularly by the help of tbe numerous figures and tbe exhaustive descriptions I think, as I said before, I have been able to distinguish some of Kjell man 's species in my Færoese material ; but, on the other hånd, the occurrence of several forms has made it necessary to somewhat amend Kjell man' s systematic classification of this genus, as, at any rate, the charac- ters which Kjellman utilises for his sections have proved to be un- maintainable. Sectio I. Speirogonicæ is, e. g., described thus: — »Cellulæ fertiles saltim ab initio sparsæ, solitariæ, binæ vel ternæ«. Sectio II, on tbe other band, is characterized by »Cellulæ fertiles jam ab initio 10 — 30 vel plures seriatæ, series intercalares forman- tes«. But I have now found a great many examples which had from I to 10 and even more fertile cells in a continuous row and which, as must be remembered, excepting this agreed well with Kjell man's description in Sectio I. Kjellman certainly writes »saltim ab initio«, but on consulting his description of species in Sectio I we find that be describes the species mentioned there as baving at most 3 fertile adjacent cells in a row. The conclusion therefore is that the two sections must undoubledly be united, from which again follows that at least some of the species referred to different sections will unqucstionably prove to be allied. I think, on tbe one hånd, thai it is justifiable lo emphasize the faet, that we owe Kjell man much in baving pointed out to us several characters by means of which we can better than hitherto 1 Kjellman, F. R.: Studier ofver Chlorophycéslågtet Acrosiphonia och dess skandinaviska Arter (Bihang till K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handlingar, Band IS, Aid. III, No 5). 507 distinguish the single species or varieties or whatever they are to be cailed, but, on the other hånd, I feel equally justified in saying thai there is still rauch left lo he done with reference lo Ihis sub- ject, and the reason why Kjellman has failed in arriving al ;i satisfactory result is doubtless because, of a great many of his species, he has had an insufficient nuniher of examples for ex- aminalion. In order to he ahle to attain lo a satisfactory result, and as- certain with certainty tlu4 variability of the different speeies, e. g. with regard lo their being furnished with hooked branches or not, the structure of the chromatophore, ele , il is beyond douhl neces- sary to have a very large nuniher ol" specimens for examination and specially from as many localities as possible, as Ihis genus, at any rate along the eoasls of Ihe Færoes grows in (seen from a biologicai point of view) widely different habitats, e. g. sometimes in exposed and sometimes in sheltered piaces; sometimes in water perleeliv salt, sometimes in brackish water; sometimes near low-water mark, sometimes near high, ele., conditions which undoubtedly al- leet the different individuals greatly. I am therefore of opinion thai unlil we have a monograph based on a considerable material, it is hardly possible to arrive at any satisfactory result with regard to the systematization of this genus, consequently, I have for the pre- sent preferred to leave a part of my material undelermined. A few years ago Wil le1 read a preliminary paper on the cell- nuclei of the Acrosiphonia in the »Biologisk Selskab« in Kristiania, and in what follows I agree with Wille in referring those species to Acrosiphonia which have many nuclei in each cell, but, on the other hånd, as proposed by Wille, I utilize Ki'itzing's old generic name of Spongomorpha for those which have one nucleus only in each cell. I may add that as early as in 1898 Ros en vinge pointed out in Deux. Mém. (p. 103, footnote) Ihe occurrence of one nucleus only in each cell in forms resembling Cladophora lanosa. 185. A. albescens Kjellm. I think a great many specimens in my material may he referred tothis species. Fig. 103 shows some portions of the plant. The species is specially characterized by its spiny more or less unilateral bran- ches (fig. 103 a, b and f). Hooked branches also occur, but often only sparingly (fig. 103 a, c and d). According to Kjell mans description 1 Cfr. Botaniska Notiser 1899, p. 281. 508 3 fertile cells at most are to be found in a row. This was the case also with a part of the material, which I examined, but some of the specimens had long rows of fertile cells, as many as 25 at least in a continuous row (cfr. fig. 103 c, /*). The chromatophore in the Fil,'. 103. Acrosiphonia albescens Kjellm. Compare tcxt. Fig. o—/; 40:1, g. 150:1. specimen figured (fig. 103 ^7) is reticular, with many small roundish holes and with numerous pyrenoids, other specimens had larger reticular chroinatophores. The hole through which the zoospores escape is large and has a dislinctly crenated margin. The main brancb of the different species varied in thickness from 70 — 100 1*. So far as I can see, the Acrosiphonia Traillii described by Bat- 509 ters1 belongs to ihis species. Batters points out as characteristic of the species: The ultimate branches of two kinds, the one hav- ing apices drawn out with a long slender point, the other of nearly equal diameter throughout, with very obtuse apices«. And he continues: The spiny branches greatly outnumber the hlunl ones, but both kinds are sometimes found side by side«. But these hlunt branches are undoubtedly nothing but young branches, as the spiny branches when young, have round apical eells. I have shown a portion of sneli a branch in hg. 103 />, and if this figure he compared with Batters's lig. 3, pi. II, the identity appears to ine unquestionable. It appears lo me very doubtful il" Acrosi- phonia hamulosa is really speciflcally distinct from this species and also from the below-mentioned A. Binderi and .1. incurva. The species has been found both on open coasts and in shel- tered localities, it grows near low-water mark on stones and rocks, and often covers these with a densely matted growth. It olien occurs associaled with Corallina officinalis, and also epiphytic on the latter as well as on Gigarlina mamillosa and Rhodymenia pal- mata. In the smooth bay near Klaksvig, it formed together with Acrosiphonia sp. and Chætomorpha tortuosa large, detached, mat- led masses. Fruiting specimens were found from April to July. Appears to be a comraon species of the Færoes: — Vid.: Vider- ejde ! ; Bordo: Klaksvig (!); Ost: Glibre (!), Gjov (!); Vaago: Midvaag(!)j Str.: Sundelaget (!), Vestmanhavn (!), Kvivig (!), Velbestad (!), Gliversnæs (!), Arge(!), Thorshavn (!- Sy ti.: Ordevig (!), Sumbo Holm (!), Tværaa (!). 186. A. Binderi (Kutz.) Kjellm. I have only felt justified in referring one gathering to this spe- cies. It dillers from Kjell mans description in having as many as 10 fertile cells in a row, but most frequently only 1, 2 or 3 oc- curred together. The fertile cells are intercalary and have small swarmspores, and finely reticular chromatophore ; hooked branches are absent and spinal branches extremely rare; there are numerous rhizoids; the thickest branches are about GO— 70 (i. I think this plant is very closely related lo A. albescens. Grows on exposed coasts between lide-marks. Fruiting speci- mens occurred in July. Found hitherto only on Syd.: at the foot of Hoddaberg (!). 1 Hat ters, E. A. L.: On Acrosiphonia Traillii, ;i new British alga Transactions and proceedings of the botanical society of Edinburgh, vol XX, p.213 510 Fig. 104. Acrosiphonia flagellata Kjcllm.V Compare lext. 10:1. 187. A. incurva Kjellm. It seems to me that a few speciraens in my material agree well with Kjellman' s description. They have hooked branches, bul no spinal ones. The chromatophore is rather ftnely reticular with numerous pyrenoids. The fertile cells in my specimens occur singly 511 or rarely 2 — 3 together, and have small zoospores. The thicker bran- ches are from 135 lo 170 [i thick. This plant undoubtedly comes very near A. albescens. Grows in sheltered localities between tide-marks, and fruiting specimens were found in May. Found hitherto only on S trom o Kalbakfjord ;il the exit of ;i stream; Syd.: Tværaa (!). Fig. 105. Acrosiplmnia /layellata Kjellm.? Compare text. a JO : 1 ; b, c. d, e 75 : 1 ; / 180 : 1. 188. A. flagellata Kjellm.? In figs. 104 and lOo I have given the illustration of an Acrosi- phonia, which has sometimes a few single fertile cells, sometimes u[) to 20 together in a continuous row. As shown in the figure the fertile cells are intercalary, and the zoospores small, hence the plant belongs to the snb-genus Melanarthrum Kjellm. The chroma- tophore is rather finely recticulate, with numerous pyrenoids (fig. 105/). The thicker main branches are ahont 135 /< thick; growing shoots, particularly vigorous, attain to a thickness of some 120/« just below 512 the apex; the top cell is short. The cells are about as long as broad, sometimes somewhat shorter, sometimes somewhat longer. In the fully developed plant the main branches grow thinner to- wards the apex (fig. 104 a and b). Lateral branches, and often even the main ones, terminate in thin prolongations resembling rhizoids (fig. 105 a); rhizoids growing downwards, occur frequently and most abnndantly in the basal portion of the plant (fig. 104). The tips of the rhizoids are often palmately cleft and serve as holdfasts (fig. 105 c). The hole through which the zoospores escape is fairly large (fig. 104 b). This plant grew between tide-marks on a rocky, exposed coast, where it occurred on the rock as a matted, dark-green growth, 3 — 4 — 5 cm jn height. Fruiting specimens were found in June. The present plant appears to agree fairly well with Acrosiphonia flagellata Kjellm., but it also comes near to Acrosiphonia cincinnata (Foslie) Kjellm. in many respects. It was gathered on Store Dimon(!). An Acrosiphonia which, in association with Enlcromorpha- species, Chætomorpha tortuosa, eta, formed large, felted growths near Klaksvig was somewhat similar to this plant. 189. A. flaccida Kjellm. A single gathering appeared to agree fairly well with Kjell- man 's description of the plant he calls A. flaccida. Both spiny and hooked branches were absent. The chromatophore was finely reticulate, with numerous pyrenoids. The cells were up to 200 /< thick, i. e. somewhat thinner than recorded by Kjellman. My specimens were unfortunately yet sterile. This species appears to come very near to Acrosiphonia hijstrix (Stromf.). The gathering was collected in shallow water near Thorshavn in the beginning of June (!). Acrosiphonia centralis Kjellm. is recorded from the Færoes by Simmons, but a dried specimen of his plant gathered at Næs (Oslero) which I examined appeared to he idcntical with .1. albescens. And the same appears lo me to be the case with a plant gathered by Rostrup and cailed by him Conferva arcta i. centralis Lyngb. Nor have I found any specimens in my own inaterial which I have felt justifled in referring lo .4. centralis as it is described by Kjell man, and I cannol help entertaining some doubt as lo the 513 possibility of keeping this species di stind from A. incurva Kjellm. on the strength ofthe differences in the structure of the chromatophore. 190. A. grandis Kjellm.? This species is recorded with some hesitation by Si m mons (1. c. p. 274). He had senl his material lo Kjellman to be deter- mined, but since it was not in a suitable stale of development, the determination is nncertain. Simmons likewise records Spongomorpha Sonderi Kutz. witb doubt. »Exemplare, die wahrscheinlich dieser angelioren, wurden im Trangisvaagfjord gesammelt«. Judging from a dried specimen I have had for examination it is doubtless like Acrosiphonia albescens. SPONGOMORPHA Kutz.1 191. S. lanosa (Roth) Kutz. I have only had seanty material for examination, as the speci- mens eolleeted were few in number, and were, moreover, sterile; hence I have preferred to retain Kiitzing's older name for this species and have also adopled his delinition of it, the more so as I lune not been able witb any certainty to identify it with any of Kjellman's species; among the latter niv specimens seem to come nearest to Spongomorpha (Acrosiphonia) bombycina Kjellm. (1. c. p. 96). The thicker branches varied from about 25 to 30 ,u. Seems to be very rare along the coasts oi' the Færoes. Found only in shallow water epiphytic on Cladophora rupestris, Str.: Sundene be- tween Thorsvig and Kvalvig (!). The Conferva uncialis Lyngb. recorded by Rostrup (1. c. p. NT from Thorshavn maj' probably be referred to tins s|)ecies. CLADOPHORA Kutz. 192. C. rupestris (L.) Kutz. Kjellm., N. I., p. 377 (307); Conferva rupestris Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 156, tab. 54 B. Found bolh in the littoral zone, usually near low-water mark. and in the sublittoral, where the water is not very deep. It is met witb on open coasts as well as in shellered localities, and grows on stones and rocks, often covering these witb a dark-green, dense growth. It often occurs growing below species of Fnats, etc. The specimens growing uppermost often develop less vigorously; one such poorly developed form bas been cailed by Simmons 1 Cfr.Wille i Botaniska Notiser 1899, p. 281. 514 formå contracta. Fruiting speciraens have been found from May to October. This species is very common along the Færoese coasts, as was noted by Lyngbyer — »Ad insulas Færoenses, copiose«. It is fre- quently covered with different epiphytes, e. g. Chantransia secundata, Diatoms, etc. , a faet already observed by Lyngbye ns he writes: - »Ad insulas Færoenses apices hujus Confervæ interdum fusci vel atro- rubentis conspiciuntur coloris, qui ex porasitis minutis, nempe Calli- thamnio Dawiesii, Diatomate marino, Fragilaria striatula &c. , quæ non- nunquam copiose adsunt. originem ducit«. 193. C. sericea (Huds.) Aresch. Phyceae Scand. mar., p. 194. Cfr. Reinbold, Chlorophyceen der Kieler Fohrde, p. 135; Kuckuck, Meeresalgen vom Sermitdlet- und kleinen Karajakfjord, p. 7. The specimens referred to this species generally fairly well resembled those determined by Areschoug, and preserved in the museum in Copenhagen, partly in the alga-herbarium, and partly in Areschoug's Exsicc. The specimens in question are only a few cm. in length and of a pale-green colour. The cells are elongated from about double as long as broad, to 10 times as long as broad. The main branches are about 75 — 100 — 170 ^ thick; the thinner branches are 20 — 30 \i thick. In a plant preserved in spirit the chromatophore was finely reticulated , with numerous pyrenoids. The branches are generally distant, but frequently several spring from the same joint; the branches of the last series often grow somewhat unilaterally. The fruiting cells occur as shorter or longer chains at the apex of the branches. I must, however, point out that among my material of this species, forms occur, which other authors have referred to other species of Cladophora, mostly to CL glaucescens and to certain forms of the below species; and, on the whole, I am not quite certain where and how the dividing line is to be drawn between this species and the below one. At any rate I am impressed with the idea that the difference in form is a result of the different habitats; in shellered localities, e. g. in the interior of fjords and especially in high-lying rock pools which receive a fresh supplv of water only when the sea is very rough, i. e. perhaps in winter only, but where the water, on the other band, even if it is somewhat heated by the sun, yet is far from foul owing lo the larger size of the basin, in such lo- calities such forms as I have referred to CL gracilis are found wbile in low-lying rock pools wilhin reach of the lides and, consequently, more exposed lo the force of the waves, small specimens, more 515 richly branching, are mel with which I have referred lo this species1. Judging from the examples, which according to my definition are referable lo Cl. sericea, the species grows mostly on fairly ex- posed coasts in high-lying rock-pools, hul il can also be mel with in piaces which are somewhat shellered. Fruiting specimens were ibnnd in April — May. Il is hardly rare around the coasts of the Færoes. 194. Cl. gracilis (Griff.) Kiitz. Conferva gracilis Aresch., Phyceæ Scand. mur., p. 197. The specimens referred to this species agree fairly well with No. 97 quoted by Areschong in Wyatt, Alg. Danm. The ramifica- tion in the Færoese piants though sometimes somewhat unilateral, especially at the apex of the branches, is never decidedly so, as is the case in Areschoug's fig. B (lab. II). In their mode of branching the Færoese specimens are also somewhat similar to Lyngbye's lign re (fig. 54 A) of the plant he calls Conferva crijslallina |9 virescens, which lignre Aresch o ug quotes under his var. § of Cl. gracilis. As may distinetly be seen in Lyngbye's ligure, two unilateral branches often spring from the same joint in the main branch, and just the same mode of branching occurs also frequently in the Færoese specimens. Some of the piants referred to this species somewhat reminded one in habit of the specimens of Cl. glaucescens f. scrobiculorum Kjellm. distributed by Kjell man in Wittr. and Nordst. Exsicc, Fase. 22, No. 1037. The main branches attain to a thickness of up to 200 f*; the thinner branches are 30 — 50 n thick. The dried specimens are of a pale, yellowish-green colour. 1 As also pointed out by Heinbold (1. c. pp. 135 — 7) there is a great deal of uncertainty regarding the definition of this species, and we very often find that characters regarded by one author as peculiar for this species differ altogether from those pointed out by another as such. Kjell man also in his introduction to »Studier ofver Chlorophycéslågtet Acrosiphonia«, where he announces the pu- blication of a second part of his »Handbok i Skandinaviens hafsalgflora« which is to contain a list of the marine Chlorophyceæ of Scandinavia, emphasizes the faet, that by the help of the material in hånd it is impossible to arrive at any definite conclusion regarding the Cladophoraceæ occurring along the coasts of Scandinavia. Kjell man has already given some determinations in Wittr. et Nordst. Exsicc, Fase. 22. and these determinations show that he dillers in several points from his previous opinion as expressed, e. g. in »Norra Ishafvets Algflora : hut until his completed work is published the specimens in the above-mentioned Exsicc. having only uames attached to them merely help to increase the difficulties. Botan; of tbe Færoes. 3;{ 516 This species occurs sometimes in highly situated rock -pools on exposed coasts and sometimes in sheltered localities. Fruiting specimens were found in the summer months. It is presumabry fairly common around Ihe Færoes, and has been found in the following localities: — Bor do: Klaksvig (H. S.!); Str.: Kolle- fjord (H. S.), Thorshavn (!). Cl. fracta (Vahl) Kutz. Rostrup (1. c. p. 87) records this as a common Færoese species, but, nevertheless, it is doubtful if it can be included in the list of the Færoese Flora. There are two specimens in Rostrup's Herbarium which are referred to this spe- cies, one of them is from Thorshavn (gathered Sept. 1867), and determined by Areschoug as »Conf. fracta, proxima«, hence this determination is uncertain. The other is from Bordo (gathered Aug. 1867), and grew on Halosaccion ramentaceum ; on the paper capsule containing this specimen is w ritten in J. Agardh's hand- writing: — »prope C. fractam?«, but a closer examination proved this example to consist mainly of Rhizoclonium riparium in which was intermixed some filaments of an Acrosiphonia. In Lyngbye's Herbarium there are no specimens of the Con- ferva fracta y elongata recorded by him in Hydrophyt. (p. 152), but the Museum in Copenhagen contains a specimen on which is writ- ten in Liebmann's handwriting: — »in saxis maritimis ad Thors- havn«, this specimen must, however, undoubtedly have been gathered by Lyngbye. When examined it proved to be a small, stunted Cladophora closely overgrown with a Rhizoclonium riparium var. implexa. Order GOMONTIACEAE. GOMONTIA Born. et Flah. 195. G. polyrhiza (Lagerh.) Born. et Flah. Sur quelques planles vivant dans le test calcaire des mollusques, p. 12, pi. VI — VIII; Co- diolum polyrhizum Lagerheim, Ofvers. af K. Vetensk. Akad. For- handl. 1885, p. 21. Grows in the shells of Solen, Buccinnm undatum, Cyprina, Cardium, Modiola, etc. often associated with Ostreobium and Hgella. It was found growing in the sublittoral zone, down to a deplh of at least 15 fathoms. Sporangiferous specimens were mel with in Julv. This species occurred in many localities, and is doubtless common along the coasts of the Færoes. 517 Order BOTRYDIACEAE. CODIOLUM A. Braun. 196. C. gregarium A. Braun. Alg. unicell. genera nova et minus cognita, p. 20, pi. I. A great manv speeics of this genus have been described, and I was at first rather doubtful lo whal species I should refer the Færoese specimens, which I have shown in the accompanying ligure (lig. 106). I hegan by re- ferring them to C. longipes Foslie as they appeared to nie to agree closely with No. 458 in Nordst. & Wittr., Exsicc. But on examining a specimen of Codiohim gregarium from Heligoland, determined by A. Braun and dislrihuted in Ra- benhorst, Algen Europa's, No. 1841 I found that my specimens corres- ponded closely with this spe- cies also. While in Alexander Braun' s figure of C. gregarium (1. c), the slem and the clavate head insensibly merge into each other, the specimens in the above- mentioned Exsicc, at any rate the fullv developed examples among them, appeared on closer examina- tion to have the stem and the head separated by quite a distinctly marked constriction, as is also shown in my figure; the stem also proved to be generally longer Hum in Braun's figures. I therefore quite agree with the opinion of Batters1 (1. c), who rcgards (]. longipes as synonymous with C. gregarium. FoslieV2 ligures of Codiolum longipes do not, however, show any decided limit between stem and head, a faet which Kjell man points out in N. I., p. 389 (317), where he writes: — The stipe does not always pass into the club-head so withoul a a limit, as appears in the ligures of Foslie« and he continues: — 1 Batters, E. A.L.: Marint' Algæ of Berwick-on-Tweed, p. 2(54. '-' Foslie, M.: Om nogle nye aretiske havalger (Christiania Vidensk.-Selsk. Forhandl. 1881). 33* Fig. 106. Codiolum gregarium A. Braun. 40:1. 518 Among the species kindly communicated to rae by Foslie there are several that accord nearly with C. gregarium Al. Braun in re- gard lo the shape of the elub-head. I think I ought to point out this faet because it shows that C. longipes is a species very slightly differentiated from C. gregarium«. I may further re- mark that among the very rich material which I had for examination from the Færoes sorae specimens were found which appeared to correspond exactly with C. Nordenskioldianum Kjellm. On the whole I think that Kjellman is right when he says in his description of C. Nordenskioldianum in N. I., p. 390 (318 — 9) that the genus Codiolum has been shown to possess a great many species differing very slightly from one another, which perhaps ought properly to be referred to the same species. On examining the specimens in the different Alg. Exsicc. at my dispo- sal I have, however, arrived at the conclusion that it is most natural to maintain the two first-described species, C. pusillum and C. gregarium1 which are in faet fairly different from each other and I should propose to refer the other species to these as re- presenting different forms of one or the other. The head of the Færoese specimens measured about 135 — 150 ,u in length and 54/;, in breadth and the stem about 250 ft in length and 15 (i in breadth. This plant has been found on sheltered as well as on open coasts ; it grows in the littoral zone near high-water mark or above it, and forms a thin, green, slimy covering on rocks, pales or such like piaces often in association with Prasiola, Urospora mirabilis, Ulothrix, etc. Specimens bearing zoospores were found in June, October, No- vember and December and the plant occurred, on the whole, most abundanlly in October, November and December. This species has hecn found in the following piaces: — Vid.: Kvannesund (II.. I.); S tr.: Thorshavn (H.J.!); Store Dimon (!); Syd.:Tran- gisvaagfjord several piaces (H. .1.), Famien (!). 197. C. pusillum (Lyngb.) Kjellm., N. I., p. 389 (318); Vaucheria pusilla Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 79, lab. 22. 1 Naturally with the exception of Codiolum Petrocelidis Kuck. Fig. 107. Codiolum pu- sillum (Lyngb.) Kjellm. 40: 1. 519 In fig. 107 I have shown some of the specimens oi' Ihis spe- cies contained in Lyngbye's Herbarium in Copenhagen. They are rather different from the one mentioned ahove. The specimens measure at the clavate-head where they are thickest about 30— 60 " in breadth and near the base 8 — 14^. The head and the stem are usually of about the same length, bul sometimes the head is a little shorter, and somelimes somewhat longer than the stem, as in the specimens which I have figured. According to my opinion the plant which was first determined by Foslie (1. c.) as C. pusillum, and which he afterwards described as a distinct species C. cylindraceum Fosl.1, should be regarded as a form belonging lo C. pusillum. The fruiting specimens in Lyngbye's Herbarium were gathered in July and August. Found hitherto in the Færoes by Lyngbye only, who writes with reference lo it (Le): - »Habitat ad saxa littoris Færoensis in superiori relluxus limite, ut ad Qualboe Suderoe, et ad Eldevig Osteroe, band fre- quens«. In his herbarium there air specimens trom the abovc-men- tioned localities. Order PHYLLOSIPHONACEAE. OSTREOBIUM Born. et Flah. 198. O. Queketti Born. et Flah. Sur quelques planles vivant dans le test calcaire des mollusques, p. 15, pi. IX, ligs. 5 — 8. Found in the shells of, e. g. Modiola, Baccinum undatum, Soleu, Cardium, Serpula as also in Phymatolithon polgmorphum. Has been met with in the sublittoral zone at extreme low-waler mark, e. g. in a cave near Kvi vig where it was found in Phymatolithon polymor- phum. It occurs down to a depth of about 25 fathoms. It has been found in many localities and is beyond doubt common along the eoasls of the Færoes. Order BRYOPSIDACEAE. BRYOPSIS Lam. 109. B. plumosa (Huds.) Ag.; Br. Lyngbyei Fl. Dan., Tab. 1603; Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 75. This alga was first found by Lyngbye, who mentions it in Hydrophyt. under the name of Bryopsis Lyngbyei Fl. dan. 1 Foslic, M., Nye havsalger (Troms6 Museums Aarshefter X. 1887). 520 Several beautiful specimens of it are to be found in Lyngbye's Herbarium in Copenhagen. Later on it was found by Rostrup at Tinganæs in Thorshavn, and specimens from the same locality were, moreover, sent to Rostrup by Mr. Randropp. In spite of a very close search both at Tinganæs and Kvivig, I have not suc- ceeded in finding this alga, which, judging also from its occurrenee along the Danish eoasts is of a somewhat sporadic habit. Lyng- bye has gathered it on the 17th of May and on the 24th of August. With regard to its habitat he writes (1. c): -- »Habitat ad littus Færoense in infimo refluxus litnite, ut a Quivig, sed raro«, as mentioned above it has also been gathered at Thorshavn (Str.) by Rostrup and by Randropp. Order DFRBESIACEAE. DERBESIA Sol. 200. D. marina (Lyngb.) Kjellm. Derbesia marina fran Norges Nordkust (Bihang till K. svenska Vet.-Akad. Handlingar. Band 23, Afd. III, Stockholm 1897); Vaucheria marina Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 79, tab. 22. Along the Færoes this interesting alga had previously been found by Lyngbye only, who in Hydrophyt. (1. c.) writes with reference to its habitat: — »Habitat ad littus Færoense in infimo refluxus limite, ut ad Quivig, sed raro«. There is only one specimen of it preserved in Lyngbye's Her- barium, which is unfortunately not labelled in Lyngbye's hand- writing, but in Horne man' s, who has written on it: — »Vau- cheria marina Lyngb., Quivig, Færoe«. It must, however, as Dr. Kolderup Rosenvinge wrote to Kjellman (1. c. p. 11), who had borrowed the specimen for examination, undoubtedly have been ga- thered by Lyngbye, since the locality corresponds with thai given by hint in Hydrophyt. (1. c). This year (1902) when I again visited the Færoes I was for- tunate enough to lind this alga, and fairly abundantly. I found il at a depth of some 8 fathoms on a ralher exposed coast near Hvidenæs, growing on Balanus and Serpula. Il occurred on these as a short, rather dense, occasionally somewhat luft-like expan- sion, x/2 to 1 inch in height. Its habit and mode of growth agree very well with Lyngbye's description, bul ils occurrenee on cal- careous shells of animals at a depth of 8 fathoms dillers altogelher from Lyngbye's statement mentioned above Unit it grows on rocks al extreme low-waler mark. Kjell man (I. c. p. 7, cfr. also N. I., 521 p. 316) found his Finmark spermiens in 10—20 l'alhoms attached to Lithothamnion soriferum and corals , and the doubt he expresses as to the identity of Mie Finmark and the Færoese plant on account of their diflferent habitats is now cleared away by the discovery of niv sublittoral plant. He linds further cause for doubt in the faet of his plant being 1 — 1,5 cm. high only, while Lyngbye records his to he »circa pollicem allns , bul liere again, I mav mention thai some of niv speeimens were also ahout 1 cm. high only, while others were almosl an inch high. With regard then lo the sub- stratum Derbesia marina grows on, this appears to he very dif- ferent, Lyngbye found il on rocks, Kjell man on Lithothamnion and corals, and I on Balanus and Serpula, and, lastly, I mav add that al Lerwick on the Shetland Islands1 I found il at a depth of ahont 6 l'alhoms, epiphytic upon the slem of Laminaria hyperborea where it occurred as a short cushion ahout 3/4 indies high. The Færoese as well as the Shetland plant agreed well with Kjellman's exhaustive description. I shall in what follows point out some of their most important characters. In hoth piants there usually occurred one short cell at the hase of each branch — most frequently in the English specimen — and a similar short cell in the stalk at the hase of the sporangium. The erect branches were, at their thickest, as much as ;"H n lliick in the plant from the Færoes, and somewhat thinner, ahout 50 fi in the English one. Sporangia occurred in both of them, but unfortunately I did not observe anv which were quite ripe. Those in the Færoese speeimens were ahout 160 u long and 75 /< broad, while those in the Shetland speeimens were ahout 150 ,u long and 70 /i broad. A similar immature spo- rangium in the specimen gathered by Lyngbye measured 156 /* in length and 67 /< in hreadth. The stalks of the sporangia vary considerably in length, as mentioned by Kjellman (1. c. p. 10); those which I examined varied in length from 20 — 60 ,«. The spo- rangia, as I said before, were not fully ripe, so, unfortunately I cannot record with anv certainty how many swarmspores are pro- duced in each sporangium, but they were, however, sufficiently deve- loped for me to ascertain that the number would undoubtedly be at least 20. 1 This year on my way to the Færoes I was enahled to pay a short visit to the Shetland Islands, as the Marine Department not only kindly allowed me to make the voyage to the Færoes in the cruiser »Beskytteren«, hut also permitted the latter to touch at the Shetland Islands. 522 As may be seen from this shorl description, the piants in question agree well in their main points with Kjellman's from Fin- mark, so that the same species of Derbesia has now been found along the coasts of Finmark (Norway), the Shetland Islands, and the Færoes. Lyngbye's specimen, as mentioned above, and as may be seen in his figure, bears frnit. The month in which it was gathered by Lyngbye is not known, but very probably it was August, in which month I found my plant with almost ripe sporangium. • Along the coasts of the Færoes this species has hitherto been found in the following piaces: — Str. : Kvivig (Lyngbye1), Hvidenæs (!). Order VAUCHERIACEAE. VAUCHERIA D. C. 201. V. coronata Nordst. Botan. Notiser 1879, p. 177, tab. I, figs. 1—9. Found sometimes in sheltered piaces in Sundelaget, where it occurred on low, muddy slopcs close to the sea, in large, green cushion-like patches associated with Percursaria percursa and other algæ; and sometimes on fairly open coast, e. g. near Gliversnæs, where it formed similar low, green, cushion-like growths in rock-crevices filled with mud, at a considerable height above sea-level, so that it could only be reached by the spray. Specimens rieh in reproduc- tive organs were found in June. It has hitherto been found only on Str.: norlh of Kval vig al the narrow tide-way (!), Gliversnæs (!). It is possible that some of the Vaucheria-species mentioned in my Freshwater Algæ (p. 256) may occur in piaces with brackish water. Order VALONIACEAE. VALONIA Ginn. 202. V. ovalis (Lyngb.) Ag. Spec. Alg., I, p. 431; Gastridium ovale Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 72; Halicystis ovalis Aresch. Phyc, scand., p. 22. This species has hitherto been found by Lyngbye only, who writes in Hydrophyt. (1. c.) with reference to ils habitats: — »Habitat 1 W'luii Lyngbye writes: li t ad Quivig«, then this seems to indicate thai he found il in several piaces. 523 ad infimum refluxus limitem liltoris Færoensis, ut ad Quivig, Hoy- vig &c, rupibus tenaciter adhærescens . In his herbarium in Copen- hagen are several specimens from the above-mentioned localities gathered respectively on the 27thof August and the 12thof September. D. Cyanophyceae. Order CHROOCOCCACEAE. CHLOROGLOEA Wille. 203. Ch. tuberculosa (Hansg.) Wille. N. Wille: Algologische Notizen I — VI in Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskab. Bind .'58. Kri- stiania 1900. Agreed well with Wille's description and figure (1. c. p. 2). Found epiphytic on Gigartina mamillosa growing between tide-marks on exposed coast. It occurred on the latter algæ in crusts of a dark, dingy green colonr. Found hitherto only on Str. : Ilojvig Fiesen (!). Order CHAMAES1PHONACEAE. DERMOCARPA Crouan. 204. D. Farlowii nov. spec. A Dermocarpa which occurred on Polysiphonia fastigiata had a slrong resemblance lo J). prasina Born. et Thur. (Noles algologi- ques, Fase. 2, p. 73, tab. 26, ligs. 6—9) holh in ils _. — -—v_ mode of growth and in ils outward appearance, ;',|jx bul on closer examination it differred so far from the latter species tliat I suspected il lo '<;>■»#■' / hc dislinet from it. I therefore wrote to Dr. Bornet regarding this specimen, and he kindly Fi* los- Dermocarpa Fariowu informed me that some years ago Professor Farlow had sent him a Dermocarpa from Japan which appeared to he identical with the Færoese specimen, and he very kindly forwarded me a preparation of the Japan plant, which also ap- peared to me lo agree exactly with mine. Dr. Bornet also told me llial he had written to Prof. Farlow on the subject, and Farlow had answered that he had nol described the plant. Before I give a description of il I mav add that I have done rnyself the pleasure of naming il 1). Farlowii in honour of ils lirsl observer. 524 As mentioned above it grows as an epiphyte on Polysiphonia fastigiata, and like Dermocarpa prasina it occurs in small, roundish, almost semi-globular growths, or when several such grow together, in cushion-like expansions, irregularly shaped. In a Iransverse sec- tion, or, better still, on separating the cells by means of a gentle pressure, they prove to be (fig. 108) cylindrically club-shaped, nar- row at the bottom and widening upwards to the lop, and with homogeneous contents of a bluish-green colour. The cells are about 60 — 90 // long and about 30 /< broad. The entire contents of the cells are transformed into a very considerable number of small conidia ; the latter are about 2,5 // broad. As may be seen from Ihis description the present plant differs essentially from D. prasina in having larger cells and inuch smaller conidia. Conidiiferous specimens occurred in May. Found hitherto only on Syd.: Tværaa (!), 205. D. violacea Crouan (?), Algues marines nouvelles de la rade de Brest. (Anm. se. nat. IV Ser., Bot., IX. 1858, p. 70). Epiphytic on Ralfsia verrucosa which grew on exposed rocks in the sea. I found a very small quantity of a Dermocarpa which I refer very doubtfully to D. violacea. The cells are pear-shaped, and the cell-contents of a yellowish-brown colour, sometimes faintly blue-green. The entire contents of the cells are produced into co- nidia, which are about 1,5 — 2 n in diameter. The cells are 24 — 30 (i long and as much as 16 \i broad. It differs more particularly from Crouan' s description by its different colour and by its conidia appearing to be somewhat smaller. Found on rocks in the sea oli" the north-west point of Videro(!). PLEUROCAPSA Thur. 206. P. amethystea Rosen v. var., Jobs. Schmidt1. Found epiphytic on Rhodochorton Rothii, consequently, in the same habitals as the latter. It has been found on almost all the material of Rhodochorton brought home and must therefore be re- gn rded as common along the coasts of the Færoes. 1 Tliis variety \v:is determined by Mr. Johs. Schmidt whose notes on it will appear in Helgi Jonssons paper »The Marine Algæ of Iceland« in »Botanisk Tidsskrift . 525 HYELLA Bom. et Flah. 207. H. cæspitosa Horn. et Flah. Surquelg. plant, vivant d. le lest calcaire des mollusques (Hullet, d.l. soe. bot. de France, Tome 36, 1889). var. tgpica. var. nitida Batt. New or t rit. brit. mar. Algæ. Journal of Bo- tany. Vol. 34, 1896. Both the forms were found in the sublittoral /.duc down to a depth of about 20 fathoms, inhabiting the cells of various mollucs, e. g. Solen. Cyprina, elc. The cell-contents of var. nitida were purpie or violet showing sometimes a transition lo bluish-green. I have not seen any sporangia. Found hitherto only on S t r. : Vestmanhavn !), Thorshavn ! ,Gliversnæs ! . A Hyella, which occurred in Phymatolithon polymorphum gathered from rock-pools at Arge near Thorshavn, had trichomes which meas- ured about 18 — 11) /» in breadth; perhaps the plant is only to be regarded as a large variety of Hyella cæspitosa, hul as I have only seen fragments, and have not succeeded in tinding conidia, I have preferred to let it remain undetermined. 208. Hyella endophytica nov. spec. A small plant of the Chamæsiphonaceæ which occurred directly under Ihe epidermis ol' an old fruiting specimen of Chondrus crispus appears to ine to belong to the genus Hyella. I have shown some specimens ofitin lig. 109. It occurs as small, almost globular bodies, 40 — 80// in breadth formed by more or less richly ramified cell-fila- ments. The cell-division occurs in all directions. The apical cells are longest, about twice as long as they are broad; the others are about as long as broad. The breadth of the cells varies from 3 lo 5 .". The cells are encloscd in an envelope and have contents of a bluish-green colour. The cells situated towards the periphery of the Chondrus are produced into conidangia; the latter are some- what larger than the vegetative cells, about 4 — 10 /< and contain numerous tiny conidia. Conidiiferous specimens were found in June. I have referred to this species, though, doubtfully, another small plant of the Chamæsiphonaceæ, which I found very sparingly, endo- phytic in the lamina of Laminaria hyperborea (lig. 110). It occurred directly under the epidermis of the laller in small irregularly shaped l'ig. 10!). Hyella endophytica nov. spec. The lines above the three piants indicate thesurface of Chondrus crispus. .'iTu : 1. 526 colonies, causing semiglobular swellings on the lamina. A trans- verse section of the lamina showed that the endophyte more or less destroys or ruptnres the cells of the epidermis, and I presume (I have not observed it) that the latter is finally entirely tornasun- der to allow the spores to escape. The cells are irregularly shaped, sometimes rounded, sometimes polygonus, and occur most fre- quently singly or a few together in short, ramified filaments, pro- duced by vegetative division. The vegetative cells are abont 5,4 fx thick. The conidangia are somewhat larger, about twice as large, the greatest diameter being 8 — 10 fi. The conidia are pro- duced abundantly in the coni- dangia and are abont 1 /< broad. As I have had only spirit speci- mens of this plant for examination I am not prepared to say any- thing about the colour of its cell-contents. Found with conidangia in the beginning of May. This species has hitherto been found only as an endophyte in Chondrus crispas on Nolso: Ejde(!); and in Laminaria hyperborea on Str.: Thorshavn (!). Fig. 110. Hgella cnclophytica nov. spec. '? In Laminaria hyperborea. 370 : 1 . Order OSCILLATORIACEAE. SPIRULINA Turpin. 209. S. subsalsa Ørsted. Beretning om en Exursion til Trin- delen, Krøyers Tidsskrift, 3. Bd., p. 56(5, 1842. formå (i oceanica Gomont, Monographie des Oscillariées, p. 274. Found in rock-pools on fairly exposed coast. Str.: between Thorshavn and Hojvig (!). PHORMIDIUM Kutz. 210. Ph. autumnale (Ag.) Gomont, cmend. Jobs. Schmidt1, Danni. blaagr. Alg., p. 68 (348). Grows near high-water mark, sometimes on rocks where fresh- 1 Determ. Johs. Schmidt. 527 water runs into the sen, and sometimes in rock-pools containing stagnant water polluted by lish remains, etc. Found hitherto only on Kalso: Husum ! ; and on Sir.: Tinganæs in Thorshavn (!). HYPHEOTHRIX Kutz. 211. Hypheotrix spec.1. According lo .lolis. Schmidt very slender piants belonging to this genus occurred frequently in the galherings. LYNGBYA C. Ag. 212. L. lutea Gomont1. Monographies des Oscillariées, p. 161. Found between tide-marks on fairly exposed coast in October. Found hitherto only on Vid.: Vedvig (H. J. ; and on Str. : Thors- havn (H.J.). MIGROCOLEUS Desmaziéres. 213. M. tenerrimus Gomont1. Monographies des Oscillariées, p.93. Found only once in November at Kvannesund (H. .1.). Order RIVULARIACEAE. COLOTHRIX Agardh. 214. C. aeruginea (Kutz.) Thur1. Johs. Schmidt, Danm. blaagr. Alg., p. 110 (390). F'ound near high-water mark, appears to be very rare along the coasts of the Færoes. Found hitherto only on Str.: In the oeighbourhood of Thors- havn (!); Syd: Trangisvaagfjord (!). 215. C. scopulorum (Web. et Mohr.) Ag. emend. Johs. Schmidt1, Danm. blaagr. Alg., p. 110 (300). Found near extreme high-water mark, frequently at a eonsider- able height above sea-level, e. g. near Bosdalafos where il occurred at a height of 80 feet; it formed herc in association with other blue-green algæ, Lichens, etc. dark-brown, almosl black crusts on the roek. It has been found botb in the spring, summer and autumn months, but generally only poorly developed specimens were met with, and Johs. Schmidt tells me thai this is the ease 1 Determ. Joh^. Schmidt 528 with several of the blue-green algæ which occur along the coasts of the Færoes. It has been found in several piaces along the coasts of the Færoes, and is probably common. RIVULARIA Rotb. 216. R. atra Roth1. Catalecta botanica III, p. 340. Found near high-water mark on exposed coast as well as in sheltered localities. It often grows at such a considerable height that it can only be wetted by the spray, and is, consequently, sub- ject to desiccation for a longer period at a time. Met with in July, October and November. Found hitherto only in the following localities: — Vid.: Ostvig and Vedvig (H.J.); Kun 6 (H. J.); Ost. (H. J.); Str.: Thorshavn (!). 1 Determ. Joh s. Schmidt. ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA. As that part of my paper in which the Fucus has been treated was already ready printed in the beginning of July I have not been able to refer to the description of Fucus spiralis L. given by Ratters in his paper »A Catalogue of the British marine Alga1« (Journal of Rotany, Vol. XL, September 1902, Supplement, p. 50), in which he has expressed the same opinion of this species as I have in my present paper. To avoid confusion I may remark that when I write at pp. 465— 6: »Fucus distichus L., Lyngb., Hydrophyt., p. 6 (partim, e specim.)< then it is to be understood that I fully agree with Lyngbye's definition of this species, but his synonyms (with exception of Fucus distichus L.) should be excluded, as also his herbarium contains, besides typical specimens which correspond with his description, also one from the Færoes, which is somewhat similar to f. linearts. At page 346 and throughout for fructifging read fruiting ; pages 371, 403, etc. for fructify read fruil. At page 383, Fig. 5 platycarpus Thur i7_' serratus I 478 — spiralis 1 472 531 Fucus \ esiculosus I - — y inflatus L. I.\ ngb /' spiralis L. L\ ngb. Purcellaria fastigiata Li Lam.. — lumbricalis Gmel.) — rotunda (imel.) 477 4( i.". 172 397 397 398 Gastridium filiforme FL Dan.)..... — ovale Lyngb — purpurascens Huds Lyngb.... Gagella polgrhiza Rosenv Gigartina Igcopodioides L. Lyngb - mamillosa (i. el W. J, Ag - pinastroides Gmel. Lyngb — plicata Lam - subfusca jdracemosa Lyngb. ... — viriilis Mull. Lyngb Gomontia polyrhiza (Lagerh.) Bom. et Flah Griffithsia setacea EU. Ag Halidrgs nodosa (L.) Lyngb — siliquosa (L.) Lyngb Halosaccion ramentaceum (L.) .1. Ag. Harveyella mirabilis (Reinsch Schmitz & Rke Hildenbrandia rosea Kutz Himanthalia lorea (L.) Lyngb Hormiscia penicilliformis (Roth) Fr. Hutchinsia atrorubescens Ag — badia Ag — Brodiæi (Dillw.) Lyngb — fastigiata Ag — lepadicola Lyngb Mostingii Lyngb — nigrescens Huds. Lyngb — stricta Ag - urceolata Dillw. Lyngb Hgdrolapathum sanguineum L. Stackh Hyella cæspitosa Horn. et Flah. - endophytica nov. spec I [ypheotrix spec Ilca fascia Mull. Fr Isthmoplea sphærophora Harv. Kjellm Laminaria digitata I.. Lara — esculenta Lam færoensis nov. spec longicruris de la Pyl.var.færoensis - saccharina L. Lam Botanv of thc Færoes. 397 365 182 375 357 360 360 375 146 516 .'{77 163 4 c:; 367 356 102 479 502 373 :57:s •m-å .'574 372 J574 373 372 371 370 525 525 527 438 119 459 44S 154 454 151 Laurencia pinnatifida Gmel. Lam. :571 Leathesia difTormis I. Arescb. 1 17 Leptonema fasciculatum Rke 135 Lithoderma Kjellmani W'i I lt- 129 fatiscens Aresch 130 Lithophyllum Crouani Fosl nu incrustans Phil 401 Lithothamnion glacialt- Kjellm 100 — læve Stromf. Fosl nu Lenormaudi Aresch. Fosl. 101 Litosiphon Laminariæ Lyngb. Harv. 4."5!t Lomentaria articulata Huds. Lyngb. 365 clavellosa Turn. Thur 365 rosea Han ;{(;(; Lyngbya lutea Gom 527 Microcoleus tenerrimus Gom 527 Mikrosyphar Polysiphoniæ Kuck. .. 429 — Zosteræ Kuck 429 Monostroma fuscum Post. et Kupr.) Wittr 4;i4 Grevillei I 'bur.' Wittr 495 undulatum Wittr 4!)(> Myrionema æcidioides (Rosenv. Sauvag 427 — Corunnæ Sauvag 42(i — færoense nov. spec 424 foecundum (Stromf.) Sauvag. .. 42(i — globosum (Rke.) Sauvag 119 — speciosum nov spec 421 vulgare Thur 42(1 Nitophyllum laceratum Gm. Grev. 368 Odonthalia dentata (L.) Lyngb 376 Ostreobium Queketti Born. et Flah. 519 Ozothalia nodosa L. Dcsne. et Thur. 163 Palmella adnata Huds Lyngb . 180 Pelvetia canaliculata (L. Dcsne. et Thur 47!t Percursaria percursa Ag. Rosenv. . 4S7 Petroderma maculiforme Wollnv Kuck 430 Peyssonnelia Dubyi Crouan 399 Phæostroma parasiticum nov. spec. 441 Phlebothamnion faroense Kutz. 381 Phormidium autumnale Ag. Gom. 526 Phgcocelis æcidioides Rosenv. Kuck. 427 foecunda Stromf 42(i globosus Rke.) De Toni 41!) Phyllitis fascia Mull Kutz 138 zosterifolia Rke 138 34 532 Phyllophora Brodiæi (Turn.) J. Ag.. 358 - membranifolia (G. et W.) J. Ag. 358 - rubens (G. et W.) J. Ag 358 Phymatolithon lævigatum Fosl 401) — polymorphum (L.) Fosl 400 Pilinia maritima (Kjellm.) Rpsenv. . 500 Pleurocapsa amethystea Rosenv. . . . 524 Pleurococcus spec 480 Plocamium coccineum (Huds.) Lyngb. 3(57 Plumaria elegans (Bonnem.) Schmitz 383 Pogotrichum filiforme Rke 440 Polyides rotundus (Gmel.) Grev. . . . 398 Polysiphonia atrorubescens (Dillw.) Grev 373 - Brodiæi (Dillw.) Grev 373 - elongata (Huds.) Harv 372 - fastigiata (Roth) Grev 374 lepadicola (Lyngb.) .1. Ag 372 — nigrescens (Huds.) Harv 373 — urceolata (Lightf.) Grev 371 — violacea (Roth) Grev 372 Porphyra coccinea J. Ag 345 - leucosticta Thur 340 - miniata (Ag.) Ag 347 - umbilicalis (L.) J. Ag 348 Prasiola crispa (Lightf.) Menegh. . . . 482 — furfuracea (Mert.) Menegh 486 - stipitata Suhr 487 Pterosiphonia parasitica (Huds.) Fkbg 374 Ptilota elegans Bonnem 383 - pectinata (Gunn.) Kjellm 384 plumosa (L.) Ag 385 - var. asplenioides Ag. . 384 Punctaria latifolia Grev 436 plantaginea (Roth) Grev 437 Pylaiella littoralis (L.) Kjellm 418 Ralfsia clavata (Carm.) Far] 432 - verrucosa (Aresch.) J. Ag 430 Rhizoclonium riparium (Roth) Harv. 504 Rhodochorton intermedium Kjellm. 35)2 islandicum Rosenv :S91 membranaceum Magnus 389 parasiticum Batt .'*94 penicilliforme (Kjellm.) Rosenv. 389 - Rothii (Turt.) Nagl 390 seiriolanum Gibs 396 Rhododermis elegans Crouan 399 Rhodomela Iycopodioides (L.) Ag.., .'{75 Rhodomela subfusca (Woodw.) Ag. 375 Rhodophyllis dichotoma (Lepech.) Gobi 302 Rhodymenia palmata (L.) Grev 303 Rivularia atra Roth 528 Schizogonium radicans (Kiitz.) Gav 482 Scytosiphon compressus (L.) Lyngb. 491 - — — — j3 crispatus Lyngb. . . . 492 — foenieulacciis Fl. Dan 4415 — hippuroides Ljmgb 444 — intestinalis y cornucopiæ Lyngb. 490 — lomentarius (Lyngb.) J. Ag 439 Sphacelaria britanniea Sauvag 432 — cæspitula Lyngb 433 — cirrhosa (Roth) Ag 433 — furcigera Kiitz 433 Sphærococcus ciliatus Ag 362 — cristatus Ag 361 — laciniatas (Turn.) Lyngb 359 — mamillosus Ag 357 Sorapion Kjellmani (Wille) Rosenv. 429 Spirulina subsalsa Ørsted 526 Spongomorpha lanosa (Roth.) 513 — Sonderi Kiitz 513 Sterrocolax decipiens Schmitz 360 Stictyosiphon tortilis (Rupr.) Rke. . 440 Ulothrix consociata Wille 498 — discifera Kjellm 482 — flacca (Dillw.) Thur 497 — isogona (Engl. Bot.) Thur 502 — pseudollacca Wille 498 Uloa fascia (Fl. Dan.) Lyngb 438 Lactuca 1 497 Linza Fl. Dan 489 - mesenteriformis Lyngb 494 - palmata Dec 363 - plicata Fl. Dan 494—5 - purpurea Roth 349 - — {3 elongata Lyngb 349 - umbilicalis I :> IS Ulvella con fluens Rosenv 500 — fucicola Rosenv 500 Urospora mirabilis Aresch 500 Wormskioldii (Mert.) Rosenv. . 502 Valonia ovalis Lyngb.) Ag 522 Vaucheria coronata Nordst 522 marina Lyngb 520 — pusilla Lyngb 518 DIATOMS FROM THE MARINE ALGÆ OF THE FÆROES ERNST ØSTRUP. My material consisls of 136 gatberings of which 48 are her- barium - material. It was collected by Mr. F. Borgesen, Mr. Helgi Jonsson, and Dr. Kolderup Rosen vinge1. Placochroniaticæ. PLEUROSIGMA W. Sm. 1852. Cl. Syn. L, p. 32. 1. Pleurosigma elongatum W. Sm., W. Sm. Syn. tal). XX., fig. 199. Kalbakfjord (S tro ni o); Tværaa (Sy de ro). 2. P. augulatum Queckett, W. Sm. Syn. tab. XXI., fig. 205. Skaalefjord (Ost er 6). 3. P. formosum W. Sm., W. Sm. Syn. tab. XX., fig. 195. Skaalefjord (Oste ro). The above-mentioned species of Pleurosigma occur only singly at the stated habitats. CALONEIS Cl. Syn. I., p. 16. 4. Caloneis Liber W. Sm., var. linearis Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XII., lig. 35. X o 1 s 6. Caloneis Liber W. Sm., var. genuina Cl., A. S. N. S. D. tab. II., lig 44. Anerne (Bord 6); Ejde, Skaalefjord, Molen (Os te ro). DIPLONEIS Klir. 1840. Cl. Syn. [., p. 76. 5. Diploneis incurvata Greg., A. S. N. S. I), tab. I., ligs. 10 — 11. Kalbakfjord St ro ni 6 . 1 In the following list the freshwater forms are marked *. 34* 534 6. D. Entomon (Ehr.) A. S., Cl. & Grun. arct. D. tab. III., fig. 54. Molen (Oster 6). 7. D. splendida Greg., Ost. mar. 1). Ostg. lab. V., fig. 64. Klaksvig (Bord 6); Skaalefjord (Ostero). 8. D. didyma Ehr., V. H. Syn. lab. IX., figs. 5— 6. Skaalefjord (Ostero). 9. D. chersonnensis Grun., A. S. N. S. D. tab. I., fig. 9. Aaerne (Bor do); Vestmanhavn (Ostero). *10. D. Boldtiana Cl., Cl. Diat. Fini. tab. II., fig. 12. Thorshavn (S trom 6). •11. D. ovalis Hilse, V. H. Syn. lab. X., lig. 10. Klaksvig (Bord 6). 12. D. notabilis Grev. formå explela A. S., A. S. N. S. D. tab. I., fig. 20. Skaalefjord (Ostero). 13. D. littoralis Donk., A. S. N. S. D. tab. I., ligs. 24—25. Tværaa (Sy de ro). 14. D. vacillans A. S. formå pJ., A. S. Atl. tab. VIII., fig. 34 and 36. Skaalefjord (Ostero). 15. D. Smithii Bréb., V. H. Syn. tab. IX., fig. 11. Molen (Ostero). 16. D. borealis Grun., Grim. Fz. Jos. L. tab. I., fig. 40. Molen (Ostero); Vestmanhavn (S trom 6). In a gathering collected at the head of Kalbakfjord (S trom 6) I found a Diploneis, which corresponds with the figure in A. S. AU., tab. VIII., fig. 15 (from Camp. Bay) referred by Cleve (Syn. I., p. 96) lo D. borealis. 17. D. major Cl., V. H. Syn. Supl. B, lig. 23. Skaalefjord (Ostero). In a gathering from Skaalefjord (Ostero) I found a frag- ment of a Diploneis (fig. 111. 660/i). 0 is probably identical with the Navicnla lacrimans A. S., A. S. Atl. tal). XII., lig. 60 (from Camp. Bay), which ('.leve (Syn. I, pp. 103 1 calls Di- ploneis gemmatula Grun. var. lacrimans. A. S. All these species of Diploneis occur dispersed in the gatherings and never in a large quantity in any of them. Fig. 111. FBUSTULIA Ag. 1824. Cl. Syn. I., |>. fil ■IS. Frustulia vulgaris Thw., V. II. Syn. tab. XVII., lig. 6. Kalbakfjord, Thorshavn (S tro ni o. 535 *19. F. rhomboides Ehr. var. saxonica Rabh., V. II. Syn. lab. XVII., lig. 4. Kalbakfjord, Thorshavn Stromo). Both the above-mentioned species occurred in a few examples only. AMPHIPLEURA Klz. 1844. CI. Syn. [., p. 125. 20. Amphipleura (Berkeleya) rutilans Trentepohl, V. II. Syn. tab. XVI, ligs. 15 18. Nol rare. Found in 15 gatherings, and in several of them abundantly Bord 6; O s te ro; Stromo; Syd er o NAVICULÆ MESOLEJÆ Cl. Syn. I., p. 127. 21. Navicula (Dickeia) ulvacea Berkl., V. H. Syn. tab. XVI., lig. 10. Found only in a gathering From Aaerne Bordo where il. however, occurred rather abundantly. Varies somewhat in size and form. Typical specimens, such as those figured by V. II., occur, but elliptical and proportionally broader examples are also met with, the proportion as regards length and breadth in those figured by V. H. being 25 : 7 while in the sborter Færoese speci- mens it mav be 1.75 to 1. XAVICULÆ ENTOLEIÆ Cl. Syn. I., p. 131. 22. Navicula inornata Grim., Cl. & Grim. arct. I), tab. III., lig. 56. Skaalefjord lOstero ); Kvivig, Kirkebo Stromo). NAVICULÆ MICROST1GMATICÆ Cl. Syn. I., p. 141. 23. Stauroneis (Libellus) constricta (Ehr.?) W. Sin., W. Sin. Syn. tab. XV., lig. 126. Found only in a gathering from Thorhavn — stones between tide- marks« -- (Stromo), where it, however, occurred rather l'requently. 24. S. Phoenicenteron Ehr., V. Syn. tab. IV., fig. 2. Kalbakfjord (Stromo). 25. Navicula (Libellus) rhombica Greg., Greg Mie. .1. III., tab. IV., lig. 16. Tværaa (Sy der o). 26. N. Grevillei Ag., V. H. Syn. lab. XVI., ligs. 2, 3, 6 and 7. Dispersed. Found in 11 gatherings trom Oste ro, Stromo and Syd er 6. 27. Navicula Libellus Greg., Donk. Brit. I), tab. IX., lig. 1. Nol common. Aaerne Bordo ; Skaalefjord Ostero ; Tværaa (Sydero). 536 CYMBELLA Ag. 1830. Cl. Syn. I., p. 156. *28. Cymbella ventricosa Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. III., iig. 15. Between Thorsvig and Kval vig (S trom 6). *29. C. æqvalis W. Sm, V. H. Syn. tab. III., Jig. 24. Between Thorsvig and Kvalvig iStrorao). *30. C. affinis Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. II., tig. 19. Thorshavn (S trom 6). *31. C. cymbiformis (Ag.?) Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. II., lig. 11. Kalbakfjord (S trom 6). *32. C. Cistula Hempr., V. H. Syn. tab. II., ligs. 12 — 13. Kvi vig, Thorshavn (S trom 6). *33. C. lanceolata Klir., V. H. Syn. tab. II., lig. 7. Tværaa (Sydero). *34. C. hebridica Grun., Cl. Diat. Fini. tab. II., ligs. 16—17. Between Thorsvig and Kvalvig (Stromo). All the Cgmbellæ occur only as solitary specimens in the above- mcntioned gatherings. GOMPHONEMA Ag. 1824. Cl. Syn. I., p. 178. *35. Gomphonema gracile Ehr. var. naviculacea W. Sm., V. H. Syn. tab. XXIV., ligs. 13—14. Tværaa (Sydero). *36. G. subclavatum Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XXIII, ligs. 38— 41. Kalbakfjord (Stromo). 37. G. Aestuarii Cl., Cl. Diatomiste II., tab. III., fig. 4. — Fig. 112. 1000/i. Fairly common. Fonnd in 18 gatherings from Videro; Bor do; Ostero; Stromo; Vaago; Trold- hoved; and Sydero, and in some of the gatherings, e. g. from Thorshavn (Stromo) and Troldhoved rather abundantly. Cleve (Syn. I-, p. 188) records the length of this species (from Hastings) to be 0,02 mm.— 0,028 mm.; I have freqnently fonnd specimens which were shorter 0,012 mm. in length. The transverse fascia is situated more closely to the lower end of the valve; there are distinct diaphragms at both apices. and Ihe valvcs are occasionally almost rectilinear, in the latter case it strikingly resembles a Rhoicosphdiiia PullusJ. S. (A. S. Atl., tah. CCXIIL, lig. 20). 38. G. exiguum Ktz., V. II. Syn. lab. XXV., fig. 34. Gjov (Ostero); Thorshavn (Stromo); Store Dimon; Vaags Ejde (Sydero). Fonnd in a gathering from Thorshavn (Stromo), not rare. 537 G. exiguum Ktz., var. pachyclada Bréb., V. H. Syn. tab. XXV., rigs. 31—32. G. exiguum Kl/., var. arctica Grun., V. H. I. c. lig. 30. These varieties are found dispersed in several (17 of the gatherings; var. arctica occurs perhaps more frequently than var. pachyclada. Videro; Bordo; Stromo; Vaagd; Nolso; and Sydero. 39. G. kamtschaticum Grun., V. H. Syn. lab. XXV., fig. 29. Coraraon. Found in 27 gatherings, and in several of them abundantly Bordd; Ostero; Stromo; Sando; Store Dimon; Sydero). It varies somewhat. Thus, I i'oun^ scattered among the typical forms others, which agree well with the almost oval form Ironi the coast of California, figured in A. S. All. lab. CCXIII., tig. 44, and the one from Vancouver Island il. c. lin. Hi . TRACHYNEIS Cl. Cl. Syn. I., p. 190. 40. Trachyneis aspera Ehr. var. pulchella W. Sin., W. Sm. Syn. lab. XIX., p. 194. Found dispersed in several (10) of the gatherings from Ostero; Stromo; and Sydero, but never in large quantities. T. aspera Ehr. var. vulgaris CL, A. S. AU. tab. XLVIII., lig. 5. Only found in a gathering from Thorshavn (Stromo). ANOMOEONEIS Pfitzer 1871. Cl. Syn. II., p. 5. *41. Anomoeoneis brachysira (Bréb.) Grim., V. H. Syn. tab. XII., figs. 8—9. Kvannesund (Videro); Kalbakfjord Stromo). NAVICULÆ HETEROSTICHÆ CL, Cl. Syn. II , p. 8. *42. Navicula cocconeiformis Greg., V. H. Syn. tab. XIV., tig. 1. Kalbakfjord (Stromo . NAVICULÆ LINEOLATÆ Cl., Cl Syn. II., p. 10. *43. Navicula cryptocephala Klz., V. H. Syn. tab. VIII., fig. 5. Between Thorsvig and Kvalvig Stromo). :i44. N. rhyncocephala Ktz., V. H. Syn. tal). VIL, tig. 31. Between Thorsvig and Kvalvig Stromo). 45. N. avenacea Bréb. (Schizonema Smithii Ag.), V. H. Syn. tab. XV., tig. 33. Hqjvig Stromo); Famien Sydero). 538 *46. N. viridula Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. VIL, fig. 25. Kalbakfjord (S t ro m 6). 47. N. hungarica Greg., Grun. Øst. Ung. tab. XXX., fig. 42. Vaags Ejde (Sy der 6). :f:48. N. radiosa Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. VII., fig. 20. Molen (Ost er 6); Velbestad S trom 6). *49. N. gracilis Ehr, V. H. Syn. tab. VII., ligs. 7— 8. Tværaa (S y d e r o). 50. N. bottnica Grun., V. H. Syn. lab. VII., fig. 33. Klaksvig (Bordo); Ejde and Fuglefjord (Ostero); Thorshavn (S t r 6 m 6) ; Tvaera a Syder 6). Especially common in a gathering from Ejde. Varies somewhat in size and form. May be elliptic, but is then generally shorter; length 0.035 mm. 51. N. (Schizonema) ramosissima Ag. forina genuina, V. H. Syn. tab. XV., ligs. 4—5. Common. Found in 20 gatherings from Ostero; Stromo; Vaago; Nolso; and Sy der 6. N. (S.) ramosissima Ag. formå amplia, V. H. 1. c, fig. 3. Found in 6 gatherings from S tom 6; and Sydero. 52. N. (S.) Bryopsis Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. XV., fig. 26. Gjov (Ostero). 53. N. (S.) corymbosa Ag., V. H. Syn. tab. XV., fig. 21. Kvi vig (Stromo). 54. N. (S.) tenuis Ag. var. americana Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XV., fig. 35. Kirkebo Stromo). 55. N. directa W. Sm. var. subtilis Greg., Greg. Diat. Cl. tab. IX, fig. 19. Ejde (Ostero); Between Thorsvig and Kvalvig, Vestmanhavn, Kalbak- fjord (.Stromo). 56. N. ammophila Grun., Grun. Øst. Ung. tab. XXX., ligs. 66—69. Midvaag (Vaago). N. ammophila Grun. var. intermedia Grun., Grun. I. c., fig. 72. Thorshavn (Stromo). 57. N. distans W. Sin., Grun. Fz. Jos. L. tab. I, fig. 26. Kvannesund (Videro); Skaalefjord, Molen (Ostero); Thorshavn Vestmanhavn (S I ro m 6). 539 Grun. ih the 58. Navicula achnanthoides m. Fig. 113. """/i. L: 0.02 mm. —0,08 mm.; B: 0,005 mm. Almost linear willi obtuse, sometimes very sliglilly contracted apices. Striæ contiguous and exceedingly delicate, so that I have nol been able to counl them; radiating and somewhat distant in the middle, and convergenl towards the apices. As far as I t-an see there is a central area. The frustule slightly bent. I am uncertain as to the systematic position ol Ihis form. Il has been impossible for me to distinguish any structure of the striæ, bat the latter radiating and being convergeni t tiis species mav be referable to Cleve's Navi- Fig. 113. culæ lineolatæ. The outline of the valve and the somewhat benl frustule remind one of Achnanthes tceniala Grun. (Cl. and arc. Dial.. tab. I., fig. ."> , hid Ihe presence ol' central nodules in bo valves proves thai il cannot be identical with the latter species. Found only in a few examples in a gathering Ironi Thorshavn (S tro ra o). NAVICULÆ PUNGTATÆ CL, Cl. Syn. II, p. 37. 59. Navicula pusilla W. Sm„ V. H. Syn. lab. II., lig. 17. Rare. Ejde (Ost er o . NAVICULÆ LYRATÆ Cl, Cl. Syn. II.. p. 52. 00. Navicula Hennedyi W. Sm., V. H. Syn. tab. IX., lig. 14. Rare. Skaalefjord Ost er 6). 61. N. Reichardtii Grun., A. S. All. tab. LXX., lig. 28. Rare. Thorshavn (Stromo). 62. N. forcipata Grev., V. H. Syn. lab. X., lig. 3. Rare. Klaksvig Bordo); Vestmanhavn (Stromo). NAVICULÆ LÆVISTRIATÆ Cl, Cl. Syn. II.. p. 66. 63. Navicula palpebralis Bréb., Donk. Brit. Diat. lab. IV., lig. 3 b. Rare. Skaalefjord Oste ro ; between Thorsvig and Kvalvig. Kaibak- fjord (Stromo . A few of the specimens somewhat approach the variety: angulosa Greg., Donk.. 1. c. lig. 4. PIXNULARIA Khr.. Cl. Syn. IL, p. 71. Capitatæ CL, 1. c p. 75. *64. Pinnularia mesolepta Klir. var. stauroneiformis Grun. A. S., Atl., tab. XLV., ligs. 52—53. Tværaa Sy de ro). 540 Tabellarieæ Cl., 1. c, p. 81. ('>.">. Pinnularia stomatophora Grun., A. S. Atl. tab. XLIV., figs. 27-29. Kalbakfjord (S trom 6 . Complexæ Cl., 1. c, p. 90. *66. Pinnularia viridis Nilzsch, V. H. Syn. tal). V., lig. 5. Vaags Ejde (Sydero'. *67. P. isostauron (Klir?) Grun., CI.& Grun. arct. Diat., tab. I., lig. 14. Kalbakfjord (S t r 6 m 6). All the Pinnulariæ occur only singly at the stated habitats. AMPHORA Klir., Cl. Syn. II., p. 99. Amphora CL, 1. c, p. 100. 08. Amphora Proteus Greg., A. S. Atl. tab. XXVII., tig. 3. Found as single specimens in a gathering from Skaalefjord (Ostero). 69. A. ovalis Ktz. var. Pediculus Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. I., ligs. 4 — 5. Kalbakfjord (S trom 6); Tværaa (Sydero). Diplamphora Cl., 1. c, p. 107. 70. Amphora crassa Greg., Greg. Diat. Cl. tab. XIV., tig. 94. Rare. Molen (Ostero). Halamphora Cl., 1. c, p. 1 1 7. 71. Amphora coffæiformis Ag. (— A. salina W. Sm.), V. H. Syn. tab. I., lig. 19. Rare. Molen (Ostero). 72. A. Terroris Ehr., A. S. Atl. tab. XXV., lig. 19. Dispersed in the material. Generalty a few examples only. Molen and Skaalefjord (Ostero); Velbestad, Thorshavn (Stromo); Trold hoved (S an do); Tværaa (Sydero). Oxyamphora Ol.. 1. c p. 125. 73. Amphora lineolata Klir., V. H. Syn. lab. [., lig. 13. Rare. Kalbakfjord (S tro in 6). 74. A. Arcus Greg. I'onna typica CI., Greg. Diat. Cl. tab. XIII., fig.88. Hare. Skaalefjord (Ostero). 75. A. ostrearia Bréb. var. vitrea Cl., A. S. Atl. tab. XXVI., lig. 10. Rare. Vestmanhavn (Stromo). 541 70. Amphora marginata m. Fig. 114. 66° i. L: 0,04 mm., lu. ol the valve 0,008 mm., br. of the frustule 0,02 mm., Sti-. 15 in 0,01 mm. The valve segmeht-shaped, with straighl ventral margin, cm the lalh-r the slriæ are short and indistinct; alun- the dorsal side they form a band. producing a segment-shaped unstriated area on the valve. The connecting zone with a l'ew plications, lainlly and eloselv striated. Found only in .i gathering trom Haraldsund Bordo), but occurs frequently in the gathering. Tlie form of the frustule as well as of the valve. and the Dumber of the striæ point to A. behringensis Cl. Cl. Syn. II., p. 102, tab. III., ligs. :> I -35), but the connecting zone with plications and the striæ on the ventral side prove that it cannol be identical with the latter species. There is also some pos- sibility of its being related to A. sulcata Breb.? Cl. Cl., 1. c, pp. 112 li:'. . Cymbamphora Cl., 1. c. p. 134. 77. Amphora angusta (Greg.) Cl., A. S., All., tab. XXV., lig. 15. Hare. Between Thorsvig and Kvalvig S tro in o. 78. A. cymbelloides Grun., A. S., AU., tab. XXVI., ligs. 61—62. Rare. Skaalefjord (Os ter 6). MASTOGLOIA Thwaites 1848. Cl. Syn. II., p. 142. 79. Mastogloia elliptica Ag., V. H. Syn. lab. IV., lig. 19. Rare. Tværaa S y d e r 6 . ACHNANTHEÆ Cl., Cl. Syn. IL, p. 163. Rhi)ic<>spht>nia Grun. 18G0. Cl., le., p. 105. 80. Rhoicosphenia curvata Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. XXVI., ligs. 1—3. Common. Found in 31 gatherings from Bordo; Oster 6; S trom 6; Vaago; Nolso; and Sy der 6. R. curvata Kl/, var. subacuta .1. S., A. S. All. tab. CC XIII., ligs. 11—13. Kalbakfjord (S trom 6); Tværaa Syde ro). Cocconeis (Ehr.) CL, CL, Le, p. 168. 81. Cocconeis Scutellum Ehr., V. H. Syn. lab. XXIX., ligs. 1—3. Very common. Found in 76 gatherings collected trom all the dif- ferent islands trom which I have reeeived material. C. Scutellum Ehr. var. stauroneiformis W. Sin., V. H., 1. c, figs. 10—11. Found intermixed with the main species. 542 C. Scutellum Klir. var. californica Grim., A. S. Atl. tab. CXCL, rigs. 42— 43. Ejde lOslcrii ■; Thorshavn S trom o). Occurs frequently in the gathering from the former locality. 82. C. Scutellum Ehr. vår. Fig. 115. 6(!%. Cfr. C. speciosa Greg., Mier. Journ. III., tab. IV., tig. 8. Epitheca L: 0,016" mm., B: 0,018 mm.; Hypotheca L: 0,018 mm., B: 0,016 mm. The valve rhombic, sometimes - especially in the epitheca - obliquely developed. Epitheca: Striæ numbered along the median line 12 — 14 in 0,01 mm., and consisted of coarse, square puncta. Hypotheca: Striæ numbered at the margin 10 in 0,01 mm., and grew indistinct as it extended lo the raphe. This small Cocconeis, which is characterized by its de- cidedly rhombic form, is unquestionably identical with Gregorys C. speciosa, of which he (1. c. lins only figured the epitheca. Gregory (1. e. p. 39) writes with reference to this form that it is »nearly allied to C. Scutellum, bul is usually smaller, and hus somewhat of an angular form«, and he continues »I have closely searched several slides af marine origin, full of Cocconeis Scutellum of every degree of development, but I have not found in them one example of C. speciosa. I therefore re- gard it as a distinct species.« In De To ni' s Sylloge. Bacc, I., p. 445, Cocconeis speciosa Greg. is placed under C. Scutellum Ehr. Found only in a gathering from Klaksvig (Bord 6), but occurred fairly often in the latter. In another gathering from Klaksvig (Bordo) I found a single specimen of a Cocconeis (epitheca) which I have shown in the accompanying figure. 660/i. It is undoubtedly identical with C. grata A. S. enfr. Perag : Diat. mar. de France, p. 15, tab. III., fig. 7. Eucocconeis CL, CL, Le, p. 173. 83. Cocconeis molesta (Ktz.) Grim. var. crucifera Grim., A. S. Atl. tab. CXCIII., ligs. 48—51. Kvannesund (Videro ; Aaerne Bordo); Nolso. Found frequently in the gathering from Nolso. 84. C. dirupta Grim., V. H. Syn. tab. XXIX., lig. 13. Molen (Ostero); Kalbakfjord (Stromo); Trangisvaag (Sydero). In a gathering from Kvannesund Videro) I found a variety of the above-mentioned species which approaches very closely to var. antarctica Grim. V. H., 1. c, ligs. 18—19. Pleuroneis CL, CL, 1. c. II.. p. 181. 85. Cocconeis costata Greg., V. H. Syn. tab. XXX., ligs. 11 -12. Dispersed in many (39) of the gatherings. Bordo; Ostero; Stromo; 543 Sandd; Nolso; Sydero. It is not rare ;is ;i rule, l>nl il does nol occur sufficiently often in any of the gatherings to characterize the latter. Microneis Cl., Cl., 1. c p. 187. SG. Achnanthes delicatula Ktz., V. 11. Syn. tab. XX\ II., figs. .'}— 4. Klaksvig (Bordo ; Ejde, Fuglefjord (Ostero ; Thorshavn. Kaibak- fjord Stromo). Usually in a few examples only; l>nl fairly common in the gathering Ironi Klaksvig. Achnanthidium Ktz. 1844 Heib. 1863, CL, I. c. II.. p. 191. *87. Achnanthes lanceolata Bréb., V.H.Syn. lab. XXVII., figs.8— 11. Thorshavn (Stromo); Famien (Sydero). In both the gatherings a l'ew examples only. 88. A. brevipes Ag., V. H. Syn. lab. XXVI., rigs. LO— 12. Not common. Aaerne (Bordo ; Gjov (Ostero); Højvig Stromo. A. brevipes Ag. var. parvula Ktz., V. H., 1. c, ligs. 25 — 28. Ejde Ostero); Famien Sydero). Found fairly olien in the latter gathering. A. brevipes Ag. var. intermedia Klz., V. H., 1. c, ligs. 21 — 24. Abundantly in a gathering from Saxen Stromo). Achnanthes Bory S:t Vincent 1822, Cl., 1. c, II., p. 195. 89. Achnanthes longipes Ag., V. II. Syn. tab. XXVI., ligs. 13—16. Rare. Found only in one gathering the habitat of which is not given. EPITHEMIA Bréb. 1838, V. II. Syn., p. 138. *90. Epithemiaturgida(Ehr.) Klz, V. H. Syn. lab. XXXI, ligs. 1—2. Kalbakfjord S t ro m o). *91. E. Sorex Klz.. V. II. Syn. lab. XXXII., ligs. 6—10. Kirkebo (S t ro m o). *92. E. Argus Ktz., V. II. Syn. lab. XXXI., ligs. 15—17. Vaags Ejde Sy de ro . *93. E. Zebra Klz., V. H. Syn. tab. XXXI., lig. 9. Between Thorsvig and Kvalvig (Stromo). 94. E. Musculus Klz... V. II. Syn. lab. XXXII., ligs. 14 15. Eide Ostero); Kalbakfjord (Stromo. All these Epithemiæ occur only in solitary specimens. EUNOTIA Ehr. 1837, V. II. Syn., p. 141. *95. E. Arcus Ehr., V. H. Syn. tab. XXXIV., lig. 2. Midvaag Vaago). 544 *96. E. pectinalis (Ktz.) Rabh. var. stricta Rabh., V. H. Syn. tab. XXXIII., fig. 18. Between Thorsvig and Kvalvig (S trom 6). *E. pectinalis (Ktz.) Rabh. var. minor Rabh., V. H. 1. c, figs. 20 — 21. Kalbakfjord (S trom 6). *97. E. prærupta Ehr., formå curta, V. H. Syn. tab. XXXIV., fig. 24. Tværaa (Sydero). *98. E. Triodon Ehr., V. H. Syn. tab. XXXIII., fig. 9. Kvivig (Stromo). All the above-mentioned Eunoliæ occur only in single specimens. CERATONEIS Ehr. 1840, V. H. Syn., p. 148. •99. Ceratoneis Arcus Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. XXXVII., fig. 7. Skaalefjord (Ostero); Kalbakfjord, Thorshavn (Stromo)- Sorvaag (Vaago). Everywhere in solitary specimens. /I SYNEDRA Ehr. 1831, V. H. Syn., p. 149. 100. Synedra pulchella Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. XL., fig. 28. Ejde (Ostero); Kalbakfjord (Stromo); Sorvaag (Vaago). S. pulchella Ktz. var. lanceolata OM., V. H. 1. c, tab. XLI., fig. 7. Klaksvig (Bord 6). Specimens of S. ])iilch., which ocenrred in a gather- inij; from Ejde (Ostero), varied somewhat in outward VJ form. In lig. 117. 660/i. I have given an outline drawing of the chief varietions in that rcspect. Form c mav occur in very small specimens: 1:0,011 mm., br: 0,005 mm. i/ Fig. 117 •101. S. Ulna (Nitzsch) Ehr. var. danica Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. XXXVIII. , lig. 14 a. Klaksvig (Bordo); Kalbakfjord (Stromo'; Famien (Sydero). Only a few examples. 102. S. Gailloni Ehr., V. H. Syn. lab. XXXIX., lig. 18. Nol rare. Found in '2'A gatherings from Videro; Bordo; Ostero; Stromo; and Sydero. 103. S. capensis (hun., V. H. Syn. lab. XLII., lig. 1. Kvannesund and Klaksvig (Bordo). S. capensis is hardly specifically distinct Ironi S. Gailloni (cfr. descrip- tion to Van Heurck's figure quoted above). 545 104. S. investiens W. Sin., V. IL Syn. hil). XL., fig. 3 and 3b,C,d,e. Very common. Found in 53 gatherings from Viderd; Bordo; Ostero; Stromo; Vaago; Sando; Store Dimon; and Sydero. It occurs fairly often in large quantities completely covering the host-plant. 105. S. affinis Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. XLI. Of the numerous varieties belonging to tliis species I have observed tlic folio wing: — S. affinis var. acuminata Grun., V . IL, 1. c, fig. 11. — Arcus Ktz., V. H., 1. c, fig. 11. fasciculata Ktz., V. H., 1. c, tig. 15. intermedia Grim., V. H., 1. c, fig. 21. lancettula Grim., V. H., 1. c, fig. 28. obtusa Arnott, V. H., 1. c, lig. 12. parva Ktz., V. IL, 1. c, ligs. 22— 23. tabulata Ktz., V. IL, I. c, fig. 0 A. Syn. d/f. with varieties have been found in 27 of the gatherings from Bordo, Ostero, Stromo, Store Dimon and Sydero. Of the varieties perhaps jxuva and »acuminata* occurred more frequently than the others. They often covered the host plant as closely as S. investiens. In a gathering from Kalbakfjord I found a variety which in the nnniher of its striæ (9—10 in 0,01 mm. agreed with .S. a/f tabu- lata, V. H., 1. c, fig. 9 A, men in its outlines with var. acuminata, fig. 14. 100. S. commutata Grim., V. H. Syn. tab. XL., lig. 4. Between Thorsvig and Kvalvig (Stromo). 107. S. fulgens (Ktz.) W. Sin., V. H. Syn. tab. XLIII., ligs. 1—2. Skaalefjord (Ostero): Thorshavn Stromo); Tværaa Sydero. Found frequently in the gathering from Thorshavn. S. fulgens (Ktz.) W. Sm. var. mediterranea Grim, V. II. I. c, fig. 3. Skaalefjord Ostero ; Trangisvaag Sydero. Found fairly olien in the latter gathering. 108. S. nitzschoides Grun. (— Thalassiothrix? nitzschoides Grun.), V. H. Syn. tab. XLIII., ligs. 7—10. Kirkebo Stromo). One example only. 109. S. undulata (Bailey) Greg., V. H. Syn. tab. XLII., lig. 2. Rare. Skaalefjord (Ostero). MTZSCHIA Ilassall 1845, Cl. & (dun. året. I).. p. 07. Panduriformes Grun., 1. c. p. 70. 110. Nitzchia panduriformis Greg. var. minor Grun., V. H. Syn. tal). LVIIL, lig. 4. Rather rare. Molen, Skaalefjord Ostero: Yaa^s Kjde (Sydero). 546 N. panduriformis Greg. var. delicatula Grim., Cl. & Grim. arct. D. tab. V., (ig. 92. Rare. Thorshavn (Stromo); Tværaa (Syd er 6). Apiculatæ Grun. 1. c, p. 72. 111. Nitzschia marginulata Grun. formå parva, cfr. V. H. Syn. tab. LVIIL, lig. 15. — Fig. 118. <;6%. Rare. Tværaa (Sydero). I have given a drawing of this small species which is some- what smaller and less contracted than V. H.'s figure. Perhaps the present form is identical with Grunow's formå minuta from Es- liu lls quimault harbour (cfr. Grun. Le, p. 72). 112. N. apiculata (Greg.) Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. LVIIL, ligs. 26—27. Rare. Aaerne (Ror do); Skaalefjord (Ostero). Dnbiæ Grun. 1. c., p. 77. 113. Nitzschia littorea Grun. var. parva Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. LIX., lig. 25. Rare. Tværaa (Sydero). Bacillaria Grun. 1. c., p. 85. 114. Nitzschia socialis Greg., V. H. Syn. tab. LXL, lig. 8. Not eommon. Haraldsund (Bordo); Skaalefjord (Ostero); Thors- havn (Stromo); Tværaa (Sydero). Spathulatæ Grun. 1. c., p. 87. 115. Nitzschia angularis W. Sin., V. H. Syn. tab. LXTL, ligs. 11—14. Nol rare. Aaerne (Bordo ; Molen, Gjov, Skaalefjord (Ostero ; Tværaa (Sydero). 116. N affinis Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. LXIL, lig. 16. Rare. Nol so. Dissipatæ Grun., 1. c, p. 90. 117. Nitzschia dissipata (Ktz.) Grim., V. II. Syn. tab. LXIIL, lig. 1. Rare. Ejde (Ostero). Sigmoidece Grun. 1. c., p. '.»o. 118. Nitzschia sigmoidea (Ehr.) W. Sm, V. II. Syn. tab. LXIIL, ligs. 5 -7. Rare. Skaalefjord (Ostero 547 Sigmata ('.nm. ('.asp. s., p. 118. 119. Nitzschia Sigma W. Sin. V. H. Syn. lab. L.W., fig. 7. Rare. Skaalefjord Ostero ; Vestmanhavn Stromo' ; Tværaa S \ (I v ro Lanceolatæ Grim.. Cl. & Grun. arct. Diat., p. 94. 120. Nitzschia tubicola Grun., V. II. Syn. lab. LXIX.. fig. 14. Haraldsund., Aaerne Bordo). Found frequently in Ur- gathering ironi Haraldsund. 121. N. Frustulum (Ktz.) Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. LXVIIL, figs. 27 — 29. Rare. Klaksvig (Bord o . N. Frustulum (Ktz.) Grun. var. perminuta Grun. formå curta, V. H. Syn. tab. LXIX., tig. 7. Rare. Ejde Ostero). CAMPYLODISCUS Ehr. 1841, V. H. Syn., p. 189. 122. Campylodiscus simulans Greg., A. S. N. S. I), tab. III., lig. 10. Aaerne Bordo); Skaalefjord (Ostero). Only a few examples oc- curred in each of the two gatherings. SURIRELLA Turpin 1826. V. H. Syn., p. 186. 123. Surirella ovalis Bréb. var. æqvalis Ktz. (= S. ovata Ktz.), V. H. Syn. lab. LXXIII., lig. 8 & A. S. Atl. tab. XXIII., fig. 55. Rather rare. Klaksvig (Bordo); Ejde (Ostero); Thorshavn and Kalbakfjord S t r 6 m o . 124. S. Brightwelli W. Sm., A. S. Atl. tab. LVL, ligs. 17-18. Rare. Vaags Ejde (Sy der 6). 125. S. lata W. Sm., W. Sm. Syn. tab. IX., lig. (il. A few examples occurred in a gathering Ironi Molen Ostero). Coccochromaticæ. MERIDION Ag. 1824, V. H. Syn., p. 161. :i:12(). Meridion circulare Ag., V. H. Syn. lab. LI., ligs. 10 — 12. Klaksvig Bordo); Kirkebo (Stromo. Only a few examples oc- curred in eaeh of the two gatherings. DENTICULA Ktz. 181 t. V. II. Syn., p. 159. *127. Denticula tenuis Ktz. var. frigida Ktz., V. II. Syn. tab. LIX., figs. 35—38. Thorshavn S t r 6 m 6). Botnny of the Pærdes. 35 548 128. D. exigua (Grun.) Øst. (= DiatomaV exiguum Grun. in Nov. Exp., p. 2, tab. I., tig. 3). Ejde (Ostero;; Vestmanhavn, Thorshavn (S trom 6); Midvaag (Vaago); Trold hoved (San do). This small species, which I eonsider a true Denticula, is referred doubtfully to Diatomu by Griinow. His specimens are trom the coast of Chile and grew on Lessonia. Along the Færoes it occurs on Ecto- carpus and Cladophora. DIATOMA De Cand. 1805, V. H. Syn., p. 159. :iT29. Diatoma hiemale (Lyngbye) Heib., V. H. Syn. tab. LI., figs. 1—2. Gjov, Kalbakfjord (O s ter 6); Thorshavn (S trom 6). Found only as solitar}' specimens. FRAGILARIA Lyngbye 1819, V. H. Syn., p. 155. 130. Fragilaria striatula Lyngbye, W.Sm. Syn. tab. XXXV., lig. 298. Very common. Found in 55 gatherings from Bor do; Ostero; Stromo; Vaago; Nol s 6; and Sy de ro. It often occurs in large quan- tities, especially in several of the gatherings from Thorshavn. F. striatula Lyngbye var.? californica Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XLIV., fig. 13. Kvi vig (Stromo). *131. F. æqvalis Heib. var. producta Lgst. , V. H. Syn. tab. XLIV., lig. 7 b. Rare. Kalbakfjord (Stromo). 132. F. hyalina Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XLIV., figs. 14—15. Not common. Fuglefjord (Ostero); Vestmanhavn (Stromo). 133. F. vitrea (Ktz.) Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XLIV., lig. 16a&b. — var. minima Grun., V. H. 1. c, ligs. 16 c, d, e, 18. Not rare. Found in 17 gatherings from Videro; Ostero: Stromo; Vaago; Nol so; and Sydero. The variety minima occurs fully as often as the main species. *134. F. lapponica Grun., Øst. Surtarbr. IL, lig. 7. Rare. Vestmanhavn (Stromo). PERONIA Bréb. & Arn. 1868, V. H. Tr. d. Diat, p. 333. *135. Peronia erinacea Bréb. & Arn., VII. Syn. tab. XXXVI., lig. 19. Kalbakfjord (S t ro m 6). 549 OPEPHORA Petit 1888, V. II. Tr. d. Diat., p. 333. 136. Opephora pacifica Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XLIV., ligs. 20 — 22. Rare. Saxen (Stromo). GLYPHODESMIS Grev L862, V. II. Tr. d. Diat, p. 334. 137. Glyphodesmis Williamsoni (Greg.) Grun., V. H. Syn. lab. XXXVI., fig. 14. Hare. Only a l'cw examples occurred in a gathering frora Skaale- fjord (Os ter 6). LICMOPHORA Ag. 1827, V. II. Tr. d. Diat., p. 341. Subseptatæ Grun. 1867, V. H., 1. c, p. 342. 138. Licmophora flabellata (Carm.) Ag., V. H. Syn. lab. XLVI., ligs. 2 -3. Nol rare. Klaksvig, Haraldsund (Bordd); .Molen (Ostero); Thors- havn, Kalbakljord (Stromo). 139. L. Jiirgensi Ag. var. dubia Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XLVI., lig. 12. Found abundantly in a gathering from Velbestad (Stromo). Both long and short forms occur. 140. L. Oedipus (Ktz.) Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XLVIL, ligs. 2-3. Not rare. Found in 10 gatherings from Ostero; Stromo; Store Di m o n; and Sy dero. 141. L. dalmatica (Ktz.) Grun., V. H. Syn. lab. XLVIL, lig. 7. Høj vig (Stromo). 142. L. gracilis (Ktz.) Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XLVI., fig. 13. Here and there. Aaerne (Bord 6); Kvivig and Vestman havn Stromo). 143. L. anglica (Ktz.) Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XLVI., ligs. 14—15. Ralher common. Found in 19 gatherings from Vi dero; Bordd; Ostero; Stromo; V a a g 6 ; N ol s 6 ; and S y d e r 6. Profunds septatæ Grun. 1867, V. H. 1. c, p. 3 1 1. 144. Licmophora Lyngbyei (Ktz.) Grun., V. H. Syn. lab. XLVIL, lig. 16. Gjov, Molen, Ejde (Ostero); Velbestad Stromo. L. Lyngbyei (Ktz.) Grun. var. abbreviata (Ktz.) Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XLVIL, lig. 2(). Sumbo Holm (Sy dero. The main species as well as the variety occur only sparingly. 145. L. hyalina (Ktz.) Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XLVIIL, ligs. (i— 7. Xot common. Aaerne Bordd); Ejde and Fuglefjord Ostero). 35* 550 146. L communis (Heil).?) Gran. ,V.H. Syn. tab.XLVIII., (igs.8— 9. Not common. Vaago; Vaags Rjde (S yd er 6). 147. L. paradoxa(Lyngl).) Ag.,V.H. Syn. tab.XLVIIL, ligs. 10— 12. Not rare. Found in 8 gatherings from Bor do; Ostero; S trom 6; Vaago; and Syder 6. TABELLARIA Ehr. 1839, V. H. Syn., p. 162. *148. Tabellaria fenestrata (Lyngb.) Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. LII., ligs. 6—8. Klaksvig (Bordo); Thorshavn, Kalbakfjord (Stromo). *149. T. flocculosa (Roth) Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. LII., ligs. 10—12. Skaalefjord (Ostero); Kalbakfjord,Vestmanhavn, Thorshavn (S t r 6 m 6) ; Tværaa (Sydero). Both the above-mentioned Tabellariæ occnr only sparingly at the stated localities. GRAMMATOPHORA Ehr. 1839, V. H. Syn., p. 163. 150. Grammatophora marina (Lyngb.) Ktz., V. H. Syn. tab. LUL, ligs. 10—13. Common. Fonnd in 57 gatherings from Bordo; Ostero; Stromo; Vaago; Sando; Store Di mon; and Sy der 6. The var. major (V. H., 1. c. ligs. 10—11), and minor (fig. 13) occur dispersed among the main species; a gathering from Kvivig (Stromo) consisted almost exelnsively of the latter variety. 151. G. oceanica Ehr. var. macilenta (W. Sm.) Gran., V. H. Syn. tab. LUL, fig. 16. Found in 8 gatherings from Ostero; Stromo; and Sy de ro, but never in a large quantity. 152. G. serpentina Ehr., V. H. Syn. tab. LUL, figs. 1-3. Found in 12 gatherings from Bord 6; Stromo; Sando; and Sydero, but usually not in considerable quantity in any of them. 153. G. islandica Ehr., V. H. Syn. tab. LUL, lig. 7. Found in 15 gatherings from Bordo; Ostero; Stromo; and Sydero, but never in a large quantity. 154. G. arctica CI., V. H. Syn. tab. LUL, bis, lig. 3. Found only as single specimcns in a gathering from Frodebo (Stromo). RHABDONEMA Ktz. 1844, V. H. Syn., p. 165. 155. Rhabdonema adriaticum Ktz., V. H. Syn. lab. LIV., ligs. 11 — 13. Only found in a gathering from Tværaa (Sydero). 55 1 156. R. arcuatum (Ag.) Kl/., V. II. Syn. [ah. LIV., flg. 21. Common, Found in 15 gatherings from Videro; Bordd; Osterd; Stromd; Nolsd; Store Di mon: and Sydero. In a l'ew of the ga therings. e. g. from Aaerne Bordd ; Kalbakfjord Stromd ; and Ordevig (Syd erd) abundantly. 157. Rh. Crozieri Klir.. A. S. AU. tab. CCXX., figs. 5— 6. Not rare. Found in 9 gatherings Ironi Bordd; Osterd; Stromd; and Sydero. The Rh. Crozieri (Klir. Grun., which I have recorded in niv paper Kyst-Diatomeer fra Grenland (p. 340), and referred to Rab. Diat. Hond., tab. III., fig. 19, is an error; it ought to have been : R. Crozieri Halls: Rabenhorst's figure belongs to the latter. Moreover, the strongly bulg- ing form of R. arcuatum which I mention in the same place p. 3 1 1 ought to have been referred to Rh. Crozieri Klir. A. S.. AU. 1. e. . 158. R. minutum Kt/.., V. H. Syn. tab. KIV., figs. 17— 21. Common. Found in 42 gatherings from Bordd; Osterd; Stromd: Nolsd; and Sydero. In a lew of the gatherings, e. g. from Klaksvig Bordd); Gjdv Osterd); and Kvivig Stromd), abundantly. STRIATELLA Ag. KS.T2, V. II. Syn., p. Kil. 159. Striatella delicatula (Ktz.) Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. KIV., figs. 1 — 6. Not rare. Found in 9 gatherings from Vaagd; S tro nid; and Sydero. In two gatherings from Vaags Kjde (Sydero), abundantly. 160. S. unipunctata Ag., V. H. Syn. tab. KIV., lig. 0. Not rare. Kvannesund (Videro . Vaags Kjde. Tværaa and Trangis- vaag (Sydero). Found in large quantities in the gathering from Kvan- n e s u d d. TETRACYCKUS (Ralfs) Grun., V. H. Syn., p. 166. *161. Tetracyclus lacustris (A. Braun) Grun., V. H. Tr. d. Diat., p. 358, fig. 108. Found singly in a gathering from Kalkakfjord (Stromd). RHIZOSOKENIA Ehr. 1843, V. H. Syn., p. Hil 162. Rhizosolenia setigera Brigth., V. H. Syn. tab. LXXVIIL, figs. 6—8. Thorshavn (Stromd); Sdrvaag (Vaagd). Only a few examples occurred in each of the two gatherings. CIKETOCEROS Ehr. 1844, V. II. Syn., p. 195. 1611 Chætoceros boreale Bail., Cl. Diat. f. arct. S. tab. II., fig. 7 a. Betwecn Thorsvig and Kvalvig, Kirkebd (Stromd ; Tværaa Sydero). 552 164. Ch. Brightwelli Cl., Cl. Diat. f. arct. S. tab. II., lig. 7 b, c. Vaags Ejde (Sy de ro). 165. Ch. decipiens Cl., Cl. Diat. arct. S. tab. L, fig. 5. Vestmanhavn (Stromo); Vaags Ejde (Syde ro). 166. Ch. Diadema (Ehr.) Gran., Gran. N. N. Exp., lab. II., fig. 18. Spores. Skaalefjord (O s ter 6); Vestmanhavn (Stromo. 167. Ch. cinctum Gran., Gran. N. N. Exp. tab. IL, ligs. 23— 27. Kirkebo Stromo). All the above-mentioned species of Chætoceros occur only singly, and partly as fragments. TIIALASSIOSIRA Cl. 1872, V. H. Tr. d. Diat., p. 436. 168. Thalassiosira gravida Cl., Spores = Cosimodiscus subglobosus Cl. & Grim., A. S. Atl. LVIIL, fig. 44. Rare. Vestmanhavn (Stromo). MELOSIRA Ag. 1824, V. H. Syn., p. 197. 169. Melosira nummuloides (Bory) Ag., V. H. Syn. tab. LXXXV., ligs. 1—2. Not common. Between Thorsvig and Kvalvig, Kalbakfjord (Stromo). 170. M. Borreri Grev. var. hispida Cast., V. H. Syn. tab. LXXXV., lig. 8. Rare. Kalbakfjord (Stromo). 171. M. sulcata (Ehr.) Ktz., W. Sm. Syn. tab. LUL, fig. 338. Found in 15 of the gatherings from Bordo; Ostero; and Stromo, but never in a large quantity in any single gathering. PODOSIRA Ehr. 1840, V. H. Tr. d. Diat., p. 447. 172. Podosira dubia (Ktz.) Grim., V. H. Syn. tab. LXXXIV., ligs. 13—14. Not common. Glibre and Fuglefjord (Ostero); Kvivig and Thors- havn (Stromo). HYALODISCUS Ehr. 1854, V. H. Tr. d. Diat., p. 448. 173. Hyalodiscus scoticus (Ktz.) G run. — Podosira bormoides W. Sm. Syn. lab. XLIX., lig. 327. Found in 11 galherings from Bordo; Ostero; Stromo; and Syde ro. Usually dispersed; only in two gatherings from Kalbakfjord (S l ro m o nol rare. 553 JSTHMIA Ag. 1820, V. 11. Syn., p. 201. 174. Jsthmia nervosa Ktz., W. Sm. Syn. tab. XL VII. Koiind in 1 ."> gatherings from Vider 6; Stromo; S l or c Di mon; and Sydero; abundantly in (i from Kvivig and Vestmanhavn Stromo) Store Dimon; Ordevig Sydero); and in a gathering without habitat. HIDDULPHIA Gray 1831, V. II Syn., p. 203. 17;"). Biddulphia aurita Bréb., W. Sm. Syn. tab. XLV., fig. 319. Found dispersed in 13 of the gatherings Ironi Bordd; Ostero; Stromo; and Sydero. Usually a l'ew examples only, bul more fre- quently in two gatherings from Thorshavn (Stromo); and Vaags Ejde (Sydero). ACTINOPTYCHL'S Ehr. 1838, V. II. Syn., p. 210. 176. Actinoptychus undulatus Ehr., V. H. Syn., tab. CXXII., lig. 3. Found dispersed in 8 gatherings from Ostero and Stromo. The Færoese form agrees well with Van Heurch's figure quoted ahove (drawn alter a specimen trom the Depot de Richmond), hul its diameter is scarcely hall' so large (0,03 mm. . ACTINOCYCLUS Ehr. 1840, V. H. Syn., p. 215. 177. Actinocyclus subtilis (Greg.) Ralfs, V. H. Syn. tab. CXXIV., fig. 7. Molen, Ejde (Ostero); Thorshavn (Stromo); Troldhoved (S an do Tværaa (Sydero). Everywhere in a few specimens. COSCINODISCUS Ehr. 1838, V. H. Syn., p. 216. 178. Coscinodiscus excentricus Ehr. 1838, V. H. Syn. tab. CXXX., fig. 4. Ordevig (Sydero . 179. C. lineatus Ehr., V. H. Syn. tab. CXXXI., fig. 3. Skaalcfjord (Ostero. 180. C. curvatulus Grun. var. inermis Grim., Grim. Fz. .los. L. tab. IV., figs. 11—12. Found only in a gathering without habitat. 181. C. radiatus Ehr. var. minor A. S., V. H. Syn. tab. CXXX., fig. 3. Found in two gatherings without habitat. 182. C. Asteromphalus Ehr., V. H. Syn. tab. CXXX., figs. 1—2. Thorshavn (Stromo). The above-mentioned species of Coscinodiscus occur only singly at the stated habitats. 554 From the Botanical Gardens I have further had some old her- hariuin material from the Færoes for exainination; 24 gather i rigs in all, of which 3 were eollected by E. Rostrup, and of the olher gatherings the greater part was from Lyngbye's Herbarium. Of these 24 gatherings, 7 were freshwater gatherings and contained Diatoma hiemale Lyngb. (5 gatherings), and Gomphonema geninatum Lyngb. (2 gatherings); the remaining 17 gatherings, on only a few of which the habitats were mentioned, contained: — Cocconeis costata Greg., V. H. Syn. hib. XXX., figs. 11 — 12 (1 gathering. scutclliim Ehr., V. H. 1. c. tab. XXIX., figs. 1—3 (1 gatherin<> . Fragilaria striatala Lyngb. (Tent. Hydroph. p. 183 tab.;. 63), W. Sm. Syn. ' tab. XXXV., lig. 298 (6 gatherings). Kirkeboholm (Stromo). Kvalbo, Famien (Sydero). Grammatophora marina (Lyngb.) Ktz. Diatoma marinum Lyngb. Tent. Hydroph. p. 180 tab. 62), V. H. Syn. tab. LUI., figs. 10-11 (4 gatherings). Grammatophora scrpenlina (Ralfs) Ehr., V. H. 1. e. figs. 1—3 (1 gathering). Isthmia nervosa Ktz. (^Diatoma obliqvatum Lyngb. Tent. Hydroph. p. 181 tab. 62), W. Sm. Syn. tab. XLVII. (8 gatherings). Licmophora gracilis (Ehr.) Grun., V. H. Syn. tab. XLVIII., fig. 13 (1 gathering). paradoxa (Lyngb.) Ag. (Echinella paradoxa Lyngb. Tent. Hy- droph. p. 211 tab. 70) (1 gathering). The material which I had for examination needs only a few short remarks. Il was kindly selecled for mc by Mr. Borgesen, partly from his own considerable material of Fæ roe se marine algæ and partly from Mr. Helgi Jonsson's gatherings. On making the selection Mr. Borge sen had two objecls in view. First, to choose such algæ as were rich in Diatoms, and secondly, to provide me with gatherings from many different localities, so that a fa hiv satisfactory result could be arrived at with regard to the Diatom- Flora belonging to the Færoe se marine algæ. With regard lo the laller object, a comparison between the map of the Færoes and the localities menlioned in the following list will show how carefully the work has been done, and I must express my hest thanks lo Mr. Borgesen for his kindness in obliging me on this point. I have received gatherings from the following localities: — From Viderejde I . „, , Kvannesund j Vldero Iolal Å g^henngs. Haraldsnnd Aaerne Bord 6 — 13 Klaksvig 555 From (ijov Molen Ejde Ore Strender Glibre Skaalefjord — Fuglefjord Nolso Betw. Kvalv. mul Thorsv. From Kalbakfjord Hojvig Thorshavn (iliversnæs Kirkebd Velbestad Kvivig Vestmanhavn Saxen M id vang Sorvaag North side ofVaagd Troldhoved Store Dimon Tværaa Frodebo Trangisvaag Ord evig Famien Vaags Ejde Sumbo Holm Without habitai . . Osteri) Total 21 gatherings S t r 6 m 6 Y a a u 6 Sand 6 S y d e r 6 .V.) 4 2 o — '11 — 9 Total 130 gatherings. The material has proved to be very homogeneous, and ns is natura], the main part of the forms in question, taken collectively, consists of altaehed or colony-forming genera. The material taken as a whole is characterized by the oceur- rence of the following genera: — Amphipleura (Berkeleyaj, Cocconeis, Fragilaria (striatula) ; Gom- phonema, Grammatophora, Licmophora, Navicnla (Schizonema), Si/- nedra (especially investiens and affinis with their varieties). Isthmia nervosu1 mav occur abundantly in some of the ga- therings, without, however, being characteristic of the whole of the 1 In a note to mc regarding a gathering without habitat Mr. Borgesen writes tliat the alga (Plilota plumosa), as well as the diatoms occurring on it. are very common everywhere along exposed coasts. The diatom is Isthmia nervosa. 550 material which I have examined. Other marine forms are gene- rally not common, and usually occur dispersed in the gatherings, the only exception being a gathering labelled: -- »Delesseria san- guinea (L.) Lam., Skaalefjord (Ostero)« in which I observed some- thing like 40 species, almost all of which were marine forms. Plankton-forms snch as Chætoceros and Rhizosolenia occur in soli- tary specimens, and nsnally in fragments only. In localities which may more parlicularly be characterized as »exposed to the open sea« I have found the fol lo wing charac- teristic species: — Viderejde (Videro) 1 gathering Gomph. pachycl. Gjov (Ostero) 3 Frag. striat., Gomph. kamtsch. Molen (Ostero) 2 Syn. inv. Saxen (Stromo) 1 Achn. subsess. Hojvig (Stromo) 1 Syn. aff. pa.ru. Kvivig (Stromo) 13 Cocc. sent., Frag. striat., Gram. mar., Isthm. neru., Syn. inv. Vaago, north side 2 Gomph. pachycl, Licm. angl. Troldhoved (San do) 2 Cocc. scut. Gomph. kamtsch S: Aest., Gram. mar., Syn. inv. St. Dimon 2 Isthm. nerv., Licm. Oedip. Famien (Sydero) 1 Achn. parv., Syn. aff. parv. Vaags Ejde (Sydero) 8 Gomph. kamtsch., Licm. angl. S: Oedip., Striat. delicat., Syn. inv. Sumbo Holm 1 Licm. angl., Syn. inv. True Polar forms did not occur, but I found some 50 fresh- water forms, the latter were always met with in solitary examples and excepting a very few species (e. g. Diploneis Boldtiana), were already known as belonging to the freshwater algæ of the Færoes. They occurred most abundantly in the gathering from Kalbakfjord (Stromo), doubtless because the circumstances that prevail there are such that the Diatoins are not immediately carried away by the stream or the waves, but remain hanging to the algæ. I have not found Snrirella Moelleriana, so it must undoubtedly be a fresh- water form. With regard to the charaeteristic genera, there is on the whole no slight resemblance between the present material and the coastal Diatoms of Greenland, with the exception that Gom- phonema and Grammalophora are more conspicuous along the 557 Færoes then along Greenland, for example I have nol found Gomphonema Aestuarii in Greenland. On the other hånd Achnanthes and Biddulphia which are comraon in Greenland, occur only sparsely along the Færoes, and Striatella gronlandica appears to be absent in the latter place. I had been entertaining some hopes that the material would furnish some information of how far certain Diatom-genera are cohfined to certain marinc-algæ, as also whether c er la in genera usually occur toget her. But only a negative result has been obtained, and, in connection with this I shall merely point out that wherever I found Isthmia nervosa abundantly, it usually occurred on Ptilola , and again that it most frequently oc- curred together with Grammatophora , sometimes also with Rhab- donema. I think that I have also been able to observe thai when- ever Diatom -colonies occur on such red algæ which have a flat thallus — on herbarium material they occur as small dark spots — then the colonies usually consisl of Licmophora. PHYTOPLANKTON FROM THE SEA AROUND THE FÆROES BY C. H. OSTENFELD. The plankton-material at hånd from the sea around the Færoes (viz. 91 samples) is rather eonsiderable. It was obtained as follows : — 1. In the years 1897 — 1901, under the supervision of Admiral C. F. Wandel, samples of plankton were gathered in the North Atlantic from on board the packet -boats to the Færoes -Iceland. Only the gatherings from the years 1897—99 have been published1. From these publications I have taken the lists of the plankton con- tained in the samples collected near the Færoes. As regards the samples from the hvo last years, 1900 — 1901, about which nothing has been published, I have had opportunity of examining those gathered around the Færoes. — From these gatherings there are 33 samples in all. 2. In the years 1898 — 99 the Swedish Hydrographical Commis- sion consisting of Prof. P. T. Cleve, O. Pettersson and G. Ek- man began an investigation of the waters of the Atlantic as far as temperature, salinity and surface-plankton were concerned. Besides the gatherings made from on board steamers crossing the ocean, material was also collected at short intervals from several stations on land, e. g. from Thorshavn. Prof. P. T. Cleve has examined all the 1 C. F. Wandel & C. Ostenfeld: Iagttagelser over Overfladevandets Tempe- ratur Saltholdighed og Plankton paa islandske og grønlandske Skihsronter i 1897. København (G. E. C. Gad) 1898. (Ostenfeld. Iagttagelser, 1898.) Martin Knudsen .v. C.Ostenfeld: Iagttagelser over Overfladevandets Tem- peratur, Saltholdighed "g Plankton paa islandske og grønlandske Skihsronter i 1898, foretagne under Ledelse af C. F. Wandel. Kobenhavn (G. E. C. Gad) 1899. (Ostenfeld, Iagttagelser, 1899.) .Martin Knudsen & C.Ostenfeld: Iagttagelser over Overfladevandets Tem- peratur, Saltholdighed og Planklon paa islandske og grønlandske Skibsrouteri 1899, foretagne under Ledelse af C. F. Wandel. København (G. E. C. Gad) 1900. Ostenfeld. Iagttagelser. 1900.) 559 samples and partly published them1. Bul being anxious to ascer- lain the complete results of his investigations, I applied to him on the subject. The lists are preserved in the Museum in Goteborg, and through the kindness of Professor Cleve and the Board of Directors of the Museum, I was allowed to take a copy of lliem. I now take this opportunity of expressing my warm thanks to Prof. Cleve and to the Board of Directors of the Museum in Gote- borg for their kindness and courtesy. — The samples in question are 30 in number. 3. In the autumn of 1901 mv friend, Or. Knud Poulsen, went lo the Færoes and setlled down in Thorshavn as a physician. I begged him to make gatherings at intervals of from 2 to 4 weeks as a continuation of the series of gatherings made at the request of Prof. Cleve, and my friend has steadily kept doing so until Octoher 1902, so that 23 samples have been gathered and examined, and my warm thanks are due to him for these gatherings. 4. A few samples (5) were gathered by mvself and Mr. Hel gi Jonsson in 1897, in July, August, November and December re- spectively. — On comparing the material from all these gatherings it must be borne in mind that it is necessary to distinguish between the gatherings (the greater number belonging to 1) which have been gathered at a considerable distance from the islands, N. W. and S. and S. E. of them, from those (the main part belonging to 2, 3 and 4, and a few belonging to 1) which have been gathered near the coast, where coastal conditions (ampler nourishment and lesser salinity) make themselves felt. But on the other hånd, the single habitats within this restricted area have naturally enough no great value with regard to such freefloating organisms as those with which we are dealing, and therefore in the following list only the frequency of the organisms, the season of the year in which they occurred, and a few facts ahout their relation lo temperature and salinity have been recorded, as also how far they mav be regarded as oceanic or as neritie forms. The terms oceanic and neritie plankton are introduced by E. Hæckel2, and he defines them (1. c. p. 22) as respectively the 1 P. T. Cleve: The Seasonal Distribution of Atlantic Plankton Organisms. Goteborg 1900. - Ernst Hæckel: Plankton Studien. Vergleichende Untersnchungen uber die Bedeutung und Zusammensetzung der pelagischen Fauna und Flora. Jena (Gustav Fiseher). 1890. 560 plankton of the open Ocean« and »the floating Fauna and Flora of the coastal regions« ; the same author (1. c. p. 25) distinguishes also belween holoplanktonic and meroplanktonic organisms, i. e. organisms which spend their whole life as freefloating indivi- duals, and organisms which spend onc part of their life floating as plankton, and the other part as bottom organisms. The two latter terms are sharper and clearer than Ihe two former, but it has be- corne customary to use the former so that they are almost identical with the latter; it must, however, be remarked that while all the oceanic species are holoplanktonic and the greater part of the neritic species are meroplanktonic, it is possible that some of the neritic species are holoplanktonic, at any rate our present knowledge of the life-history of these minute organisms is not so complete that we can preclude this possibility1. The plankton of the North Atlantic Ocean and its tributaries have d uring the last 10 years become fairly well-known through the researches of different (especially Scandinavian) investigators2, and therefore, as was to be expected, only a few new forms were 1 Cfr. H. H. Gran: Hydrographic-biological Studies of the North Atlantic Ocean and the Coast of Nordland. — Report on Norwegian Fishery- and Marine Investigations. Vol I. No. 5. 1900. Kristiania, p. 27. H. H. Gran: Das Plankton des Norwegischen Nordmeeres, von hiologischen und hydrographischcn Gesichtspunkten behandelt. — Ibidern, Vol. II, No. 5. 1902. Bergen. This very important treatise came in to my hånds while I was writing the present paper.) 2 P. T. Cleve: Plankton collected by the Swedish Expedition to Spitzbergen in 1898. — Kongl. Svenska Vetenskaps Akademiens Handlingar. Bd. 32, No. 3. Stockholm, 1899. P. T. Cleve: Report on the Plankton collected bj' the Swedish Expedition to Greenland in 1899. — Ibidern, Bd. 34, No. 3. 1900. P. T. Cleve: Notes on some Atlantic Plankton-Organisms. Ibidern, Bd. 34. No. 1. 1900. P. T. Cleve: Karakteristik af Atlantiska Oceanens vatten pa grund af dets mikroorganismer. — Ofversigt af K. Sv. Vetensk. Akad. Forhandl. 1897, No. 3. P. T. Cleve: On the seasonal distribution of some Atlantic plankton Or- ganisms. — Ibidern, 1899, No. 8. P. T. Cleve: On the origin of »Gulf-Streamwater«. Ibidern, 1899, No. 9. P. T. Cleve, G. Ekman, O. Pettersson: Les variations annuelles de l'eau de surface de l'Océan Atlantique. — Goteborg 1901. P. T. Cleve: A Treatise of the Phytoplankton of the Atlantic and its Tribu- taries and on the periodical changes of the Plankton of Skagerak. Upsala 1897. George Murray: Observations on Plant Plankton. — Journal of Botany, Vol. XXXV, 1897, pj). 387— 395. E. Vanhoffen: Die Fauna und Flora Gronlands. — Gronland-Expedition der Gesellscliaft fur Erdkunde zu Berlin 1891—93. — Vol. II, Parti, 1S97. C. H. Ostenfeld: see note on p. 558. 561 founri along the Færoes, but Ihe following lisl and hildes are more particularly valuable, because they represent so long a period ns si\ yearSj during which gatherings have been made at shorter and longer intervals. Tbey form a pendant to the investigations of several years standing of the Norwegian Sea, the North Sea and Ihe Skagerak carried ont by Norwegian and Swedish investigatois '. Excepting the above-mentioned paper by Cleve, very little has been published particularly with regard to the Færoese plankton; there are only two short papers by G. Pouchet2, who visited Thorshavn in August (from the 12th to the 24th) 1890. He made daily gatherings, and studied the living organisms, especially Gijm- nodinium pseudonoctiluca, diseovered by him, which appears to be extremely interesting as it forms a link between the Peridiniaceae and the Cgstoflagellata ; unfortunately it has never been observed by others; it can only be studied while living; as having no cell- walls it beeomes misshapen and indistinguishable when preserved together with other organisms. In his note in »Comptes Rendus« he gives some general features of the plankton. It was very uni- 1 E. Jorgensen: Protophyten und Protozoén im Plankton aus der norwe- gischen Westkuste. — Bergens Museums Aarbog 1899, No. VI. E. Jorgensen: Protistenplankton aus dem Nordmeere in den Jahren 1897 — 1900. — Ibidem 1900, No. VI. P. T. Cleve: Plankton -Researches in 1897. — Kongl. Svenska Vetenskaps- Akademiens Handlingar. Bd. 32, No. 7. 1899. P. T. Cleve: The Plankton of the North Sea, the English Channel and the Skagerak in 1898. — Ibidem, Bd. 32, No. 8. 1900. P. T. Cleve: The Plankton of the North Sea, the English Channel and the Skagerak in 1899. — Ibidem. Bd 34, Nr. 2. 1900. P. T. Cleve: The Plankton of the North Sea and the Skagerak in 1900. — Ibidem, Bd. 35, No. 7. 1902. P. T. Cleve: see above. H. H. Gran: Protophyta: Diatomaceæ, Silicoflagellata and Cilioflagellata. — The Norwegian North-Atlantic Expedition 1876—78. Christiania 1897. H. H. Gran: see above. Johan Hjort & H. H. Gran: Hydrographic-biological Investigations of the Skaberak and the Christiania Fjord. -- Report on Norw. Fishery- and Marine Investigations. Vol. I, No. 2. Kristiania 1900. Johan Hjort & H. H. (Iran: Currents and pelagic Life in the Northern Ocean. — Report on Norwegian Marine Investigations 1895 — 97. Bergen 1899. C. W. S. Aurivillius: Vergleichende thiergeographische Untersuchungen fiber die Plankton -Fauna des Skageraks in den Jahren 1893—97. -- Kongl. Svenska Vetenskaps Akademiens Handlingar. Bd. 30, Nr. 3. Stockholm 1898. - G. Pouchet: Sur la faune pélagique du Naalsoe-fjord (iles Feroé). — Comptes Rendus des Seances de l'Academie des Sciences, t. 114, 1892, pp. 80— 87. G. Pouchet: Cinquiéme contribution ii l'histoire des Peridiniens. — Journal de I Anatomic et de la Physiologie, 28 année, 1892, pp. 143— 150, PI. XI. 562 form du ring the three weeks in which he mach' gatherings, and occurred in large quantities; the main part of it consisted of Dia- toms, especially Rhizosolenia (according to my investigations it has probably been R. Shrubsolii) ; Peridiniaceae were also common. Phaeo- cystis Pouchetii, one of its constituents, is mentioned as an organ is m of special interest; it was named after Pouchet, as he was the hist to observe it in the Arctic Ocean. I. LIST OF THE PROTOPHYTA FOUND IN THE MARINE PLANKTON FROM THE SEA AROUND THE FÆROES. In the following list, I have enumerated the Bacillariaceae which belong to the plankton in the samples I examined (with regard to the other Diatoms I beg to refer to the above paper of E. Østrup), as also the Peridiniaceae and the single representatives for other Protophyta, which may occur in plankton. I have mentioned the chief papers dealing on each species under their own heading. I. Bacillariaceae. A. Centricae1. COSCINODISCEAE. I. PARALI A Heiberg, 1863. 1. P. sulcata (Ehbg.) Clevc, Året. Sea, Bih. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. Bd. 1, No. 13, 1873, p. 7; Galionella sulcata Ehbg.; Orthosira marina W.Smith, Syn. Brit. Diat., IL, p. 59, PI. 53, hg. 338; Paralia marina Heiberg, Consp. crit. Diat. Dan., 1863, p. 33; Melosira solida, var. Sarsii Ostenfeld, Iagttagelser, 1898, Tab. V and Melosira solida Ostenfeld, Iagttagelser, 1899, Tab. II, V, VII, VIII, 1900, p. 53, Tab. I, II, V, VIII, non Eulenstein in Van Heurek, Synops., PI. 86, figs. 36—42. This dialom is not rare in the plankton. It is not a true plankton- form, but a temperate, littoral form which is easily broken ol! and car- ried away by the sea. Found in January— March and July— December, most characteristic of the poor winter- plankton in November— March. As it is not a true plankton form, it is only found in the coastal regions, not in the open Ocean; optimum ol* temperature about 5° — 10°C. [See tablcs]2. 1 The genera are arranged much in the same way as in F. Schutt: Bacil- lariaceae, in Engler & Prantl: Die Naturlichen Pflanzenfamilien 1 11). 1896. '-' Where the more common species and their occurrence around the Færdes are speeified (pp. 593 — 596 and pp. 600 — (>04). 563 II. THALASSIOSIRA Cleve, 1873. 2. T. Nordenskioldii Cleve, Ard. Sea, 1873, p. 6, PL II, lig. 1; Van Heurck, Synopsis, PI. 83, fig. 9; Gran, Protophyta, 1897, p. 28, PI. IV, lig. 59; Gran, Bemerk., Nyt Magazin f. Naturv., 1900, p. 116. This species most frequently accompanies T. gravida, bul il is more particularly arctic. Found from March to August und reaches its maximum in March Mav and in 1902 it had a secondary maximum in August, hul il is not so common ;is T. gravida. See tables. 3. T. gelatinosa Hensen, V" Ber. der Konim. /ur Unters. d. deutsch. Meere in Kiel, 18.S7, p. 87; Gran, Bemerk., 1900, p. 110: Coscinodiscus excentricus, var. catenata Gran, Protophyta, 1897, p. 30. A temperate, oeritic species, which is often confounded with Cosci- nodiscus excentricus and is really very difficult to distinguish Ironi it. when the thin central mucilaginous thread is nol present. It is a winter- l'orm. and is found from November to April and reaches its maximum in March. Optimum ol' temperature 1° -7 "C. See lables. 4. T. gravida Cleve, Baff. Bay, Bih. t. K. Svenska Vel. Akad. Handl. Bd. 22, Aid. III, No. 4, 1896, p. 12, PI. 2, ligs. 14, 15, 10; Gran, Protophyta, Norw. North-Atl. Expedition , 24, 1897, p. 28, PI. IV, ligs. 57, 58; Gran, Bemerk., 1900, p. 115. A horeal- arctic, neritie form, met with along the eoasls of the Northern Atlantic Ocean from the North Sea norlhwards in the Arctic Ocean. Around the Færoes it occurs from March to August and but rarely in September— November. It reaches its maximum in March- Mav. but in 1898 it was also rather common in June— July and in 1002 in August. Rather indifferent with regard to salinity and tempe- rature (about 5°— 11° C). [See lables.] 5. T. subtilis (Ostf.) Gran, Bemerk., 1900, p. 117; Podosira (7) subtilis Ostenfeld, Iagttagelser, 1899, p. 55; 1900, p. 54. I found a small Diatom in plankton from the North Atlantic Ocean, collected in 1898, which I referred with hesitation to the genus Podosira. Gran found the same diatom later on and he refers it to the genus Thalassiosira because it has one connecting ring (copula) to each valve besides the connecting band (pleura); he does so somewhat doubtfully as neither he, nor I, have seen any mucilaginous thread as connection between the cells, the latter being merely embedded in an amorphous mucilage. I give a lignre of a colony of cells embedded in the mucilage; afler treatment with safranine the mucilage occasionally hecame somewhat striated. The cells are placed without order, sorae in valvar view, other in girdle view, and it is impossible to know the reciprocal ages of the dif- Botany <>r Uie Færdes. !i(> 564 Fig. 119. Thalassiosira subtilis ( Ostf.) Gran. An aggregation of cells em- bedded in the mucilage i15"/V. and a valve of a cell showing the »pseu- do-nodule« («o/t). each valve are distinguishable. ferent cells afler their position in the mucilage; that is at least the case judging Ironi preserved material. In some of the cells two daughter- cells are formed; they are somewhat separated from each other and yet kept together by the connecting zone. After ignification and embedding in styrax the structure of the cell is seen with diffi- culty; the valve (16 — 32 \i in diameter) is arched and without any visible structure; seen from the front, a small, but distincl »pseudo-nodule« is to be observed at some distance from the margin, which appears to be very faintly and closely spiniferous, but the last observation may be wrong. In girdle-view a connecting band and two narrow connecting rings, one belonging to The cells are thus formed much in the same way as in the Thalassiosirae of the section Pseudolauderia, and by the absence of the mucilaginous thread and the existence of the amorphous mucilage this species seems to form a connecting link between this section of the Thalassiosira and the Landeria, especially L. glacialis (Grim.) Gran. It has been found once (March 1900) around the Færoes. 6. T. bioculata (Grun.) Ostf. n. nora. ; Coscinodiscus bioculatus Gru- now, Diat. Franz Josefs Land, Denkschr. d. K. Akad. d. Wissensch., Bd. 48. Wien 1884, p. 107, PI. C, fig. 30, & D, figs. 1-2; Gleve, Baff. Bay. 1896, p. 10, PI. II, fig. 13; Coscinodiscus sp. Ostenfeld, Iagttagelser, 1900, p. 52. A chain- diatom predominates in the samples of August — September of 1902; the same species occurs also in April — May, but rarely. The cells are cylindrical, often higher than they are broad (diameter 30 — 60 /«, height 40 — 60 ,»). Besides the connecting band a great number of connecting rings occur, commonly 4 or 5 on each theka. It is without doubl identical with Coscinodiscus bioculatus of Grunow, the structure of the valves being exactly like that of his ligures. Markings are fasciculate, punctiform; central space has two round granules; apiculi very small, close lo the border and in one row; bul the structure is diflicult to dislinguish owing to the Fig. 120. Tlialassiosira bioculata (Grun.) Ostf., ditl'erent cells show- ing the connecting rings. ('1 cells to the lefl ■•""■'i, cell to the right«« ,. | 565 cells being very slightly siliceous. As a connection between the cclls I found n very thin central thread like the threads in l'h. hyalina (Grun.) Gran., and, consequently, I take the species to be a Thalassiosira . in spile of the numerous connecting rings which separate il from the other species; I think il heller to do so, rather tlian create a new genus at a time when we do not know how great a systematic valne this character has. (i ran. in his excel- lent paper on Lauderia and Thalassiosira (Bemerk., 1900), mentions that Cleve (Baff. Bay., 1896) has seen these numerous connecting rings and that he evidently does not regard them to be a very valuahle character, as he in his later papers always calls it Coscinodiscus bioculatus. On the other hånd Gran himself regards it as a character of great value, and according to his definitions of Ihe genera Lauderia, Detonula and Thalas- siosira, the species in question ought to be a Detonula; my reason for taking it to be a Thalassiosira of a new section Coscinolauderia, is because of its resemblance on the whole to the other species, e. g. in its having one row ofapicnli near the margin, in its central mucilaginous thread, etc. In one sample of September 1902 I found the auxospores (Hg. 121) which are produced in the same manner as in T. grauida (see Gran, Protophyta, PI. IV, figs. 57, 58). [See tables.] Grunow has found the species in samples from Cape Wan- karema and the Kara Sea as well as in a sample from an ice-Hoe from the west of Novaya-Zemlya, and Cleve has it from Davis Strait. From these statements it should be an arctic form, but 1 think it is a boreal or temperate one belonging to the fjords and is sometimes driven out in the ocean, as it is not seldom found in the North Atlantic Ocean together with other diatoms, but not in any great quantity. Fig. 121. Thalassiosira bioculata ((■run. Ostf. o, chain; />, a cell devcloping into an auxospore; c, auxospore (lv'/i). III. COSCINOSIRA Gran. 1900. 7. C. polychorda Gran., Bemerk., 1900. p. 115. Coscinodiscus polychordus Gran, Protophyta, 1897, p. 30, PI. II, lig. 33, PI. IV. lig. 56. A boreal, neritic species, which is rare around the Færoes; found sparingly in March— April and single specimens also seen in September, October, December and Mav. 36* 566 IV. COSCINODISCUS Ehbg., 1838. 8. C. radiatus Ehbg., incl. C. ocalus iridis Ehbg. and C. asterom- phalus Ehbg. Common around the Færoes, and found all the year round; it reaches its maximum in the winter from December to April and constitutes then the dominant species of the poor >I)isco-plankton<. [See tables.] As there is no distinct limit between the small specimens (the typical C. radiatus) and the larger ones which have been named C. ocalus iridis and C. asteromphalus, I prefer to take them as one species. It is a marine ubiquist which is indifferent as regards sali- nity and temperature. 9. C. concinnus W. Smith, Syn. Brit. Diat., II., p. 85. Rather common and found during most of the months: it reaches its maximum in February —April and is then common. A temperate, neritic species which has its central area of distribution in the North Sea. [See tables.] 10. C. subtilis Ehbg. Rare; only found in a few samples during the winter months. Not a true plankton-form. 11. C. lineatus Ehbg. Rare; found in three samples. Not a true plankton-form. 12. C. excentricus Ehbg. Rare; in some of the samples forms occur which are not distin- guishable from Thalassiosira gelatinosa, and perhaps this species has sometimes been mistaken for the species in question and vice versa. Fig. 122. Coscinodiscus concinnus W. Smith. A cell with several connecting rings and much arched valves (2ll"/i). ACTINODISCEAE. V. ACTINOPTYCHUS Ehbg., 1839. 13. Actinoptychus undulatus Ehbg. Not rare in the samples all the year round, but usually in a few specimens only; most frequent in winter. Not a true plankton -form, but a temperate, littoral form. [See tables.] VI. ASTEROMPHALUS Ehbg., 1844. 14. A. heptactis (Bréb.) Ralfs. in Pritch. In!, p. 838, PI. VIII, lig. 21. Occurs rarely and singly in the samples; it is a true plankton-form, which belongs to the temperate North Atlantic Ocean. 567 SOLENIEAE. VII. CORETHRON Castr., 1886. 15. C. criophilum Castr., Challenger Rep., p. 85, PI. 21, ligs. 12, 14, 15; C. hystrix Hensen, 1. c, PI. 5, lig. 49: Ostenfeld, Iagttagelser 1900, p. 52; Cleve, Fifteenth Ann. Report of the Fishery Board for Scotland, 1897, p. 298, lig. 15. OccurS rarely and singly in the plankton, generally in Jury No- vember. An oceanic plankton -form. found in most of the temperate parts of the oceans. VIII. LAUDERIA Cleve, 1873. 1(5. L. borealis Gran, Bemerk., 1900, p. 110, PI. IX, ligs. 5—9; Ostenfeld, Iagttagelser 1900, p. 53; L. annulata Cleve, pro parte. Only found in a single sample from Klaksvig in 1897 Augusl A temperate, neritic plankton-form which follows the west-coast of Europe from the English Channe! and the Haltit- northwards lo northern Norway. IX. LEPTOCYLINDRUS Cleve, 1881). 17. L. danicus Cleve, Kanonbaaden Hauch's Togter, Kjøben- havn, p. 54 (1889). A neritic species widely distributed, found along the west-coast of Europe in the Mediterranean, the Red Sea, the Malaj' Arehipelago and the Gulf of Siam. [See tahles. Its occurrence around the Færoes in the years of 1897 — 1902 is rather curious. In 1897 it was common in a sample from Thors- havn, gathered in July, and in 1898 predominant in all the samples gathered during May and June in different localities (it was in faet the predominant species of the whole area in those two months), but in 1898 — 1902 it was only found occasionally in a few speci- mens and never occurred as a common or predominant species. Such an irregular occurrence is the case with several plankton-dia- toms; they predominate in some years, but are absent (or almost so) in others. X. DACTYLIOSOLEX Castr.. 188G. 18. D. antarcticus Castr., Challenger Rep., p. 75, PI. 9, lig. 7. A temperate, oceanic form, only found once along the Færoes November). It occurs every year in the North Atlantic Ocean, bul rather sparingly. 508 19. D. tenuis (Cleve) Gran, Plankton des Norw. Nordmeercs, 1902, p. 172; I), mediterranelis v. tennis Cleve, Fish. Board for Scot- land 1897, p. 300, fig. 14. This s]>ecies also is found once only and in a l'ew specimens (Sep- tember). In the North Atlantic Ocean the two species often occur together. XI. GUINARDIA Perag., 1892. 20. G. flaccida (Castr.) Perag., Monogr. Rhiz., p. 107, PI. I, figs. 3—5. A temperate, neritic species found along the west coast of Enrope and Africa (also in other Oceans). Around the Færoes only found in the some samples from Klaksvig (August), in which Lauderia borealis occurs. XII. RHIZOSOLENIA (Ehbg.) Btw., 1858. 21. R. delicatula Cleve, Plankt. of the North Sea, Kgl. Vetensk. Akad. Handl., Bd. 32, No. 8, 1900, p. 28, fig. 11; Leptocylindrus dani- cns Schiitt, Jahrb. f. wissensch. Botanik, XXXV., 1900, PI. XII, figs. 13—24, 33; non Cleve. A boreal, neritic species found in the English Channel and the North Sea (and but rarely around the Azores) is moreover characteristic of the plankton of leeland (according to (i ran). Found four times at the Færoes in July — August, but sparingly. 22. R. faeroénsis n. sp. Cells short- cylindrieal with blunt angles, length 50 — 80 |M, breadth 40 — 70 ja ; spine very Ihin and short, forming the centre of a bluntly triangular depression on the valve; nunie- rous connecting rings; chromatophores rather numerous; occurs singly or in cbains. Related to R. delicatula and R. Stolterfothii. This very peeuliar Rliizosolenia, which at the (irst glance resembles Ceratanlina, seems to l)e an outpost of the genus, forming a transition to the La uderia-group and perhaps also to Ditylum; il comes nearest to R. delicatula, of which I have given a ligure from the same sample for comparison. It occurs in plankton from July 1900 and August 1902 and is ralhcr common in some of the samples; il was also found in July 1897, judging Ironi ;i drawing in my nianuscripl notes of the planklon of thai Fig. 123. Fig. 124. Fig. 123. Rhizosolenia delicatula Cl., chain showing the arrangement ofthe chromatophores (""/i). Fig. 124. Rhizosolenia faeroénsis Ostf., n. sp « chain of 4 cells showing the connections; b cell with connecting rings; c cell with chromatophores; <( cell in side vicw ('"/i). 569 year. Perhaps it is lliis species and not li. delicatula whicfa is cha- racteristic of the plankton from Iceland (according to Granj. 23. R. Stolterfothii, Perag., Diat. de Villefranche, p.90, PL 6, fig.4 I. A teraperate, neritic species which occurs in the southern part uf the North Sea and still further south, only found twice in the planklon from July (a few specimens . 24. R. Shrubsolii Cleve, New Diatoms, Kgl. Vetensk. Akad. Handl., Bd. 18, No. 5, 1881, p. 26. Common in the plankton around the Færoes, found all the year round, predominanl Ironi July November, especially in July— August. Optimum of temperate 9°- 11 °C. [See tablcs.] It is a temperate, neritic form, which in the Atlantic Ocean occurs along the coast of Europe from Norway southwards. 25. R. obtusa Hensen, Vter Ber. Komm. in Kiel, 1887, p. 86, PL 5, lig. 41; R. alata var. truncata Gran., Protophyta, 1897, p. 6, PL 4, figs. 6, 7. A form ratlier common occurs in the plankton from the Fær- oes which I believe to be identical with R. obtusa of Hensen and R. alata, var. truncata Gran. I have given a figure of it showing the form of the calyptra. It will easily be seen that the species comes near to R. alata, and I should think that Gran is right in considering it to be a mere variety. The form of the calyptra is not alvvays the same, sometimes specimens occur which approach the form ligured by Gran (Bemerk., 1900, lig. 22) in having the calyptra elongated. Cleve regards (Addit. Notes on the season. Distrib. of All. Plankton Organisms, Goteborg 1902) the R. inermis of Castracane to be identical with this species, but ceU> 8howln* the form of the ca- I think he is wrong in doing so. lyptra (*>% It occurs from March to September, and in most years rather sparingly, but predominated du ring May— June and August of 1898 and 1902. It is a boreal, oceanic species. Optimum of tempe- rate 6°— 7°C. [See tables.] 26. R. semispina Hensen, Vtei Ber. Komm., 1887, p. 84, PL 5, fig. 39 a, b. A borcai, oceanic species, rare around the Færoes, only a few speci- mens were found in samples from March, June, July, August and November. 27. R. styliformis Btw., Mier. Journ., 1858, p. 96, PL 5, fig. 5 a, b, c, d. Fig. 125. Rhizo- solenia obtusa Hensen. Two viewsof the same 570 A temperate, oceanic form, which occurs sparing]}' all thc year round in the plankton of the Færoes, in July only it is predominant but not every year. Optimum of temperature 9°— 11 °C, [See tables]. BIDDULPHIEAE. XIII. CERATAULINA Perag, 1892. 28. C. Bergonii Perag., Monogr. Rhiz., 1892, p. 103, PI. I, ligs. 15, 16. Zygoceros (?) pelagicum Cleve, Kanonbaaden Hauch's Togter, p. 54 (1889), with fig. A temperate, neritic species which occurs sparingly in The specimens from the Færoes are always large and short, resembling Peragallo's figures and nol those by Schutt in Engler & Prantl. nor those by Cleve (1. c); I should think that the latter (the Katle- gat and Baltic form) is somi Allantic and North Sea form. the plankton from most of the months (February— December). li%l%!« [See lables. S Fig. 126. Ceratau- lina Bergonii h. pemg. a ceii gat and Baltic form) is somewhat difJerent from the of the large and short form ""' , I. XIV. BIDDULPHIA Gray, 1831. 29. B. aurita (Lyngbye) Bréb. A rommon littoral form of boreal-arctic origin which occurs in the plankton from February— April only; sometimes common. Optimum of temperature about 6° C. [See tables.] CHAETOCEREAE. XV. BACTERIASTHUM Shadb., 1853. 30. B. delicatulum Cleve, Fish. Board for Scolland, 1897, p. 298, hg. 15. Of tliis little species, which belongs to the temperate North Atlantic Ocean, I once observed a chain in a sample from Thorshavn taken in November. XVI. CHAETOCFRAS Ehbg., 1844. The genus Chaetoceras has of all the plankton-genera of diatoms almost the greatest number of species; I think that more llian 100 species are described. Thc only attempt lowards dividing Ibis large genus into natura! sections has been made by Gran, who founded the hvo subgenera Phaeoceras and Hyalochaete relativelv on 571 the presence and absence of small chromatophores in the awns. Judging from our present knowledge of the plankton-flora Ihere is no doubt thai the main part of the plankton-diatoms has heen des- cribed, hence I am of opinion thai the time has arrived when a more extensive division of the genus Chaetoceras ought to be at- tempted. Characters of systematic value are, in my opinion, the following: — the number of the chromatophores; the form of the valves and the hoop (girdle); the awns; and the endocysts, and I think that the last-named character is one of the most important. In the following I shall make an attempt at the division of the genus, beginning with the two subgenera of Gran. Subgen. 1. PHAEOCERAS Gran. Sectio 1. Atlanticae. The directions of all the awns alwavs alike (except the terminal ones); awns in one plane (sagitlal plane); generally a small spine in the centre of the val ve. 31. C. atlanticum Cleve, Arctic Sea, 1873, p. 11, PI. II, lig. 8 a, b; C. dispar Castr., C. compactum Schutt. A boreal, oceanic species which occurs in the plankton all the year round, but usually sparingly; common in the spring (March). Optimum of temperature 4° — 5° C. [See tables.] Note. The following species belong to this section; — (l. neapolitanum Schroder, C. skeleton Schutt, C. audax Schutt, C.dichaeta Ehbg. (— C.janischianum Castr.), C. polygonum Schutt. Sectio 2. Boreales. Awns diverging in all directions; the direc- tions of the awns of the one valve are often different from those of the other valve; the small spine in the centre of the valve absent. 32. C. boreale Bail., Smithson. Contrib., 1854, p. 8, ligs. 22— 23. Found sparingly in the plankton gathered during most of the months, rather common in some samples of May— July of 1898. Opti- mum of temperature 7° — 10° C. t See tables]. C. boreale var. Brightwellii Cleve, Arctic Sea, 1873, p. 12, PI. II, lig. 7 a — e. Rare around the Færoes, found in a fcw specimens in March, May August, November. 33. C. convolutum Castr., Challenger Rep., 1886, p. 78, with tig.; C. Brightwellii Gran., Protophyta, 1897, p. 11, PI. I, fig. 1 a— c, non Cleve. Cfr. E. Jorgensen , Bergens Museums Aarbog 1900, No. VI, pp. 20—22. 572 I am inclined to think that E. Jorgensen is right in sepa- rating the forms named »C. criophilum«, into two species, viz. C. convolutam Castr. and C. criophilum Castr. None of them are common aronnd the Færoes. The true C. convolulum occurred only in a few specimens in March and May— September. 34. C. criophilum Castr., Challenger Rep., 1886, p. 78, with tig.; C. periwianum Vanhoffen, Gronl. Expedition d. Gesellseh. fur Erd- kunde zu Berlin, 1897, Bd. II, 1, PI. 3, figs. 5-7; non Brightwell. As rare as the above species, found in March, April. Both species are boreal, oceanic. Note. To this section we mav also refer the following species: — C. peruvianum Btw. (= C. volans Schiitt, C. curiens Cleve), C. rudis Cleve, C. densum Cleve, C. robustum Cleve, C. curvalum Castr., C. sallans Cleve, C. coarctatum Laud., C. den- ticulatum Laud., C. roslralum Laud., C. aequaloriale Cleve, C. danicuni Cleve, C. te- irastichon Cleve, C. Aurivillii Cleve and perhaps C. radiculiun Castr. Subgen. 2, HYALOCHAETE Gran. Sectio 1. Oceanicae. Chromatophores rather large, 4 — 10; awns coalesced along a short portion of their length: no endocysts. 35. C. decipiens Cleve, Arctic Sea, 1873, p. 11, PI. I, fig. 5 a, b. Common in the plankton from the Færoes, found all the year round, predominant in many samples from March to August and especially in April— May. It is a boreal, oceanic species, the optimum temperature of which here is 7°— 10° C. [See tables]. Note. Perhaps C. femur Schiitt and C. fusus Schiitt helong to this section. Sectio 2. Cylindricae. Chromatophores small, numerous; cells terete (valve circular); foramina very narrow; terminal awns not thicker than the others; endocysts somewhere about the middle of the cells, smooth or with spines. 36. C. teres Cleve, Bih. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 22, 3, No. 5, 1886, p. 30, fig. 7. A boreal-arctic, ncritic species, which is ralher common from March — June, sparingly in the other months; found with endocysts in April and May. Optimum of temperature 7°— 9° C. [See tables. i Note. To this section helong C. Weissflogii Schiitt, C. Schmidtii Ostf. , and perhaps (1. Lauderi Halls. Sectio 3. Constriclae. Chromatophores one or two; cells more or less constricted; hoop at least 1/a of the length of the cell; ter- minal awns mostlv thicker thah the others; endocysts, in the species where they are found, somewhere about the middle of the cell, and with numerous spines on both valves. 573 37. C. constrictum Gran, Protophyta, 1897, p. 17, PI. I, figs. 11 — 13, PI. III, lig. 42. A boreal-temperate, neritic species which is usually rather rare around the Færoes, found from March t<> August and a few specimens in Oc- tober, l)iit in Mav 1902 predominant. Endocysts found (rarely in Au- gust, September and October. [See tables.] Note. To tliis section belong C. Vanheurckii (Iran. and perhaps C. incisor Laud., C. siamense Ost I'.. C. coronatum Gran. Sectio 4. Similes. Chains few-celled; Chro matophores two; hoop narrow, not x/3 of the length of the cell; foramina narrow; valves of the cells with a hump; awns straight; endocysts with spines on both valves. 38. C. simile Cleve, Bih. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., Hd. 22, 3, No. 4, p.30, lig. 1. A boreal species which has only once been found in the plankton in March 1901; but in 1902 not rare in August— September. Sectio 5. Stenocinctae. Chromatophore one; hoop narrow, nol 73 of the length ol* the cell; foramina rather narrow; terminal awns ihicker than the others, curved and for the most part diverging greatly; endocysts somewhere about the midtlle of the cell, and with numerous spines on both valves. 39. C. Schuttii Cleve, Bih. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 20, 3, No. 2, 1884, p. 14, PI. I, lig. 1. The type is a temperate, neritic species which belongs to the North Sea and southwards, but a smaller and more slender form, which is in sotne respects intermediate between the type and C. Willei Gran, occurs in the North Atlantic Ocean (cfr. Ostenfeld, Iagttagelser, 1899, pp. 53 — 54), and this form was once observed in plankton from the Færoes (February 1899). Note. The following species belong to this section: C. af fine Laud.. C. Ralfsii Cl., C. javanicum CL, C. Willei (Iran. and perhaps C. paradoxum Cl. Sectio 6. Laciniosae. Chromatophores one or two; hoop rather large; foramina large; terminal awns mostly thicker than the others, not diverging greatly; endocysts (in C. brevesmå C. laciniosum) smooth on both valves, but nol in the middle of the cell. 1<>. C. breve Schutt, Ber. Deutsch. bot. Gesellsch., 1895, p. 38, fig. 4 a, b; Ostenfeld, Nyt Magazin Naturv., 1901, p. 295, lig. 6. A temperate, neritic species, which has its centre of distribution in the North Sea. Along the Færoes found once only Mav l.S'.IN . 574 41. C. laciniosum Schutt, Ber. Deutsch. bol. Gesellsch. , 1895, p. 38, lig. 5 a — c. A boreal, ncritic species which is rare around the Færoes, only found in a few specimens in samples from April, July, August, Septem- ber, November; with endocysts but rarely in September 1902. 42. C. pelagicum Cleve, Arctic Sea, 1873, p. 11, PI. I, lig. 4; C. Ostenfeldii Cleve, Kgl. Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 34, No. 1, 1900, p. 21, PI. VIII, Hg. 19; C. laciniosum, aff. Ostenfeld, Iagttagelser, 1899, p. 53. In the North Atlantic Ocean an association of plankton-orga- nisms occurs in the spring, in which two small species of Chaeto- ceras are predominant, viz. C. Schiittii, aff. (see No. 36) and C. Osten- feldii (=■ C. laciniosum, aff.). Samples containing this association were found as early as 1868 by Th. Fries, and Cleve published his notes on the examination of these samples in his paper on »Diatoms from the Arctic Sea«, 1873, in which paper he records a new species C. pela- gicum, found at Lat. 60° 25', Long. 19° 50', which is without doubt identical with C. Ostenfeldii: the figure is not well drawn, but the directions of the awns and the large foramina, together with the locality, leave no doubt as to its being identical with the latter species and consequently the older name has the claim of priority. The other species from this association is named »C. Wighamu by Cleve; it is C. Schiittii, aff., not C. Wighami of Brigthwell. C. pelagicum occurs only three times in the plankton from the Færoes, viz.: March 1901, June 1900, and August 1902, and in a few specimens. Note. C. disians Cl. belongs to this section. Sectio 7. Diademae. Chromatophore one; the primary valve of the endocysts with dichotomously divided processes. 43. C. diadema (Ehbg.) Gran, Protophyta, 1897, p. 20, PI. II, ligs. 16—18. A boreal -arctic, neritic species which is rare around the Færoes; found sparingly in March— May, single specimens in May, July, August, October. [See tables.] Note. C. mitra (Bail.) Cleve belongs to this section, and C. dicladia Castr. and C. Lorenzianum Gran are allied to it. Sectio 8. Tortae. Chains Iwisted; chromatophore one; awns thin, curved; endocysts (in C. debile) with two short, thick spines on the primary valve. 44. C. debile Cleve, Bih. Sv. Vel. Akad., Bd. 20, 3, No. 2, 1894, p. 13, PI. I, tig. 2. A boreal, neritic species, which is eommon around the Færoes. See lables]. 575 As in other piaces il lins ;ilso here two tnaxima, viz, in the spring und in the autumn. It predominates in the samples taken at the end of March to the beginning af May, and again in the end of August to the beginning of November. Optimum of tempe- rature is in spring about 5° — 7° C.« and in autumn about 8°— 9°C. Curiously enough no endocysts have been mel with around the Færoes. Note. C. tortissimum Gran seems l<> belong to tliis section. Sectio 9. Compressae. Chromatophores numerous, small; cells compressed; intercalary awns, thickened and twisted, occur inler- mixed with the thin normal ones; endocysts (in C. contortum) smooth. 4."). C. contortum Schutt, Ber. Deutsch. hot. Gesellsch., 1895, p. 44; Gran, Protophyta, p. 14, PL II, lig. 32. A boreal-temperate, oeritic form, which is generally rather rare around the Færoes, but in July 1901) predominant rarelv with endocysts, and also in September 1902). Found in March— May, July— September; op- timum of temperature about 10° C. [See tables.J Note. G. compressum Laud. (incl. C. Keller i Brun) and C. subcompressum Schroder belong to this section. Sectio 10. Furcellatae. Chromatophore one: terminal awns not differentiated ; endocysts occurring excentrically in the inother-cells, and lying closely together, two and two, hearing thick coalesced awns; valves of the endocysts smooth or with short spines. 46. C. cinctum Gran, Protophyta, 1897, p. 24, PI. II, figs. 23—27. A boreal, neritic species which is characteristic of the plankton of leeland; along the Færoes only found in a few specimens three times in July— September. 47. C. scolopendra Cleve, Bih. Sv. Vet. Akad., Bd. 22, 3, No. 4, p. 30, fig. 4; Ostenfeld, Nyt Magazin Naturv. Kristiania, 1901, p. 295, fig. 7. A temperate, neritie species found only once along the Færoes (Octo- ber 1900, a single chain). Note. C. furcellatum Bail. belongs to this section, and perhaps C. Paulsenii Ostf. from the Caspian Sea. Sectio 11. Sociales. Chains curved, emhedded in mucilage, forming irregularly spherical colonies; chromatophore one: endo- cysts smooth or with small spines. 48. C. sociale Lauder, Transact. Microsc. Soc. London XII, 1864, p. 77, PI. VIII, lig. 1. 576 A boreal-arctic, neritic species, found only once (April 1898) in the plankton. Note. C. radians Schiitt belongs to tliis section. — Besides the sections mentioned above there are several other sections, the species of which are not found in the plankton around the Færoes. Between Cglindricae and Constrictae I think Protuberantes may be placed, to which C. di- dgmum (Ehbg. Cleve, C. longicrure (Cleve) Ostf. and C. protuberans Laud. belong; the section Subtiles with C. subtile Cleve and C. longisetum Cleve approach Steno- cinctae. As a section fairly rich in species may be named Communes, including C.crinitum Schiitt, C. pseudocrinilum Ostf., C. ballicum Cl. (= C. Granii Cl.)1, C. seir- acanthum Gran, C. difficile Cl., C. bottnicum CL, C. caspicum Ostf., C. slrictum Ostf. and perhaps C. perpusillum CL, if the latter is not a dwarf-form of C. Schåttii. Further C. curvisclum CL, C. secuudum Cl. and perhaps C. ciliatum Laud. form the section Curvisetae. Near to the section Compressae I think we may place a section Diversae with C. diversion CL, C. furca Cl. and C. /aeue Leud-Fortm. C. anastomosans Grun. and perhaps C. calvum Cleve form the section Anastomosantes, and lastly we have a section Simplices of the species C. septentrionale Oestr., C. gracile Schiitt, C. simplex Ostf. and C. clavigerum Ostf. — Gran in his last treatise on plankton (Das Plankton d. Norw. Nordmeeres, 1902) mentions a » Chaetoceras Ingolfianum Ostf. in litt.«; it is a small species the endocysts of which differ from the hitherto known type of endocysts in the genus, and resemble the organisms which have been described as Xanthiopgxis. But the examination of this species not being finished, I cannot say anythins definite with reference to this curious faet. B. Pennatae. FRAGILARIEAE. XVII. FRAGILARIA Lyngbye, 1819. 49. F. oceanica Cleve, Arctic Sea, 1873, p. 22, PI. 4, fig. 25a,b; Gran, Bibliotheca Botanica, 42, 1897, p. 8, PI. I, figs. 6—9. A few specimens of a chain-forming Fragilaria which I think is identical with F. oceanica was onee found in the plankton (July 1897); it is an arctic, neritic species. XVIII. THALASSIOTHRIX Cl. & Grun., 1880. 50. T. Fraunfeldii Grun., K. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. 17, No. 2, 1880, p. 109. A few specimens of this characteristic species (nearest f. javanica Grun.) was found in the plankton from March (three times). Temperate, oceanic species. 51. T. longissima Cl. ev Grun., K. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., 17, No. 2, 1880, p. 108. 1 Gran (Das Plankton des Nordmeeres, p. 179) has named this species C. lene Schiitt, but it is a newer name than C.laeve Leud-Fortm. (which is very different Ironi it , and must tlieiclbre be omiltcd. 577 Very rare around the Færoes, only ;i few specimens occurred in plankton Ironi March to September. Il seems to me as il' tliis boreal, oceanic species which predominates in the [rminger-Sea has become rarer in the eastern part of the North Atlantic Ocean during the lasl live years Ihan it was before. ACHNANTHEAE. XIX. ACHNANTHES Bory, 1822. 52. A. taeniata Grun., K. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. 17, No. 2, 1880, p. 22, PI. I, fig. 5; Gran, Bibliotheca Botanica, 42, 1897, p. 8, PI. I, ligs.."), 10. A few specimens of a chain-forming diatom, probably .1. taeniata, were found in plankton from March, Ma}r, July, August. Boreal-arctic, neritic species. NITZSCHIEAE. XX. XITZSCHIA Hassall., 1845. 53. N. seriata Cleve, Diat. of Vega, Vega-Exped. vetensk. iakt., PI. 38, fig. 75; N. fraudulenta Cleve, Fish. Board for Scotland, 1897, p. 300, PI. I, fig. 11. Found in the plankton from March to August, but mostly very sparingly; it predominates in some samples of June 1898. Optimum of temperature about 8° — 9° C. [See tables.] 54. N. delicatissima Cleve, A Treatise on the Phytoplankton, 1898, p. 24, PI. II, fig. 22. Found together with the above species in May— June of 1898, but at the beginning of September is found by itself. Both species are boreal. II. Pterospermataceae. With regard to the algæ which I have named Pterosper- mataceae, very little is known. They consist of a spherical (or rarely, ovoid) eell furnished with wing4ists on the surface; the cell- contents are of a brownish colour and eontain numerous small drops of oil. The development of the cells is not known; Gran (Das Plankton des norweg. Nordmeeres, p. 164) mentions that he has found empty cells with an opening or scratch through which the contents may have escaped , and I have also seen such speci- mens. I can agree with him in his supposition thai il may be the resting stages of other organisms. With regard to the literature on 578 thcse organisms, see Jorgensen in »Bergens Museums Aarbog«, 1899, No. VI, pp. 47—49, Ostenfeld, Iagttagelser, etc, 1900, p. 49 and »Vid. Medd. Nath. Forening«, København, 1901, pp. 150 — 152. I. PTEROSPERMA Pouchet, 1894. 55. P. Mobii (Jorg.) Ostf. , Vid. Medd. Nath. Forening, Køben- havn, 1901, p. 151; Pterosphaera Mobii Jorgensen, Bergens Museums Aarbog, 1899, VI, p. 48. Very rare around the Færoes, only found twice in a few specimens in winter (February— March). A temperale, oceanic organistn which ap- pears every winter in the North Atlantic Ocean. 56. P. Vanhoffenii (Jorg.) Ostf., 1. c. p. 151; Pterosphaera Van- hoffenii Jorgensen, 1. c. p. 48. Occurs togethcr with the above-mentioned species, but is not so rare; found in 6 samples of October and January— March. Has the same distribution as the species mcntioned above. 57. P. dictyon (Jorg.) Ostf., 1. c. p. 151; Pterosphaera dictgon Jorgensen, 1. c. p. 48, PI. V, ligs. 27, 28. Only one specimen met with (October). 58. P. labyrinthus n. sp. Cell spherical, lamellae (wing-lists) form few and large meshes, with undulating sides; lamellae consisting of two closely-lying layers, which ultimately separate; in the optical section the two layers are seen as two lines which are parallel in the main part, but di- verg at an obtuse angle in the upper; seen from the surface the meshes are broad and with a cir- cular dot where thrce meshes meet. Diameter of the whole or- ganism about 60 p, of the cell proper aboul 28^. Only two specimens occurred in a sample of March 1901. Fin'. 127. Pterosperma labyrinthus Ostf., n. sp. Cell in optical view and the same seen from the surface (ri""/i). II. HEXASTERIAS Cleve, 1900. 59. H. problematica Cleve, K. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. .'59, No. 8, p. 22, lig. C). I think that the little-known organism which Professor Cleve r>79 lins named Hexasterias problematica , most naturally has its place in the neighbourhood of the genus Pterosperma. Around the Færoes it occurred in a few specimens in July, No- vember, December. February and March. It seems to be ;i boreal-tem- perate, oceanic species. III. Peridiniaceae. I. EXUVIAELLA Cienkowsky, 1881. 60. E. compressa (Bail.) Ostf. , Iagttagelser, etc, 1899, p. 59; Pyxidicula compressa Bailey; Dinopyxis compressa Stein, Organismus der Infusionslhiere, III. Abt., II. Hålfte, 1883, PI. I, figs. 34— 38; Exuviaella marina Schutt in Engler & Prantl, Natiirl. Pflanzen- fainilien, I, 1, b, fig. 11; non Cienkowsky. A temperate, oceanic species which has only been found in two samples of July 1900; but this mav be accounted for by the faet that its minute size allows it to pass through the meshes of the gauze. II. DINOPHYSIS Ehbg., 1839. 61. D. acuta Ehbg., Abhandl. Berlin. Akad., 1839, p. 151 ; Stein, 1. e. PI. 19, lig. 13. With regard to the genus Dinophijsis I have followed E. Jør- gensen's view as expressed in his excellent paper on the species of the »ac7/ta«-group (Bergens Museums Aarbog 1899, VI, pp. 27 — 31). The D. acuta s. str. is a borcai- temperate, oceanic species which was found in samples from the Færoes in the months of February, March, July — August. October and December; but always rare. [See tables.] 62. D. acuminata Claparede & Lachmann, Mém. de l'Instit. Génevois, V— VI, 1858—59, p. 403, PI. 20, fig. 17; Jorgensen, 1. c. p. 30, PI. 1, figs. 7—9; D. Vanhoffenii Ostf., Iagttagelser, etc, 1899, p. 58. This boreal, oceanic species being small eseaped through the net and is of course very rare; only found in two samples and in a few specimens (July 1900). Note. D. norvegica which I consider as a neritic species occurring along the west-coast of Europe, has not been found around the Færoes. 63. D. rotundata Clap. & Lachm., 1. c. p. 409, PI. 20, lig. 10; D. Michaelis Auett., an Ehbg.? This species also, on account of its small size, eseapes through the meshes, and is only occasionally caught in the net. Specimens occurred in July— August, but sparingly. Temperate, oceanic species. Botniiy ol' Mie Færdes. •jy 580 III. PYROPHACUS Stein, 1883. 64. P. horologicum Stein, 1. c. PI. 24, figs. 1—13. Very rare, only a few specimens occurred in hvo samples (Decem- ber 1900, March 1901). Temperate, oceanie speeies. IV. PODOLAMPAS Stein, 1883. 65. P. palmipes Stein, 1. c. PI. 8, figs. 9— 11. A single specimen was inet with in March 1901. Temperate, oceanie species. V. GONYAULAX Diesing, 1866. 66. G. polygramma Stein, I. c, PI. 4, lig. 15, non ligs. 16 — 17. A single specimen was found in July 1900. Temperate, oceanie species the small size of which prevents its being caught in the net. 67. G. spinifera (Clap. & Lachm.) Diesing, 1. c. Boreal, neritic species, found once only (June 1900). 68. G. polyedra Stein, 1. c. PI. 4, figs. 7—9. Neritic species, found once only (March 1897). VI. DIPLOPSALIS Bergh., 1881. 69. D. lenticula Bergh., Morpholog. Jahrb., VII, 2, 1881, p. 244, figs. 60-62. Temperate, oceanie species, found rather sparingly in March, April, July and August; in the samples of 1897 — 1898 not distinguished from Peridinium ovalum (Pouch.) Schiitt. [See tables. J VII. PERIDINIUM Ehbg., 1832. The knowledge of this genus has much advanced thorough the researches of Jorgensen (1. c.) and Gran (Das Plankton des Nor- weg. Nordmeeres), but even then its species and their affinities re- quire further cxamination. Subgen. 1, PROTOPERIDINIUM (Bergh) Gran. 70. P. ovatum (Pouch.) Schutt, Die Peridineen d. Plankton- Expedition, I, Kiel & Leipzig 1895, PI. 16, lig. 49; Protoperidinium ovatum Pouchet, Journ. de l'Anat. el de la Physiologie, 19, 1883, PI. 20—21, fig. 13. Not rare around the Færoes, found during most of the months, hul in the years 1897 1898 not distinguished from Diplopsalis lenticula Bergh Boreal, oceanie species. See tables.] 581 71. (?) P. decipiens Jorgensen, 1. c. p. 40; Gran, Das Plankton des \orw. Nordmeeres, 1902, p. 1.S7, lig. 12. A iittle Peridinium, which resembles Gran's figures of P. deci- piens Jorg., was found in March 1001 . I have given figures of it for comparison; they are rat her like those of (i ran, l>nt Jorge li- sen's deSCriptioil doeS Fig. 128. Peridinium decipiens Jflrg. ?) var. curvipes Ostf., n. var. The same cell in different views ('"/i1. notagreewell with them, the siiecimens nol being »flat, almost cake-like« (»llaeh, fast kuchen- formig«); they are characterized by their prominent curved list on the left side ol' the longitudinal lissnre (var. curvipes n. var.). 72. P. pellucidum (Bergh) Schiitt, Die Peridineen der Plankton- Expedition, PI. 14, tig. 45; Protoperidi- nium pellucidum Bergh., 1. c. p. 227, ligs. 46—47. Neritic species. Rare around the Færoes, found in January, May, July, August and December. Allied to the following species. Fig. 129. Peridinium pellucidum (Bergh) Schiitt, a specimen from the Kattegat ; the same cell in different views i "-'"" i 73. P. pallidum Ostf., Iagttagelser, etc., 1899, p. 60; Cleve, K. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl., Bd. 34, No. 1, 1900, p. 17, PI. VII, figs.21,22; P. pellucidum Gran, Das Plankton d. Norw. Nordmeeres, p. 1N0, fig. 10; non Bergh. In 1899 I descrihed a Peridinium, which together with P. ovatum was one ol' the characleristie forms in an association of borcai Peridiniaceae (» Longi- pes - plankton«) ; my description was not ac- companied by figures, hul in 1900 Cleve gave somc figures ofit, which are not, however, very characteristic. (i ran in his last paper supposes it to he identical with P. pellucidum and gives under that name a ligure of it which is very good; but the true P. pellucidum Bergh, which is founded on Danish speci- mens, is very different from it. For comparison I have given Fig. 130. Peridinium pallidum Oslf. , a specimen Ironi the Danish Waters near Ly6 in Lille Belt); the same cell in different views 582 figures of both species; but the following measurements will per- haps better show the difference: — Breadth Thickness 45 fi 35 p 70 (i 45 \i Length P. pellucidiim about 55 n P. pallidum — 80 n The relation between the breadth and thickness is especially very different, but they also differ as regards their whole appear- ance and the plan of their transversal fissure, which is nearly at right- angles with the longitu- dinal axis in P. pelluci- diim, but very oblique in P. pallidum. It is a boreal, oceanic species, which is rather rare around the Færoes. [See tables.] 74. P. Steinii J6rg., 1. c. p. 38; P. Michaelis Stein, 1. c, PI. 9, figs. 9 — 14; non Ehbg. Temperate, oceanic species, very rare around the Færoes (found three times in July). 75. P. globulus Stein, 1. c, PI. 9, figs. 5—8. As the above, found only once in February. Fig. 131. Peridinium pallidum Ostf., a specimen from the North Atlantic Ocean; the same cell in different views (200/i). Sungen. 2, EUPERIDINIUM Gran. 70. P. conicum (Gran) Ostenfeld & Schmidt, Vid. Medd. Nath. For., 1901, p. 174: Gran, Das Plankton des Norw. Nordmeeres, 1902, p. 189, lig. 14; P. divergens, var. conica Gran, Rep. on the Nor- weg. Fishery and Marine Investigations, Vol. I, 1900, No. 5, p. 47; P. divergens, var. Michaelis Jorg., 1. c. p. 37. This species has not been distinguished from the following in most of the samples; I am inclined to think thai it is not rare in the plank- ton around the Færoes, but I have noticcd il only in some samples ol' 1900 (March and July) and 1902 (August). Gran describes il lullv in his last treatise on plankton and gives figures of it; he also describes an allied species, viz. P. pentagonum which I do not know. 77. P. divergens Ehbg.; P. lenliculare (Ehbg.) Jorg., 1. c. p. 37. Occurs not infrequently in the planklon, hul not in any greal qua n ti ty, found in January, March, July December. A temperate, oceanic species. [See lables. | 583 78. P. depressum Bailey, Smithson Contrib. to Knowledge, II, 8, Washington 1850, p. 12, ligs. 33— 34. A very characteristic species ol' boreal, oceanic origin; rather cora- mon around the Færoes and found during most of the months. fSee tahles.] 79. P. oceanicum Vanhoffen, (ironiand Exped. d. Gesellsch. f. Erdkunde zu Berlin, Bd. II, 1, 1897, PI. 5, lig. 2. Temperate, oceanic species which is rare along the Færoes; found in January, .lune and October, bul in a few specimens. VIII. CERATIUM Schrank, 1793. The species of this genus are the most important plankton-forms of the Peridiniaceae; the northern forms have been treated by al- most all the authors who have written about the plankton of the North Atlantic Ocean and its tributaries, vi/. Schull, Vanhoffen, Cleve, Jorgensen, Gran and the author of the present paper. Subgen. 1, EUCERATIUM Gran. Sectio Tripos. Antapical- horns elosed at the distal end; lists of Ihe horns without spines. 80. C. tripos (O. F. Miill.) Nitzsch., Syn. C. tripos, var. baltica Schutt, Pflanzenleben d. Hochsee, fig. 20 IV a, lig. 35 I. Fig. 132. Fig. 133. Fig. 132. Ceralium tripos (O. F. Miill.) Nitzsch., f. atlantica n. f., a specimen with longer and more diverging horns (lvj/i)- — Fig. 133. Ceratlum tripos O. I«". Miill.) Nitzsch., f. atlantica n. f., a specimen with rather short and only slightly diverging horns (L,0/i). A form of this species is common in the plankton around the Færoes and also in the Norlh Atlantic Ocean, especially in its eastern part. It is a temperate species which reaches its maximum in August— October along the Færoes. [See tables.] 584 This North Atlantic form (f. atlantica n. f.j of which I have given fignres, differs in some respects a little from the Baltic form (f. subsalsa n. f., var. baltica Schiitt ex parte), e. g. as regards the direction and cnrva- tnre of the antapical- horns. As shown in the fignres, the antapical horns of f. subsalsa form a blnnt angle at their basal part and are then straight or nearly so, while the horns of f. atlantica are longer, andevenly and faintly,bnt distinctly cnrved. This character seems to be constant at least as regards the two forms in ques- tion, viz. the North Atlantic form and the Baltic and Kattegat form, which two must then be considered as geographical races. Fig. 134. Ceratiwn iripos (O. F. Mull. Nitzsch., f. subsalsa n. f., a specimen from the Western Baltic 81. C. neglectum n. sp. In some samples I fonnd a Ceratium which comes near to C. tripos, but is always distinct from it. It is rather robust and has very prominent and broad lists on the horns, especially on the apical- horn. I have also observed it in other samples from the North Atlantic Ocean. From the Færoes it was common in a sample of June 1900, where C. tripos was very rare; it also occurred in a sample of March 1902. Still further investigations will clear the relation between the two species. Note. C. bucephalum Cl. was not met with in the samples. Sectio Macroccras. Antapical-horns open at the distal end; lists ofthe horns with more or lcss developed spincs. 82. C. horridum (Cl.) Gran emend., Das Plankton d. Norweg. Nordineeres, 1902, p. 194; C. tripos, var. horrida Cleve, Fish. Board for Scotland, 1897, p. 302, lig. 4: C. tripos var. scotica Schi'itt, Pflanzen leben, p. 70, fig. 35 IV; Ostenfeld, Iagt- tagelser, etc3 L8993 p. 57; ibidem, 1900, p. 55; C. tripos \.macrocerosi f. intermedia Jørgensen, 1. c. p. 42, PI. I, lig. 10. Fig. 135. Ceratium neglectum Ostf., n. sp., two specimens ( l;" i). 585 Gran in his lasl paper proposed the name C. horridum for the group oi* forms the extremes of which are C. horridum Cl. s. sir. and C.tripos var. »scotica Schutt« or C. tripos, var. intermediet Jorg. Although I cannot agree with hini in his argument on the name »scotica Schutt«, Fig. 136. Fig. 137. Fig. 13S. Fig. 139. Kig. 136. Ceratlum horridum (Cl. , t.tgpica ('■ran: hvo specimens with radier short antapical-horns Fig. 137. Ceratlum horridum (Cl.), f. tgplca Gran, a specimen with long antapical-horns «' Fig. 138. Ceratlum horridum (Cl.), a specimen, intermediate between t.tgpica and (.intermediet (.,M/i). Fig. 139. Ceratium horridum (Cl. , f. intermediet Jorg., two specimens (lMli). I prefer to follow him in naming the whole group C. horridum; the most important is, however, to have the same names for the same forms. I have given some figurcs of the forms ranging from the strongly spiniferous f. genuina Gran to the almost unspiniferous f. intermediet (Jorg.) Gran. The {'orm genuina is rather rare around the Færoes; it occurs sparingly from March to September. The form intermediet is found all 586 the year around: it accompanies C. tripos f. atlantica and reaches its maximum at the same time. viz. in the autumn. [See tables.] Note. C. macroceras Ehbg. has not been found in the samples; it seems to be rather rare (or wanting?) in the North Atlantic Ocean west of the line drawn between Scotland-Iceland, but is common in the North Sea. 83. C. longipes (Bail.) Cleve, Fish. Board f. Scotland, 1897, fig. 2; Peridinium longipes Bailey, Smithson. Contrib., 1854, fig. 35; C. tripos, var. tergestina Sehutt,Pflanzenleben, p. 28, lig. 20 IV b and p.70, fig. 35 II. Fig. 140. Fig. 141. Fig. 140. Ceratium longipes (Bail.), f. oceanica n. f'., a specimen with rather short antapical-horns ('■'■" ,i- Fig. 141. Ceratium longipes (Bail.), a specimen wlth short and widely diverging antapical-horn (approaching C. arcticum Ehbg.) (1:,"/ti. Of tbis species two forms, analogous to the above-mentioned forms of C. tripos, occur, viz. f. oceanica n. f. and f. baltica n. f. The form oceanica is more robust and has shorter and more spiniferous horns, while f. baltica is more slender and almost destitute of spines. The figures by Bailey (1. c.) and Gran (Plankton, 1902, fig. 2) represent f. oceanica, to which my figures (140 and 141) also beloiig, but they have unusu- ally short antapical-horns, and one of them approaches C. arcticum Ehbg. C. longipes is a boreal, oceanic form, which occurs rather commonly along the Færoes all the year around; it reaches its maximum in the autumn. [See tables.] The form baltica belongs to the Baltic and the Ku Uegal and folio ws the waters of the Baltic west and northwards in the Skagerak and along the west coast of Norway. I have given a ligure of it, drawn after a specimen from the Danish waters, and Bergh' s fig. 20 (Morphol. Jahrb., 1881) also belongs to it. Fig. 142. Ceratium longipes Bail., f. baltica n. f. a specimen from the Western Baltic i ' ■" , 587 Fig. 143. Ceratium longipes, var. oentricosa Ostf., n. var. ('■"" . ,;. C. longipes, var. ventricosa n. var. In a few samples from the Færoes (August 1900) and also in others from the North Atlantic Ocean, I saw a Ceratium which comes near to C. longipes, but is easily distinguished from it by its much larger >trunk«. As I have only seen a few specimens, I am not prepared to define ils relation to the above- mentioned species; it appears to be analogous to C. compressum Gran, which comes near to C. horridum. Note 1. C. arcticum Ehbg., which (Iran il. c. p. fil) found in the sea between the Færoes and the Shetlands, has not heen met with in the samples from the Færoes, although it may certainly occur there. C. inaequale Gourret (C. reticulatum Ostf., Iagttagelser 1899, p. 58, vix Pouchet) has been found in the North Atlantic Ocean, SW. of the Færoes and may also occasionally extend to them. Note 2. Besides the above-mentioned two sections of the subgenus Euceratium various other sections may be founded for the reception of the numerous tropical species. Subgen. 2, BICERATIUM Vanhoffen. 84. C. lineatum (Ehbg.) Cleve, Kgl. Sv. Vel. Akad. Handl., Bd. 32, Nr. 3, 1899, p. 36; Peridinium lineatum Ehbg.; C. farca v. baltica Mobius; Biceratium debile Vanhoffen, Gronland Expedi- tion d. Gesellsch. f. Erdkunde zu Ber- lin; PI. 5, fig. 16. This little species, the small si/c of which enables it to escape through the meshes of the gauze, has only been found twice in February along the Færoes; the speci- mens examined have short horns. 85. C. furca (Ehbg.) Clap. & Lachm. Occurs rather sparingly around the Færoes, mostly together with C. tripos and the following species; found during most of the months. [See tables.] Subgen. 3, AMPHICERATIUM Vanhoffen. 86. C. fusus (Ehbg.) Dujard. Hather common in the plankton and found all Fig. 144. Ceratium lineatum (Ehbg.) Cl., a short-horn- ed form (' ", ,)■ Fig. 145—1 16. FJg. 145. Ceratium fusus (Ehbg. Huj.; the common form from the sea around the Fa-roes ('■"",!). - Fig. 146. Ceratium fusus (Ehbg.) Duj. ; a robust form with rather short horns (^°li). 588 the year round, bul usually nol in Large quantities. The specimens have curved antapical-horn, bul vary as regards the length ol' the horns and the size ol" the »trunk«. [See tables.] IV. Silicoflagellata. I. DICTYOCHA Ehbg., 1838. 87. D. fibula Ehbg., Mikrogeologie, 1854, PI. 21, Hg. 42, PI. 22, fig. 42. Owing to their small size this species and the following one have only occasionally been caught in the net; found in a few specimens in March and October, but is undoubtedly more common. Temperatc oceanic species. 88. D. speculum Ehbg., Abh. d. Berlin. Akad., 1838; D. aculeata Ehbg., Mikrogeologie, PI. 22, fig. 48; Distephanus speculum Stohr, Palaeontographica, 26, 1880. Occurs as the above species; found in samples of March, April, October and November. V. Coccolithophoridae. Lohmann 's excellent monograph1 of the organisms whieh produce Ihe coccoliths, has now explained to ns these cnrious bodies. He has proved that they are flagellates, and tbat they are common in the planklon in the Mediterranean Sea, but owing to their smallness escape thorough the gauze. I have already pointed out that they are not rare in the North Atlantic Ocean (see Iagt- tagelser, elc. , 1900, p. 40), but are caught only when the other planklon-organisms (diatoms) occur so plentifully tbat the mesbes of the gauze are filled up2. I. COCCOLITHOPHORA Lohmann, 1902. (Coccosphaera Wallich, 1877, non Perty 1852.) 89. C. pelagica (Wallich) Lohm., I. c. p. 138; Coccosphaera pe- lagica Wallich, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1877, p. 348, PI. 17; C. atlantica 1 Archiv fur Protistenkunde, Bd. I, 1902, Jena. 2 In samples from the North Atlantic Ocean collected (October — November 1899 by a method, invented by Dr. K. J. V. Steenstrup (cfr. Ostenfeld, Iagttagelser ole. 1900, p. 45) I have, besides the Coccolithophora pelagica, found various Coccolitho- phoridae, viz. Syracosphaera pulchra Lohm. (59°34' N. Lat., 24° 41' W. Long.), S.me- diterranea Lohm. (59°35' N. Lat., 18°39' W. Long. and eastwards to 4" li.")' W. Long.). 589 Ostenfeld, Zoologischer Anzeiger, XXII. 1899, p. 436, fig. 1. Loh- mann has included my C. atlantica in Wallich's C.pelagica and he is perhaps right in doing so, bul I am not quite sure, nevertheless I am with him, until further researches have cleared up lliis pro- blem; Ihe distinguishing point between the species is thai C. atlan- tica has fewer and larger coccoliths than C.pelagica. Found only three times in the plankton from the Færoes October 1 900, March 1901 and Mav 1902), but is undoubtedly rather common. Temperate, oceanic species. VI. Flagellata. I. DINOBRYON Ehbg., 1838. 90. D. pellucidum Levander, Acta Soc. pro Fauna el Flora Fennica, 12, No. 2, 1894; Dinodendron balticum Schiitt, nom. nud.; Das Pflanzenleben der Hochsee, 1893, p. 36. This boreal-aretic, neritic species which is the only marine form of the genus Dinobryon, was found twice (May 1902) in the plankton. II. PHAEOCYSTIS Lagerh., 1893. 91. P. Pouchetii (Hariot) Lagerheim, Botaniska Notiser, 1893, p. 32; Tetraspora Pouchetii Hariot in Pouchet, Compt. rend. des seances de la Soc. de Biologie, 1892. Occurs every year and usually in great quantities, bul during few months. In theyéars of 1890 (Pouchet), 1895 (Borgesen), 1897, 1899 and 1900 it occurred in July— August, in 1896, 1898 and 1902 in May- June; temperature about 7°— 11°C. [See tables.] It is a boreal, neritic species which plays a conspicuous part in the plankton of the north-west coast of Europe, Ihe Norwegian Sea and around Iceland and Greenland. VII Chlorophyceae. 1. HALOSPHAERA Schmitz, 1879. 92. H. viridis Schmitz, Mitteil. aus d. zoolog. Slation zu Neapel, I, PI. 3; H. minor Ostenfeld, Iagttagelser 1899, p. 51 ; cfr. Gran, Plankton des Norweg. Nordmeeres, 1902, pp. 12— 16; PI. I, ligs. 10 — 15. In my publications on the plankton of Ihe North Atlantic Ocean (Iagttagelser, etc, 1899, p. 51 and 1900, p. 47) I have described a lillle form of Halosphaera as H. minor. It is much smaller than 590 //. viridis and has not the deep green ehromatophores, besides it occurs from July to December, while //. viridis is to be found in spring; further, I have found a spherical organism of about the same dimensions with tetraedric division-stages and referred it with hesitation to this species. Jorge nsen (1. c. p. 46) has also mentioned a Halosphaera as H. minor. But now Gran has examined the Halosphaerae of the Norwegian Sea of the last years and his opinion is that they all belong to the same species. According to him the development is as ibllows: — from August to April — May Halosphaera occurs in the Norwegian Sea; the cells are during the first months small (corresponding to H. minor Ostf.), but increase by and by until the spring when they are 236 — 476 fi in diameter (H. viridis); in the meanwhile the number of nuclei, which to begin with was one, has become numerous; then the organisms disappear sud- denly, and from May to August none are to be found. Gran sup- poses that they produce zoospores but the latter cannot be caught in the net. He says that he does not know if the North Atlantic Halosphaera is the same as in the Mediterranean, as Jorge nsen has seen zoospores with more than two flagella. But I think that Gran is right in considering our form to be H. viridis. It is common in the plankton from the Færoes, and begins to ap- pear in September — October and disappears in March— April; it often predominates from November to January; temperature 5°— 10° C. — Temperate, oceanic species. [See tables.] II. PACHYSPHAERA Ostenfeld, 1899. 93. P. pelagica Ostf., Iagttagelser, etc, 1899, p. 52. This little-known organism which appears to be a resting stage, has been found sparingly in samples from January — April, July and October— November. Seems to be of temperate-Atlantic origin. II. NOTES ON THE PLANKTON. In his last and excellent paper on the Plankton of the Norwegian Sea Gran points out that two methods may be employed for classi- fying the plankton, viz. one may either consider the associations of such species as often occur together and form a plankton of a peculiar character as unities, or treat the single species as unilies, 591 and, according lo their biogeographical relation put them together inlo gronps, which, borrowing a term from plant-geography, Gran calls elements. Gran and the aulhor of this paper have in several treatises described many snch plankton-associations (»Genossenschaf- ten«). They appear at Ihe same place and al alinost fixed seasons of the year — the one association succeeding the other, just as the plant-associations on land, c. g. in a wood, change according lo the season of the year, but a plankton -association is not confined to any particular geographical locality because the ouler conditions of lifc, such as light, warmth, salinity and nutritive matter may be the same in different piaces and that, consequenlly, makes it possible for the same plankton -association to thrive in different piaces. It is naturally enough impossible to draw any very narrow limits for such associations, the faet that some species, which olherwise belong to an association, are wanting in a locality where the other charac- teristic species occur, does not entitle one to establish a new associa- tion ; it is much better to take them in as wide a sense as possible. In what follows an attempt will be made on the strength of the samples examined to describe the plankton -associations which occur along the Færoes. To attain to as much clearness as possible, the samples have been divided into two groups, viz. 1. Samples taken in the Atlantic Ocean in the vicinity of the Fær- oes, i. e. samples which will often be found to have an oceanic character; and 2. Samples taken in Nolsofjord off Thors- havn or in the neighbourhood of it. The reason why the latter have been separated is, partly, because there is a long continuous row of samples from this particular locality, and partly, because the neritic forms are much more conspicuous in these samples gathered near land than in the others. In Ihe aeeompanying tables I have placed the common forms together. The tables are arranged in conformity with the usual plankton-tables, in which the frequency is indicaled as follows: - — cc (main part of the planklon), c (predominanl), + (rather common), r (rare), rr (very rare, only a few specimens seen); but lo avoid making the lists too long and conlusing I have — as Cleve also in his laler works — omitted those forms which only occur in a few of the samples and usually in small quantities; the laller forms are enume- rated directly after the tables and prefixed with Ihe same number as that of the samples. 592 With regard to the greater part of the samples, I have been able to give the temperature of the water, and mostly also its salinity, but the latter is nol of any greal interest as regards the area in question. 1. The Plankton of the Atlantic Ocean, off the Færoes. (Tables I— V.) In my papers on the plankton of the North Atlantic Ocean of the years 1897, 1898, 1899 I have pointed out the main features of the changes occurring in the plankton of this region. Taking the eastern part, which touches the Færoes, more parti- cularly into consideration they may briefly be summed up as fol- lows: — During winter (Dec. — April) a poor Discoplankton1 oc- curs, consisting mostly of species of Coscinodiscus, intermixed with a great many other species which occur singly; during spring a rich Chætoplankton and frequently a Nit z se hia plankton are met with ; the former is characlerized by the presence of , e. g. Chaetoceras atlanticum and decipiens and the latter by Nitzschia seriata and delicatissima and the small Chaetoceras Schuttii ajf. and pelagicmn. Later in the summer these planktons are succeeded by Scolica plankton, consisting mainly of the species of Ceratium; sometimes the Peridiniaceae are replaced by Rhizosolenia stgliformis and several other species, and a Sty li plankton is produced. To- wards autumn Halosphaera viridis is met with in these associa- tions, and it holds out beyond autumn, and after the other forms have disappeared it occurs as a Sphæraplankton which during the winter occurs together with the Discoplankton or is replaced by it. Sometimes during the summer a boreal association of Peri- diniaceæ, viz. Longipesplankton occurs in the area between the Færoes and Iceland. In what follows we shall see how the plankton of the Færoes harmonizes with the developing process in the open ocean sketched above. 1897, Table I. During March — April Coscinodiscus is the most common form, i. e. Discoplankton. Thcn comes in Mav Chaeto- ceras decipiens and Nitzschia seriata, i. e. Chæto- and Nilzsehia- plankton. In the samples of July — August there is a greal diffe- rence between the poor sample (No. 5) taken off Syden") in which 1 A closer characteristic of the different plankton-associations mav be had in the above-mentioned works by Cleve, by Gran and by the author of this paper. 593 Table I. 1897. No. 1 2 :* 1 5 (i 7 8 !) 10 11 Kh.ks- Trangis- NolsO s. B. of s. i: ol Trangis vaag- fjonl Nolso \. ,,i Kaibak- Vaag- Trangis- vaag- fjord vig Sydi i" fjord Sandfi fjord fjord Date, tlay and month. . 2Vs 26/s "7s '7: »/T 18 -V, •Vu V« Vu Temperature, C° 5°2 — 7°0 8°0 9°7 — — 9° 5 - — — Salinity pro mille 34.94 — 35.22 35.37 35.42 35.37 — Actinoptychus undulatus . r rr Cerataulina Bergonii rr Chaetoceras atlanticum . . . r boreale r rr rr constrictum . . + contortum . . . + r debile + + C + C r rr diadema teres rr + Corelhron criophilum .... rr Coscinodiscus concinnus. . rr 1 rr radiatus, s. 1. C r C + rr rr Leptocylindrus danicus. . . C rr -L i rr Paralia sulcata rr rr rr Rhizosolenia obtusa rr rr r r — Shrubsolii IT C CC 1 T rr + + + + Thalassiosira gclalinosa. . + gravida + r Nordenskioldii r r r biocuhila .... Ceratium furca rr /'usus rr rr — horrida /'. intermedia 1 T rr — — /'. genuina. . rr rr I T i Dinophysis acuta Diplopsalis lenticula Peridinium depression. . . . rr I rr ovatum pallidum Phaeocystis Pouchetii .... • r C r rr + + 594 Table II. 1898. No. 17 18 23 25 27 28 30 35 39 Vaag- fjord Mygge- næs- fjord S. E. of Sydero S. E. of Sydero Lille Dimon E. of Sydero Klaks- vig N. of Ostero Mygge- næs Date, day and month 25/5 26/s 29/6 14/7 29/7 30/7 25/8 29/l0 8/l2 6°8 7°2 9°8 10°2 9° 2 10°2 9°7 8°7 6°5 35.17 35.17 35.39 35.39 35.32 35.44 35.30 35.30 35.38 Actinoptychus undulatus .... rr + r Cerataulina Bergonii + r r rr r + r rr consirielum . . . rr rr C CC rr + r r C r r r + rr rr rr r . radiatus, s. L. . + n rr + r + + C + C + + rr r + rr rr rr Thalassiosira gelatinosa r rr Nordenskioldii . r + r rr rr + rr + r r + r + r + + r r r horrida /'. intermediet r — /'. genuina . . rr rr r rr rr C IT r rr r r rr rr rr r rr rr rr r rr Halosphaera viridis ' • • + r Table III. 595 1899. Table IV. 1900. No. 43 Locality Date, dav and month. Temperature, C° Salinity pro mille Actinoptychus undulatus . Biddulphia . No. 71 72 73 74 75 7(5 77 78 7!) 80 Thors- havn Thors- havn Thors- havn Skopen Skaale- Thors- havn Thors- havn Hojvig Kaibak Svinaa Date, dav and month. . "Al M/lt "V,, 16/l2 l6/l8 10/l */> 4/8 4/8 16/3 Temperature, C° 6 ° 0 4° 5 — — — 4°0 4° 2 — 5°6 (i°0 Actinoptychus undulatus rr r r + rr rr Biddulphia aiirita rr rr c Cerataulina Bergonii. . . . IT rr Chaetoceras atlanticum. IT rr rr rr rr rr + C C r boreale rr rr rr rr rr + r rr conslriclum . rr rr conlorlum . . . debile + rr rr rr rr rr rr IT rr + C C + diadema r IT rr tercs . . + + + C Corethron criophilum . . . rr Coscinodiscus concinnns. . r rr rr rr rr radiatus, s. 1. + + C C r r Leptocylindrus danicus. . . rr Nitzschia seriata Pcwalia sulcata rr rr r rr rr rr Rhizosolenia obtusa .... — Shrubsolii . . . r rr rr . styliformis . . Thalassiosira gelatinosa. . r rr rr + r rr rr gravida rr rr r + C Nordenskioldii rr rr + bioculala .... Ceratium furca rr rr rr /'usus rr r rr r — lonqipcs rr IT rr — horrida f. intermediet rr rr rr IT rr rr — — f. genuina . . rr rr — tripos rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr Dinophysis acula Diplopsalis lenticula rr Peridinium depressum. . . . divergens rr rr rr rr — pallidum Phaeocystis Pouchelii .... Halosphaera viridis • rr rr rr 604 Table IX (continued). 190'2. No. 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Thors- Thors- Thors- Thors- Thors- Thors- Thors- Thors- Thors- Thors- Thors- havn havn havn havn havn havn havn havn havn havn havn Date, day and month . . 26/s 9/4 23U 15/6 16/6 S,/6 "/« 8/8 16/8 8/9 16/9 Temperature, C° — 5°5 6°0 (5° 2 6°8 6°5 6°0 9° 5 — 9°0 8°5 — — — — — — — — — — — Aetinoplychus undulatus . Biddulphia aurila + rr rr Cerataulina Bergonii rr rr r r rr rr rr rr Chaetoceras atlanticum. . . r rr rr rr rr r r rr boreale rr rr rr rr r rr rr constrictum . . r + + C C CC + rr + r — conlortum . . . + rr rr rr r + rr r debile + C C + + r r r + decipiens + + + + C CC + r + + — diadema r + r rr rr r rr teres rr r rr r + + rr rr Corethron criophihun .... rr rr Coscinodiscus concinnus . . rr rr C C rr . rr radiatas, s. 1. rr rr rr rr rr rr rr Leptocylindrus danicus. . . rr rr rr rr Nitzschia seriata. rr r r Paralia sulcata r rr r Rbizosolenia obtusa rr + C + + + Shrubsolii . . . rr rr r + r CC CC CC C styliformis . . rr rr rr r + r r Tbalassiosira gelatinosa. . gravida C rr + r + + r + C + + Nordenskioldii + rr r 4- rr + + r bioculata . . . + c C CC Ceralium f'urca rr /'usus rr — horrida f. intermedia — — f- genuina. . rr — tripos Dinopbusis acuta Diplopsalis Icnticula Peridinium depressum .... rr rr r rr rr — divergens ovatum rr rr rr pallidum. . . . rr Phaeocystis Pouchetii .... CC cc CCC Halosphaera viridis 605 Species excluded from tables VI — IX. No. 13. Chaetoceras sociale r. No. 21. Thalassiothrix longissima rr. No. 26. Hexasterias problematica rr. No. 29. Chaetoceras criophilum (?) r. No. 31. Dactgliosolen tennis r, Nitzschia delicatissima CC No. 34. Coscinosira polgchorda r. No. 47. Coscinosira polgchorda r. No. 49. Coscinosira pohjchorda r. No. 69. Asteromphalus heptactis rr, Achnanthes taeniata rr. No. 70. Chaetoceras laciniosnm rr, Rhizosolenia semispina rr, /J/V- tgocha speculum rr. No. 71. Bacteriastmm delicahihun rr, Dachjliosolen anlarclicus rr. No. 77. Chaetoceras convohihun rr, C. criophilum rr, Ceratium line- ahun rr. No. 78. Chaetoceras boreale v. Brightwellii rr, C. criophilum r, PJu- zosolenia semispina rr. No. 79. Coscinosira pohjchorda rr, Thalassiothrix longissima r. No. 80. Achnanthes taeniata rr, Chaetoceras boreale v. Brightwellii rr, Coscinosira polgchorda rr. No. 82. Chaetoceras laciniosnm rr. No. 83. Chaetoceras criophilum rr. No. 84. Achnanthes taeniata rr, Chaetoceras coiwolutiim rr. No. 85. Achnanthes taeniata rr, Chaetoceras boreale v. Brightwellii rr, C/i. convohitum rr, Rhizosolenia delicatnla rr, Thalassiothrix longissima rr. No. 86. Chaetoceras convohitnm rr, Gft. boreale v. Brightivellii rr, Rhizosolenia semispina +, Achnanthes taeniata rr, Dinobrgon pellucidum rr, Coccolithophora pelagica rr. No. 87. Chaetoceras convolntum rr, Rhizosolenia semispina rr, 77w- lassiothrix longissima rr. No. 88. Chaetoceras convohitnm rr, C. pelagicum rr, C. simile r. /?/»- zosolenia delicatnla rr, i?A. faeroénsis C, P/j. semispina rr, Peridinium coni- cum rr, P. pellucidum rr. No. 89. Chaetoceras laciniosum rr, C/i. simile +, Rhizosolenia fae- roénsis + , Thalassiothrix longissima rr. No. 90. Chaetoceras laciniosnm rr, Ch. simile -f, Thalassiothrix lon- gissima rr. No. 91. Chaetoceras convohitnm rr, C/j. laciniosnm r. C7i. simile r, Coscinosira polgchorda rr. 2. The Plankton of Nolsofjord. (Tables VI— IX.) The gatherings from Nolsofjord cover a period of two clear years, viz.: — April 1898 — May 1899 (examined by C leve) and October 1901 — September 1902; on an average a sample was taken every fortnight, but some occasional gaps occur in the series. 1898, Table VI. The sample from March contains almost nothing, but as early as April Chaetoceras debile occurs numerously; in the 606 beginning of May it is replaced by Phneocystis , which is, how- ever, dominant in one gathering only; on the other hånd, in the middle of May, a rich plankton consisting of Rhizosolenia obtusa and Leptocylindrus appears; in the middle of June, the former dis- appears and Chaetoceras decipiens and Nitzschia seriata (Chæto- and Nitzschiaplankton) take its place, the latter, however, only for a few days, as it is absent in July. Chaetoceras decipiens continues to be common for a very long period, and not until September does it give way for the temperate Rhizosoleniae (Soleniaplankton) intermixed with Nitzschia deticatissima, which otherwise invariably accompanies N. seriata. In October these neritic associations dis- appear, and the waters of the ocean with its Disco- and Sphæra- plankton fill the Sounds of the Færoes without being able to call the other dormant associations to life, presumably on account of the slight power and d uration of the light. Thus the year ends, and in this way begins and goes on into January and February of 1899, Table VII. But now a visitor occurs abundantly, which per- haps may be regarded as neritic, viz. Coscinodiscus concinnus, and the two oceanic species of Chaetoceras (Ch. atlanticum and Ch. decipiens). In March we meet with the first indications of neritic life, viz. the arctic-horeal Biddulphia anrita which occurs in the plankton in its early spring-stage only. In April Biddulphia is joined by a great many other forms, so that the plankton may more particularly be characterized as Siraplankton, but with some of the indications of the next stage, the Contorto-association ; the latter is predominant in the beginning of May and continues to be so, though in a lesser degree, through- out the whole of the month. Leptocylindrus and Rhizosolenia ohtnsa which occurred abundantly in 1898 did not appear in May 1899, and unfortunately the gatherings ceased at the end of the month, so we do not know if they occurred at all ; the few oceanic samples (Table III) give unfortunately no information as regards this question. After these gatherings — which were collected at the reqnest of Prof. Cleve — were brought to an end, no samples were taken until October 1901 when Dr. K. Poulsen l)egan his gatherings at the request of the author. 1901 , Table VIII. In the firsl sample only a few organisms occur, which may indicate Scolicaplankton; but in the sample of November 1. Chaetoceras debile and Rhizosolenia Shrubsolii constitule the main part, i. e. Contorto- and Soleniaplankton; but this does not appear lo lasl long, the sea taking its winter- repose in December 607 along with ils poor Discoplankton , in which some Peridiniaceae occur in solitary examples. 1902, Table IX. In the beginning of March the oceanic Chæto- planktoD occurs, bul in the middle of the raonth it is covered by Siraplankton with Thalassiosira gravida, Nordenskioldii, and Biddul- phia aurita; at the end of March tliis again gives plaee to Contorto- plankton with Chaet. debile; this disappears in Majf and a plankton consisting of Chaetoceras constrictum, C. decipiens, Coscinodiscus con- cinnus, Rhizosolenia obtusa and Phaeocystis prédominates ; this asso- ciation appears to he closely related lo the one which occurred in May — June 1898, and must doubtlcss be regarded as Chætoplanklon (oceanic) which by coming in contacl with the coast became over- grown with neritic forms. In the middle of June Phaeocystis pre- dominated, and the diatoms which occurred were almost all dead. Unfortnnately, there is now a gap in the gatherings until the beginning of August, when a rich Solenia|)lankton as mel with, in which, strangely enough Thalassiosira gravida and Nordenskioldii are also common; otherwise it is characterized by the presence of Rhizosolenia faeroensis and Thalassiosira bioculata, the former dis- appears in August, while the latter hecomes more and more domi- nant towards the end of September when the gatherings ceased. — If we sum up the proceeds of the development of the plankton in these two years, we find that, as in the more oceanic samples, the associations make their appearance in the same succession and at about the same time: — in the winter we have Disco- and Sphæraplankton; the first spring-plankton is Siraplankton, then comes Contortoplankton ; in early summer the resemblance between the two years is less; in May Phaeocystis and Rhiz. obtusa are met with, and, moreover, Chæto- (and Nitzschia-) planklon occur more or less indistinctly, but some species, e. g. Ch. constrictum and Leptocylindrus are observed abundantly in the one year, but are almost absent in the other. Soleniaplankton occurs late in sum- mer, and in 1902 several rare species predominate in it. This enormous development of single species is peculiar to the coastal conditions, and, also, this development does not re-occur every year in the case of all the species. The waters of the ocean, so to speak, rouses the reposing coast-forms, but this recall to activity does not take place with absolute regularitv; il appears to be dependant on circumstances which are as vel unknown; we mav eompare this phenomenon with the well-known faet in the case of the higher 608 piants, that certain species do not shoot up and flower every year; for example, Epipogon aphyllus. III. THE GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE SPECIES FOUND AROUND THE FÆROES. If we regard the single species as unities, as mentioned on p. 590, and try to gather them into groups according to their dis- tribution, then it will be best to follow Gran and divide the spe- cies into 3 elements: — 1 arctic; 2 boreal; 3 temperate, and begin by distinguishing between neritic and oceanic species, so that we have 6 groups. Such a division will naturally prove un- satisfactory in several cases, as species may occur whose distribu- tion lies almost just exactly between two groups, so that it will be a matter of subjective estimation to which group they are to be referred, as also there are naturally many species the distribution of which are very little known. I have in the accompanying list enumerated the greater part of the species occurring along the Færoes, and have upon the whole followed Gran, but in some few instances my opinion dillers from his1, and besides several forms are enumerated in the following list which are not recorded in his lists. A. NERITIC SPECIES. 1. Arctic-neritic element. (Fragilaria oceanica)2. 2. Boreal-neritic element. Thalassiosira gravida. — Nordenskioldii Coscinosira polychorda. Biddulphia aurita. Chaetoceras teres. diadema. debile. sociale. Achnanthes taeniata. Dinobryon pellucidum. Phaeocystis Pouchetii. Chaetoceras laciniosum. contortum. cinctum. simile. Nitzschia seriata. — delicatissima. Rhizosolenia faeroénsis. Gonyaulax spinifera. 3. temperate-neritic element. Thalassiosira gelatinosa. bioen lata. 1 Cleve's division differs somewhat both from (Irans and mine lefr. Seasonal Distribution, Gdteborg, 1900, p. 10 and following pp.). 2 Cfr. p. 610, Note. 009 Coscinodiscus concinnus. Paralia sulcata. Actinoptychus undulatus. Lauderia borealis. Leptocylindrus danicus. Guinardia flaccida. Rhizosolenia Shrubsolii. Stolterfothii. Cerataulina Bergonii. Chaetoceras constrictum. Schuttii. pelagicum. breve. seolopendra. Gonyaulax polyedra. Peridinium pellucidum. B. OCEANIC SPECIES. 1. Boreal-oceanic element. (Coscinodiscus radiatus, exparte. Rhizosolenia obtusa. — semispina. Chaetoceras atlanticum. l)oreale. — convolutum. criophilum. decipiens. Thalassiothrix longissima. (Hexasterias problematica.) Dinophysis acuminata. rotundata. Peridinium ovatum. pallidum. depressum. Ceratium horridum, genuina. longipes. 2. Temperate-oeeanie element. Thalassiosira sul)tilis. Asteromphalus heptactis. Corethron criophilum. Dactyliosolen antarcticus. tenuis. Rhizosolenia styliformis. *Båcteriastrura delicatulum. Thalassiothrix Fraunfeldii. (Coscinodiscus excentricus.) ( lineatus.) ( sul)tilis.) Pterosperma Mobii. Vanhoffenii. ( dietvon.) ( labyrinthus.) Dictyocha fibula. speculum. Coccolithophora pelagica. Halosphaera viridis. Pachysphaera pelagica. *Exuviella compressa. Dinophysis acuta. *Pyrophacus horologicum. *Podolampas pahnipes. *Gonyaulax polvgramma. Diplopsalis lenticula. Peridinium Steinii. globulus. conicum. divergens, oceanicum. (>eratium tripos. neglectum. horridum, intermedia. lineatum. furca. fusus. 610 Within the boreal-neritic element I have separated ofr a group to represent, both doubtful neritic forms, and such as are less boreal than the others. In a similar way I have in the temperate- oceanie element marked those species with an asterisk which are more southern than the others. Species regarding the position of which I have been doubtful, are enclosed within parentheses and excluded from the sum total. For comparison I have summed up the forms recorded by Gran from the Norwegian Sea and have referred them to such groups as I in conformity with the Færoese consider them to belong. Table X. Species The Færoes Norwegian Sea neritic oceanic Totals neritic oceanic Totals arctic boreal (D1 19 18 15 32 (1) 34 50 9 23 25 3 15 33 12 38 temperate 58 37 47 84 57 51 108 What strikes us most on comparing the two regions is that the arctic species are quite absent around the Færoes1. This is easily understood when we consider that the islands are almost constantly surrounded by the waters of the Atlantic and are only occasionally touched by the cold current from off the east coast of Iceland. The middle temperature (off Thorshavn) in Ja- nnary— March is even 5°5C, which is considerably higher than that which is favourable for the arctic Diatoms (0° — 5° C). We may further notice that the Færoes have several more oceanic (47) than neritic (37) forms, while the reverse is the case in the Norwegian Sea (51 to 57). This may doubtless be ex- plained by the faet that the Fa>r6es cover a small area and are rather isolated, so that the neritic Flora becomes relatively poor, the present direction of the ocean enrrents is not favourable for the transportation of forms which may thrive on or around the Færoes. It is quite a diffcrent thing in the case of the oceanic plankton- forms which spend their whole life in the open ocean withoul ever 1 A single specimen of the arctic-neritic form, Fragilaria oceanica, was ob- served once only, but I nm not quite sure as to the correctness of the determination. (■»11 settling down at the bottom of the sen. In contradistinctioD to the Færoes the Norwegian sea has a wide stretch of coast: — the west coast of Norway and the east coast of [celand, where there are ex- cellent conditions for a rich neritic planklon, while almost all the oceanic forms must pass the Færoes in order to reach the Nor- wegian Sea and intermingle with ils neritic forms. Table X shows besides that the proportion between the horeal and the temperate forms is almost the same in holh the areas. These short noles mav possibly have shown that owing to the gatherings of later years we have attained lo a fairly good know- ledge of the marine phytoplankton of the Færoes, hul there is as vel mnch on which no light has been thrown, and besides it should be noted that the Færoes afford an excéptionally favonr- ablc station for the study of the living plankton, as there a r e fe w p 1 a e e s w h e r e w e h a v e the o e e a n so a v a i 1 a b 1 e as in those is land s. Botanv dI the Pter&es. 39 CONTENTS. Introduction 558 I. List of the Protophyta found in the marine plankton from the sea around the Færoes. I. Bacillariaceae . . 562 II. Pterospermataceae 577 III. Peridiniaceae .">7!» IV. Silicoflagellata 588 V. Coccolithophoridae 588 VI. Flagellata 589 VII. Chlorophyceae 589 II. Notes on the Plankton 590 1. The Plankton of the Atlantic Ocean, off the Fteroes (Tables I — V) ... 592 2. The Plankton of Nolsofjord (Tables VI— IX) (500 III. The geographical distribution of the species found around the Færoes 608 PHYTOPLANKTON OF LAKES IN THE FÆROES BY F. BORGESEN AND C. H.OSTENFELD. In Borgesen's listofthe Færoese freshwater algæ, and in Østrup's list of the Færoese freshwater diatoms (Botany of the Færoes I) wc see thai somc of the species enumerated in them have been found in plankton-samples gathered by Ostenfeld in 1897. Aller Borgesen had completed his investigations of the freshwater algæ, hc gathered during a boating excursion to Bosdalafos on one of his later journeys, a few plankton-samples, especially from Sorvaags- vatn. Ostenfeld, happening to look through these samples, found that they contained some points of interest, which gave rise lo the idea of publishing jointly, a lisl of Ihe Færoese plankton-algæ ; the co-operation seemed appropriate as Ostenfeld had also taken pari in the investigations of the plankton-algæ gathered by him and enume- rated in Borgesen's above-mentioned list. This also gives ns an opportunity of correcting some of our earlier determinations, and of making some additions to the list of the freshwater algæ as regards the Chlorophgceae , but especially by including the Flagellata and Peridiniaceae which have not hitherto been recorded (excepting Hy- (Iriirus foetidus of the Flagellata which is mentioned in Borgesen's list). With regard to the determinations, Borge sen has deter- mined the Desmids, and Ostenfeld the Diatoms, Flagellata, and Peridiniaceae; the rest of the algæ has been treated by ns jointly. The plankton-samples are obtained from the following localities : Oste ro. Store Ejde So, leg. C. H. O, Aug. 22, 1897. Lille Ejde So, leg. C. H. O, Aug. 22, 1897. Vaago. Sorvaagsvatn, leg. C. H. O., Aug. 2(>, 1897; Sorvaagsvatn, leg. F. B., July 5, 1899; Sorvaagsvatn, leg. F. B., July 5, 1899. Sando. Grothusvatn, leg. C. H. O., Aug. 29, 1897: Sandsvatn, leg. C. H. O, Aug. 29, 1897. Sydero. Kvanhaugevatn, leg. F. B., July 9, 1899: Lake in Kvalboejde, leg. C. H. ()., July 21, 1897; Vaagsvatn, leg. C. H. ().. July 25, 1897. 39* nu Of these lakes, strictly speaking, only Sorvaagsvatn is largo and of great depth; thc rost are generally small, more or less flat- bottomed, and with shallow waler, and, consequently, typical plank- ton occurs only in Sorvaagsvatn, while the rost of Ihe lakes, judg- ing from the samples, contain a flora corresponding lo the flora of small ponds and pools. We have had three samples for examination from Sorvaags- vatn (see tahle I), onc from August 1897, and two from July 1899. The plankton contained in them consisled mainly of animals, but the two latter contained also a fairly large quantity of piants, among which Dinobryon, Asterionella formosa and Desmids were most conspicuous. Thus the character of the phyloplankton is such as is usnal for the phyloplankton of the hilly regions1. Table I. CHLOROPHYCEAE. Sphaerocystis Schroeteri Chodal Gloeocystis vesiculosa Nag Scenedesmus quadricauda (Turp.) Bréb Pediastrum Boryanum (Turp.) Menegh Botryococcus Braunii Ktitz Cosmarium margen- Hi fe rum (Turp.) Menegh. Cosmarium Pbaseolus Bréb. f. Euaslrum elegans (Bréb.) Ktitz verrucosum Ehrenb Staurastrum jaculiferum West lunatum Ralfs crenulatum Nagl Magdalenae nov. spec Xanthidium quadricornutum Roy cl Biss. /'. MYXOPHYCEAE. Oscillatoria tenuis A;/ Chroococcus limneticus Lemm Microcystis incerta Lemm Sorvaagsvatn 2C/8 1S97 5/7 1899 + B/7 1899 + rr rr IT IT rr IT IT IT rr r rr ' IT IT IT IT + + C + + IT r r r + + rr rr 1 See, cg. Borge, ().: Schwedisches Phy to plankton, Botaniska Notiser 1900. 615 Table I (continued). BACILLARIACEAE. Tabellaria fenestrata (Lyngb.) Kiitz flocculosa (Kolli) Kiil: Fragilaria capucina Desm — construens (Ehrenb.) Gran Synedra ulna (Nitzsch) Ehrenb Asterionella formosa Ilass Surirella biseriata Bréb Melosira distans Kiitz — varians Ag Cyclotella radiosa Gran PERIDINIACEAE & FLAGELLAT A. Dinobryon divergens Imhof. Peridinium Willei Huitf.-Kaas umbonatum Stein Ceratium hirundella (O. F. Mu.ll.) Schrank Sorvaagsvatu 26/8 18«)7 + + IT IT + 6/7 189!) r CC r rr + 6/7 1899 + CC rr rr + cc + rr Table II. CHLOROPHYCEAE. Sphaerocystis Schroeteri Chodat Gloeocystis vesiculosa Nag Oocystis Någelii A. Br — spcc Crucigenia rectangularis (A. Br.) Chod. Scenedesmus bijugatus (Turp.) Kiilz. . hystrix Lagerh quadricauda (Tarp.) Bréb. Pediastrum duplex Meyen Boryanum (Turp.) Menegh. Coelastrum cubicum Nag sphæricum Nag Raphidium Braunii Nag Polyedrium enorme (Ralfs) De Bari). . Tetraedron ret/ulme Kiilz Botrycoccus Braunii Kiilz Cosmarium Botrytis (Borg) Menegh... + + rr r rr rr rr rr + rr + rr rr rr rr rr rr rr IT rr rr rr + Mfi Table II (conlimied). Cosmarium margaritiferum Menegh Meneghinii Bréb granatum Bréb Phaseolus Bréb Euastrum elegans (Bréb.) Kiitz — oblongum (Grev.) Ralf s — verrncosum Ebrenb Sphcerozosma excavatum Ralfs Slauraslrum hexacerum (Ehrenb.) Wiltr. . . dejectnm Bréb jaculifcrum West lunatum Ralfs creniilalum (Nagl.) Delp Magdalenae nov. spec Xanthidium quadricornutum Roy & Biss. /'. antilopaeum (Bréb.) Kiitz. Closterium Dianae Ebrenb aciculare West Pleurotaenium Ehrenbergii (Ralfs) MYXOPHYCEAE. Oscillatoria lenuis Ag CQelosphaerium Någelianum Unger Chroocoecus limneticus Lemm Microcystis incerta Lemm BACILLARIACEAE. Tabellaria fenestrata (Lyngb.) Kiitz — /loeculosa (Rolb.) Kiitz Fragilaria crotonensis (Edw.) Kitton capucina Desm — construens (Ebrenb.) Grun Diatoma hiemale (Lyngb.) Heib Synedra ulna (Nitzsch.) Ebrenb Asterionella formosa Hass Surirella biseriata Bréb Melosira distans Kiitz — varians Ag Cyclotella radiosa Grun PERIDINIA C EA E & I LÅ C, EL LA 1\ 1 . Dinobryon divergens Imb Peridinium Willei Huitf-Kaas umbonatum Stein Ceratium hirundinella ((). /•'. M.) Schrank ri- IT C + r + + rr rr rr + + CC + CC + ■2 ^ ro •■—s ro '•— s - K ■ - W w . zz ■ « £ sy XI o C « « « "G J ► J 5 tf £ ! — M « > r rr rr + r rr r rr rr rr rr 617 On table II we have grouped together the plant- organ isms1 of all the lakes which have been examined, and when we except Sor- vaagsvatn, the result is very poor. In the large lake near Ejde and in the lake in Kvanhauge only, were found some indications of true plankton; the others hardly contained any plankton-organisms, Iml only algæ, not particularly characteristic of plankton. Il is a well-known faet2 that Desmids are olien surrounded by a mucilaginous envelope, and in the Færoes we have found lliis lo be the case with the plankton-forms, spec. Staurastra, Xanthidia, and some Cosmaria, hul nol Closteria. It is also the case with some of the Chlorophyceae, vi/.. Sphaerocystis, Gloeocyslis, Cracigenia and Raphidium, and the diatom Cyclotella. Notes on some of the forms enumerated in the tables. I. PLEUROCOCCOIDEAE. 1. Sphaerocystis Schroeteri Chodat, Etudes de Biologie lacustre (Bul. de l'Herb. Boissier 1897, p. 292). There is hardly any doubt that what we have previously cailed Eudorina elegans (Borgesen, Freshwater Algæ, p. 2158), and in a measure also Pandorina Morum, which are found in plankton from Sorvaagsvatn and the lake near Ejde, are stages of development of lliis alga; Eudorina shonld thcrefore be omitted from the list of the Færoese algæ. 2. Oocystis spec. An Oocyslis which appears to hear a very close resemblance lo Borge' s figure (Borge, Schwedisches Susswasser-plankton , Bol. Notitser, 1900, p. 5, lab. I, lig. 3) was found occasionally in a sample from the lake in Kvalbo Ejde. The colony consisled of four cells. Long. cell = 16 n\ lat. cell = 11 /*; crass. fam. — 29 p. 3. Scenedesmus hystrix Lagerh. A few specimens of this species were found in some of the plankton-samples. As pointed out by Chodat (Algues vertes de la Snisse, p. 215) Se. denticulatus Lagerh. should probably be referred lo lliis species, hence it is also probable that the Se. denticulatus ligured by Borgesen (I. c. lab. X, tig. 5) oughl lo be placed under Ibis species. 1 The frequency of their occurrence is hulicateil ;is customary; see Osten- feld s paper above. '-' See, e.g.Schroder Bruno: Untersuchungen uber Gallertbildungen der Algen. Verh. d. Naturhist.-Med. Vereins zu Heidelberg. N. F. VII. '.!. 1902. fil s 4. Pediastrum. Here in our present list we shall menlion P. duplex and P. lio- rijamim only; as regards the varielies and forms cfr. Borgesen, 1. c. pp. 241—242. 5. Coelastrum cubicum Næg. Of the present species we have only seen a very few coenobias. Fig. 147 shows one. This species appears to come very near to C. proboscidenm Bohlin. Lat. cell = 13 — 14 (i. Note: — Further, the following species, found in the Kig. 147. Coelastrum cubicum , , , , . .. ., . Ni'i ®*>l if b del plankton-samples, are not recorded in li orge s e n s Freshw. Algæ: Oocystis Någelii A. Br., Crucigenia rectangularis (A. lir.) Chod., Raphidium Bramin Nag., Tetraeciron regulare Kiitz. II. DESMIDIACEAE. (by F. Borgesen) 6. Cosmarium Phaseolus Bréb. var. achondra Boldt. Of this species a large form has been found which somewhat resembled my lig. 13, tab. I in »Ferskvandsalger fra Østgrønland«, p. 19; long. cell = 38 (* = lat.; and a smaller which was very much like the one described and ligured by Borge in »Algologiska Notiser« 3—4 (Bot. Notiser, 1897, p. 212, tab. 3, fig. 2). 7. Staurastrum lunatum Balfs, Borgesen, Freshwater Algæ, p. 233. 8. Staurastrum jaculiferum West., Borgesen, 1. c. p. 232. Plate VIII, fig. 1. 9. Staurastrum crenulatum (Nægl.) Delp. Borgesen, 1. c. p. 234. Plate VII, fig. lfi. 10. Staurastrum Magdalenae nov. spec. Fig. 148. l-'il,'. 148. Staurastrum Magdalenae nov. spec. K0/±. (F, B. del An elegant Staurastrum which occurred in the planklon-samples Ironi Sorvaagsvatn and was fairly common in one of the samples <;i«) from July 1899, must to my thinking be regarded as a new species, and Dr. O. Nord s led l ol' Lund is also of the same opinion. The following is a shorl diagnosis: — St. mediocre, 2 — 21/s plo latins quam longius (cum processibus) , modice constrictum , incisura parva mox ampliata; semicellalae triangulares, apice concavo glabratoqtie, marginibus convexis, glabratis, angulis in processibus longioribus, gracilioribus pro- ductis, extrorsum sæpe leviter deorsum incurvatis, spinis simplicibus (rarissime furcatis?), in series or- dinatis, præditis, apicibus 4 furcatis; a verlice visæ triradiatæ, medio glabro, processibus aculeis munitis. Long. cell — 2Sfi; lat. cell cum proc. = 68/*; lal. isthm. — 11 fi. This species reminds one somewhat of St. acu- leatum, but in the latter the spines are usually fur- cate, and more evenly distributed over the whole of the cell. It also bears some resemblance to St. controversnm Bréb. and St anatinum C. el W., bul is, however, quite distinct from both of them. Dr. Nordstedt has cailed my attention to Sl.aspi- nosum Wolle1 which also comes near the present species, but differs from it in some essential points. Il may also be compared to St. limneticum Schmidle var. rectum Lemm.2. Finally I may point out that whal I have cailed St. paradoxum Meyen: »In Planklon from Sorvaagsvatn« (1. c. p. 2'M) is undoubtedly this alga ; it occurred very sparingly in the sample from 1897, hence the reason why il was not closely investi- galed at that time. 11. Xanthidium quadricornutum Roy & Biss. Formå longispina Borgs. Freshwater Algæ, p. 229, plate VII, fig. 13. Fig. 1 19. Closterium aciculare West. '-■" ,. F. I!, del.) 1 Wolle: Desmids ol' the United States, p. 14.'!. tal). ;>1 lig. 22. - Lem inerma n n, E.: Planktonalgen, Ergebnisse einer Reise nach dem I'aeifie (Abh. Nat. Ver. Brem., Bd. XVI, 189!)) p. 344, pi. 1, ligs. 11 — 12 620 12. Closterium aciculare T.West1. The accompanying figure represents a Closterium which occur- red fairly abundantly in a sample I gathered in thc small lake in Kvanhauge 011 Sydero. I think il is identical wilh Cl. aciculare T.West, and Dr. Nordstedt is also of this opinion. It attains lo a length of at least 450 /t, and the breadth varies with an average of 5 /<. It has numerous pyrenoids, often upwards of 20. The cells are sometimes slightly bent at both apices; sometimes the apices are almost straight; sometimes individuals are met with which are actually sigmoid. Of forms related to this species Cl. subpronum W.West2 comes so near to it, that it is not possible for me to find any character, by which it may be distinguished. W.West writes with reference to it (l.c): »In relative length and breadth this species agrees with Cl. aciculare T. West, but is somewhat smaller, and does not begin to laper until half-way from the centre to the apices, which are nol »very acute««. But here I may remark that if we look al W. Wesl's ligure ol Cl. subpromim, especially the one more highly magnified (lig. 3 a'), il will be seen that it tapers evenly, right from the centre; and when, moreover, T.West writes »very acute« then this description agrees with the species known al that time with which T. West compares Cl. aciculare; and if we compare the figure of T. West with that of W. West it will be seen that the apices of their semi-cells are in faet of the same thickness. As re- gards the size, W.West mentions that Cl. subprouum is 427// long and 3,7 j« broad ; but in a paper recently published3 he piaces il respectively 392—406 \i long and 4,2 — 5,2 /< broad, and the size ol a var. lacustre referred by Leminermann4 to this species is given as 500 — 800 fi long and 6 — 8 // broad. In Sylloge Algarum Vol. 1, p. 837, De To ni gives Cl. aciculare as 500// long and 5 /< broad; the shortest individual which I have figured is 324 /< long; Ihe Iongest 450/«, bul slill longer specimens doubtless occur. As nol 1 West. Tuffen: Remarks on some Diatomaceæ, new or imperfectly iles cribed, and a new Desmid (Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science, Vol. VIII, 1860, p. 153, PI. VII, fig. 10). 2 West, William: New British Freshwater Algæ (Journal of the R. Micro scopical Society. lcS94, p. ',\, pi. 1, iig. 3). ; West, W. and West (i. S.: A Contribution to the Freshwater Algæ of the North of Ireland (Transactions of the R. Irish Academy, Vol. 32, Sect. 1>. Part. I. 1902, p. '->;>, pi. 2. li-s. 1 2). 1 Lemraermann, E.: Planktonalgen, l.c. p. 344, pi. 1, figs. 13 — 14. (V21 even the size gives ns the least certainty, il appears to me to be impossible to maintain Cl. subpronum as species; il should be clas- sified with Cl. aciculare West. I do not think either that Lemmer- m an ns above-mentioned variety is justifiable, the onlv difference being that il mav altain to somewhat larger dimensions. Ol' the closely related forms, two more mav be mentioned, viz. Closterium limneticum Lemm. which is somewhat smaller, and according to Lemmermann has a fairly distinct vacuole al the apex of the cell; and a form of Cl. Ceratium Perty described and figured by Bruno Schroder in »Planktonflanzen ans Seen von Westpressen«1. III. MYXOPHYCEAE. 1«}. Coelosphaerium Naegelianum Unger. The few individnals which have heen observed agree well with O. Borge's description and (igure (Bol. Nolis., 1900, p. 5, PL I, lig. 3) and with Migula's Kryptogamae Germaniae, Anstriae el Helvetiae exsiccatae, Fase. 2, N. 14. Il is this form which has heen recorded as C. Kutzingianum Nag. in »Freshwater Algæ«. Chroococcus limneticus Lemm. as well as Microcystis incerta Lemm. oecur in several of the gatherings. The discoverer of the species, Mr. E. Lemmermann, has had an opportunity of exainining one of the samples from Sorvaagsvatn, and has fonnd these Iwo spe- cies as well as M. stagnalis Lemm. in the sample; we have nol heen able lo lind the latter speeies; they are recorded in »Freshwater Algæ«, p. 206, under the names Polycystis incerta Lemm. and P.pal- lida Lemm. IV. I5ACILLARIACEAE. (by C. H. Ostenfeld). The speeies recorded were all fonnd by E. Østrup except Fragilaria crotonensis of which I have onlv seen 2 chains. Onlv Asterionella formosa and Cyclotella radiosa are special plankton- organisms, hul all the others are also fairly common in lakes with low temperature, especially the Tabellarias. Strangely enough, Melosira, which is otherwise an important plankton -genus, is al- most totally absent. 1 Berichte d. deutsehc bot. Gesellschaft, Vol. XVII. 1899, p. 159, pi. 10, lig. .'5 a, 1). 622 V. CHRYSOMONADINEAE. (by C. H. Ostenfeld). 14. Dinobryon divergens Imhof, cfr. Lemmermann, Ber. d. deut- schen Botanischen Gesellsch., XVIII, 1900, p. 517, PI. XIX, ligs. 15—20. In Sorvaagsvatn a Dinobryon constiluted the main part of the plankton, and it also occurred sparingly in the lake in Kvanhauge. It corresponds very closely with Lemmermann 's (1. c.) figures of D. cylindricum Imhof, var. divergens (Imhof) Lemmerm. This species appears to be very widely distributed; it is known throughout the whole of Central Europe, and I have seen it in planklon both from Norway and Iceland; and it is possible that the I), sertnlaria reeorded by N. Wille1 from Norway and by O. Borge2 and A. Cleve3 from Sweden is identical with this species. VI. PERIDINIACEAE. (by C. H. Ostenfeld). In none of the samples which have been examined does the Peridiniaceae bear any prominent part, but 3 species in all have been found, one of which, Peridiniiun Willei appears to occur in most of the Iakes. 15. Peridinium Willei Huitfelt-Kaas, Die limnetischen Peridineen in norwegischen Binnenseen, Christiania Vidensk. Selsk. Skrifter, 1900, No. 2, p. 5, figs. 6—9. This species of which Huitfelt-Kaas gives an exhaustive description accompanied by good figures, was first found in the Norwegian lakes Fig. 150. Peridinium Willei Huitf-Kaas. The arrange- where none of the other coiiimon species ol ment of ti,c piatea of the Europe, p fabulatum and P. cinctum have been distal limb. (C. H. O. del.) l ' reeorded. It might be concluded therefore that the Norwegian species is only a form of one of these, P. cinc- tum, which it closely resembles in outward shape. I examined the material very carefully in order to ascertain the distribution of the piates, and for comparison I made usc of Danish material of P. cinctum which Dr. Wesen berg-Lund kindly placed at my 1 Wille, N.: Algolog. Notizen VII, Nyt Magaz., f. Naturvid., Vol. 39, 1901, p.21. Borge, ().: 1. c, pp. 22, 23, 26. s Cleve, Astrid: Plankton <>r lakes in Lule Lappmark, ()IV. af K. Svenska Vet. Akad. Forhandl., 1899, pp. 828— 835. 623 disposal. I came to the conclusion Ihal Huitfelt-Kaas is right; the alga in question is a distinct species, which dillers considerably from P. cinctum in the distribution of ils piates, and is, moreover, somewhat different (Vom it in ils whole shape, and the structure ol* the piales. I have given a diagrammatic figure as a supplement lo Huitfelt-Kaas's figure showing the distribution of the piales on the dislal limb (Ihe apical hall); by comparing this figure wilh A. I. Seh illing's1 diagrammatic lignres of ihe Peridinium-species, il will be seen thai the present species occupies rather an isolated position, the arrangement ol" the apical piates differing considerably from thai of the olhers, il resemhles P. cinctum in one particular only, that holli of them are destitute of apical pore, which is pre- sent in all the other species. Moreover, on looking through the different works, \ve (ind thai a great many of the writers entertain very conflicting views rc- garding the definition of the Iwo common species P. tabulatum and P. cinctum, and many statements of the occurrence of P. tabulatum as a plankton-organism must unquestionably be due to its having been confounded with P. cinctum, which appears to be by far the most commonly occurring limnetic species, while P. tabulatum be- longs more particularly to small collections of water (slonghs, puddles, etc.)2. From a plant-geographical point of view it is extremely inter- esling that P. Willei occurs in the Færoes, and it is of no less in- lerest that I have also found it in Iceland, having observed it in a plankton-sample which Mr. Jonsson gave me to investigate. Its oc- currence mav now be expected also in the Scottish lakes, and, in laet. its distribution mav be greater than is known. K. M. Le vander3 has recently recorded it from the lakes of the Murmanian coast (Pen- insula of Kola) and from those of southern Finland, and O. Borges (1. c. p. 23) records of P. cinctum from the lakes of northern Sweden douhtless refers to this species. It will only be justifiable to express an opinion as to its plant-geographical importance, when the investiga- tions bearing on ils distribution are carried out more extensively. 1 Schilling. AI.: Die Siisswasser-Peridineen. — Flora o. allgem. botan. Zei- tung, 1891, Heft 3. 2 e. g. , the figures by G. Klebs (Organisation einiger Flagellaten -Gruppen, Unters. a. d. Botan. Institut zu Tubingen, I, 2, 188.'}. PI. 2, figs. 22— 24, 28) are named /'. tabulatum, but belong without doubt to P. cinctum. ;! Levander, K. M.: Beitråge zur Fauna und Algen flora der sussen Gewasser and der Murmankuste, p. l(i. — Acta pro Fauna & Flora Fennica, XX. 8. 1901. 624 In the Færoes I found it in Sorvaagsvatn (Vaago); the large lake near Ejde (Ostero); Sandsvatn (San do); and the lake in Kvan- hauge (Sydero). 16. P. umbonatum Stein, Organistnus der Infusionsthierchen, III. Abteil., 2 Håll'te, 1883, PI. XII, ligs. 1—8; A. I. Schilling, 1. c., p. 73, PI. III, fig. 15. In one of the samples from Sorvaagsvatn, occurred, as well as the ahove-mentioned species, a single individual of a smaller spe- cies which, as regards its appearance, and the distribution of its plales agrees with the figures of P. umbonaliun given by Stein and Schilling, with the exception that the dorsal apical piates differed slightly from those seen in Schilling's diagram. 17. Ceratium hirundinella (O. F. Mull.) Schrank. This widely distributed plankton-form, the only freshwater Peri- diniacea which is important owing to its quantity, appears to be strangely rare in the Færoes; at any rate during those seasons when the samples which have been examined were gathered il was almost absent. I found a few dead individuals in the lake in Kvan- hauge, and in the large Sorvaagsvatn only a few individuals occur- red. The individuals observed belong to the 3-horned temporal variely. THE HIERACIA FROM THE FÆROES BY H. DAHLSTEDT. S orne time alter his return home from a botanical journey lo tlie Færoes in 1895, Mr. H. G. Si m mons sent the Hieracia he had gathered there to me for determination and description. Al that time I was prevented from investigating them scienlilicallv, and I was obliged lo eontent myself with a cursory examination, which, however, proved Ihe galherings to he of so mueli interest that when Mr. C. H. Ostenfeld some years later asked me to investigate the Hieracia gathered in the Færoes by himself, Mr. J. Hartz and Prof. E. Wa rining during the summers of 1895, 1896 and 1897, but inostly in the latter year, it was with very great interest thai I took up the work. The gatherings proved lo work in well with each olher, partly because each of them contained different forms, and partly because some of the forms were idenlical though they had been gathered from different localities. The gatherings are, moreover, represenlalive of almost the whole area of the group of istands. An unexpecledly rich knowledge of the Hieracium-ftora has thereby been allained, especially when we bear in mind thai previously no scientific knowledge of the Hieracium-fiora of these islands had existed. The number of the distinct forms is certainly not large (21 species and 2 varieties) in proportion to the numerous forms which occur in the surrounding countries, but they are notwith- standing of great interest on account of the insight they give us when considered in relation to the neighbouring floral districts. Xow that attention has been drawn to the Hieracium-i\ora of these islands il will unquestionably prove to be much richer Ihan we have been led to believe, judging from the previous linds. As is well known, the genus Hieracium is perhaps at the present time, the European plant-genus which is richest in forms, and in full 626 development. Usually thc different forms have not a wide geo- graphical distribution. I am therefore of opinion thai the studv of the Hieracia of a single district in its relation lo the neighbouring Iloral distriels oughl lo be particularly useful as a contribution to- wards the solving of various plant -geographical questions. This has become still more clear to me by studying the Hieracium-Rora of Scandinavia. I think thai il will more particularly be of great help lo us in determining the ways by which the flora of a land immigrates, and also Ihe relative time for its immigration. The composition of the Hiercicium-flora of the Færoes confirms the opin- ion expressed by C. H. Ostenfeld regarding the origin of the rest of the phanerogamous flora. Its composition proves to be rather peculiar. As I said before, 21 species and 2 varielies are known. These belong to the following groups of the genus: - Vulgata, sub-group Subcæsia 2 — Vulgata genuina 4 Rigida 3 Cerinthoidea 12 (of which two are varieties) Alpestria 2 The forms in question stand in the following relation to the flora of the neighbouring countries: — Of the two forms of Sub- cæsia, H. sarcophylloides is closely allied to a formå H. sarcoj)luilluni Stenstr. which occurs in Norway and the south of Sweden, while //. ardisodon has, as far as I know, no closely related forms in Scandinavia. H. sarcophyllum has otherwise a distribution in Scan- dinavia which suggests that it belongs to a western floral element. Of the forms re ferred to Vulgata genuina, H. cordifrons is extremely closely allied to the Icelandic H. holopleurum Dahlst., and H. holo- pleuroides Dahlst., as also to H. ciliolatum. H. constrictiforme is un- questionably very closely connected with the Scandinavian forms: — H. constringens Norrl. and H. subalpestre Norrl. — which have a north- ern distribution — but it comes perhaps nearer to //. protalatuin K. Joh. from the south of Sweden. All these belong beyond doubt lo the same group of forms, comprising both lowland and sub- alpine forms. H. epileucuin occupies a more isolated position, and as yet I know nothing regarding its relation to Ihe forms from the surrounding countries. Of the Færoese Rigida, II. Simmonsianum belongs to a group of forms which is ivpresented in Scandinavia by //. lapponicum Fr., 627 and approaches forms allied to H. sparsif olium Lbg. , it must thus be regarded as a subalpine form. Both the others, H. epileucoides and H. færoense are closely related to each other. The latter is, moreover, genetically allied to //. stictophgllum Dahlsl. which occurs in the west of Norway, and, again, a form parallel to the latter is developed in Wales, Scotland, and the Shetland Islands. Both the last-mentioned Færoese forms mav wilhout doubt be refer- red to an Atlantic tloral element. With regard then to the two forms: H. Hartzianum and H. Ostenfeldii referred to Alpestria, sub- group Semidovrensia , none of them appear to be connected with the Scandinavian forms of the same group, though the former somewhat resembles H. glaucicolor Dahlst. which occurs in the mountain regions in the south of Norway. Both of them belong, however, to the Alpine floral element. The most interesting of all the Færoese forms, and those which characterize its Hieracinin- flora are those belonging to Cerinthoidea. They are also the most numerous and constitute upwards of one half the number of the forms hitherto known. They would have been in a still greater ma- jority, if I had been able t6 include sorae other forms which oc- curred in the gathering, but which I was obliged to lay aside un- determined o wing to the incompleteness of the material. — Cerin- thoidea is a group of forms which belongs exclusively to the Atlantic region. From the Pyrenees it partly spreads sparsely across the South European Alps as far as Greece, and partly extends along the Atlantic to Scotland. It is plentifully represented in England and especially in Ireland and Scotland, and is also met with dis- persed over the Shetland Islands. Some of its forms occur in Ice- land, and a single species was discovered in the west of Norway. The greater part of the Færoese, some of the Scottish, and both the Icelandic forms belong to a sub- group, which is somewhat modified in habit in conformity with certain Cæsia of Vulgata or with Schmidtii-\ike forms of Oreadea. To this sub -group be- long H. kalsoense, H. leucograptum, H. heterophyllum, H. perintegrum, and H. subrubicundum (forms allied to which occur in Scotland) and H. veterascens which stands in a close genetic relation to the Icelandic H. arctocerinthe Dahlst., and H. mesopolium Dahlst. H. pe- ramplum, H. perampliforme and H. melanochrotum, on the other hånd, come much nearer to the southern, true Cerinthoidea, and forms al- lied to them are also met with in the British I sies, viz. H. anglicnm Fr., etc. As regards H. scoticiforme , the latter belongs to a form-group Botany of the Færoes. IQ 628 of Cerinthoidea , the members of which have a rigidnm-Yike habit. It has allied forms (H. scoticum Hanb., etc.) in the British Isles. The above pro ves that the greater part of the Færoese forms are Atlantic, especially so all the Cerinthoidea, H. færoerne and H. epi- leucoides of Rigida, and perhaps H. sarcophijlloides, and H. ardisodon (both of which ought otherwise to belong to the Temperate-European element), or, in all, 14 (16) forms; 5 (perhaps 7) may, on the other hånd, be reckoned among the Temperate-European forms, viz., H. con- strietiforme, H. ciliolatum, H. epileiicum and H. cordifrons of Vulgata, and H. Simmonsianum of Rigida. Both the Alpestria: H. Hartzianum and H. Ostenfeldii belong to the Arctic-Alpine element. It is an interesting faet that the Atlantic element in this genus, is so strongly represented in the Færoes. The presence of this element lends considerable weight to the theory of a post-glacial land connec- tion, which perhaps existed much longer than we have hitherto be- lieved, judging from the other data. The occurrence in Iceland of two Cerinthoidea, closely related to the Færoese forms, appears to me also to be an important support for the above theory. It may be argued that these forms having flying apparatus, may easily be carried to great distances by the help of the wind ; but , on the one hånd, I have proved that the fruits of the Hieracia usually do not spread ve ry far, and on the other, that the Cerinthoidea have heavier and larger fruits than the greater part of the other groups, with the exception of Oreadea and Alpina vera, consequently, if it be maintained that they are conveyed across larger areas by the agency of the wind, then they ought to be more poorly re- presented in the Færoes than the rest of the groups which have lighter fruits. That the forms of the remaining categories are so few in number may be accounted for by the climatic and physical condi- tions prevailing on the islands. The greater part of the forms of Vulgata, Rigida and Alpestria are especially adapted lo life in vari- ous localities in woody districts. The Cerinthoidea, on the other hånd, as proved by their general structure, are distinctly coast and rock forms. It is therefore very remarkable that the Oreadea-group, which almost exclusively consists of rock and coast forms, and numerous forms of which are represented in Great Britain (chiefly Scotland), on the Norwegian coasts, in western as also in eastern Sweden, and a few, moreover, in Iceland, is quite wanting in thi' Færoes. The Alpina are likewise totally absent from the Færoes, G29 though numerous forms of this gro up occur in the rocky districts ot* Scotland and Scandinavia and in [celand. But as regards the latter group, the climatological conditions prevailing in the Færoes are hardly favourable for ils growlh. What is applicahle to Vul- .">() tn. J. Hartz and C. Ostenfeld . dillers somewhal in having smaller involucres, with somewhal denser hairs. The form from Ostero in Qower July 17. 1 «s 1) r> ; the form from Videro August 10-12. 1897. This form belongs likewise to the more typical Cerinthoidea. It is imquestionably closely connected with both the preeeding forms, of which it comes nearest to H. perampliforme. It is distinguished from the latter by its fewer-toothed leaves, and darker involucres with narrower phyllaries, with much fainter floccose stripe at the margins, somewhal fewer simple hairs, and more numerous glands. The upper part of the stem and the peduncles are richer in glan- dular hairs. It is easily distinguished from H. peramplum by its straight growth, faintly toothed leaves, heavier involucres with fewer hairs, and denser glandular-hairiness. The form from Ostero, which is here regarded as the chief form, is not quite identical with the form from Videro. The latter has shorter involucres, with denser, shorter and darker hairs, and the glands are somewhat more faint on the phyllaries, but agrees with the former in all other points. The differences not being very great they may be attributed to the influence of the locality and perhaps the season of the year. 21. HIERACIUM SCOTICIFORME Dahlst. n. sp. (Tab. XII. Fig. 9.) Caulis 30 — 60 ctm. altus, 4 — 7-folius, + rubescens, robustus, + llexuosus, inferne dense — densiuscule, medio sparsim — den- siuscule, apice parce pilosus, basi apiceque parce stellatus. — Folia basalia sub anthesi emarcida v. 1 — 2 rarius 4, exteriora ovata — ovalia, interiora + late lanceolata -- oblongo-lanceolata, spar- sim denticulata — dentata; folia caulina, infimum subsessile v. bre- viter et late petiolatum late lanceolatum — oblongo-lanceolatum obtusiusculum — suhacutum, intermedia + ovato-lanceolata v. lan- ceolata + longe acuta, superiora late — anguste ovato-lanceolata basi ovata-truncata, summa parva ex ovata basi lineari-lanceolata, omnia sparsim dentata v. denticulata, sensrm decrescentia v. superiora longe distantia, inferiora quam internodia vulgo longiora, superiora iis hreviora, in marginibus et in nervo dorsali + longe et dense pilosa, subtus in pagina densiuscule pilosa, supra glabriuscula v. glabra. — Inflorescentia parva 1 — 5-cephala, contracta v. polycephala, 658 effusa, ramo ex axillo folii caulini summi evoluto sæpe aucta, ramis + superantibus aeque ae pedicellis et acladio 30—60 ctm. longo floccis interne pareis superne sparsis v. densiusculis et pilis sparsis v. apice densioribus obtectis. — Involucra sat magna 14 — 15 ra. m. longa, crassa, fusco-virescentia, basi rotundata, postea truncata, squamis plurimis, exterioribus late linearibus, obtusis, intermediis triangulari- v. ovato-laneeolatis in apicem obtusiusculum — obtusum cito contractis, interioribus e basi lata lanceolatis sensira in apicem late obtusum + albocomosum sanguineo- v. vinoso-coloratum con- tractis, omnibus, præsertim exterioribus, inferne in marginibus spar- sim stellatis, cæterum parce stellatis et pilis mediocribus albidis crassis, densiusculis — sat densis glandulisque minutis parcis ob- tectis. — Calathium 40 — 45 m. m. diametro, subplenum. — Ligulæ apice glabræ. — Stylus siccus fuscus. Sydero: Vaag, on rocks (H. G. Simmons); Strorao: Kirkebo (J. Hartz and C. Ostenfeld). A very characteristic form, belonging undoubtedly to tbe Cerin- thoidea, and closely related to forms from the British Isles. In habit it reminds one of several rigidum-Yike forms of Vulgata, e. g. H. norvegicum of the Oreadea. It is distinguished by its usually high, stiff, leafy stem, with broad, lanceolate or ovate-lanceolate leaves: short, coarse involucres, often gathered into an elongated, sometimes dichotomous, as well as more contracted inflorescence, usually with long acladium, and erect, or slightly spreading but generally straight branches. The base of the involucres is to begin with ovate, afterwards truncate. The phyllaries are dark, broad, ob- tuse, tipped with red, and bear a tuft of hairs at the top ; moreover, they are covered with solitary, glandular hairs, and short, coarse, rather numerous hairs; and are sparingly floccose at the margins. As regards habit and character it is quite distinct from the other Færoese Cerinthoidea , and approaches forms such as H. epileucoides and allied forms. Comes very near to H. scoticum Hanb., but dillers mainly from it by having more faintly toothed leaves, most of which are sessile, somewhat broader and more obtuse phyllaries, more sparingly clothed with simple hairs and glands, and less floccose peduncles with fewer glands and hairs. BOTANY OF THE FÆROES. // DahlMtedi del 1. H. ardisodon. 2. H. sarcophylloides. 3. H. constrictiforme. 4. H. ciliolatum. 5. H. epileucum. 6. H. Simmonsianum. 7. H. Hartzianum. S. H. Osten fe Idii. 9. H. cordifrons. 10. H. færoénse. HOTANY OF THE FÆROES. //. Dalilslnlt del 1. H. leucograptum. 2. H. kalsoénse. 3. H. perampliforme. i. H. heterophyllum. 5. H. subrabicundum. 6. H. melanochrotum. 7. H. veterascem. 8. H. peramplum. 9. H. scoliciforme. INDEX OF NAMES. ardisodoD p. 631 ciliolatum - (>:!."> constrictiforme - 634 cordifrons - 632 eidense - 649 epileucoides - 639 epileucum - 636 færoénse - 640 Hartzianum - 643 heterophyllum - 650 kalsoénse - 645 leucograptum - 647 melanochrotum p, (i Ostenfeldii - ">1 sarcophylloides - 629 scoticiforme - 657 Simmonsianum ... - 638 subrubicundum ... - 652 veterascens - 648 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS USED ON THE PLATES. bi inner basal leaf (fol. basale intimum) 1) m middle — — ( - — intermedium) be outer — — ( - — extimum) c 1 lower stem -leaf ( - caulinum infimuin i primum) c 2 upper (second) stem-leaf ( - — secundum) c stem-leaf ( - caulinum) CORRIGENDA. Plate XI, for 1 b (to tbe left) read 1 be; and for 1 1) (to the right . read 1 bi. Botany of the Færoes. 42 THE HISTORY OF THE FLORA OF THE FÆROES. BY EUG. WARMING. Al the above notes by Ostenfeld, C.Jensen, Børgesen, etc., regarding the relationship of the Færoese Flora1, show, with one accord that the Flora of the Færoes is Temperale-European, and Atlantic with a touch of Arctic, viz. on the higher mountains, and more particularly on the Nordreoer. O sten fe Id' s investiga- tions (pp. 100 — 119) prove that the flora of the Færoes, as regards the uascular piants is somewhat more Arctic than that of Great Bri- tain, somewhat more Atlantic than that of Norway and much more Atlantic and Temperate than that of Iceland; at the bottom of p. 111 he says, that the flora of the Færoes must be regarded as »most closely related to the northern part of Great Britain«; and on p. 115 »the flora bears a wonderful resemblance to that of Scotland.« The Hieracia, which have been treated separately by Dahls tedt (p. 625), ought more especially to be mentioned liere. As is well- known, the genus is in full development and »is the European plant-genus which is richest in forms«. According to Dahlstedl the 23 forms (21 species and 2 varieties) which are at the present time known for certain to occur in the Færoes, are all endemic, though they are often very closely related to forms in the sur- rounding countries. The following are the results he arrives at: — The greater part of the forms are Atlantic, viz. 14 (perhaps 10) forms; 5 (perhaps 7) are Temperate-European ; and 2 are Arctic-Alpine. C. Jensen's investigations regarding the Mosses show, thai the Færoes possess the greater part of their species in common with Great Britain, somewhat fewer with Norway — the difference is slighl ; but, on the other band, they have very few in common with Ice- land and North America (pp. 186—196). The Færoes come nearesl lo Scotland with regard to the percenlage of Alpine-Arctic and At- 1 Botany of the Færoes, based upon Danish investigations. I. Copenhagen. 11)01. 661 tantic mosses, hul have mucb fewer Alpine-Arctic than [celand, und somewhat fewer than Norway. In the richness of circumpolar mosses, Ihey come after [celand, bul before Norway and Scotland; and in Ihe Western -Continental mosses, Ihey stand somewhat above [celand, but below Scotland and Norway. They conse- quently bear a closer resemblance to Scotland, a somewhat slighter one to Norway, and a still slighter one to Iceland, but in those points in which they diller from Scotland and Norway they draw near to Iceland. The largest Alpine-Arctic and Subarctic ele- ment is met with in the northern part, where the mounlains are highest. With regard to the Freshwater Algæ F. Børgesen comes lo a similar conclusion: — Greatest resemblance to West Europe, espe- cially to Scotland and Ireland ; Arctic stamp most conspicuous on the Nordreoer (p. 200). As to the other cryptogams, the conditions are less distinct, probably, chielly because the investigations hitherto made pf the countries in question do not permit of a fully reliable eomparison. With reference to the Freshwater Diatoms, E. Østrup, however, writes as follows (p. 299): — Common with Europe, with Scandi- navia and with Great Britain 73 — 83%; with Riesengebirge and with Greenland 34%; with Spit/.bergen 25%, etc. ; and he comes to the conclusion that the Diatom-flora has »a European, especially North European character« 1. Regarding the Fungi, Rostrup comes to the conclusion, that 168 species from the Færoes are known at the present time, and of these, 9 species are found in the latter islands only. Of the rest, 10 species are found only in the countries north of the Færoes (Ice- land, Greenland, Finmark), while 149 have been met with in Tempe- rate Europe, and are for the most part widely distributed (116 of them occur in Denmark). As only 78 Færoese species have been found in Iceland, the Fungi also point to a relationship with Europe. As at the present time no less than 622 species are known to occur in Greenland2, and 542 in Iceland3, it seems probable that the know- ledge of the Fungus-flora of the Færoes is as yet rather imperfect. 1 Even on the basis of his very poor material, N.Wille in 1897 Botaniska Notiser) arrives at the conclusion that the flora should more particularly be characterized as a poorer part of the English flora, and that the forms agree, more- over, very closely with those of England. 2 See E. Rostrup in »Meddelelser om Grønlande, vol. III. Kjøbenhavn. 3 E. Rostrup in Botanisk Tidsskrift«, vol. XXV. 42* 662 Regarding the Lichens, Deichmann Branth (pp. 337 — 338) has only thc following: - - The Færoes have 13 European species whieh are not found in Iceland and which are most comnion »in the woody, temperate regions of Europe« ; 2 species which are not found in Scandinavia (viz. 1 Atlantic and 1 Arctic-Suharctic); and 4 Arctic and Suharctic which are not found in Great Brilain. This also bears out the common result. The floral character of the Marine Algæ will be treated by Bør- gesen in connection with their vegetation in the last part (Part. III) of this book, and regarding the Marine Diatoms, which occur as epiphytes on Marine Algæ, Østrup (p. 556) does not say anything conclusive about them. But as regards the Marine Plankton the conditions are quite different, and very clear, as may be expecled : — While Norway has some Arctic species, the Færoes have, according to Ostenfeld (see p. 611 above), none, owing to the islands being »ahnost constantly surrounded by the waters of the Atlantic« (Gulf Stream). The above recent studies of the floral conditions prevailing in the Færoes, based on a larger amount of material, bears out the earlier assumption that the Land -flora of the Færoes must have genetic connection with that of West Europe, i. e., it must have immigrated chiefly, perhaps enlirely from West Europe, and especially from the part lying nearest, viz. Great Britain. The flora of the Færoes is, moreover, s een from a geo logi- cai point of view, a young flora: — It has no endemic species of vascular piants — except, as mentioned above, among the Hiera- cia — (see Ostenfeld, p. 107) and the few, hitherto unknown forms of Mosses, Freshwater Algæ, Freshwater Diatoms, and Fungi, whieh have been met with, will doubtless, on a closer examination, be found also in other countries1. The Færoes form thus a strong contrast to other Atlantic is- lands, viz. the Azores, Madeira, and the Canaries, which are rich in endemic species, and have a flora whieh is very old, related to that of the Tertiary time; this can only be accounted for by the 1 The new forms may be distributed ;is follows: — Mosses, 1 species and some 7 varieties out ol' :w species out of 168 species: Lichens, no new forms out of 194 species. 663 faet that no Glacial Period destroyed the old plant-world of linse islands. The flora of the Færoes, on the other hånd, was no donbl utlerly destroyed during the Glacial Period, at l*';isl as regards the higher organized piants (vascular piants) and il is doubtful whether any of the lower piants survived this on the highest mountain tops. Al that time, il is hardly possible that any other piants occurred there than such as we find growing at the present day on Ihe inland ice of Greenland, and on the »everlasting« snow and ice fieids of similar countries or mountains. According to the investigations of Helland and J. Geikie il is most likely that the whole has been covered with ice1. The flora is then to be regarded as post-glacial2 and it must have immigrated from other countries alter the Ice Age. Its flora! character shows whence it has immigrated, viz. from West Europe, especially from Great Britain, the country which lics nearest to the Færoes. How far soine of Ihe species which the Færoes have in common with leeland, have immigrated from the latter island, cannot be determined, at least not at the present time3. Il' we now ask: - - How did the flora immigrate? The an- swers will be different; and even in this hook we lind the two opinions expressed, Ostenfeld supporting the theory of an immi- gration across land, viz. by means of a post-glacial land connec- tion between the Færoes and great Britain, while Børgesen main- lains that the llora migrated across the sea, especially by the agency of the wind and hirds. Having previously (1887) considered the im- 1 See Helland: »Om Færoernes Geologi'.. Geografisk Tidsskrift, vol. IV. 1880. - .1. Geikie: Prehistoric Europe, 1881. In this work (p. 504) .1. Geikie writes: - Mr. Helland and 1 found that the Færoe Islands had been in like manner en- veloped in glacier-ice. They supported an ice-sheet ol' their own, the upper sur- face of which rose to a height in the northern islands of 1600 leet, and in Suderoe of 1 tOO leet ahove what is now Ihe sea-level. Xot only so, but the iee was so thick that it Biled up all Ihe fjords and sounds between the various islands of the archipelago, thus forming one compact mer de glace which flowed outwards in all directions from the dominant points, and discharged its icebergs into the surrounding ocean.« 2 See Ostenfeld, p. 112 above. — .1. Geikie (1. c. p. 519): — the flora of the Færoe Islands is certainly of postglacial origin.« 3 The question is one of long standing, and was put forward by Ch. Martins as early as 1839 Voyage en Scandinavie, en Laponie. etc., vol. II : the result he arrived at was that the range of islands: — the Shetlands, the Færoes, Iceland and Greenland derived their vegetation both from east and west, »mais la migration européenne est évidemment prédominante.« 664 migration of the flora of Greenland, and having advocated the theory that alter the Glacial Period it had immigrated in part across the sea, I cannot abstain from taking up this interesting question for re- newed consideration so far as the flora of the Færoes is conccrned, which llora was also mentioned in my previous considerations1. Now, as then, I regard a post-glacial land connection ve ry improbable, and not necessary for the immigration of the Flora, which mav be assumed to have immigrated across the sea. I shall shortly mention the two immigration-hypotheses. Immigration across land. The assumption of a land con- nection between Scotland and Greenland, by means of the Færoes and Iceland, is supported by the following data : — (1) The submarine ridge which connects the Shetlands-Færoes- Iceland-Greenland, and occurs at a depth of about 300 fathoms (227 — 330) only, and the existence of which has been proved by English, Norwegian, and Danish investigations. The newer Danish explorations (the »Ingolf« expedition) have further made clear how important this ridge is in the biology of the sea, as it forms a very sharp boundary between two deep-water faunas: — An Arctic- Ocean-fauna north of the ridge, and an essentially different Atlantic- Ocean-fauna south of it2. (2) The geological conformity existing between the islands in question and a part of the east coast of Greenland (Lieut. Amdrup's investigations on his journey along the east coast of Greenland in the year 19003 proved, however, that the above- mentioned con- formity did not begin until near Kangerlugsuak about 68° N. Lat., or right to the north of the ridge). (3) Recently a third moment has been brought out, viz. the faet that shells of littoral mussels occur at great ocean depths north of the ridge. 1 Eug. Warming: »Om Grønlands Vegetation« (witli resumé in Ffench). Meddelelser om Grønland, vol. XII, 1888. See also »Tabellarisk Oversigt over Grønlands, Islands og Færøernes Flora«, 1887, in Videnskabelige Meddelelser Ira Naturhistorisk Forening i Kjøbenhavn 1887 2 See various memoirs of Danish zoologists in »Den danske Ingolfexpedi- tion«, Kjøbenhavn, and H.Jungersen in »Forhandlingar ved 15. Skandinav. Natur- forskare motet«, Stoekholm, 1892, p. 271. Eug. Warming: Meddelelser om Grøn- land, 1. c. p. 176. 3 See Meddelelser om Grønland, XXVII (with resumé in French). 665 Thai there has existed a Tertiary land connection between Europe and Greenland, of which the present islands are remains, is assumed by several investigators , e. g. Wallace, A. Gray, Nathorst, and olhers, and il is even possible lliat il existed during the Glacial Period, or through a part of it. Bul nothing is known for certain regarding this, the supposition resis mainly on the homogenous character of the circumpolar flora, which is more easily explained by the assumption of a land connection. On the other hånd, il mav be taken for granted that tceland, the Færoes, Shetlands, etc. were formerly larger; regarding the Færoes, Hel- land (1. c. p. 178) goes even so far as to sav that thev are onlv the ruins of an old country, but this naturally far from proves the fornier existence of a continuous land connection. But pre- glacial and glacial land connection have no importance as regards the present question; what we have to consider liere, is. how far there has existed a post-glacial land connection. Several geojogisls believe in a post -glacial land connection, e. g. Forbes, and James Geikie (1. c). The latter does not, how- ever, give any geologicai evidence in support of the theory, but draws his conclusions from the flora. In 1883 Nathorst1 also expressed himself in favour of the existence of a land connection and has, like Geikie on pi. E. (»Europe in early Postglacial times. First age of forests«), given on a map a sketch of the hypothetical boundaries of the connecting helt of land. He stales in the paper in question that the floral conditions »give the strongest evidence of« the vegetation having immigrated into the Færoes, etc, across a continuous stretch of land, and this must have happened at the very first melting of the ice. Thus the »Scandinavian« flora must have been the very first which could have immigrated into Green- land alter the Glacial Period. As regards Spitzbergen he goes so far as to say (p. 285) that »it possesses no higher forms of piants which are peculiar to it; its phanerogains as well as its vascular cryptogams all occur in other countries; hence, it mav be con- cluded as a certainty, that its ilora is due to immigration, and that the immigration took place across land2.« However. it is hardly 1 »Polarforskningens Bidrag o. s. v. in Nordenskiold's »Studier og Forsk- ningar.« Stockholm 1883. 2 >Det eger ingen enda derstådes uteslutande forekommande hogre vaxt, dess fanerogamer sa val som kårlkryptogamer finnas alle åfven inom andra lander. På grund heraf kan man med såkerhet antaga, att dess flora år dit invandrad, och at t denna invandring skett ofver land 666 possible to conclude from the absence of endemic species in an insular flora that it must necessarily have immigrated a cros s land, and later on Nathorst also appears to have changed his opinion on this point, at least in his later writings he expresses himself more doubt- fully as regards the England-Greenland connection and thinks that even if a post-glacial land -bridge had existed it was at any rate, not of so great an importance for the immigration of the flora as he had previously believed. He even mentions the existence of the postglacial land connection as »etwas zweifelhaft1.« Among the botanists, who have maintained the theory of an im- migration across a glacial or post-glacial land-bridge, mav be men- tioned O. Drude2 and Ostenfeld (see p. 113 above). A. Blytt has, on the other hånd, advocated the possibility of a pre-glacial or glacial land connection only, but not of a post-glacial one as assumed by Ostenfeld (p. 113 above), and which I also had believed previously4. We see from the above that geologists had previously, very little to say in defence of a post-glacial land connection, and lately, they appear to be quite sceptical as regards the theory in question. On his map of »The Great Ice-sheet« (Om Skandinaviens geo- grafiska utveckling efter Istiden, Stockholm, 1896) De Geer has marked out the Færoes covered by an ice-sheet which extends somewhat beyond the land, and otherwise surrounded on every side by floating icebergs, exactly as in Geikie's Plate D. (»Map of Europe showing extent of the glaciated areas at the climax of the Ice Age«) where, according to the investigations made by Helland and Geikie, the Færoes are shown with their local ice-sheet flowing outwards in all directions and separated by the sea from the great continuous ice-sheet of northern Europe, the edge of which, lies to the west of the Shetland Islands. He says distinctly (p. 45) that during a part of the glacial period a land-bridge is supposed to have existed, but as yet nothing is known for certain as regards 1 Nathorst: Kritiska anmårkningar om den grdnlåndska vegetationens hi- storia (Bihang t. K. Sv. Akad. Handlingar. Bd. 1(5, 1890, p. :57 and pp. 4'J -43); Id.: Fortsatta anmårkningar om den grdnlåndska vegetationens historia (K. Vet. Akad. Ofversigt, 1891, p. 232). Id. in Englers Jahrb., XIV, 1891, pp. 209— 14. 2 »Pfanzengeographische Anhaltspunkte fur das Hestehen einer Landbrucke zvvischen G ro n land und West Europa zur Kiszeit« in Das Ausland, 1883. 8 Englers Jahrb., vol. II, p. 49 and p. 177. 4 Warming: »Grenlands Natur og Historie . Videnskabelige Meddelelser Ira Naturhist. Forening, 1890, p. 290, and Kuglers .lalirlnieher, XIV, p. 481. 667 the extent and duration of the bridge, in faet one does nol even know il' il existed at all. Th. Thoroddsen, the well-known Iceland-geologist, writes far moro positively on lliis point (Geografisk Tidsskrift, vol. XVI, 1901-02); he says: — »Iceland and the Færoes have had their own glaciation, with rock-striæ spreading out in all directions«, and »pro- bable as il is thai a land-bridge existed in the Miocene period, ils existence during the Glaeial Period is as improbable« (p. have taken place in the Interglacial period, when the Boreal fauna proceeded east- wards with the Gull' Stream, but in that ease no continuous land connection could have existed. at any rate at that time. 2 W. C. Brogger: Om de senglaciale og postglaciale Niveauforandringer i Kri- stianiafeltet. — Kristiania, 1900 and 1901. 668 Færoes without reference to a post -glacial land -bridge.« In the work mentioned above be expresses himself (p. 100) with as mncb reservation on tbis qnestion as in the present case. Recently, quite another series of facts have been brought for- ward in support of the theory of the post-glacial land connection, viz. the following: — Already, several investigators (e. g. Jeffreys, 1868; G. O. Sars, 1872; Spotswood Green and H. Friele 18791) had previously noted the occurrence of shallow water shells at considerable depths on the sea bottom, and sought the explanation in a former elevation of the sea beds. In 1900 the Danish zoolo- gist A. S. Jensen recordcd that also on the Danish »Ingolf« expedi- tion littoral mussel shells were found at considerable depths, up to 1300 fathoms, where they could not possibly have lived. He re- garded this as evidence of an enorm ou s post-glacial depres- sion of land, some 800—1400 fathoms, which had gradually taken place2. He likewise considered the find of otoliths of cods at great depths to be additional proof of the land-depression, but that very year he rejected this evidence (Videnskab. Meddel., 1900, p. 251). Brogger, however, hesitates in accepting the assumption of such an enormous subsidence, and is of opinion that if the land lay so much higher formerly it must have been during the great Ice Age and not after that time. In 1902 A.C.Johansen (1. c.) wrote still more strongly against this hypothesis of the land-depression. He shows that the pheno- menon mentioned above is widespread, and says, e. g. on p. 413: — »The phenomenon presents itself at all the coasls where the mollusc fauna has been fairly well investigated«, also over large areas of the Atlantic Ocean, and »the phenomenon is so universal, that we must hesitate to explain it as caused by a sinking of the sea bed« (see also Brogger, 1. c. p. 99). As an explanation of this circumstance he mentions (1), thai the shells may have been transported by the 1 See A.C.Johansen: »On the hypotheses on the sinking of seabeds based on the occurrence of dead shallow-water shells at great depths in the sea. Viden- skabelige Meddelelser 1902, p. 40-1. See also Brogger Le. 2 See A. S. Jensen. Om Levninger af Grundvandsdyr paa store Havdyb mellem Jan Maven og Island. Videnskabelige Meddelelser fra Naturhist. Forening, 1900. See also letter to Brogger in his work (p. 90) ahove eited. 669 agency of lloaling ice1; seaweeds on which Ihe molluscs are fixed; currents along the sea bottom; the waves on precipitous coasts; seabirds; fishes and olher animals; (2) the existence of a previous, higher temperature in Ihe Arctic Sea which doubtless made il pos- sil)lc for the species lo live at greater depths llien I han now. Whether a warmer post-glacial epoch did occur in the Færoes has hardly heen proved. The faet that some of the flowering piants of the Færoes do not bear fruit (see Ostenfeld, p. 106 where, e. g. Vaccinium Vitis idæa may probably also have heen mentioned) may be referred to liere. But this phenomenon, the correctness of which is by no means satisfactorily demonstrated, mav be explained wilhout a hypothesis of the piants having im- migrated during a warmer post-glacial epoch2. Geikie in »Pre- historic Europe« (pp. 514, 518 and 519) mentions that in post-glacial times a warmer climate prevailed, which permitted the growth of trees on the Færoes, and he further mentions that in the peat of the Færoes, birch wood as thick as an arm has been met with; but according to my knowledge, no other trees have been found in the bogs but juniper {Juniperus communis), and their remains do not appear to be of any unusual size. But, on the other hånd, it is probahle that the Færoes also have had a warmer post-glacial epoch, since there is evidence of a warmer post- glacial climate in Scandinavia; and Johansen (1. c. p. 402) also mentions a warmer period. In regard to the agencies mentioned by Johansen and quoted above by means of which littoral shells are transported, I am of opinion that ocean currents must play the most prominent part, in faet they must be of importance everywhere. As for the ridge between the Shetlands and Greenland a strong submarine current must unquestionably flow over it which would perhaps convey the light shells to great depths. Another very weighty objection has also quite recently been brought foward against the hypothesis of a great land depression, viz. by the Danish geologist Boggild3. He points out, e. g. that 1 Several writers have giveD decided instances of the transport of mussel shells, etc. by the agency of ice, e. g. Bay (Meddelelser om Grønland, XIX ; H. Reusch (Naturen. 1900 and 1902); Hans Kiær (Naturen, 1902). See also Wa nu in g: >Om Grønlands Vegetations Meddel, om Grønland, XII, 18.S7. pp. 211 — 13. 2 See Warming: Om Gronlands Vegetation, I. c. p. 20.'J. 3 O. B. Boggild: Om en formotiet Sænkning af Havbunden mellem Island og Jan Mayen. Videnskabelige Meddelelser 1902. 670 thc littoral shells at great ocean depths, do not really occur there in great quantilies, but are very much scattered (»surprisingly few«); moreover, that of the samples of the deposits of the sea bottom, brought home by the »Ingolf« expedition, and investigated by him, those taken from the sea bottom between Iceland and Jan Maven are pure deep sea deposits, and when notwithstanding this, lilloral shells occur there, they must have been deposited at a compara- tively recent period, transported thither somehow or other — he thinks, most possibly by the agency of iloating ice, the latter being also able to transport, e. g. shells from r ais ed shell banks from around the walers in question. On the other hånd, the surface of the ridge between Iceland and the Færoes, which is entirely covered with loosely lying deposits, indicates a typical area of depression; but this naturally gives no idea as regards the time when this assumed depression took place. Everything considered, I must conclude therefore that the littoral shells at great depths cannot by any means be said to testify or give evidence of the faet, that the areas in question have previously lain higher. Consequently they cannot testify to the existence of a post-glacial land connection. As yet it is somewhat difficult to find evidences against the existence of a land connection, but it appears to me that one may be obtained from the fauna of the Færoes. It contained ori- ginally no wild terrestrial mammals, neither foxes, hares, moles, nor mice - - hares have been inlroduced1, and also quite lately grouse. If a land connection had existed after the glacial period we might wonder why the greater part of these animals had not migrated thither from Scotland. Mr. H.Winge kindly tells me that grouse are met with in the Orkneys and Hebrides, and the field mouse (no doubt involuntarily introduced by man) occurs in the Scottish islands in peculiar races, a faet which has »doubtless wrongly« been taken for an evidence of the existence of a recent land connection between these islands and Scotland. Moreover, the faet that neither reptiles nor toads are found in the Færoes may also be mentioned here. From the flora also, evidences may unquestionably be ihawn against the existence of a post-glacial land connection. I have nol, however, investigated on what points the flora of the Færoes is deficient lo thai of Scotland, as I am of opinion thai the results 1 See, e.g. Knud Andersen: Videnskab. Meddelelser 1898, p. :\22. 671 arrived at would be very unsatisfactory; hul there are other circum- stances which are worthy of noiice. The many Temperate-Euro- pean or Atlantic species which occur can liardly be assumed to have migrated across a land-bridge, because if such u land-bridge were to be imagined Ihe climate prevailing on il would hardly snit these piants; the sea lo the north of Ihc land connection would unquestionably become frozen, turn ihto an ice-cellar«, al any rate, Ihis would happen, were Ihc bridge to hc continued uninter- ruptedly lo Greenland; and Ihe climate would beyond doubt be loo raw, the land loo thickly enveloped in cold fogs, even if the Gull' Stream were to wash ils south eoast. Ostenfeld (p. 118 above) follows, e. g. Drude, Blytt, A. de Candolle, and others in helieving thai Ihe piants i m migrated step by step and in collected bodies1.« But so far as I can see, there are no evidences in favour of the above assumption, if we judge, as we ought to, from whal we see every dav in nature, wherever piants immigrate into »new earth.« Piants always immigrate one by one, according as they are adapted for dissemination or travel2. Well-marked associations are developed little by little, and a fairly constant vegetation, suited lo life in the different soil condi- tions, arises in the course of time only. The plant-migration to Krakatau verifies this. Sern ander also, who has made a long and thorough study of the disseminating biology of piants, expresses himself in favour of a gradual migration H, e. g. as regards the im- migration to Spitzbergen (which according to sorae authors must have taken place across a land connection between these islands and Scandinavia), or to Gotland, Gotska Sandon, etc. The oldest piants of the Færoes, those which immigrated as the ice retired, doubtless following hard at its heels, were unques- tionably true arclic. As the climate gradually grew milder other species entered, and the arclic were expelled from all the favour- able habitats, so that at the present dav they occur on the highest hills only, and many have probably hecome extincl. That an insular tlora like that of the Færoes, ultimately, after 1 See Warming: Grønlands Vegetation, p. 201. See Warming: Plantesamfund. Kjøbenh. 1895, p. .'JOS. Pflanzenvereine. Deutsche Ausgabe von E. Knoblauch. Berlin 1896; 2><" Ausgabe, 1902. 8 Sernander, Den skandinaviska Vegetationens Spridningsbiologi. Upsala 1901, p. 407, etc. 672 a lapse of a long period, mav get to bcar a strong resemblance to that of a neighbo uring country, especially to the flora of Scot- lantl, may be easily understood without adopting the theory of a land connection. Considering that the migration has been going on for ages, it might be assumed that perhaps the entire flora of Scotland has gradually tried to immigrate, and when the natura] conditions (soil and climate) agree so closely with the country whence the immigration has taken place, then the species in their continual struggle for place would ultimately occur in similar quan- tities and associations in the different localities as the species which are met with in corresponding localities in the mother-country. Ostenfeld (p. 115 above) is of opinion that if the immigration had taken place across the sea, the flora would have »consisted of fewer species.« But the richness of a flora is dependent on other factors besides the facility with which the immigration takes place and the age of the flora, viz. on how many different sorts of habi- tats the country contains. The richer the country is in differ- ences as regards the habitats, the richer the flora, and as the Færoes presumably in this point also resemble Scotland, and espe- cially the Scottish islands, the flora would hardly be poorer even if it immigrated across the sea. Ostenfeld also remarks that in the case of an immigration across the sea the piants introduced would have »developed or been in the aet of developing peculiar forms,« but he gives no reason for this, nor do I see any, the circumstances being as in the present case: the flora being so young as in the Færoes, and the soil and climate agreeing so closely with those of the mother- country. It must naturally also be dependent on the power of variability of the different species; and as the genus Hieracium is highly variable, it is lo be understood that this particular genus has been developing new forms (see Dahlstedt, p. 625 above). Several circumstances seem to indicale that an occasional immigration to the Færoes has been taking place across the sea, little by little, during successive ages, and probably down to the present day. Thus, many species, which are met with in a very few, or occasionally in a single locality only, could undoubtedly grow in various other localities than those in which they have been found. 673 I mav mention the following1: /. Mgosolis arvensis; 2, M. palu- stris; •'>, M. repens; 6, Campanula rotundifolia ; 8, Achillea Ptarmica; 24, Menganthes; 27, Mentha aquatica; 30, Lobelia Dortmanna; 32, Plan- tago Coronopus; 36, Anagallis tenella; 37, Lysimachia nemorum; 38, Pri- mula acaulis; 40, Galium palustre; 52, Veronica Beccabunga; 60, Calli- triche autumnalis; 61, Alsine verna; 70. Melandrium rubrum; 93, Suhu- laria aquatica; 94, Drosera rotundifolia; 99, Hgpericum quadrangulum ; 116, Polggonum amphibium, 136, Geum rivale; t38, Potentilla palustris; l'il. Rosa mollis; H>o. Viola tricolor; 176, Carex leporina; /, Heleo- charis multicaulis; 190, Agropgrum junceum; 202. Catabrosa aquatica; 214, Phragmites communis; 221, Psamma arenaria; 223, Iris Pseudacorus; 224-, Juncus balticus; 230, J. obtusiflorus; 242, Habenaria albida; 244, Listera cordata; 245, Malaxis paludosa; 248, Orchis masculus; 249, Pota- mogeton alpinus; 250, P. filiformis; 256, P. prælongus; 25'/. V. pusillus; 258, Ruppia; 259, Zostera marina; 271, Lgcopodium annotinum; 274, Aspidium Drgopteris; 279, Asplenium Adiantum nigrum; 280, A. Trichomanes. Among 285 of the numbered species in Ostenfelds Flora, 46 of them are very rare, or no less Ihan 16%, and that nolwilh- standing my having omitted all the like numbered species which are presumably hybrids, also all the alpine species occurring on mountain heights, and a species like Juniperus, which has doubt- less heen reduced in quantity by man. Now it may be objected that all the above-mentioned species are not of equal importance in regard to the present question, and some of them are perhaps rare simply because they lack suitable localities in the Færoes, e. g. Psamma, or because the country has nol been completely investigated. But then, on the other hånd, I have omitted a great many species, which also appear to be rare, and occur dispersed over the islands in a few localities only, though they could doublless grow in many other piaces, and will presumably in time be more largely distributed. The faet that about Ve of the species, met with on ;i single, small area, occur so sparsely, appears to me to be a strong evidence of their having been introduced to the islands at a comparatively late period. It is no easy malter to comparc the flora of the Færoes with others which may be placed on an equal fooling lo it. I have. however, atlcmpled to do so, and I lind that South-wesl Zealand. according to P. Nielsens Flora, has 1/io species only which mav be said to be as rare as those of the Færoes. It also appears to me that an unusually large numher of species 1 The number attached to each species is that under which the plant is ehumerated in Ostenfelds list, the latter ma}- thus be easily consulted ;is regards the habitats. 674 occur either on a few islands or on a single island only, and that this circumstance can only be due to oecasional and irregular im- migration. If the species immigraled across a land conncction, we might wonder why so large a number, as has been recorded, has reached only the southernmost part of the area, viz. some 27 species or Vio (see Ostenfeld, p. 105). The southern islands do not diller so much from the others that the reason should be sought for there. Judging from the present circumstances it seems most natural to assume that these islands are geographically the nearcsl to receive the seeds and piants transported from Scotland by the agency of wind and birds1. Plant immigration across the sea. The result I have arrived at is consequently, that it is almost certain that the flora has not immigrated across land. Hence, it could have immigrated across the sea only, and I may point out that many eminent investigators including Hooker, Darwin, Alph. de Candolle, Wallace and Hemsley are of opinion that »oceanic transport« is the principal and most probable means by which oceanic islands have been stocked with piants. That a flora can migrate even across vast tracts of sea is according to my opinion proved by the faet that there does not exist a single oceanic island, which is destitute of plant-life, and many of them have unquestionably never formed parts of a con- linent. In my »Grønlands Vegetation« (1. c. p. 201) I have referred to Jan May en, this volcanic island, situated 450 kilometres from Greenland, 550 from Iceland, and 965 from Spitzbergen, surrounded on all sides by vast ocean depths (1000 — 2000 fathoms), the bottom samples of which are, as far as has been ascertained by Boggild, all deep sea deposits. After the Amdrup Expedition, in 1900, had paid a short visit to the island, the list of its vascular piants was enriched by 33%, so that it now consists of 39 vascular piants, almost all of which have a wide arctic distribution-. Jan Mayen's 1 That there is. and has been, some sort of connection between leeland and the Færoes, as well as between Iceland and Greenland, is beyond doubt. The faet that certain species (see Ostenfeld, p. 109) such as Alchimilla fåeroénsis are common both in the Færoes and in east Iceland, and that Carc.v cryptocarpa which is common in Iceland also occurs, though rarely, in the Færoes, scem to bear witness of a recent immigration, and the nearest lying parts of the country have been first reached by the immigrants. 2 See C. Kruuse in Botanisk Tidsskrift, XXIV, p. 297; and Meddelelser om Grønland, XXVII, p. 361. 675 (lora must necessarily have immigrated across the sea, at least a distance of 450 kilometres - a rauch longer tract than between the Shetland islands and the Færoes (285 km.)1. The Azores and the Bermudas in certain respects resemble Jan Maven. According lo Wallace's »Island Life« the Azores are also widely separated from othcr islands and countries by vast ocean depths, and distances of some 900 English miles, and are, on the whole, vulcanic too, though of great age. The flora is de- cidedly eastern with a fairly large percentage of endemic species, all of which are, however, related to eastern species. As in the case of the Færoes they lie in the way of the Gulf Stream, bul have notwithstanding, received their piants from the east (Europe, Madeira, the Canaries). Similar depths surround the Bahamas, which are 700 English miles distant from America; they are coral islands, and their flora has immigrated from America. A migration, backwards and forwards, across the Skagerak is undoubtedly going on in our own day also; I shall discuss this more ful ly elsewhere2. Krakatau may also be mentioned liere, be- cause it has been so thoroughly investigated as regards the immi- gration of its flora. It had been utterly destroyed in 1883, yet 3 years after Treub found on it 6 Algæ, 11 ferns, and 15 flowering piants, all told, 26 vascular piants. Ten and a half years Iater Penzig records 62 vascular piants, of which 60 °, o had been trans- ported by the agency of ocean currents, 32% by wind, and 7% by fruit-eating birds (perhaps two have been introduced by man)3. True, the distance from the nearest land is not more than 20 km., but some of the piants doubtless travelled a longer distance, about as far as across the English channel. Many curious occurrences of piants can hardly be explained in any other way than by trans- port across vast oceans, e. g. the occurrence of the North American Eriocaulon septangulare on the west coast of Ireland and Scotland, the only Eriocaulacé to be found in Europe, or of the American Rhipsalis Cassyta in Africa, the only genus of cactus which is met with in the old world. 1 The distances mentioned in this paper are the following; kilometres: Norway — Denmark: 110: Norway — England: 445: Norway the Færoes: 585; Norway— leeland: 970: Denmark— England: 520 (east — western direction: 610); the Færoes — Iceland : 430: Iceland — Greenland: 290. Further, Europe — the Azores: 1400: the continent of Africa — Madeira : 650. 2 See also Warming: Om Grønlands Vegetation, Meddelelserom Grønland, XII. 3 Annales du jardin de Buitenzorg, vol. VII, and 2. Sér., vol. III, 1903. Hotany of the Færoes. 43 676 We may thus take it as an established faet Ihat piants can travel across the sea, and that a country, island, or arehipelago may be stocked with many different species if only there is time enough. Earlier writers also have referred to the following fac- tors as means of transport across the sea, viz. (1) birds, (2) wind, (3) ocean currents, (4) lloating ice and floating timber, and lastly (5) man1. I find that these disseminating agencies are of very une- qual value to the Færoes. Birds. Ostenfeld (pp. 116—117 above) refers to the inter- esting result arrived at by Danish investigators, viz. that migratory birds journey on empty stomachs. For a number of consecutive years thousands of birds, picked up dead at the Danish lighthouses, have been sent to the Zoological Museum in Copenhagen, and notes on these dead birds have for many years been published annually by H. Winge in »Videnskabelige Meddelelser fra Naturhist. For- ening«. This eminent zoologist writes to me, in a letter dated March 27, 1903, as follows: — »In one of the first years, the contents of the stomachs were systematically examined, later on only occa- sionally, but the stomach has always proved to be empty, only rarely some very slight traces of food have been found, viz. small pieces of the testa of seeds, etc. (besides, in some cases, a little sand or small stones, etc). Though I have had thousands of dead migratory birds between my hånds, and have made a habit of examining every single one, I have not as yet found any seeds adhering to the feathers, beaks, or feet. Small crusts or lumps of dried mud or clay occur fairly often on the beaks and feet of birds such as wading-birds, larks, starlings, etc; whether these crusts or lumps contain microscopical germs, has not yet been ascertained (they may undoubtedly do so), but seeds, such as may be discerned by the naked eye or with a pocket-lens, have not been found.« As the above observations are made by so careful and eminent an investigator, I must consequently believe that birds at least very seldom carry seeds and other larger reproductive organs, and small piants, across great distances, and the indisputable evidences 1 See, e. g. A. de Candolle: Géographie botanique raisonnée, II, p. (513; Darwin: The Origin of Species, chap. XI; Wallace: Island Life, 1880; Sernander: Den skandinaviska Vegetationens Spridningsbiologi, 1901. In regard to Greenland, see Warming: Gronlands Vegetation, 1888, pp. 203— 213. The immigration to the Færoes has been discussed by Ostenfeld (pp. 112— 118 above) and Borgesen (pp. 201— 203 above), but especially by Wil le in Hotaniska Notiser, 1897. 677 of birds carrying seeds either in them or adhering lo them men- tioned in books evidently apply to birds shot at, or not far from, their daily liaunts, and not to snch as have just made a long journey. Winge also has observed a great many instances <>!' birds carrying seeds across short distances1. If then il be true that birds transport seeds capablé of ger- mination across the sea but rarely, it is of no great importance whether a regular migratory flight of birds passes over the Færoes or not. Nevertheless it may be as well to mention what is known regarding this, because according to my thinking, birds must at least occasionally transport seeds across the sea, bcsides algæ and spores of cryptogams, especially in the mud which may adhere to them , and many spores adhering to the crops of birds have un- doubtedly been introduced into the islands unnoticed. For a number of consecutive years the Danish ornilhologist, Knud Andersen, has been publishing notes on the birds of the Færoes in »Videnskabelige Meddelser fra Naturhist. Forening i Kø- benhavn« (1898—1902), based more particularly on the excellent in- vestigations carried out by two natives of the Færoes, viz. P. F. Pe- tersen on Naalso, and Samuel Niclas sen on Myggenæs. These investigations have proved that a fairly large number of migratory birds pass over the Færoes, and that many, more or less chance visitors, appear at the latter place. There are several records of large flocks of foreign birds having been blown by strong south- easterly and easterly gales to the islands, when on their way from Great Britain to Norway2. But as yet nothing is known for certain regarding the routes taken by the migratory birds on their regular llights. In this connection the large race of Saxicola oenanthe is of particular interest. It breeds in Labrador (does not occur else- where in America), Greenland, Iceland and doubtless also in the 1 This question has heen much discussed in lite rature, and Darwin 's notes on it (The Origin of Species) are douhtless the most well-known. See also Ker- ner s Pflanzenleben II, p. 803. Duval-Jouve in Bulletin de la Soc. hotanique dv France, XI, 1864, p. 265. Hesselman in Botaniska Notiser, 1897. p. 97. Ser- n a nder: Spridningsbiologi. — On the transport of Algæ by the agency of water insects, see Migula in Biolog. Centralblatt, VIII. 2 In Vidensk. Meddel., 1902, p. 337, we read regarding 1901 as follows: — As least 12 times during the course of the jTear birds, on their migratory journey across the sea hetween the British Isles and Scandinavia, were blown to the Færoes, this generally happens with the south-east and east winds, but they are sometimes blown thither with the south wind also. As regards 1900, three times large flocks of foreign hirds have heen blown to the Færoes by easterly gales. 43* 678 Færoes, which place it at least visits during the migratory llight; moreover, it flies along the extreme west coast of Europe, doubt- less to Africa; in Norway it appears to be totally absent, and in Denmark it occurs extremely rarely. Ocean curien ts too are doubtless of no consequence to-day as transporters of land-plants to the Færoes. Ostenfeld (p. 115) has already mentioned that ocean currents are »as unfavourable as possible,« and the condition of the oceanic plankton gives the same proof (Ostenfeld; and pp. 558— 612 above). Besides, judging from the bottles thrown out by the »Ingolf« expedition the polar current from off the east coast of Iceland appears to run in a semi-circle, from the east of Iceland, along the Færoes, and towards the north- east. Hence, the seeds it might convey, must corae from the northern regions1. Floating ice, icebergs, and floating timber are, at the present day, undoubtedly of still less importance than ocean cur- rents, or rightly, of no importance whatever. But I think it is possible that in former times, especially in the late-glacial , or at the beginning of the post-glacial period , they might have been in- strumental in transporting the arctic species, which occur to-day in the Færoes, from Iceland, Scotland, also perhaps from Norway or from the north-west. These unquestionably first existed in the low- lying districts of the islands, whence they were expelled to their present habitats on the higher hills2. I am inclined to believe, now, more so than formerly, that the wind (a factor to which Ostenfeld (p. 117) also assigns some im- portance) is of great consequence as a means of transport3. 1 See C.Wandel: »Stromflasker« : Den danske Ingolfexpedition, vol. I, No. 4, 1899. 2 On the transport of seeds by ocean currents, ice, etc, see Warming: Grønlands Vegetation, p. 200. — On the transport by floating timber. see parti- cularly Kjellman: Vega Expeditionens Vetenskapliga lakttagelser, I, 188'2, p. 351. On the transport of materials by floating ice, see also Eberlin: »Naturen«, 1.S.S7; Fr. Nansen in Broggers work (p. 74) already cited p. G67. and in »Naturen« 1890, p. 75. Amdrup: Meddelelserom Grønland, XXVII, p. 365. For accounts of the occurrence of algæ on ocean ice, see Wille: in Botaniska Notiser, 1897, p. 8. — P. T. Cleve, Microscopical examination of dust from drift-ice north of Jan Maven Ol'versikt af K. Vet. Akad. Forhandlingar. 1900, p. 393). :i See Warming: »Grønlands Vegetation« (p. 206) where I have given some data. Wille (1. c.) has also given some, and he refers to Ehrenberg's papeis on »Passatstaub und Blutregen«, and »Obersicht der seit 1847 fortgesetzten Unter- (579 I will here give only one example of the Iransport of seeds across the sen, whicfa is l'nllv proved and which I already men- lioned in 1887, in »Grønlands Vegetation« (p. 207), vi/.., the faet, that fragments ol' piants, especially large quantities of fruit of Calluna, were carried by a gale (Febr. 12, 1881) across the Cattegat, from Sweden to the easlern eoasl of Jutland, a distance of al least 110 — 120 kilometres, where they were found on the snow-covered ground, scaltered over an area, measuring from east lo west, at least 4 kilometres. Another record, which appears to be reliahle, is contained in »Comptes rendus de l'Academie des sciences«, Paris, 1891, 1. 113 (p. 100), where Mr. Stanislas Meunier tells us of a shower of small pieces of chalk which fell in France during a violent gale, and which must have been conveyed a distance of at least 150 kilo- metres, in a straight line. If gales are able to transport such heavy bodies so far, they must be able to carry much lighter ones, such as seeds of piants, much farther1. On the whole I am nnable to find an explanation for the different phenomena respec- ting the distribution of piants, unless I adopt the theory that germs of all kinds are being sown constantly and in every direction, and that it is chielly by the agency of the wind that the sowing and colonization of the earth is effected across longer distances. On p. 35 above we see that the south, south-east, and east winds of the Færoes, all in all, amount to 28%; and from Knud Andersen's notes (see p. 677 above) we learn that strong east and south-east gales occur, by which large llocks of hirds are blown out of their line of flight. I cannot follow Ostenfeld (p. 115 above) in his argument that the shape of the fruits of the Færoese vascular piants speak against a transportation across the sea. Even if the seeds of only 9 — 10% of the piants, have flying apparatus, on the other hånd, so far as I can see, there are not many species which have seeds large enough, and heavy enough to prevent them being carried along by suchungen fiber das von der Atmosphåre unsichtbar getragene, reiche, organische Leben« (Abh. d. Akad. d. Wissensch. zu Berlin, 1871). Showers of dusi which un- questionably originated from Africa is recorded to have fallen over large an-as in Switzerland, e. g. in 1901. See also Marshall: Dnst Storms in New-Zealand, »Na- turec, July 9, 1903, p. 223. 1 C. Reid has been investigating Oie size of Oie seeds of the flowcring piants of the Arctic regions, and arrives at the conclusion that they are >small and usually ver}' minute.« 080 a gale. Moreover, it must be borne in mind that some have pro- bably been transported to the islands either by ocean currents or other agencies. One of these agencies I also hold to be very important. Osten- feld mentions it, but very briefly (p. 117), as follows: — »Further . . . man has doubtless introduced and keeps on introducing new spe- cies«. By the agency of man a quantity of piants have doubtless been introduced. Upwards of a thousand years have elapsed since the Færoes were discovered, and they were immediately colonized. From the Sagas we know that when Iceland was discovered and colonized (»Landnamstiden«) the migrating Norsemen took domestic animals with them (horses, cows, goats, sheep, pigs, etc); this must also have happened in the case of the Færoes, and later on, in the long succession of ages, domestic animals have undoubtedly been brought over to the islands several times, and with them — in their fodder, and adhering to their hairs — seeds of piants. The Færoes have kept up a brisk communication by means of ships with Norway, Scotland, Iceland, Denmark, etc, — and even the Turks came over to the islands for plunder — , conse- quently, there must have been numerous opportunities for the im- portation of seeds of piants. Let us bear in mind, that, in the present day, numerous species of weeds immigrate to all the various seaport towns, even, to, e. g. I vigtut in Greenland, and to Spitzbergen1. Thus, in the list of vascular piants above no less than 40 spe- cies are recorded as having been recently »accidentally introduced.« Of the 285 numbered species, a large number have unquestionably, in former days, been introduced to the Færoes by man, and later on conveyed from one island to another, viz. many of the species menlioned above as »common in cultivated fieids,« »common in enclosed fieids,« »on cultivated ground,« etc. (species such as Stel- laria media, Spergula arvensis, Capsella bursa pastoris, Urtica dioica, Viola tricolor , Agrostis stolonifera, Alopecurus geniculatus, Holcus mollis, Poa annua, Poa trivialis, Juncus bufonius, etc). The per- centage of these piants average some 12 — 13, and to this may be added many of the species recorded as occurring in the low-lamls. The latter must, at any rate, be assumed to have immigrated when a more congenial climate prevailed; their percentage averages some 20. 1 See Ostenfeld, Botanisk Tidsskrift, 24 (1902), p. LUI. Hk s tam, Tromsø Museums Aarshefter, 1897. 681 As regards the rest of Ihe species they mav be distributed as follows: - Such as exclusively or mosliv occur on the highesl mountaiii tops, at lcast 7%; these are presumably the oldest in- habitants of tlie islands. Of coast piants. there are 7%; they have doubtless immigrated in pari by the agency of currents, and at very different periods during successive ages. The rest oi' the species, some 46%, occur mostly in the low-lands, l)nt extend also more or less from thence up the mountains. They also have doubtless immigrated al very different periods, and by various means and ways, regarding which nothing is known for certain. Taking every thing into consideration, I am fully eonvineed that the whole of the flora — at least all the more highly or- ganized land-plants — have immigrated after the glacial pe- riod, across the sea, and from the nearest countrics, lying east, especially Great Britain. '-Tig g, El 1 S» ^ ~n 0: ; 0: £ø en w f w* . i *